[
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 383: 1970",
    "title": "Coarse And Fine Aggregates From Natural Sources For Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS3831970_1",
    "text": "IS 383: 1970 Coarse And Fine Aggregates From Natural Sources For Concrete [Scope]\nRequirements for aggregates, crushed or uncrushed, derived from natural sources for use in the production of structural concrete including mass concrete works. 2. Requirements 2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones, gravel and sand, and shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clear and free from veins, adherent coating and injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces and deleterious substances. 2.2 Deleterious Materials — Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as pyrites, laminated material, alkali, seashells, and organic impurities and those which may attack the reinforcement, in excess of the limits given in Table 1 of the standard. Aggargates shall not be chemically reactive with alkalis of cement. 2.3 Aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 30 percent fo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2116: 1980",
    "title": "Sand For Masonry Mortars",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS21161980_1",
    "text": "IS 2116: 1980 Sand For Masonry Mortars [General]\nIS 2116: 1980 Sand For Masonry Mortars (First Revison)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9142: 1979",
    "title": "Artificial Lightweight Aggregates For Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS91421979_1",
    "text": "IS 9142: 1979 Artificial Lightweight Aggregates For Concrete Masonry Units [Scope]\nRequirements of artificial lightweight aggregates, such as foamed blast furnace slag, bloated clay aggregate, sintered fly ash aggregate and cinder aggregate intended for use in concrete masonry units in which prime consideration is lightness in mass. 2. Requirements 2.1 Grading — The grading of the aggregate, that is, its particle size distribution as obtained by sieve analysis shall be as given in Table 1. 2.2 Bulk Density — The dry loose bulk density of combined aggregate shall not exceed 1100 kg/m3. 2.3 Uniformity of Mass — The bulk density of succes- sive supplies of lightweight aggregate shall not differ by more than 10 percent from that of the sample submitted for acceptance tests. 2.4 Deleterious Substances 2.4.1 Organic Impurities — Lightweight aggregates, upon being subjected to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 269: 1989",
    "title": "Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2691989_1",
    "text": "IS 269: 1989 Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade [Scope]\nCovers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.\n[Chemical Requirements] When tested in accordance with the methods given in IS 4032 : 1985, 33 grade ordinary Portland cement shall comply with the chemical requirements given in Table 1. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface of cement shall not be less than 225 m2 /kg. 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated expansion shall be not more than 10 mm by 'Le Chatelier' method and 0.8 percent by autoclave test; if it fails, aerated sample shall not show more of than 5 mm and 0.6 percent when tested by 'Le Chatelier' method and autoclave method respectively. 3.3 Setting Time — The setting time of the cements, when tested by the vicat apparatus shall conform to the following requirements: a) Initial setting time Not less than in minutes 30; and b) Final setting time Not more than in minutes 600. 3.4 Compressive Str"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 269: 1989",
    "title": "Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS2691989_2",
    "text": "IS 269: 1989 Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg, 25 kg, 10 kg,5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 33 GRADE ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT Sl. No. Characteristics Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentage of Not greater than 1.02 and not silica, alumina and iron oxide, when calculated less than 0.66 by the formula ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass (a)In case no flyash, silica fume, rice, husk ash and metakaoline is added - not more than 5.0 (b) In case of addition of and / or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and /or metakoline - Not more than 5.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 percent v) Total sulphur content cal"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 455: 1989",
    "title": "Portland Slag Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS4551989_1",
    "text": "IS 455: 1989 Portland Slag Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kgs or 25 kgs net or in builk with tolerances specified in the standard.\n[Scope] Covers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements for Portland slag cement. 2. Chemical Requirement Percent, Max Magnesium oxide (MgO) 8.0 Sulphur trioxide (SO3) 3.0 Sulphide sulphur (S) 1.5 Loss on ignition 5.0 Insoluble residue 4.0 Notes1—Total chloride content in cement shall not exceed 0.05 percent by mass for cement used in prestressed concrete structures and long span reinforced concrete structures. (Method of test for determination of chloride content in cement is given in IS 12423:1988.)* Notes 2. Granulated slag conforming to IS 12089:1987 † has been found suitable for the manufacture of Portland slag cement. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1Fineness — Specific surface , not less than 225 m2/kg. * Method for colorimetric analysis of hydraulic cement. † Granulated slag for m"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1489Part11991_1",
    "text": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement [Scope]\nCovers the manufacture, physical and chemical requirements of Portland pozzolana cement using only fly ash pozzolana. 2. Raw Materials 2.1Pozzolana 2.1.1 Fly ash used in the manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement shall conform to IS 3812 : 1981*. 2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 320 m2/kg and 4.0 MPa respectively. 2.1.3 Average compresive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 4.0 MPa. 2.1.4 Fly ash content shall be between 15 to 35 percent by mass of portland pozzolana cement. 2.2 Portland Cement Clinker/Portland Cement-shall conform to IS 269:1989†."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS1489Part11991_2",
    "text": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement [Chemical Requirements]\nSee Table 1. 4. Physical Requirements 4.1Fineness — Specific surface shall be not less than 300 m2/kg. 4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample— i) Not more than 10 mm by 'Le Chateliers' method. ii) Not more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method. 4.3 Setting Time — Initial setting time 30 min, Min Final setting 600 min, Max 4.4Compressive Strength — a) At 72 1h 16 MPa, Min b) At 168 2h 22 MPa, Min c) At 672 4h 33 MPa, Min"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS1489Part11991_3",
    "text": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND POZZOLANA CEMENT SI No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Loss on ignition, percent by mass, Max 5.0 ii) Magnesia (MgO), percent by mass, Max 6.0 iii) Sulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass, Max 3.0 iv) Insoluble material, percent by mass, Max Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1727:1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic material (first revision), relevant part of IS 4031 Method of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of hydrolic cement (first revision) For detailed information , refer to IS 1489 (Part 1) 1991 Specification for portland pozzolana cement Part 1 :1991 Fly ash based (third rev"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS1489Part21991_1",
    "text": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement [Chemical Requirements]\nSee TABLE 1. 4 Physical requirements 4.1Fineness Specific surface of Portland pozzolana cement shall be not less than 300 m2/kg. 4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample. (i) Not more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ Method. (ii) Not more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method. 4.3Setting time— Initial setting time 30 min, Min. Final setting time 600 min, Min. 4.4Compressive stength a) At 72 ± 1h 16 MPa , Min b) At 168 2h 22 MPa , Min c) At 672 4 h 33 MPa , Min 5 Delivery Packed in specified bags of 50 kgs or 25, kgs net or in bulk with toerances specified in the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1489Part21991_2",
    "text": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement [Scope]\nManufacture, Physical and Chemical requriements of Portland- pozzolana cement manufactured by using calcined clay pozzolana or a mixture of calcined clay and fly ash pozzolana. 2. Raw Materials 2.1Pozzolana 2.1.1 Pozzolana used shall be either calcined clay pozzolana conforming to IS 1344: 1981*. or a mixture of calcined clay pozzolana conforming to IS 1344: 1981 and fly ash conforming to IS 3812 : 1981† . 2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in lime reactivity of pozzolana shall not be less than 320 m2/kg and 4.0 MPa respectively. 2.1.3 Average compressive strength in lime reactivity of pozzolana shall not be less than 4.0 MPa. 2.2 Portland cement clinker-shall confirm to IS 269:1989‡ Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 1727:1967 Methods of test of pozzol"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3466: 1988",
    "title": "Masonry Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34661988_1",
    "text": "IS 3466: 1988 Masonry Cement [Scope]\nRequirements for masonry cement to be used for all general purposes where mortars for masonry are required. Masonry cement is, however, not intended for use in structural concrete, for flooring and foundation work or for reinforced and prestressed concrete works. (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3466: 1988",
    "title": "Masonry Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS34661988_2",
    "text": "IS 3466: 1988 Masonry Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerance as given in the standard. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS Sl NO. Characteristic Requirements i) Fineness— Residue on 45-micron IS Sieve, Max percent (by wet sieving) 15 ii) Setting Time (by Vicat Apparatus )— a) Initial, Min 90 min b) Final, Max 24 h iii) Soundness: a) Le- Chatelier Max 10 mm b) Autoclave expansion, Max 1 percent iv) Compressive Strength—Average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of 50 mm size, composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard stand by volume, Min 7 days 2.5 MPa 28 days 5 MPa v) Air Content—Air content of mortar composed of 1 part masonry coement and 6 percent 3 parts standard sand, by volume vi) Water Retention— Flow after suction of mortar composed of 1 part cem"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6452: 1989",
    "title": "High Alumina Cement For Structural Use",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS64521989_1",
    "text": "IS 6452: 1989 High Alumina Cement For Structural Use [Scope]\nManufacture of high alumina cement (HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a structural building material in the colder regions of our country (continuously 18°C and below). Its use as a refractory cement is not covered. NOTE — HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold regions it may find use as a structural material due to high early strength development. Following restrictions shall be followed for its use in concrete— a) Shall not be used in locations where ambient temperature exceeds 180C. b) Accelerators like calcium chloride shall not be used. c) Steam curing or elevated temperature of curing shall be avoided. d) Shall not be mixed with other types of cement. 2. Requirements 2.1. Total Alumina Content (Al2O3) — Not less than 32 percent (First Revision) 2.2 Fineness — Sp"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6452: 1989",
    "title": "High Alumina Cement For Structural Use",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS64521989_2",
    "text": "IS 6452: 1989 High Alumina Cement For Structural Use [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances as given in the standard. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 : Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032 :1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6452:1989 Specification for High alumina cement for structural use (first revision). ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6909: 1990",
    "title": "Supersulphated Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS69091990_1",
    "text": "IS 6909: 1990 Supersulphated Cement [General]\nIS 6909: 1990 Supersulphated Cement (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8041: 1990",
    "title": "Rapid Hardening Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS80411990_1",
    "text": "IS 8041: 1990 Rapid Hardening Portland Cement [Chemical Requirements]\nShall be as laid down in IS 269:1989*. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than 325 m2/kg. 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated Cement (Second Revision) Not more than 10 mm ('Le Chatelier’ method). Not more than 0.8 percent (autoclave). 3.3 Setting Time: Initial setting 30 minutes, final setting 10 h. 3.4 Compressive Strength of Mortar Cubes a) 24 hours 30 Not less than 16 MPa minutes b) 72 1 hours Not less than 27 MPa 4 Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS 4032:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.( first revision) *Ordinary Portland cement,33 Grade. For\n[Physical Requirements] Physical require- ments of white portland cement shall be as laid down in IS 269: 1989* except that compressive strength of mortar"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8042: 1989",
    "title": "White Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Degree Of Whiteness",
    "chunk_id": "IS80421989_1",
    "text": "IS 8042: 1989 White Portland Cement [Degree Of Whiteness]\nThe reflectance of neat cement ring prepared and tested in accordance with the test specified shall not be less than 70 percent.\n[Delivery] Packed in specified bags of 50 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk subject to tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentages of lime to percentage of Not greater than 1.02 silica, alumina and iron oxide and not less than 0.66 ii) Iron oxide, percent by mass Not more than 1.0 percent iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 2.0 percent iv) Magenesisa, percent by mass Not more than 6 percent v) Total sulphur content calculated as Not more than 3.5 percent sulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass Note —For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of\n[Chemical Requirements] The chemical requirements hydrophobic cement shall be as laid in IS 269:1989*. *Ordinary portland cement 33 Grade (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8043: 1991",
    "title": "Hydrophobic Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS80431991_1",
    "text": "IS 8043: 1991 Hydrophobic Portland Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net subject to tolerances specified in the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8043:1991 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement (second revision). ± ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8112: 1989",
    "title": "43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS81121989_1",
    "text": "IS 8112: 1989 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Scope]\nManufacture, chemical and physical requirements of 43 grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—This specification covers the requirements of ordinary Portland Cement for uses such as manufacture of prestressed concrete railway sleepers and precast products."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8112: 1989",
    "title": "43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS81121989_2",
    "text": "IS 8112: 1989 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Chemical Requirements]\nSee Table 1. 3. Physical Requirement 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface not less than 225 m2/kg 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated cement not more the 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and not more than 0.8 percent by autoclave method. (First Revision) 3.3 Setting Time — a) Initial setting time in minutes —not less than 30. b) Final setting time in minutes — not more than 600. 3.4 Compressive strength — a) 72 1 hour not less than 23 MPa b) 168 2 hour not less than 33 MPa c) 672 4 hour not less than 43 MPa"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8112: 1989",
    "title": "43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS81121989_3",
    "text": "IS 8112: 1989 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg , 25 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH STRENGTH PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica, Not greater than 1.02 and not alumina and iron oxide, when calculated by the formula less than 0.66 ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 3.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric Not more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tricalcium anhydride (SO3), percent by mass greater than aluminate percent by mass is 5 or less and 5 respectively vi) Total loss on ignition No"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12269: 1987",
    "title": "53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS122691987_1",
    "text": "IS 12269: 1987 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Scope]\nManufacture, chemical and physical requirments of 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—For certain specialized works, such as prestressed concrete and certain items of precast concrete, the concrete industry quite often needs a special type of ordinary Portland cement having the compressive strength much higher than the minimum compressive strength limits specified in IS 269:1989*and IS 8112:1991+"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12269: 1987",
    "title": "53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS122691987_2",
    "text": "IS 12269: 1987 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Chemical Requirements]\nSee Table 1. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than 225 m2/kg. 3.2 Soundness — unaerated cement not more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and 0.8 percent by autoclave method 3.3 Setting Time — a) Initial setting time in minutes – not less than 30, and b) Final setting time in minutes – not more than 600. 3.4 Compressive Strength — a) 72 1 h, not less than 27 MPa b) 168 2 h, not less than 37 MPa c) 672 4 h, not less than 53 MPa"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12269: 1987",
    "title": "53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS122691987_3",
    "text": "IS 12269: 1987 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg, 25 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg or in bulk with tolerances specified in this standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 53 GRADE ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica Not greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.80 alumina and iron oxide ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass (a) In caes no flyash, silica fume, rice hask ash and metakoline in added - Not more than 3.0 (b) In case of addition of fly ash and/or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and/or metakaoline - Not more than 5.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3), N"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12330: 1988",
    "title": "Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS123301988_1",
    "text": "IS 12330: 1988 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement [Delivery]\nPacked in specified bags of 50 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage if lime to percentages of silica, alumina Not greater than 1.02 and and iron oxide when calculated by the formula not less than 0.66 ii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 4 iii) Magmesia, percent by mass Not more than 6 iv) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) percent by mass Not more than 2.5 v) Tricalcium aluminate (C3A), percent by mass Not more than 5 vi) Tetracalcium alumino ferrite phase twice the tricalcium aluminate Not mor ethan 25 (C4AF+2C3A), percent by mass vii) Total loss on ignition, percent by mass Not more tha"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12330: 1988",
    "title": "Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS123301988_2",
    "text": "IS 12330: 1988 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement [Scope]\nRequirements for the following concrete masonry building units which are used in construction of loadbearing and partition walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks. b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, and c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks. Note—Concrete masonry units are used for both load-bearing and non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls, as backing for other types of facing materials, for piers, pilasters and columns, for retaining walls, garden walls, chimneys and fire places, as fillers in concrete joist floor construction and as shuttering for beams, columns and lintels. 2. Terminology 2.1Hollow (Open or Closed Cavity) Block—A block having one or more large holes or cavities which either pass through t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS2185Part11979_1",
    "text": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979 Concrete Masonry Units [Classification]\nsee Table 2 4.1 Hollow (Open and Closed Cavity) Concrete Blocks — a) Grade A b) Grade B (see Table 2) c) Grade C 4.2 Solid Concrete Blocks — Grade D (See Table 2). 5. Physical Requirement 5.1 General — All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects. 5.2 Blocks Density and Compressive Strength – Shall be as given in Table 2. 5.3 Water Absorption — Average value of three units shall be not more than 10 percent by mass. 5.4 Drying Shrinkage — Average value of three units shall not exceed 0.1 percent. 5.5 Moisture Movement —Average value of three units shall not exceed 0.09 percent. ± Note 1 — For requirements regarding materials, surface texture, texture and finish, refer to the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard. For detailed inf"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2185Part11979_2",
    "text": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979 Concrete Masonry Units [Scope]\nCovers the following lightweight concrete masonry building units which are used in the construction of load-bearing and non-load bearing walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks, b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks, and d) Solid non-load bearing concrete blocks 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Nominal Dimensions Length 400, 500 or 600 mm Height 100 or 200 mm Width 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mm Note 1 — Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified). Note 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200,250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full lengths. 2.2 Tolerance — Not more than 5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2185Part21983_1",
    "text": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983 Concrete Masonry Units [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks having density up to 1 000 kg/ m3. Note — Autoclaved means team curing of concrete products, sandlime bricks, asbestos cement products, hydrous calcium silicate insulation products, or cement in an autoclave at maximum ambient temperatures generally between 170 and 215oC. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Nominal Dimensions Length 400, 500 or 600 mm Height 200, 250 or 300 mm Width 100, 150, 200 or 250 mm Note 1— Actual dimensions shall be 10mm short of the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified). Note 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full lengths. 2.2 Tolerance — Not more than 5 mm in length and 3 mm in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS2185Part21983_2",
    "text": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983 Concrete Masonry Units [Classification]\nClassified into two grades (See Table 1). 4. Physical Requirements 4.1General — All units shall be sound and free of cracks and other defects . 4.2 For block density, compressive strength and thermal conductivity (See Table 1). 4.3 Drying Shrinkage — Shall not be more than 0.05 percent for Grade 1 blocks and 0.10 percent for Grade 2 blocks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 3): 1984",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2185Part31984_1",
    "text": "IS 2185 (Part 3): 1984 Concrete Masonry Units [Scope]\nRequirements for reinforced concrete fence posts for general purposes. Recommendations for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as well as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence posts and prestressed concrete fence posts are not covered. 2. Classification a) Line Posts— Line posts are intermediate posts forming the majority in a post-and-wire system and are intended to carry the fencing wire between the strainer posts. b) Strainer Posts— Posts notched on three sides and used with struts or braces as strainers at the corners or ends, or at intermediate positions in a line of fence. c) Strut or Brace— Member used in inclined position for supporting the strainer post. 3. Shape and Dimension 3.1 Shall be square, rectangular"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4996: 1984",
    "title": "Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS49961984_1",
    "text": "IS 4996: 1984 Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts [General]\nIS 4996: 1984 Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts (First Revision) cross-sectional dimensions and the reinforcement shall be adequate to conform to strength requirements given in 4. Note— Some of the common sizes and shapes for reinforced concrete fence posts with other details such as reinforcement, fencing wire spacing from ground level, spacing of line post and strainer post and suitability of particular size of fence post for use are given in Appendix B of the standard for general guidance. These may be used provided the strength requirements are fulfilled. 3.2 Tolerances— ± 15 mm on overall length,± 3 mm on cross-sectional dimensions and 0.5 percent on straightness of fence post. 4. Strength Test 5.1 Impact Test— When tested, specimen shall show no visible permanent cracking."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4996: 1984",
    "title": "Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS49961984_2",
    "text": "IS 4996: 1984 Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts [General]\nstandard for general guidance. These may be used provided the strength requirements are fulfilled. 3.2 Tolerances— ± 15 mm on overall length,± 3 mm on cross-sectional dimensions and 0.5 percent on straightness of fence post. 4. Strength Test 5.1 Impact Test— When tested, specimen shall show no visible permanent cracking. 5.2 Static-Load Test—The static load required to produce first visible crack in post shall be as given below— Line post 700 N Strainer post 2 500 N Strut or angle post 450 N Note 1 — For typical details and dimensions of line post, strainer post and brace for fencing intended for various uses, for recommendations for manufacture of reinforced concrete under field conditions and for recommendations for erection of fence posts, refer to the standard. Note 2— For method of tests, refer to Appendix C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 4996:1984 Specification for reinforced concrete fence posts (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5751: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Coping Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS57511984_1",
    "text": "IS 5751: 1984 Precast Concrete Coping Blocks [Scope]\nRequirements for precast concrete coping blocks, giving details of materials for manufacture, workmanship, functional requirements and essential dimensions to meet them. Note—The blocks serve as defence against entry of moisture into hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are: a) should prevent downward penetraction of water b) should direct water clear of walls below c) should resist lateral displacement, either by its mass or by mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use of cramps and dowels. d) should allow for thermal and moisture movements. e) should be durable. 2. Dimension and Tolerances 2.1Dimension of Cross Section— The form of cross section shall be as agreed to mutually. Overall width shall be determined by referring to thickness of wall to which coping is"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5751: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Coping Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Shape",
    "chunk_id": "IS57511984_2",
    "text": "IS 5751: 1984 Precast Concrete Coping Blocks [Shape]\nCoping blocks shall slope to the rear so as to reduce wash of water and accumulated dirt over face of wall. The slope shall be as steep as possible for rapid shedding of water. Note— For example of concrete copings such as splayed and saddleback coping, see Fig. 3 of the standard.\n[Mass] Not less than 35 kg/m for flat bottomed coping without cramps."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5751: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Coping Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Fixing And Jointing",
    "chunk_id": "IS57511984_3",
    "text": "IS 5751: 1984 Precast Concrete Coping Blocks [Fixing And Jointing]\nEnds of coping blocks shall be jointed by means of dowels, cramps or joggled mortar joints. Flashing of non-corrodible material is adopted at joints in coping blocks to prevent leakage."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5751: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Coping Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Fittings",
    "chunk_id": "IS57511984_4",
    "text": "IS 5751: 1984 Precast Concrete Coping Blocks [Fittings]\nStopped ends, hipped stopped ends, stooled ends and right-angled returns, shall be available to match the coping blocks. For detailed information, refer to IS 5751:1984 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5758: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Kerbs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS57581984_1",
    "text": "IS 5758: 1984 Precast Concrete Kerbs [General]\nIS 5758: 1984 Precast Concrete Kerbs (First Revision) Type of Product Dimensions (mm) Load to be Supported (N) a) Rectangular kerbs 150 × 300 22 750 125 × 250 13 600 100 × 250 9 100 b) Splayed kerbs 150 × 300 22 750 125 × 250 13 600 c) Half-batter kerbs 150 × 300 22 750 125 × 250 13 600 d) Half-section kerbs 150 × 125 8 200 e) Channels 250 × 125 13 600 f) Edgings 50 × 250 3 180 50 × 200 2 720 50 × 150 2 040 6.1.1 If tests are carried out after a longer period, the load to be supported shall be increased by the ageing factor given below— Age of sample (months) 3 6 12 Ageing factor 1.1 1.15 1.20 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not exceed 3 percent in the first 10 minutes and 8 percent after 24 hours. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5758:1984 Specification for precast concrete kerbs (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5820: 1970",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Cable Covers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS58201970_1",
    "text": "IS 5820: 1970 Precast Concrete Cable Covers [Scope]\nRequirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast concrete for covering cables.\n[Classification] See Table 1. 2.1Arch type covers are also sometimes used.\n[Dimensions] See Table 2. Note 1 — L,W= Length, Width. T = Total thickness in case of flat type and thickness of flat portion excluding peak in case of cover with peak. T' = Total thickness including peak in case of cover with peak. Note 2 — For typical concrete cable cover, flat type and with peak, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard. 3.1Tolerance — On length and width ±3 mm, and on thickness ±2 mm. 4. Tests 4.1Impact Strength for Reinforced Covers— Not more than one transverse crack. 4.2Transverse Strength for Unreinforced Covers— Average breaking load shall not be lower than the value specified in Table 2. Note 1— For manufacturing details with regard to the aspects such as mixing, moulding, protection from frost and reinforcement details, refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2— For methods of tests, refer"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6072: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS60721971_1",
    "text": "IS 6072: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs [Finish]\nTongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. Physical Properties 7.1Density — Range as specified in 3. 7.2Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent. 7.3Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours. 7.5Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity— Class Compressive Thermal Strength, Conductivity Min Max (kgf/cm2) (kcal/m/h/oC) A 70 0.36 B 60 0.32 C 50 0.26 D 35 0.21 E 20 0.18 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision) and relevant partsof IS 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products . Note 2 — F\n[Scope] Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6072: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Terminology",
    "chunk_id": "IS60721971_2",
    "text": "IS 6072: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs [Terminology]\nThe cellular concrete consists of an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing silicon dioxide (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water and additives (optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclabes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6072: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS60721971_3",
    "text": "IS 6072: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs [Classification]\nShall be classified on basis of oven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength— Class Gross Density (kg/m3) A Over 850 and up to 1 000 B Over 750 and up to 850 C Over 650 and up to 750 D Over 550 and up to 650 E Over 450 and up to 550"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6072: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS60721971_4",
    "text": "IS 6072: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs [Designation]\nBy indicating compressive strength (kgf/cm2), load bearing capacity, that is, design load (kgf/cm2), length (m), breadth (mm) and thickness (mm). 5. Sizes 5.1 Preferred Dimensions— Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 75 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6073: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Floor And Roof Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS60731971_1",
    "text": "IS 6073: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Floor And Roof Slabs [Finish]\nTongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. Physical Properties 7.1 Density — Range as specified in 3. 7.2 Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent. 7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4 Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours. 7.5 Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity— Class Compressive Thermal Strength, Min Conductivity Max (kgf/cm2) (kcal/m/h/oC) A 70 0.36 B 60 0.32 C 50 0.26 D 35 0.21 E 20 0.18 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 : 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision), and relevant parts of IS 6441 Part 1 to 9 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6523: 1983",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Door And Window Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS65231983_1",
    "text": "IS 6523: 1983 Precast Reinforced Concrete Door And Window Frames [Scope]\nRequirements for precast reinforced concrete door and window frames. Use of such frames is recommended to be restricted to a maximum opening width of 2.25 m.\n[Dimensions] Cross section 60 ×100 mm or 70 × 75 mm for single shutter door and 60 × 120 mm for double shutter door. Overall sizes (width and height) of frames shall conform to IS 4021:1995 * Note 1 — Suitable adjustments in cross-sectional shape may be made by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier to provide suitable groove for wall plaster, etc, provided the overall dimensional requirements given above are not affected. Note 2 — For overall dimensions of the frame, the width of the frame shall be the total length of the horizontal piece measured out-to-out; the height of the frame shall be the total height measured from the lowest end of the vertical piece (in case of three member frame or the outer edge of the lower horizontal member in case of four member frame) to the outer edge of the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9893: 1981",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Blocks For Lintels And Sills",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS98931981_1",
    "text": "IS 9893: 1981 Precast Concrete Blocks For Lintels And Sills [General]\nIS 9893: 1981 Precast Concrete Blocks For Lintels And Sills Note 1 — For details of material, refer to 3 of the standard. Note 2— For details of manufacture, or aspects such as construction, finish, mould, reinforcement, occuring etc, refer to 5 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9893:1981 Specification for precast concrete lintels and sills. +12 - 0 +0 - 6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10388: 1982",
    "title": "Corrugated Coir, Woodwool,",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS103881982_1",
    "text": "IS 10388: 1982 Corrugated Coir, Woodwool, [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, dimensions and physical properties for corrugated roofing sheets made from coir, woodwool and cement. Note — Optimum utilization of national resources demand that use of indigeneous building material should be promoted. Coir, woodwool and few other vegetable fibres which are available in large quantity in this country, have been found suitable for the manufacture of sheets for roofing purposes. The sheets may be either plain or corrugated and manufactured by mixing and pressing coir wood-wool and cement in suitable proportions. 2. Materials 2.1Cement—This shall conform to either IS 269:1989* or IS 8041 : 1990† or IS 8112 : 1989‡ CEMENT ROOFING SHEETS Note — For methods of tests , refer to Appendices A to D of the standard. For detailed information, refer t\n[Physical Requirements] See Table 2. * 33 Grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision). † Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision). ‡ 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12440: 1988",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Stone Masonry Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS124401988_1",
    "text": "IS 12440: 1988 Precast Concrete Stone Masonry Blocks [Classification]\nSee Table 1. 5. Physical Requirement 5.1 Water Absorption — The water absorption being the average of three blocks, shall not be more than 6 percent by mass. 5.2 Compressive Strength — See Table 1 TABLE 1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE STONE MASONRY BLOCKS (Based on 28 days Strength) Class Minimum Average* Compressive Minimum strength of Designation Strength of Blocks N/mm2 Individual Blocks N/mm2 5 5.0 3.5 6 6.0 4.2 7 7.0 5.0 9 9.0 6.3 10 10.0 7.5 *For 100 mm wide blocks (for 100 mm thick walls) the miminum strength may be 3.5 N/mm2. Note 1 — For details of materials refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2 — For details of manufacture in regard to mould, mix, placing, compaction, curing and drying refer to 6 of the standard. Note 3 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the st"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS125922002_1",
    "text": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame [General]\nIS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame (First Revision) 4. Physical Requirements 4.1 General — All covers and frames shall be sound and free from cracks and other defects which interferes with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the units. 4.2 Dimensions – The dimensions of the cover and frame shall be as specified in 3.2 4.3 Load Test — Breaking load of individual units shall be not less than the value specified in the table given below : Load Test Load and Diameter of Block Grade Type Load Diameter of Cover in of Block kN mm LD-2.5 Rectangular, square 25 300 and circular MD-10 Rectangular and 100 300 circular HD-20 Circular, lamphole, 200 300 square and rectangular (scrapper manhole) EHD-35 Circular, square and 350 300 rectangular (scrapper manhole) Note 1 — For details of material refer to 4 of the standard. Note 2 — For details of manufacture in regard to mixing, placing, compaction, curing and finishing, refer to 7 of the standard. Note 3 — For methods of tests refer to Annex B and C of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS125922002_2",
    "text": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame [General]\n1 — For details of material refer to 4 of the standard. Note 2 — For details of manufacture in regard to mixing, placing, compaction, curing and finishing, refer to 7 of the standard. Note 3 — For methods of tests refer to Annex B and C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12592 :2002 Specification for precast concrete manhole covers and frames. 1. Scope Requirements for precast steel reinforced cement concrete manhole covers and frames intended for use in sewerage and water drainage. 2. Grades and Types 2.1 Manhole cover shall be of the following four grades and types: Grades Grade Type/Shape of Cover Designation Frame Light Duty LD-2.5 Rectangular,square and circular Medium Duty MD-10 Rectangular and circular Heavy Duty HD-20 rectangular, square, circular and lamphole (scrapper manhole) Extra Duty EHD-35 rectangular, square and circular (scrapper manhole) 2.2 Recomended locations for placement of different grades and types / shapes of manholes covers and frames are given in 3.2.1 to 3.2.4 of the standard. 3. Shapes and Dimensions 3.1 Shape— The shapes of precast concrete manhole covers shall be of shape as mentioned in 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS125922002_3",
    "text": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame [General]\ncircular (scrapper manhole) 2.2 Recomended locations for placement of different grades and types / shapes of manholes covers and frames are given in 3.2.1 to 3.2.4 of the standard. 3. Shapes and Dimensions 3.1 Shape— The shapes of precast concrete manhole covers shall be of shape as mentioned in 2. 3.2 Dimensions and Tolerance – The dimensinos and tolerances on dimension of frames shall be as shown in Table 1 of the standard. 5. The permanent set shall not exceed the requirement given in Annex C of the Standard. 4.2 The tensile stress in reinforcement under services condition shall not exceed 200 N/mm2. 4.3 The minimum cross-sectional area of main reinforcement in any one of the two principal directions shall not be less than 1.0 percent of the gross cross- sectional area of the element. 4.4 Laps in wire mesh, where provided, shall be not less than 100 mm. 4.5 The skeletal steel shall be spaced at not more than 300 mm centre to centre in both directions. Laps in bars where, provided, shall be not less than 150 mm. The skeletal steel may not be necessary in case of mechanized or semi-mechanized casting processes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS125922002_4",
    "text": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame [General]\nless than 100 mm. 4.5 The skeletal steel shall be spaced at not more than 300 mm centre to centre in both directions. Laps in bars where, provided, shall be not less than 150 mm. The skeletal steel may not be necessary in case of mechanized or semi-mechanized casting processes. 4.6 The minimum wall thickness shall be 12 mm for tanks up to 2 000 litres capacity in case of mechanized or semi-mechanized casting and 15 mm for tanks up to 1 000 litres capacity when hand cast. For larger capacity tanks the wall thickness may be 20 mm to 40 mm depending on capacity. 4.7 The minimum thickness of the lid/cover slab shall in no case be less than 15 mm. 4.8 In case the bottom slab thickness exceeds 30 mm, the slab may be cast in ferrocement only. However, an intermediate plain concrete layer using graded coarse aggregate of nominal maximum size 6.3 mm may be introduced between the wire mesh layers to achieve the design thickness without excessive use of cement. In case of composite slab, the minimum thickness of top as well as bottom layer of ferrocement shall not be less than 8 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS125922002_5",
    "text": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame [General]\ncoarse aggregate of nominal maximum size 6.3 mm may be introduced between the wire mesh layers to achieve the design thickness without excessive use of cement. In case of composite slab, the minimum thickness of top as well as bottom layer of ferrocement shall not be less than 8 mm. 4.9 The minimum clear cover to reinforcement shall be 4 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13356: 1992",
    "title": "Precast Ferrocement Water Tanks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS133561992_1",
    "text": "IS 13356: 1992 Precast Ferrocement Water Tanks [Scope]\nRequirements for precast reinforced concrete planks and joist used for construction of roofs and floors. The planks length upto 1.5 m long only are covered. 2. Shape, Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks 2.1.1 Shape —Shape of the planks shall be rectangular with haunches as shown in. Top surface shall be chequered finish. 2.1.2 Dimensions 2.1.2.1 Width— The width of the planks shall be 300 mm. 2.1.2.2 Length— The length of the planks shall be limited to a maximum of 11.5 m. However, it is preferable to use lengths in multiple of 300 mm only, keeping in view the requirements of modular co-ordination. 2.1.2.3 Thickness— The plank shall be made partly 30mm and partly 60mm thick. A 100 mm wide tapered concrete filling shall be provided for strengthening the haunch p"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13990: 1994",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks And Joists For Roofing And Flooring",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS139901994_1",
    "text": "IS 13990: 1994 Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks And Joists For Roofing And Flooring [Tests]\nDimensional test and deflection recovery test shall be routine test whereas failure load test shall be a type test. Type test is intended to prove the suit- ability and performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test be applied at the time of design of a component of a particular size or at the time of any change in the design/size."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14143: 1994",
    "title": "Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS141431994_1",
    "text": "IS 14143: 1994 Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially [Scope]\nRequirements for prefabricated brick panel and partially precast joist for flooring and roofing. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Prefabricated Brick Pane 2.1.1 Length— Length of panel shall not exceed 1.1 m for bricks having strength less than 40 N/mm2. For bricks having strength more than 40 N/mm2 conforming to IS 2180 : 1988* the length of panel shall not exceed 1.2 m. From economic point of view, the minimum recommended length of panel is 0.9 m. 2.1.2 Width— Width of the panel shall be 53 cm for panels made of conventional size (230 mm × 110 mm × 75mm) bricks and 45 cm for panels made of modular size (190 mm x 90 mm x 90 mm) bricks. 2.1.3 Thickness— Thickness of the panel shall be equal to thickness of a brick, that is, 75 mm for conventional size bricks and 90 mm for modular size bric"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14143: 1994",
    "title": "Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS141431994_2",
    "text": "IS 14143: 1994 Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially [Tests]\nDimensional test and deflection recovery test shall be routine tests whereas failure load test shall be type test. Type test is intended to prove the suitability and performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test is applied at the time of any change in the design/size. * Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision) Fig. 2 Typical Partially Precast Joist ** Code of practice for design and construction of roofs and floors with prefabricated brick panel. ± ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14201: 1994",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Channel Units For Construction Of Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS142011994_1",
    "text": "IS 14201: 1994 Precast Reinforced Concrete Channel Units For Construction Of Floors And Roofs [Tests]\n2.3 Tolerances on Dimensions 2.3.1 Dimension Tolerance Length ± 5 mm Width ± 3 mm Bow (deviation from intended ± 3 mm line or plane) Twist (distance of any corner ± 3 mm from the plane containing other three corners) 2.3.1 Squareness— When considering the squareness of the corner, the longer of the two sides being checked shall be taken as the base line. The shorter length shall not vary in length from the perpendicular by more than 3 mm. 2.3.2 Flatness— The maximum deviation from a 1.5 m straig Tests for dimensional conformity, deflection recovery and failure load shall be conducted. Fig. 2 Typical Details of Channel Unit"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14241: 1995",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS142411995_1",
    "text": "IS 14241: 1995 Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel [Scope]\nRequirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete L-panels used for making roofs for buildings. This standard also covers the requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete channel units which are to be used along with L-panels in the roof construction. 2. Shape and Dimensions 2.1 Shape— The precast L-panel units shall have a cross-section of “L” shape with end bearing of same depth and width as the rib of L-section at the two ends of length. The end bearing length of rib parallel to the width of L-panel shall be kept lesser than the overall width of L-panel to provide an overlapping of 80-150 mm depending upon climatic conditions (see Fig. 1). 2.1.1 Channel Units— Units having a cross-section of channel shape shall also be produced in required numbers, to be used at the eaves in a ve"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14241: 1995",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS142411995_2",
    "text": "IS 14241: 1995 Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel [Tests]\nDimension test, deflection, recovery test shall be routine tests while failure load test shall be type test. Note 1— For details of material refer to 3 of the standard. Note 2— For details of manufacture with regard to mould, casting and curing refer to 6 of the standard. Note 3— For methods of tests, refer to Annex A of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 14241:1995 Specification for precast reinforced concrete L-panel for roofing. 3.2 Impermeability test (optional) — The specimens shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisutre on the lower surface. 3.3 Frost cracking test (optional) — Shall not show any cracking, surface alteration or delamination. 3.4 Density (Optional test) — Shall not be less than 1.4g/cm3.\n[Finish] Shall have rectangular shape; corrugation true and regular; edges strainght and clean and square."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 459: 1992",
    "title": "Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4591992_1",
    "text": "IS 459: 1992 Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos [Scope]\nCovers corrugated and semi-corrigutated asbestos cement sheets, designed to provide structural weather exposed surfaces of roofs and building walls of industrial, residential, agricultural commercial and institutional types of buildings and for decorative and other purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 459: 1992",
    "title": "Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS4591992_2",
    "text": "IS 459: 1992 Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nSee Table 1. 3. Physical and Mechanical Characteristics 3.1 The load bearing capacity of corrugated and semi- corrugated sheets shall be not less than 5 N/mm width of specimen. CEMENT SHEETS (Third Revision) Note 1 — For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets, refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913: 2003 Methods of tests for absestos cement products (second revision). For detailed informatoin refer to IS 459:1992 Specification for corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets (third revision). TABLE1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF CORRUGATED AND SEMI-CORRUGATED SHEETS All dimensions in milimetres Sl. Types of Depth of Pitch of Overall Effective Nominal Length of No. Sheets Corrugation Corrugation Width Width Thickness Sheet (1) (2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1592: 2003",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS15922003_1",
    "text": "IS 1592: 2003 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes [Scope]\nRequirements of socketed asbestos cement building and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of diameter 50 to 150 mm for use as rain water pipes, soil, waste and ventilating pipes. 1.1 The followings pipes and pipe fittings are covered— a) Single socketed pipe, b) Loose socket, c) Plain bend, d) Swan neck, e) Sanitary bend, f) Single and double equal junctions, g) Single and double unequal junctions, h) Single and double equal inverted junctions with spigot branch, j) Hexagonal rain water head, k) Shoe, m) Cone cap cowl, n) Slotted vent cowl, and p) W.C. connectors,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1592: 2003",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS15922003_2",
    "text": "IS 1592: 2003 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes [Workmanship]\nThe interior surface of the pipes and pipe fittings should be regular. 3. Dimensional Requirements 3.1 Nominal Diameter and Thickness— The nominal diameter of the pipes and pipe fittings corresponds to the internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken into account. 3.2 Length 3.2.1 Nominal Length — The nominal lengths of pipes correspond to the useful lengths of the socketed pipes exclusive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerance into account, and shall be 500, 1000, 1500, 1830, 2000 2440 and 3000 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1626Part11994_1",
    "text": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings [General]\nIS 1626 (Part 1): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings AND ROOF FITTINGS PART 1 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS (Second Revision) 3.2.2 Overall Length — The overall length is the sum of nominal length and length of socket. 3.3 Tolerances 3.3.1 Internal diameter of plain ends and sockets: The ratio of the actual diameter (maximum or minimum bore of pipes, pipe fittings or sockets measured over a given section) and the nominal diameter (bore of pipes, pipe fittings or sockets) should lie between 0.95 and 1.05 for all diameters of pipes and pipe fittings. 3.3.2 The nominal length— The tolerances on nominal length of pipes and pipe fittings shall be ± 10 mm and ± 5 mm respectively. 3.3.3 The overall length— The tolerances on the overall lengths of pipes shall be ± 10 mm. 3.3.4 The depth of socket — The tolerances on the depth of the sockets of pipe fittings shall be ± 5 mm. 4."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1626Part11994_2",
    "text": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings [General]\nshall be ± 10 mm and ± 5 mm respectively. 3.3.3 The overall length— The tolerances on the overall lengths of pipes shall be ± 10 mm. 3.3.4 The depth of socket — The tolerances on the depth of the sockets of pipe fittings shall be ± 5 mm. 4. Physical Requirements 4.1 The deviation in straightness of pipes shall not exceed the following— Nominal Diameter Deviation m m m m 50 to 60 5.5l 80 to 150 4.5l where l is the nominal length of the pipe in metres 4.2 Hydraulic Pressure Test — To be carried out on all pipes and fittings except on cone cap cowl, slotted vent cowl and pipe fittings provided with access doors. 4.2.1 Pipes and fittings shall show no fissure or visible sweating on outside surface when subjected to internal hydraulic pressure of 0.1 MN/m 2 maintained for 30 seconds. 4.2.2 Hydraulic bursting test — (optional for pipes only) the pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress of 5 MN/m2 4.2.3 Longitudinal bursting test — The unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 12.5 MN/m2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1626Part11994_3",
    "text": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings [General]\nsubjected to internal hydraulic pressure of 0.1 MN/m 2 maintained for 30 seconds. 4.2.2 Hydraulic bursting test — (optional for pipes only) the pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress of 5 MN/m2 4.2.3 Longitudinal bursting test — The unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 12.5 MN/m2. 4.2.4 Transverse crushing test — The unit transverse crushing stress of pipes at failure shall not be less than 14 MN/m2. 4.2.5 Water absorption test— The mean water absorption of speciment shall not be more than 28 percent of the dry mass of the material. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Method of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision) For detailed information refer to IS 1626 (Part 1):1984 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 1 Pipes and pipe fittings (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1626Part21994_1",
    "text": "IS 1626 (Part 2): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building [Scope]\nRequirments of asbestos cement gutters and gutter fittings used in buildings.\n[Workmanship] The interior surface of the gutters and their fittings shall be regular and uniform. 3. Dimensional Requirements a) Valley gutters — Normal size (in mm), shall be, 915 × 205 × 230, 610 × 150 × 230, 455 ×125 × 150 and 405 × 125 × 255 with thickness 12.5 mm, and length 1 830 mm. b) Boundary wall gutters — Nominal size (in mm), shall be 510 × 150 × 255, 455 × 150 × 305, 305 × 150 × 230 and 280 × 125 × 180 with thickness 12.5 mm and length 1830 mm. c) Half round gutters Nominal size shall be 305, 230 and 150 mm with thickness 9.5 mm. PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS, GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS AND ROOF FITTINGS PART 2 GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS (Second Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626: 1984",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Guter Fittings And Roof Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS16261984_1",
    "text": "IS 1626: 1984 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Guter Fittings And Roof Fittings [General]\nIS 1626: 1984 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Guter Fittings And Roof Fittings PART 3 ROOF FITTINGS (Second Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 1626(Part 3):1994 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 3 Roof fitings (second revision). * Corrugated and semi-corrugated asebestos cement sheets (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2096: 1992",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20961992_1",
    "text": "IS 2096: 1992 Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets [Scope]\nRequirements regarding, composition, dimension and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets (semicompressed and fully compressed). These sheets are different from autoclaved silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are covered in IS 13000:1990.*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2096: 1992",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS20961992_2",
    "text": "IS 2096: 1992 Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets [Classification]\nSee Table 1. 3. Dimensional and tolerances 3.1 Thickness— shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 15 mm. 3.2 Length and Width — See Table 2. 3.3 Tolerances 3.3.1 On thickness — (a) From 3 mm to 5 mm ±0.5 mm (b) From 6 mm and above ± 0.1 mm where 'e' is nominal thickness of sheet. (First Revision) 3.3.2 On length and width — Shall not vary from the nomoinal dimensions for length and width by more than ± 5 mm. 3.3.3 Straightness of edges — Shall be not more than 2 mm/m for the relevant dimension (length or width) 3.3.4 Squareness of edges — Shall be not more than 3 mm/m. 4. Tests 4.1 Bending Strength Test and Density — Bending stress and density shall not be less than the values specified in Table 1. 4.2 For measurement of thickness, straightness and squareness of edges, refer to 8 of the standar"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2098: 1997",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Boards",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20981997_1",
    "text": "IS 2098: 1997 Asbestos Cement Building Boards [Scope]\nRequirements regarding composition, dimensions, and test of asbestos cement building boards. Asbestos cement flat sheets and silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are different, are not covered in this standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2098: 1997",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Boards",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS20981997_2",
    "text": "IS 2098: 1997 Asbestos Cement Building Boards [Classification]\nSee Table 1. 3. Tolerances 3.1 Length and Width ±0.5 mm 3.2 Thickness a) From 3 mm to 5 mm ± 0.5 mm (First Revision) b) From 6 mm and above ± 0.1 e mm (± 10 percent) where 'e' is nominal thickness of board. 4. Tests 4.1 Load Bearing Capacity— Average of two specimens not less than 20 kg for Class A boards and 15 kg for Class B and Class C boards. Further, the breaking load of either of the specimens shall not be less than 15 kg for Class A boards and 10 kg for Class B and Class C boards. 4.2 Water Absorption Test— The amount of water absorbed by the specimen shall not exceed 40 percent of its dry weight. TABLE 1DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING BOARDS Class of Board Length Width Thickness mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) A 2440 1220 6 (2400) (1200) 1830 (1800) 1220 (1200) B 2440 1220 5 (2400)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6908: 1991",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS69081991_1",
    "text": "IS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage [General]\nIS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage (First revision) 5.2 Fittings — Tolerances on the nominal thickness of the fittings shall be as follows: Upper deviation : Free Lower deviation :—1.5 mm 6. Tests 6.1 Hydraulic ressure Test— The pipe and joints when tested to a pressure of 0.25 MPa shall not show any fissure, leakage, or sweating on their outside surface. 6.2 Transverse Crushing Test— a) Pipes— Minimum 33 N/mm. b) Fittings — No minimum transverse crushing load is required 6.3 Longitudinal Bending Strength (Optional ) Shall not fracture below the following bending loads 100 mm 2.8 kN 125 mm 4.2 kN 150 mm 6.0 kN 6.4 Acid Resistance Test (Optional) — The amount of acetic acid neutralied shall not exceed 0.100 g/cm 7. Joints a) Asbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing rings. b) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6908: 1991",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS69081991_2",
    "text": "IS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage [General]\n2.8 kN 125 mm 4.2 kN 150 mm 6.0 kN 6.4 Acid Resistance Test (Optional) — The amount of acetic acid neutralied shall not exceed 0.100 g/cm 7. Joints a) Asbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing rings. b) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts. 7.1 The assembled joint shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydrostatic pressure of 0.25 MPa TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPES Nominal Minimum Ultimate Crushing Load Diameter m m Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 (1) (2) (3) (4) 100 15.0 15.0 15.0 125 15.0 15.0 15.0 150 15.0 15.0 17.5 200 15.0 17.5 25.0 250 15.0 22.5 30.0 300 17.5 27.5 35.0 350 21.5 31.5 41.5 400 23.5 36.5 48.5 450 26.5 40.0 53.5 500 30.0 45.0 60.0 600 36.5 53.5 71.5 700 41.5 63.5 83.5 750 45.0 67.5 90.0 800 48.5 71.5 96.5 850 51.0 76.5 102.5 900 53.5 81.5 108.5 1000 60.0 90.0 120.0 Note— No crushing load at rupture shall be less than 15 kN/m."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6908: 1991",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS69081991_3",
    "text": "IS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage [General]\n36.5 48.5 450 26.5 40.0 53.5 500 30.0 45.0 60.0 600 36.5 53.5 71.5 700 41.5 63.5 83.5 750 45.0 67.5 90.0 800 48.5 71.5 96.5 850 51.0 76.5 102.5 900 53.5 81.5 108.5 1000 60.0 90.0 120.0 Note— No crushing load at rupture shall be less than 15 kN/m. TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE DEVIATIONS ON SIZES Thickness Permissible Deviations On Thickness On External On Nominal Excluding Diameter at Length Machined Ends Finished Ends (1) (2) (3) (4) mm mm mm mm Up to and including 10 -1.5 +50 Over 10, up toand including 20 -2.0 ±1.0 for 100 - 20 for 100 to to 700 mm 300mm nominal Over 20, up to and including 30 -2.5 nominal diameter and diameter and Over 30, up to and including 60 -3.0 ± 1.5 for 750 + 50 to 1000 mm - 40 for nominal nominal diameter diameter greater than 300 mm Over 60, up to andincluding 90 -3.5 Over 90 -4.0 Note— Nominal length of the pipes shall be 3 m for nominal diameters upto 200 mm and 4 m for greater diameters. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6908: 1991",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS69081991_4",
    "text": "IS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage [General]\nOver 60, up to andincluding 90 -3.5 Over 90 -4.0 Note— Nominal length of the pipes shall be 3 m for nominal diameters upto 200 mm and 4 m for greater diameters. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 6908:1991 Specification for asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8870: 1978",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS88701978_1",
    "text": "IS 8870: 1978 Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits [Scope]\nCovers asebstos cement cable conduits of 50 to 150 mm diameter together with plastic couplings and asbestos cement conical couplings and asbestos cement collars with rubber rings These are intended to accomodate paper insulated telecommunication and power cables. Also covers asebestos cement cable trough of 100×100 mm to 300×300 mm size together with bends and union clips for use at ground level and above ground level for carrying cables. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Conduits and Bends — See Table 1. 2.2 The nominal sizes of asbestos cement troughs shall be 100 × 100, 150 × 100, 180 × 150, 300 × 200 and 300 × 300 mm. Nominal length and wall thickness shall be 1.75 m and 12 mm respectively. 2.2.1 Tolerances on depth and width shall be ±3 mm and on length it shall be ± 6 mm. AND TROUGHS"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8870: 1978",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS88701978_2",
    "text": "IS 8870: 1978 Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits [Finish]\nHomogenous with inner and outer surfaces clean, true, smooth and free from any imperfections that render them unsuitable for their purpose. Ends shall be finished square to the axis. 4. Tests 4.1 Conduits shall be tested for straightness, regularity of thickness and diameter, flexural strength, crushing strength, water absorption, impact resistance and flattening resistance. 4.2 Troughs shall be tested for straightness, regularity of thickness, flexural strength and water absorption. Note— For detailed test requirements refer to 6 of the standard. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 8870 :1978 Specification for asbestos cement cable conduits and troughs."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9627: 1980",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS96271980_1",
    "text": "IS 9627: 1980 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes [Scope]\nRequirement for materials, classification, dimensions and tests for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets.\n[Classification] Shall be classified according to bending stress and density as given below : Class of Bending Stress N/mm2 .Min Density sheets Loading parallel Loading at g/cm3. Min to fibres right angles 1 13 16 1.2 2 20 28 1.6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9627: 1980",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS96271980_2",
    "text": "IS 9627: 1980 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes [Workmanship And Finish]\nShall be free from visible defects that impair its appearance or serviceability. The surface of the sheets shall be of uniform texture and shall have at least one smooth srface. They shall be flat, rectangular and shall have neatly trimmed straight and regular edges and shall be square at the corners. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Thickness shall be 3,4,5,6,8,10,12 and 15 mm 4.2 Nominal lengths and widths of silica- asbestos— Cement flat sheets shall be as follows—"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13000: 1990",
    "title": "Silica Asbestos - Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS130001990_1",
    "text": "IS 13000: 1990 Silica Asbestos - Cement Flat Sheets [Tests]\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information refer to IS 13000:1990 Specification for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets. Length Width mm 1200 1220 mm mm 600 × — 610 — × 1 200 × — 1 220 — × 1 800 × — 1 830 — × 2 400 × — 2 440 — × 3 000 × — 3 050 — × 4.3 Tolerances a) Thickness From 3 mm to 5 mm — ±0.5 mm From 6 mm and above— ± 0.1 e mm where e is nominal thickness of sheet. b) Length and Width — Shall no Shall be done for thickness, straightness of edges, squareness of edges, bending stress and density."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13008: 1990",
    "title": "Shallow Corrugated Asbestos",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS130081990_1",
    "text": "IS 13008: 1990 Shallow Corrugated Asbestos [Scope]\nCovers the requirements for materials, dimensions and tests for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] See Table 1 3. Physical and Mechanical Properties 3.1 Load bearing capacity – Shall be not less than 1.8mm width of the specimen. CEMENT SHEETS 3.2 Impermeability — Shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisture on the lower surface."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13008: 1990",
    "title": "Shallow Corrugated Asbestos",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS130081990_2",
    "text": "IS 13008: 1990 Shallow Corrugated Asbestos [Finish]\nShall have a rectangular shape, smooth surface on the weathering side, a good apearance and shall be true and regular. The edges of the sheets shall be straight and clean. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF SHALLOW CORRUGATED SHEETS All dimensions in millimetres. Sl Characteristics Nominal Tolerances No. Dimension i) Depth of corrugation 20 ±2.0 ii) Pitch of corrugation 75 ±1.5 ±10 iii) Overall width 1 015 – 5 +Free iv) Nominal thickness 4.2 – 0.2 v) Length of sheet 1 500 1 750 2 000 ±10 2 250 Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 13008:1990 Specification for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 458: 2003",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Pipes (With And",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4582003_1",
    "text": "IS 458: 2003 Precast Concrete Pipes (With And [Scope]\nRequirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast cement concrete pipes, of both pressure and non- pressure varieties used for water mains, sewers, culverts and irrigation. The requirements for collars are also covered by this standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 458: 2003",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Pipes (With And",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS4582003_2",
    "text": "IS 458: 2003 Precast Concrete Pipes (With And [Classification]\nFor the purpose of this standard, concrete pipes shall be classifed as per clause 4.1 of the standard 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimension The internal diameter, barrel wall thickness, length, the minimum reinforcements and strength test requierments for different classes of pipes (see 4.1 of the standard) shall be as specified in Tables 1 to 11of the standard. Dimensions of collar for class NP1 and dimensions and reinforcement of collar for class NP2 shall be as per Tables 1 and 21 of the standard respectively. 3.2 Tolerances The following tolerances shall be permitted : Sl. No. Dimensions Tolerances i) Overal length : ± 1 percent of standard length ii) Internal diameter of pipes: a) Up to and including 300 mm : ± 3 mm b) Over 300 mm and up to and including 600 mm : ± 5 mm c) Over 6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 784: 2001",
    "title": "Prestressed Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7842001_1",
    "text": "IS 784: 2001 Prestressed Concrete Pipes [Scope]\nRequirements of prestressed concrete cylinder and non- cylinder pipes (including specials) with nominal internal diameter in the range of 200 mm to 2 500 mm, in which permanent internal stresses are deliberately introduced by tensioned steel to the desired degree to counteract the stresses caused in the pipe under service. 2. Terminology 2.1 Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe — A welded sheet steel cylinder with steel socket and spigot rings welded to its ends, lined with concrete suitably compacted and circumferentially pre stressed to withstand internal pressure and external design loads and subsequently coated with cement mortar or concrete to protect the steel cylinder and prestressing wires. 2.2 Prestressed Concrete Non Cylinder Pipe– A suitably compacted concrete core longitudinally"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1916: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Cylinder Pipes With Concrete Lining And Coating",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS19161989_1",
    "text": "IS 1916: 1989 Steel Cylinder Pipes With Concrete Lining And Coating [Workmanship And Finish]\nPipes with linning and coating shall be straight and free from cracks. The ends of the pipes shall be square with their longitudinal axis. The lining and coating of the pipes shall be smooth, dence and hard, and shall not be coated with cement wash or other preparation. The lining and coating shall be free from excessive distance and surface irregularities. Projections exceeding 3mm measured from the general surface of the lining shall be removed. 5. Steel Cylinder 5.1 Thickness of Plates for Steel Cylinder– Shall be as given below— Internal Diameter Minimum of Finished Pipe Thickness of Plate mm mm 200 to 450 3.0 500 to 900 5.0 1 000 to 1 100 6.0 1 200 to 1 500 8.0 1 600 to 1 800 10.0 1 900 to 2 200 12.0 2 300 to 2 600 14.0 2 700 to 3 000 16.0 5.2 Each Cylinder shall undergo hydrostatic t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4350: 1967",
    "title": "Concrete Porous Pipes For Under",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS43501967_1",
    "text": "IS 4350: 1967 Concrete Porous Pipes For Under [Scope]\nRequirement for porous pipes made of concrete for use in under drainage. The requirements cover pipes ranging from 80 to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three types of joints. 2. Shape and Dimensions 2.1 Pipes may have butt ends, or rebated or ogee ends. 2.2 Dimensions for Concrete Porous Pipes— See Table1. 2.3 Collar Dimensions— See Table 2. 2.4 Tolerances Nominal Internal Permissible Diameter Deviation from Nominal Internal Diameter Upto and including +3 mm 300 mm –1.5 Over 300 mm, upto +6 mm 400 mm –3 mm over 400 mm +1.5 percent –0.75 percent DRAINAGE 2.4.1 Deviation from straightness — Not to exceed 3 mm per metre run. 3. Tests 3.1 Load Test — Specimen shall support a minimum load of 2000 kg uniformly distributed per metre length of pipe without showing any signs of failure at le"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7319: 1974",
    "title": "Perforated Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS73191974_1",
    "text": "IS 7319: 1974 Perforated Concrete Pipes [Scope]\nRequirements for perforated non-reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage work Note— Reinforced cement concrete perforated concrete pipes may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. Note— These pipes are used for underdrainage work in infiltration galleries, reclaiming water logged areas and for similar other purposes 2. Classification a) Circular perforation pipes— 5 to 8 mm diameter perforations arranged in rows parallel to the axis of the pipe. Perforations shall be approximately 75 mm centre to centre, along rows. The rows shall be spaced over not more than 165°of the circumference. b) Slotted perforation pipes— Slots shall be circumferential in direction, not more than 5 mm nor less than 3mmin width, and of the lengths shown in Table 1. There s"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7319: 1974",
    "title": "Perforated Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS73191974_2",
    "text": "IS 7319: 1974 Perforated Concrete Pipes [Dimensions]\nSee Table-1 3.1 Tolerances — Table 2 4. Workmanship and Finish 4.1 Shall be free from fractures, cracks and blisters laminations and surface roughness. 4.2 Joints — Spigot and socket type."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7319: 1974",
    "title": "Perforated Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Specials",
    "chunk_id": "IS73191974_3",
    "text": "IS 7319: 1974 Perforated Concrete Pipes [Specials]\nshall have spigot and socket ends. Curves shall be at 900, 450 and 221/20 5. Tests 5.1 Three edge bearing test or sand bearing test. 5.2 Absorption Test — Total absorption at the end of 24 h shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight. TABLE 1 SIZES AND DIMENSIONS Internal Minimum Rows of Perforations Length of Spacing of Minimum Diameter Thickness Perforation Per Row Slots Slots Strength Barrel, kg/m, Three Edge Bearing mm mm mm mm Method (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 80 25 4 9 25 50 — 100 25 4 9 25 75 1 560 150 25 4 9 37.5 75 1 560 200 25 4 9 50 100 1 560 225 25 6 10 50 100 1 670 250 25 6 10 50 100 1 670 300 30 6 10 75 150 1 790 350 32 6 10 75 150 1 880 400 32 8 10 75 150 2 020 450 35 8 10 75 150 2 230 TABLE 2 TOLERANCES a) Overall length ± 1 percent of standard length b) Internal diameter of"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3597: 1998",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Concrete Pipes.",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS35971998_1",
    "text": "IS 3597: 1998 Methods Of Test For Concrete Pipes. [General]\nIS 3597: 1998 Methods Of Test For Concrete Pipes. For detailed information, refer to IS 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7322: 1985",
    "title": "Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS73221985_1",
    "text": "IS 7322: 1985 Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of tests for steel cylinder reinforced concrete specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes conforming to IS 1916 : 1989* having nominal internal diameter from 200 to 1800mm. Covers special having— a) Spigot and socket ends, b) Plain ends or slip- in type ends suitable for field welding, and c) Flanged ends for connection with valves and accessories.\n[Classification] Special shall have the same classification as for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes given in 2 of IS 1916:1989*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7322: 1985",
    "title": "Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS73221985_2",
    "text": "IS 7322: 1985 Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes [Dimensions]\nNominal internal diameters for bends, tees, scour tees and flanges shall be 200,250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 300, 1 400, 1 500, 1 600, 1 700 and 1 800 mm. 3.1 Minimum thickness of plate for steel shell and nominal thickness of flange are given below— Nominal Internal Minimum Thickness diameter of Special Finished of Steel Plate for Shell mm mm 200 to 500 2.5 600 to 900 5.0 1 000 to 1 100 6.0 1 200 to 1 500 8.0 1 600 to 1 800 10.0 Nominal Internal Nominal Thickness Diameter of Flange mm m m 200 to 300 15 350 to 450 18 500 to 600 20 700 to 1 100 25 1 200 to 1 800 32 * Steel cylinder pipe with cocrete lining and coating (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 7322 : 1985 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced Concre"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7322: 1985",
    "title": "Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS73221985_3",
    "text": "IS 7322: 1985 Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes [Workmanship And Finish]\nSpecials shall be free from local dents or bulges greater than 3.0 mm in depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of the barrel. They shall be free from cracks. When actually placed in site trench, no opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in specials up to 600 mm diameter and 6 mm in specials larger than 600 mm diameter. 5. Tests 5.1 Each fitting shall be tested for conformity to the requirements of this standard. 5.2 The unlined special shall be tested by dye penetration test. 5.3 Dye- Penetration Test — This test shall be done in accordance with IS 3658 : 1999† † Code of practice for liquid penetrant flaw detection (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1834: 1984",
    "title": "Hot Applied Sealing Compounds For Joints In Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Physical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS18341984_1",
    "text": "IS 1834: 1984 Hot Applied Sealing Compounds For Joints In Concrete [Physical Requirements]\nSee Table 1. For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 1) :1983 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion Joint in concrete pavement and structures (non extruding and resilient type): Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1838 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1838Part11983_1",
    "text": "IS 1838 (Part 1): 1983 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures [General]\nIS 1838 (Part 1): 1983 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures (NON- EXTRUDING AND RESILIENT TYPE) PART 1 BITUMEN IMPREGNATED FIBRE (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984",
    "title": "Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1838Part21984_1",
    "text": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures [Scope]\nSpecifies the materials, manufacture, properties and tests for CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith based fillers for expansion joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures. 2. Properties 2.1 Preformed slabs or strips of expansion joint fillers shall not be deformed or broken by twisting, bending or other handling when exposed to atmospheric conditions. Pieces of the joint filler that have been damaged shall be rejected. 2.2 Recovery— The specimen shall recover at least 70 percent of its thickness before the test. 2.3 The load required to compress to 50 percent of its thickness before test , shall be 0.7 to 5.3 N/mm2. The material after compression shall not show a loss of more than 5 percent of its original mass. 2.4 Extrusion— When tested with three edges restrained an\n[Dimensions] Shall conform to the order."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984",
    "title": "Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS1838Part21984_2",
    "text": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures [Tolerances]\nTolerances of ±2.5 mm on thickness, ±5 mm on depth and ±7.5 mm in length shall be permitted. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 10566 : 1983 Methods of test for preformed fillers for expansion joints in concrete paving and structural construction. For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 2) :1984 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavement and structure (Non extruding and resilient type) Part 2 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985",
    "title": "One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11433Part11985_1",
    "text": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985 One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants [Scope]\nGeneral requirements of one-part gun- grade polysulphide-based sealants used in some sealing or glazing applications in buildings and structures.\n[Selection Of Material] The sealant shall cure at ambient temperature and humidity when applied."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985",
    "title": "One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Curing Conditions",
    "chunk_id": "IS11433Part11985_2",
    "text": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985 One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants [Curing Conditions]\nStandard cure condition shall be 40 ± 20C temperature and 95±5 percent relative humidity. 4. Test Requirements 4.1 Rheological Properties — The flow of the sealant shall be such that it shall not slump or sag in vertical or horizontal displacement or slip from the channel. 4.2 Recovery — The cure of the sealant shall be considered satisfactory if it exhibits recovery of not less than 75 percent, and if the tensile force required to extend the specimen is not less than 25 N or greater than 300 N. After the test the sealant shall be cut open with a clean sharp knife; there shall be no substantial transfer of the sealant onto the knife blade. 4.3 Mass loss after heat ageing — The mass loss, which includes volatile content, shall not exceed 10 percent. The sealant shall exhibit no cracks bubbl"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12118Part11987_1",
    "text": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987 Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants [Scope]\nGeneral requirements of two grades of two-part polysulphide based sealants for use in general building applications, namely, pouring grade and gun grade. Pouring grade sealants are intended for use in horizental joints. Gun grade sealants are intended for use in vertical and inclined joints (that is, glazing applications). 2. Grades of Sealants 2.1 Pouring Grade — A sealant which flows sufficiently to give reasonably smooth level surface when applied in a horizontal upward facing joint at ambient temperature. 2.2 Gun Grade — A sealant which permits application in a suitable joint of any aspect or inclination without appreciable slumping at ambient temperature."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Selection Of Material",
    "chunk_id": "IS12118Part11987_2",
    "text": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987 Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants [Selection Of Material]\nThe salient shall cure at ambient temperature. 4. Test Requirements 4.1 Rheological Properties 4.1.1 Pouring grade sealant — The sealant shall exhibit a smooth and level surface. 4.1.2 Gun-grade sealant — The sealant shall not stump in vertical displacement by more than 1.0 mm, when tested in a vertical position and shall not protrude in front of 2.1 SECTION 2 BUILDING LIMES CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 712: 1984",
    "title": "Building Limes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Packing",
    "chunk_id": "IS7121984_1",
    "text": "IS 712: 1984 Building Limes [Packing]\nThe hydrated lime shall be supplied, in suitable containers, such as jute bags lined with polythene or high density polythene woven bags lined with polythene or craft paper bags, preferably containing 50 kg of lime. Note — If the hydrated lime can be used within 30 days, use of liner may be dispensed with. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514: 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime ( first revision) and revelant parts of IS 6932: 1973 Methods of test for building limes. For detailed information, refer to IS 712: 1984 Specification for building limes (third revision). The quicklime shall be supplied in containers like metal container or similar suitable containers preferably containing 50 kg of lime.\n[Scope] Requirements for cinder for use as aggregates in lime concrete."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 712: 1984",
    "title": "Building Limes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7121984_2",
    "text": "IS 712: 1984 Building Limes [General]\nCinder aggregates shall be well-burnt furnace residue obtained from furnaces using only coal as fuel. It shall be clean and free from clay, dirt, wood ash or other deleterious matter.\n[Classes] a) Class A – for general purposes b) Class B – for interior work not exposed to damp conditions, and c) Class C – for precast blocks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 712: 1984",
    "title": "Building Limes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Grading",
    "chunk_id": "IS7121984_3",
    "text": "IS 712: 1984 Building Limes [Grading]\nIS Sieve Percentage Designation Passing 10– mm 100 4.75– mm 80 2.36– mm 60 1.18– mm 40 600– micron 30 300– micron 25 150– micron 16 5. Characteristics 5.1 Sulphate Content — Shall not exceed 1 percent when expressed as sulphur trioxide. 5.2 Loss on ignition — Shall not exceed 10 percent for class A, 20 percent for class B and 25 percent for Class C."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2686: 1977",
    "title": "Cinder As Fine Aggregates For Use In Lime Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26861977_1",
    "text": "IS 2686: 1977 Cinder As Fine Aggregates For Use In Lime Concrete [Scope]\nRequirements for coarse aggregate prepared from broken bricks (burnt clay) for use in lime concrete.\n[Quality] Shall be prepared from the well/ overburnt bricks conforming to class designation 50 and above of IS 1077:1992.* It shall be free from underburnt clay particles, soluble salt and adherent coating of soil or silt. Brick aggregate should be handled least number of times before being used in concrete. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Grading for broken brick coarse aggregate -shall be as fallows — IS Sieve Percent Passing Designation (By Mass) 75 mm 100 37.5 mm 95-100 19.0 mm 45- 75 4.75 mm 0- 5 3.2 Requirements of broken brick coarse aggregate- shall be as follows: Characteristic Requirement Bulk density, kg/m3 1 100 - 1 350 Aggregate impact value, 50 percent, Max water absorption, 20 percent, Max Water soluble matter, 1 percent, Max"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3068: 1986",
    "title": "Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate For Use In Lime Concrete",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS30681986_1",
    "text": "IS 3068: 1986 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate For Use In Lime Concrete [General]\nIS 3068: 1986 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate For Use In Lime Concrete (Second Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and IS 2386: 1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5640: 1970",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Determining Aggregate Impact Value Of Soft Coarse Aggregates.",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS56401970_1",
    "text": "IS 5640: 1970 Methods Of Test For Determining Aggregate Impact Value Of Soft Coarse Aggregates. [General]\nIS 5640: 1970 Methods Of Test For Determining Aggregate Impact Value Of Soft Coarse Aggregates. For detailed information, refer to IS 3068:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime concrete (second revision). *Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3115: 1992",
    "title": "Lime Based Blocks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS31151992_1",
    "text": "IS 3115: 1992 Lime Based Blocks [Scope]\nCovers dimension, quality and strength requirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) used for walls, internal partitions and filler walls.\n[General Requirements] All blocks shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges, distortion and other defects. The bedding surface shall be at right angles to the face of blocks. The ends of the blocks which form the vertical joints may be plain, tongued and gooved or double grooved. 3. Types Type A – Block with both faces keyed for plastering Type B – Block with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plasterning or rendering on either side,and. Type C – Block with one face keyed and one face smooth. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Actual Sizes Length 390 mm Width 90,190, 290 mm Height 90, 190 mm (Second Revision) Note — For methods of test, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1):1979 Concrete masonry units— Part 1 solid and hollow concrete blocks (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3115:1992 Specification fo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3182: 1986",
    "title": "Broken Brick (Burnt Clay)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS31821986_1",
    "text": "IS 3182: 1986 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) [Scope]\nRequirements for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar.\n[General Quality] Shall be prepared from broken/ solid bricks conforming to class designation 50 and above of IS 1077:1992*. It shall be free from underburnt clay particles, soluble salts and adherent coating of soil or silt. 3. Physical Requirements IS Sieve Percent Passing(By Mass) 4.75 mm 100 2.36 mm 90-100 1.18 mm 70-100 600 µm 40-100 300 µm 5-70 150 µm 0-15 75 µm Nil * Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision). Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 2386: Method of test for aggregates for concrete, and IS 3068:1986 Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime concret (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3182:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (second revision). FINE AGGREGATE FOR USE IN LI"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4098: 1983",
    "title": "Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS40981983_1",
    "text": "IS 4098: 1983 Lime Pozzolana Mixture [Scope]\nRequirements of lime pozzolana mixture for use in construction works. 2. Types Type Use LP7 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 0.5, and for foundation concrete LP20 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 2 and for foundation concrete. LP40 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 5."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4098: 1983",
    "title": "Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS40981983_2",
    "text": "IS 4098: 1983 Lime Pozzolana Mixture [Chemical Requirements]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIRE- MENTS SlNo. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Free moisture content,percent, Max 5 ii) Free lime, percent, Min 22 iii) Carbon dioxide, percent,Max 5 iv) Sulphate content, percent,Max 3 v) Magnesium oxide, percent, Max 8"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4098: 1983",
    "title": "Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Physical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS40981983_3",
    "text": "IS 4098: 1983 Lime Pozzolana Mixture [Physical Requirements]\nSee Table 2. (First Revision) TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS. Sl Characteristic Requirment No. Type of Mixture LP40 LP20 LP7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Fineness, percent retained on 150- micron 15 15 – IS Sieve ii) Setting time, hours a) Initial, Min 2 2 2 b) Final, Max 24 36 48 iii) Compressivestrength- average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of size 50 mm composed of one part of lime pozzolana mixture and 3 partsof standard sand by weight, N/mm2 a) At 7 days, Min 2 1 0.3 b) At 28 days, Min 4 2 0.7 iv) Water retention ,flow after suction of mortar composed of 65 65 65 one part of lime-pozzolana and 3 parts of standard sand by weight, percent of original flow, Min. v) Soundness, autoclave expansion, percent Max. 1 1 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4098: 1983",
    "title": "Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS40981983_4",
    "text": "IS 4098: 1983 Lime Pozzolana Mixture [Delivery]\nShall be packed in bags (jute, multiply paper, HDPE or cloth) with a net mass of ‘50’ kg. The permissible tolerance on the mass of mixture supplied Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514 : 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1727: 1967",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Pozzolanic Materials,Relevent Parts Of Is 4031: Methods Of Physical Tests For Hydraulic Cement, And Is 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods Of Tests For Building Limes.",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS17271967_1",
    "text": "IS 1727: 1967 Methods Of Test For Pozzolanic Materials,Relevent Parts Of Is 4031: Methods Of Physical Tests For Hydraulic Cement, And Is 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods Of Tests For Building Limes. [General]\nIS 1727: 1967 Methods Of Test For Pozzolanic Materials,Relevent Parts Of Is 4031: Methods Of Physical Tests For Hydraulic Cement, And Is 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods Of Tests For Building Limes. For detailed information, refer to IS 4098:1983 Specification for lime pozzolana mixture (first revision) in bags shall be ± 2.5 percent per bag with an overall tolerance of ± 0.5 percent for wagon load upto 25 tonnes. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard and IS 3495 :1992 Methods of test for burnt clay building bricks (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 4139:1989 Specification for calcium silicate bricks (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4139: 1989",
    "title": "Calcium Silicate Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS41391989_1",
    "text": "IS 4139: 1989 Calcium Silicate Bricks [Scope]\nRequirements regarding classification, general quality, dimensions, compressive strength and drying shrikage of calcium silicate bricks used in building.\n[General Quality] Shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape. Shall be free from visible cracks, warpage, organic matter, large pebbles and nodules of free lime. Shall be solid and with or without frog. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp and square corners and shall be uniform in colour."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4139: 1989",
    "title": "Calcium Silicate Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS41391989_2",
    "text": "IS 4139: 1989 Calcium Silicate Bricks [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nThe size shall be 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm. Tolerance on length shall be ± 3 mm and that on breadth and height ± 2 mm. 4. Classification Class Average Designation Compressive Strength (N/mm2) Not less than less than 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 15 15 15 20 20 20 – 5. Physical Characteristics 5.1 The minimum average compressive strength shall not be less than that specified in 4. The compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average compressive strength specified for the corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent. 5.2 Drying Shrinkage— See Table 1. TABLE 1 DRYING SHRINKAGE OF CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS. Class Drying Shrinkage, Max Designation (Percent of Wet Length) 7.5 0.06 10 0.06 15 0.04 20 0.04"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10772: 1983",
    "title": "Quick Setting Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS107721983_1",
    "text": "IS 10772: 1983 Quick Setting Lime Pozzolana Mixture [Scope]\nRequirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of fly ash-lime bricks used in buildings. Note— Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks having wet compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 approximately 300 kg/cm2 are covered in this standard and for higher strength see IS 2180 and IS 1077. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Visually the bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape. The bricks shall be free from visible cracks, warpage and organic matter. 2.2 The bricks shall be solid and with or without frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat side. The shape and size of the frog shall conform to either Fig. 1A or Fig. 1B of the standard. 3. Classification 3.1 Pulverized fuel ash - lime bricks shall be classified on the basis of average wet compresive strength"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12894: 2002",
    "title": "Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128942002_1",
    "text": "IS 12894: 2002 Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks [General]\nIS 12894: 2002 Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks (First Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to various part of IS 3495 :1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (third revision) and IS 4139:1989. Calcium silicate bricks (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 12894:2002 Specification for pulverized fuel ash-lime bricks (first revision). 560 to 640 mm (600 ± 40 mm) (For 30 mm high bricks) 5. Physical Characteristics. 5.1 Compressive Strength— Shall be as per 3. The compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average compressive strength of corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent. 5.2 Drying Strinkage — Shall not exceed 0.15 percent. 5.3 Efflorescence test — Shall have rating not more than ‘moderate’ upto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes. 5.4 Water Absorption— Not more than 20 percent by mass upto class 12.5 and 15 percent by mass for higher classes when immersed in cold water for 24 hours."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12894: 2002",
    "title": "Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128942002_2",
    "text": "IS 12894: 2002 Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks [General]\n0.15 percent. 5.3 Efflorescence test — Shall have rating not more than ‘moderate’ upto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes. 5.4 Water Absorption— Not more than 20 percent by mass upto class 12.5 and 15 percent by mass for higher classes when immersed in cold water for 24 hours. 2.1 SECTION 3 STONES CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1127: 1970",
    "title": "Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11271970_1",
    "text": "IS 1127: 1970 Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work [Scope]\nRecommendations for the dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones used for various types of stone masonry. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Dimesion – See Table 1. (based on thickness of mortar joints 3 mm for ashlar masonry, 6 mm for block in course and 10 mm for square rubble). TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES Sl.No. Type of Masonry Length Breath Height mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Stones for ashlar 597 297 297 697 347 347 797 397 397 i) Stones for block in course 394 194 194 494 244 244 iii) Stones for square rubble 90 90 90 140 90,140 90,140 190 90,140,190 90,140,190 240 90,140,190 90,140,190 290 90,140,190,240 90,140,190,240 390 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 440 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 490 90,140,190,240,290 90,140,190,240,290 590 90,1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1127: 1970",
    "title": "Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS11271970_2",
    "text": "IS 1127: 1970 Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work [Workmanship]\nStratified rocks shall be so quarried and dressed that the stones when set in building, are laid along the plane of stratification. Note — For details on dressing of stones, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS1127:1970 Specification for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1128: 1974",
    "title": "Limestone (Slab And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS11281974_1",
    "text": "IS 1128: 1974 Limestone (Slab And Tiles) [General]\nIS 1128: 1974 Limestone (Slab And Tiles) (First Revision) TABLE 1 STANDARD SIZES OF LIMESTONE SLABS AND TILES Length Breadth Thickness (1) (2) (3) 15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm 15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm 15 to 95 mm in stages of 10mm 60 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm 30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm - do- 100 to 150 cm in stages of 10 cm 30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm 25 to 95 mm in stages of 10 mm Sl.No. Characteristics Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption 0.15 percent by weight ii) Transverse strength 70 kgf/cm2 iii) Durability Shall not develop signs of spalling, disintegration of cracks. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones.Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination for water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination of durability of natural building stones (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1130: 1969",
    "title": "Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11301969_1",
    "text": "IS 1130: 1969 Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles) [Scope]\nRequirements for sizes, physical properties, quality and workmanship of marble (block, slabs and tiles) 2. Classification (a) white, and (b) coloured\n[General Requirements] The marble, as far as possible, shall be free from foreign inclusions and prominent cracks. 4. Sizes 4.1 Blocks and slabs, shall be supplied in following sizes: Length Width Thickness Blocks 30 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 30 to 100 mm Slabs 70 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm 20 to 150 mm Note — All the sizes given are in stages of 10.cm or mm 4.2 Tiles shall be supplied in following sizes : 60cm × 60 cm; 50cm × 50 cm; 40cm × 40 cm; 30cm × 30 cm; 20cm × 20 cm; 10cm × 10 cm; with thickness 18 to 24 mm in the same piece."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1130: 1969",
    "title": "Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS11301969_2",
    "text": "IS 1130: 1969 Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles) [Tolerances]\nWith thickness 18 to 24mm in the same piece. 5.1 Blocks — + 2 percent for all dimensions. 5.2 Slabs — + 2 percent for length and width ± 3 percent for thickness 5.3 Tiles — + 4 percent for length and width and for thickness see 4.2. 6. Physical Properties See Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MARBLE Sl. Characteristic Requirement No. (1) (2) (3) i) Moisture absorption Max 0.4% after 24 hours immersion by weight in cold water. ii) Hardness Min 3 iii) Specific gravity Min 2.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1130: 1969",
    "title": "Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS11301969_3",
    "text": "IS 1130: 1969 Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles) [Workmanship]\nEdges of the slabs and tiles shall be true. Finishes may be one of the following: a) Sand and/or abrasive finish, b) Hone finish, or c) Polished finish. Note — A short note on grouping of marble in the two categories mentioned above in 2 is given in Appendix A of the standard. Note — For method of tests, refer to IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision), and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 1130:1969. Specifications for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles. 3.2 Specific Gravity — Shall not be less than 2.6. 3.3 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 0.5 percent. 4."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3316: 1974",
    "title": "Structural Granite",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS33161974_1",
    "text": "IS 3316: 1974 Structural Granite [Scope]\nRequirements for dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of rectangular blocks made from laterite stone, used in the construction of walls and partitions.\n[General Requirements] Shall be exposed for three months before using but not to rains. Shall be without any soft veins, cracks, cavities, flaws and similar imperfections.\n[Dimensions] Length Breadth Thickness mm mm mm 390 190 190 490 190 190 590 290 290 3.1 Tolerance — ± 5 mm on all dimensions."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3316: 1974",
    "title": "Structural Granite",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Physical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS33161974_2",
    "text": "IS 3316: 1974 Structural Granite [Physical Properties]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES SI. Characteristic Requirement No. (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption Not more than 12 percent by mass ii) Specific gravity Not less than 2.5 iii) Compressive strength Not Less than (for saturated dry samples) 3.5N/mm2\n[Workmanship] Blocks shall be of uniform shape with straight edges at right angles and edges be rough and chisel dressed."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3620: 1979",
    "title": "Laterite Stone Block For Masonry",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS36201979_1",
    "text": "IS 3620: 1979 Laterite Stone Block For Masonry [General]\nIS 3620: 1979 Laterite Stone Block For Masonry (First Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 1) : 1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones : Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3620:1979 Specifications for laterite stone block for mansonry (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3622: 1977",
    "title": "Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS36221977_1",
    "text": "IS 3622: 1977 Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles) [Scope]\nRequirements for dimensions and physical properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in flooring, roofing and face work. 2. General Requirements 2.1 The stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks and flaws and shall have a uniform texture and colour. 2.2 The deviation of surface from straightness shall not exceed 5 mm for slabs and 1 mm for tiles. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Rough Cut — Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough cut edges shall be of sizes as specified below: Length Breadth Thickness 15 to 360 cm 15 to 90 cm 15 to 100 mm in stages of in stages of in stages of 5 cm 5 cm 5 mm (First Revision) Note — The sizes in between (of length and breadth) shall be reckoned as next lower size. This aspect will also cover tolerance in length and breadth. 3.1.1 Tolerances — The tolerance for thicknes"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3622: 1977",
    "title": "Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Physical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS36221977_2",
    "text": "IS 3622: 1977 Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles) [Physical Properties]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SLATE TILES SLNo.. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption a) Maximum average — 2 percent by mass. b) Variation should not exceed 20 percent bet ween individual sample. ii) Modulus of rupture 60 N/mm2 (dry), Min 40 N/mm2 (wet), Min iii) Depth of softening 0.05 mm, Max iv) Permeability No water shall ooze from the bottom. v) Sulphuric acid immersion (see Note) Shall show no sign of delamination along the edge or swelling, softening flaking of the surface and shall not exhibit gaseous evolution during immersion. vi) Wetting and drying Shall show no sign of delamination or splitting along the edge nor flaking of the surface. Note — This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles be subjec"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3622: 1977",
    "title": "Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS36221977_3",
    "text": "IS 3622: 1977 Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles) [Workmanship]\nUnless otherwise specified the slates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular shape with reasonably full corners and the edges shall Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the Standard and IS 4122:1967 Method of test for surface softening of natural building stones. For detailed information, refer to IS 6250:1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6250: 1981",
    "title": "Roofing Slate Tiles",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS62501981_1",
    "text": "IS 6250: 1981 Roofing Slate Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements of dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of slate tiles used for sloped roof covering. Requirements in regard to method of laying and fixing of slate tiles for roofing covered in IS 5119 (Part 1):1968*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6250: 1981",
    "title": "Roofing Slate Tiles",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS62501981_2",
    "text": "IS 6250: 1981 Roofing Slate Tiles [General Requirements]\nSlate shall be free from veins, cracks, or other similar source of weakness. shall be of uniform colour and texture and shall not contain white patches and deleterious minerals. Slate shall be of reasonably straight cleavage and the grains shall be longitudinal. *Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings, Part 1 Slating. be true. The exposed surface shall be finished as specified and in accordance with an approved sample."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6579: 1981",
    "title": "Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS65791981_1",
    "text": "IS 6579: 1981 Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam [Scope]\nRequirement for dimensions, physical properties, and workmanship of lintels made out of natural stone.\n[General Requirements] The stone for lintels shall be reasonably fine grained, hard and shall have a uniform texture and colour. They shall be free from weathering and decay. The stone shall be without any cracks, vents, fissures, clayholes or other similar source of weakness. The lintel shall be so cut that when set in the building, the stone is laid on its natural bed or with the bed in the same direction as it was when the test for transverse strength was carried out."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6579: 1981",
    "title": "Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Physical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS65791981_2",
    "text": "IS 6579: 1981 Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam [Physical Properties]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE STONE USED FOR LINTELS Sl.No Characteristics Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Specific gravity 2.6 Min ii) Water absorption, percent 1.0 Max iii) Transverse strength, N/mm2 11.0 Min iv) Durability Shall not develop spalling or cracks 4. Dimensions and Tolerance 4.1 Stone Lintels—Shall be of rectangular cross- section. The width shall be equal to the thickness of the wall and the depth shall not be less than 100 mm. The length shall be limited to a maximum clear span of 2.65 m. A tolerance of ±1.5 mm shall be allowed on all dimensions of 1.2 m. or less and ± 3 mm on all dimension more than 1.2 m. 4.2 Throating — A 16mm × 8 mm throating shall be provided to the soffit of the external lintel. 4.3 Lintel Bearing — Stone lintels shall be well bonded in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6579: 1981",
    "title": "Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS65791981_3",
    "text": "IS 6579: 1981 Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam [Workmanship]\nThe edges of the stone lintels shall be dressed as per IS 1129:1972*. The exposed surface of the lintel shall be finished as specified. Note — For design details of stone lintels, 5 of the standard may be refered to. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1972 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones :Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination of durability of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 9394:1979 Specification for stone lintels."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9394: 1979",
    "title": "Stone Lintels",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS93941979_1",
    "text": "IS 9394: 1979 Stone Lintels [Scope]\nCovers physical properties and finish requirements of polished granite used for various purposes.\n[General Requirements] Granites should be free from all imperfections and injurious minerals that may interfere with the appearances, strength, structural integrity and its amenability to take good polish. Hair line cracks/joints, flowers, moles, knots, white and dark lines due to segregation of light coloured minerals in multi-coloured granites and ferro-magnesium minerals in light coloured granites are considered to be the imperfections. Granities should be free from deletereous minerals such as pyrite, marcasite and minerals such as biotite, chlorite, ilmenite, etc, which interfere with the coulur and appearance on weathering and also affect polishing characteristics."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9394: 1979",
    "title": "Stone Lintels",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS93941979_2",
    "text": "IS 9394: 1979 Stone Lintels [Dimensions]\nThe slabs shall be rectangular or square and of specified dimensions. The tolerance on length and breadth shall be ± 2 mm and on thickness ± 1 mm. The bottom face may be rough but the top surface shall be fine polished and joint faces shall be dressed with the top surface without hollowness and spalling off."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9394: 1979",
    "title": "Stone Lintels",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS93941979_3",
    "text": "IS 9394: 1979 Stone Lintels [Finish]\nThe surface of the polished granite shall be mirror finish without any hairline crack. The polish on the surface shall be checked with glassometer instrument and shall not be less than 95 percent. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GRANITE Characteristic Requirements Pink Granite Multi-coloured and grey Granites Moisture content (percent) 0.15, Max 0.15, Max Dry density (M/v) 2.58 to 2.63 2.60 to 2.68 Specific gravity (Min) 2.75 2.75 Water absorption 0.50 Max 0.50, Max Porosity (percent) 1.02 to 2.50 1 to 2 Comptessive strength (kg/cm2) 1 000-1 500 1 300-2 200 Tensile strngth (Min) 90 kg/cm 2 90 kg/cm2 Shear strength (kg/cm2) 280-425 300-540 Hardness (mohs) 6 to 7 6 to 7 Hardness (schmidt) No. 80 to 100 85 to 110 Hardness (shore) No. 50 to 60 46 to 61 Ultrasonic pulse velocity 5 000 Min 5 000"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995",
    "title": "Polished Building Stones",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS14223Part11995_1",
    "text": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995 Polished Building Stones [Scope]\nRequirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common burnt clay building bricks used in buildings with compressive strength less than 40 N/mm2 Note— For burnt clay bricks having higher strength, see IS 2180*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995",
    "title": "Polished Building Stones",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS14223Part11995_2",
    "text": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995 Polished Building Stones [Classification]\nClass Average Compressive Strength Designation not Less Than N/mm2 35 35.0 30 30.0 25 25.0 20 20.0 17.5 17.5 15 15.0 12.5 12.5 10 10.0 7.5 7.5 5 5.0 3.5 3.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995",
    "title": "Polished Building Stones",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS14223Part11995_3",
    "text": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995 Polished Building Stones [General Quality]\nShall be hand or machinemoulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or 70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides. Bricks of 40mm hieght as well as those made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour. *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995",
    "title": "Polished Building Stones",
    "category": "Stones",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS14223Part11995_4",
    "text": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995 Polished Building Stones [Tolerances]\nDimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks Modular size Non-Modular size mm mm a) Length 3 800 ± 80 4 600 ± 80 b) Width 1 800 ± 40 2 200 ± 40 c) Height 1 800 ± 40 1 400 ± 40 (For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks) 800 ± 40 600 ± 40 (For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks) 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — Minimum average strength shall be as given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent by weight upto class 12.5 and 15 percent for higher classes. 6.3 Efforescence— Shall not be more than ‘moderate’ upto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevent parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay buildings bricks (third revision). For detailed information,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1077: 1992",
    "title": "Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10771992_1",
    "text": "IS 1077: 1992 Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks [Scope]\nRequirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical proterties of heavy duty burnt clay building bricks.\n[Classification] Shall be classified on the basis of average compressive strength as given below: Class Average Compressive Designation Strength Not Less than Less than N/mm2 N/mm2 40 40.0 45 45 45.0 —"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1077: 1992",
    "title": "Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS10771992_2",
    "text": "IS 1077: 1992 Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks [General Quality]\nShall be manufactured either by pressing or extrusion. When broken, the fractured surface of the brick shall show a uniformly dense structure free from large voids, laminations and lime particles. Two bricks when struck together shall emit a clear metallic ring. The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour. Note — Methods for tests, refer to the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2180:1988 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2180: 1988",
    "title": "Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS21801988_1",
    "text": "IS 2180: 1988 Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks [Tolerances]\nDimensions Tolerance on Individual Bricks mm mm 190 ±4 90,40 ±2 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — As given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — The average water absorption by mass shall not be more than 10 percent after 24 hours immesion in water absorption by mass shall not exceed 15 percent. Note — If specified by purchaser a 5 hour boiling test may be done and water absorption by mass shall not exceed 15 percent. 6.3 Effloresence — Rating shall be “Nil” 6.4 Bulk Density — Not less than 2.5 g/cm3\n[Scope] Covers the dimensions, quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt clay bricks for use in walls and partitions.\n[General Quality] Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. shall have rectangular face with sharp straight edge at right angle and uniform colour and texture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2180: 1988",
    "title": "Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS21801988_2",
    "text": "IS 2180: 1988 Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks [Dimensions]\nThe standard size of shall be as follows— Modular 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm Non-modular 230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 4. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances on Individual mm mm 70, 90 + 4 110,190 + 7 230 + 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2180: 1988",
    "title": "Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Perforations",
    "chunk_id": "IS21801988_3",
    "text": "IS 2180: 1988 Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks [Perforations]\nThe area of perforation shall be between 30 percent and 45 percent of the total area of the face. In the case of recrangular perforations, the larger dimension shall be parallel to the longer side of the brick and shorter side shall be less than 20 mm. It shall be less than 25 mm diameter in case of circular perforations. area of each perforation shall not exceed 500 mm2. thickness of any shell shall not be less than 15 mm and that of any web not less than 10 mm. 6. Physical Requirement 6.1 Compressive Strength — Shall have a minimum average compressive strength of 7 N/mm2 on net area. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours in cold water. 6.3 Efflorescence — Rating not more than “slight” 6.4 Warpage — Average shall not exceed 3 perce"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2222: 1991",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS22221991_1",
    "text": "IS 2222: 1991 Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks [Scope]\nSpecifies the dimensions, quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in buildings and other structures.\n[General Quality] shall be of uniform colour, free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime and of even texture. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight right angled edges."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2222: 1991",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS22221991_2",
    "text": "IS 2222: 1991 Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks [Dimensions]\nThe standard sizes shall be 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm. 4. Tolerances Dimension Tolerances mm mm 190 + 3 90,40 + 2 Note — For the methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks. (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2691:1988 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2691: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Facing Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26911988_1",
    "text": "IS 2691: 1988 Burnt Clay Facing Bricks [Scope]\nCovers dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay paving bricks for use in construction of pavements.\n[General] shall be mechanically shaped and not hand moulded. when broken, bricks show a uniformly dense structure free from lime, large voids and marked laminations. Shall have smooth rectangular faces and sharp corners. 3. Dimensions 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm Note — The bricks shall not be provided with frogs. 4. Tolerances Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Bricks mm mm 190 ± 80 90,40 ± 40 5. Physical properties 5.1 Average compressive strength shall be not less than 40 N/mm2 5.2 Average water absorption shall be not more than 5 percent 5.3 Efforescence shall be ‘nil’. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3583:1988 Specification for clay pavin"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3583: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Paving Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS35831988_1",
    "text": "IS 3583: 1988 Burnt Clay Paving Bricks [Scope]\nCovers the dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow bricks made from burnt clay and having perforations through and at right angle to the bearing surface. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Bricks shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and shall have sharp straight edges at right angle; and a fine compact and uniform texture. 2.2 The bricks shall be free from excessive winding or bowing. Winding or bowing in length dimension concaity or converxity in external face of brikcs, and angles between sides and joining edges shall be not more than 5 mm. Note— For testing details refer to 3.2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3583: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Paving Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Types A) Type A",
    "chunk_id": "IS35831988_2",
    "text": "IS 3583: 1988 Burnt Clay Paving Bricks [Types A) Type A]\nBricks with both faces keyed for plastering or rendering. b) Type B — Bricks with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plastering or rendering on either side, and c) Type C — Bricks with one face keyed and one face smooth. 4. Dimensions Length Width Height mm mm mm 190 190 90 290 90 90 290 140 90 Thickness of any shell and web shall not be less than 11 mm and 8 mm respectively. 5. Tolerances Dimensions Overall Measurements of 20 Bricks (mm) Min Max 290 5680 5920 190 3720 3880 140 2740 2860 90 1760 1840 5.1 In addition, the size of any individual brick in the sample shall not exceed the corresponding modular size as given below : Dimension of Bricks Modular Size mm mm 290 300 190 200 140 150 90 100\n[Crushing Strength] Minimum average value shall be 3.5 N/mm2. The strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the average value by more than 20 percent.\n[Water Absorption] Shall not be more than 20 percent by mass."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3583: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Paving Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Efflorescence",
    "chunk_id": "IS35831988_3",
    "text": "IS 3583: 1988 Burnt Clay Paving Bricks [Efflorescence]\nShall have a rating not more than ‘slight’. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, and relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3952:1988 Specification for burnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3952: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks For Walls And Partitions",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS39521988_1",
    "text": "IS 3952: 1988 Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks For Walls And Partitions [General]\nIS 3952: 1988 Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks For Walls And Partitions (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4885: 1988",
    "title": "Sewer Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS48851988_1",
    "text": "IS 4885: 1988 Sewer Bricks [Scope]\nSpecifies dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay sewer bricks used for sewers of sanitary (domestic) sewage. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Dimensions 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm, and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm Note — For oval and other special shaped sewers, bricks may be tapered suitably. 2.2. Tolerance Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Bricks mm mm 190 ± 80 90, 40 ± 40 2.3. Tolerance for warpage of face or edges from plane surface and straight line shall be 2.5 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4885: 1988",
    "title": "Sewer Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS48851988_2",
    "text": "IS 4885: 1988 Sewer Bricks [General Quality]\nShall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of lime. shall have plane rectangular faces with sharp edges and corners. Kiln marks not exceeding 3 mm in depth shall be permitted on the opposite edges. When broken, sewer bricks shall show a fracture of uniformly fine grained and compact structure throughout. 4. Physical properties 4.1 Average compressive strength shall not be less than 17.5 N/mm2 and for individual brick it shall not be less than 16 N/mm2. 4.2 Average water absorption shall not exceed 10 percent and for individual it shall not exceed 12 percent. 4.3 Efflorecence shall not be more than “slight”"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5779: 1986",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Soling Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS57791986_1",
    "text": "IS 5779: 1986 Burnt Clay Soling Bricks [Scope]\nDimensions for special shapes of clay brick used in building and other civil engineering"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6165: 1992",
    "title": "Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS61651992_1",
    "text": "IS 6165: 1992 Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay [Scope]\nRequirement for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common clay building bricks used in buildings. Note — Burnt clay flyash bricks having compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 (approximately 300 kgf/cm2) are covered in this standard and for higher strength, see IS 2180 :1988* and IS 1077 : 1992** 2. Classification Class Average Compressive Strength Designation not less than N/mm2 30 30.0 25 25 20 20.0 17.5 17.5 15 15.0 12.5 12.5 10 10.0 7.5 7.5 5 5.0 3.5 3.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6165: 1992",
    "title": "Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS61651992_2",
    "text": "IS 6165: 1992 Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay [General Quality]\nShall be hand or machine moulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws as black coring, nodules of stone and/or free lime and organic matter. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or 70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides; and bricks of 40 or 30 mm height as well as those made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in shape and colour. 4. Dimensions Modular : 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm Non-Modular : 230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 230 mm × 110 mm × 30 mm Modular and non-modular for proper bond arrangment 70 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 1/3 length brick 230 mm × 50 mm × 70 mm 1/2 length brick"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6165: 1992",
    "title": "Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS61651992_3",
    "text": "IS 6165: 1992 Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay [Tolerances]\nDimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks. Modular size Non-modular size a) Length 3 800 ± 80 4 600 ± 80 b) Width 1 800 ± 40 2 200 ± 40 c) Height 1 800 ± 40 1 400 ± 40 (For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks) 800 ± 40 600 ± 40 (For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks) 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — Average strength shall be as given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent 6.3 Efflorescence — Not more than “moderate” for class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for brighter classes. For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 13757:1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash building bricks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13757: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS137571993_1",
    "text": "IS 13757: 1993 Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks [Scope]\nCovers dimensions, quality and strength requirement of burnt clay jallies having perforations of ornamental designs. Note — Burnt clay jallies are suitable for providing a screen on Verandah, Construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc. 2. Dimensions and tolerances 2.1. Dimensions (in mm) 190 × 190 × 100 190 × 190 × 50 190 × 140 × 100 190 × 140 × 50 140 × 140 × 100 140 × 140 × 50 140 × 90 × 50 90 × 90 × 50 2.2 Tolerances Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Jallies 190 mm 140 mm ± 80 mm 100 mm 90 mm ± 40 mm 50 mm 2.3. The thickness of any shell shall not be less than 10 mm and that of the web not less than 8 mm. The total void area of the jallies shall not eceed 40 percent. 2.4. Keys of bonding with mortar shall be 10 mm wide and 3 mm deep."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13757: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS137571993_2",
    "text": "IS 13757: 1993 Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks [General Quality]\nJallies shall be free from web or shell cracks, flaws or nodules of free lime. Shall be uniform in colour and texture. In the case of wire-cut jallies, the cut faces shall be at right angles and parallel to each other and the edges of shell and webs shall be trimmed to a smooth finish. The jallies shall not exhibit excessive warpage when placed between two parallel straight-edges. The maximum warpage permissible shall be 3 percent in any direction. 4. Physical Requirements 4.1. Average breaking load shall not be less than 12 N per mm width : 4.2. Average water absorption shall not be more than 15 percent 4.3. Efflorescence rating shall be not more than “slight”. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7556:1988 Specific"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7556: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Jallies",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS75561988_1",
    "text": "IS 7556: 1988 Burnt Clay Jallies [Scope]\nCovers the machine-pressed clay interlocking roofing tiles of the ‘Mangalore Pattern.’\n[Classification] Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF ROOFING TILES Sl.no. Characteristic Requirement Class AA Class A i) Water absorption percent, Max 18 20 ii) Breaking load, kN, Min a)Average 1.0 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.80(for 410 × 235 mm) 1.10 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.90 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm) b) Individual 0.90 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.68 (for 410 × 235 mm) 1.00 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.78 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm) 3. General Quality. 3.1. Shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and laminations. The roofing tile shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a characteristic ringing soud and when broken the fractu\n[Shape] Placed on either face on a plane surface, gap at corners shall not exceed 6 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7556: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Jallies",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Lugs",
    "chunk_id": "IS75561988_2",
    "text": "IS 7556: 1988 Burnt Clay Jallies [Lugs]\nAt least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs of thickness not less than 15 mm at bottom and 10 mm at top shall be provided. Projection shall be 7 to 12 mm for batten lugs and not less than 10 mm for eave lugs."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7556: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Jallies",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Tie",
    "chunk_id": "IS75561988_3",
    "text": "IS 7556: 1988 Burnt Clay Jallies [Tie]\ndown hole — 1.6 to 2 mm diameter. 4. Dimensions Overall Length Overall Width mm mm 410 235 420 250 425 260 Minimum overlap shall be 60 mm length wise and 25 mm widthwise Note— For typical details of Manglaore tile see Fig 1of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "For Measurement Of Variations In Length/Width Of Tiles The Difference Between",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_1",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [For Measurement Of Variations In Length/Width Of Tiles The Difference Between]\na) The overall length/width of three tiles and b) The length/width of a tile is calculated and this value shall be within the limits mentioned below— For Tile Value for Value for Sizes Length Width mm mm mm 410 × 235 630 to 650 410 to 430 420 × 250 670 to 690 420 to 440 425 × 260 690 to 710 430 to 450 Note — For tolerances, refer 6.2 of the standard.\n[Weight] Average of 6 tiles shall not be less than 2 kg and not more than 3 kg 6. Strength Requirement\n[Permeability] Water shall not drip at the bottom when tested as per Annex B of the stanard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Breaking Load Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_2",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [Breaking Load Test]\nShall conform to Table 1 when tested as per annex C of the standard. Note — For the methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 654:1992 Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_3",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [Scope]\nCovers machine pressed clay ridge and ceiling tiles. It does not cover tiles of irregular sizes, shapes and colour and those made to meet special requirements. Sl No. Characteristic Requirement for Class AA Class A (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption percent (for ridge 18 20 and ceilling tiles), Max ii) Breaking strength (for ridge 0.015 0 (1.5 kg) 0.011 0 (1.10 kg) tiles only) kN, Min 0.012 5 (1.25 kg) 0.009 5 (0.95 kg)\n[Classification] Class AA and class A with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF RIDGE AND CEILLING TILES"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Shape",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_4",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [Shape]\nCommon patterns of ridge and ceiling tiles are shown in Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard. Gap at corners of celing tiles, when placed on a plane surface in normal position, shall be not more than 6 mm. Ceiling tiles are of two types, namely double lug and single lug."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_5",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [General Quality]\nshall be uniform in shape and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and laminations. shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a ringing sound and when broken, the fracture shall be clen, dense and sharp at the edges. 5. Dimensions of Ridge Tiles a) Length— 375, 400 and 435 mm. The tolerance shall be ± 5 mm. b) Width and Height — Shall have a base of 265 mm and height of 100 mm with a tolerance of ± 5 mm. c) Thickness — shall be not less than 10 mm throughtout excluding ornamentation, etc. d) Rib — The rib at the rear end of the tile shall be of such a height and shape as to prevent effectively the tendency of the front face of the tile interlocked to slide over it."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Dimension Of Ceiling Tiles",
    "chunk_id": "IS6541992_6",
    "text": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern [Dimension Of Ceiling Tiles]\nThe length of the double lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be such that when a tile is placed between two battens the space between the face of the batten and that of end of tile shall be between 3 and 6 mm. The length of the single lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be 30 mm less than the face to face spacing of battens. The length of the lug shall not be more than 20 mm. Thickness of the tile or lug shall be not less than 10 mm. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1464:1992 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1464: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS14641992_1",
    "text": "IS 1464: 1992 Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles [General Quality]\nshall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks, flaws, laminations and imperfections. Faces of tiles shall be plain, grooved fluted or figured as specified and the edges shall be square. 4. Dimensions i) 150 × 150 × 15 mm ii) 150 × 150 × 20 mm iii) 200 × 200 × 20 mm iv) 200 × 200 × 25 mm v) 250 × 250 × 30 mm Depth of the grooves or frogging on the underside shall not exceed 3 mm.\n[Tolerances A) Length And Breadth] Average + 5 mm, individual + 2 mm. b) Thickness — Average + 2 mm, individual + 1 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1464: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Warpage",
    "chunk_id": "IS14641992_2",
    "text": "IS 1464: 1992 Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles [Warpage]\nShall not exceed 2 percent along edges and 1.5 percent along diagonals. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For details information, refer to IS 1478:1992 Specifications for clay flooring tiles (second revision).\n[Scope] Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength for clay flooring tiles."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1464: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS14641992_3",
    "text": "IS 1464: 1992 Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles [Classification]\nClass 1, class 2, and class 3 with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF FLOORING TILES SI.No. Characteristic Requirements for Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 i) Water absorption 10 19 24 percent, Max ii) Flexural strength, kg/cm width, Min a) Average 6 3.5 2.5 b) Individual 5 3.0 2.0 iii) Impact maximum height in mm of drop of steel ball: a) 15 mm thick 25 20 15 b) 20 mm thick 60 50 40 c) 25 mm thick 75 65 50 d) 30 mm thick 80 70 60"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1478: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Flooring Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS14781992_1",
    "text": "IS 1478: 1992 Clay Flooring Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements for machine-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.\n[General Quality] Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and particles of stones. 3. Dimensions and Toleranes 3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.2 Width — 200 to 100 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.3 Thickness —20 and 15 mm. 3.4 Tolerances — ± 2 percent on all dimensions in case of machine pressed tiles and ± 3 percent in case of machine exturded tiles.\n[Warpage] Shall not exceed 1 percent in any direction.\n[Water Absorption] Average of 6 tiles shall not exceed 15 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1478: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Flooring Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Flexural Strength",
    "chunk_id": "IS14781992_2",
    "text": "IS 1478: 1992 Clay Flooring Tiles [Flexural Strength]\nShall not be less than 2N/mm2. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 1):1993 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 1 Machine-made (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2690 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay–Flat Terracing Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2690Part11993_1",
    "text": "IS 2690 (Part 1): 1993 Burnt Clay–Flat Terracing Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements for hand-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.\n[General Quality] Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and particles of stones. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.2 Width — 200 to 75 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.3 Thickness— 25 to 50 mm in stages of 5 mm. 3.4 Tolerances — Shall be ± 3 percent for all dimensions.\n[Warpage] Shall not exceed 2 percent of the dimension in any direction.\n[Water Absorption] Shall not exceed 20 percent by weight.\n[Flexural Strength] Shall not be less that 1.5 N/mm2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2690Part21992_1",
    "text": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992 Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles [Scope]\nCovers machine-pressed, wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles used for lining irrigation canals and for drainage channels (other than sewage works).\n[General] Shall be uniform in size, shape and free from irregulatities, such as cracks and laminations. Shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime and other foreign materials. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances. 3.1 Dimensions — 300 mm × 150 mm × 50 mm. 3.2 Tolerances — ± 10 mm in length, ± 5 mm in width, and ± 1.5 mm in thickness."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS2690Part21992_2",
    "text": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992 Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles [Classification]\nClass 105 and Class 75. 5. Physical Properties See Table 1. Note — For methods of test, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information refer to IS 3367:1993 Specification for burnt clay tiles for use in lining irigation and drainage works (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3367: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS33671993_1",
    "text": "IS 3367: 1993 Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works [Scope]\nRequirements for dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles having perforations parallel to their length and intended for use in floors and roofs.\n[General Requirements] Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour and shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and straight right angled edges. 2.1 Winding or Bowing — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2.2 Concavity or Convexity — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either diagonal. 2.3 Angles between Sides and Joining Edges — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run. Note — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1 to 3 on the standard. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimensions Length Width Height mm mm mm 340, 390, 440, 490 350, 300 80, 90 540, 590, 640, 690 250, 200 100, 110 740 3.2 Tolerances — ± 5 percent 3.3 Thickness — Shall be not less than 11 mm for shell and not less than 8 mm for web.\n[Breaking Strength] Shall be not less than 10 kgf/cm2 length."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3367: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Water Absorption",
    "chunk_id": "IS33671993_2",
    "text": "IS 3367: 1993 Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works [Water Absorption]\nShall not more than 20 percent. Note 1 — Typical shapes of hollow clay filter tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 1):1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs:Part 1 Filler type (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part11975_1",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [Scope]\nRequirements for quality, dimensions, bulk density, water absorption and strength requirements of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for floor/roof.\n[General Requirements] Shall be free from cracks, flaws or inclusion of any deleterious materials. 2.1 Shall have at least one plane of symmetry in cross section. 2.2 Shall have serrations (not deeper than 3 mm and not wider than 6 mm) on all faces designed to be concreted or mortared or plastered. 2.3 Winding or Bowing — Shall not be more than5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2.4 Concavity or Convexity — Shall not be more than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point in either diagonal. 2.5 Angle between Sides and Joining Edges— Shall not be more than 5 mm per 30 cm run Note — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1. to 3. of the standard. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimensions Length— 290 and 390 mm Width — 90 to 190 mm in stages of 50 mm Height — 125 to 200 mm in stages of 25 mm 3.2 Thickness —Shall be\n[Bulk Density] Shall be not below 0.9g/cm3 and not more than 1.2g/cm3.\n[Compressive Strength] Average not less than 200 kgf/cm2. Individual not less than 150 kgf/cm2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Water Absorption",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part11975_2",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [Water Absorption]\nShall not exceed 10 percent by weight. Note 1—Typical shapes of structure clay units for flooring and roofing are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard Note 2 — For methods of tests refer to 5.1.1 Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 2) : 1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part 2 Structural type (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Specifications",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part21975_1",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [Specifications]\nCovers the specifications of hand made half round and flat country tiles. Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Class AA Class A Class AA Class A (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water absorption percent, Max 19 24 19 24 ii) Breaking load, kN, Min a) Average 0.40 (40 kg) 0.30 (30 kg) 0.35 (35 kg) 0.25 (25 kg) b) Individual 0.35 (35 kg) 0.25 (25 kg) 0.30 (30 kg) 0.20 (20 kg) TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF TILES Dimensions mm Overall length Overall width Overall height Wide end Narrow end Wide end Narrow end Half Round Tiles Size I 250 105 85 50 40 Size II 250 120 95 60 45 Flat Tile Size I 200 175 145 20 20 SIze II 250 200 160 25 25 TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF CLAY COUNTRY ROOFING TILES\n[Classification] Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Shape, Dimension And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part21975_2",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [Shape, Dimension And Tolerances]\nFor dimensions see Table 2 When the half round or flat country tile is placed on a plane surface, the gap at the corners shall be not more than 8 mm. The cross-section of the half round and flat country tiles shall be such as to give the tile structural rigidity. The overall minimum overlap in both the type of tiles shall be 60 mm length length wise. There is no overlap width wise in these tiles. The tolerances in length and width shall be below ± 5 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part21975_3",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [General Quality]\nShall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bend, cracks and lamination. Shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. Class AA tile shall be of uniform colour."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "Weight",
    "chunk_id": "IS3951Part21975_4",
    "text": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs [Weight]\nAverage of 6 tiles when dried to constant weight at 110°ºC. Half round tile 5 to 8 N, Max Flat tile 7 to 10 N, Max Note 1 — For typical details of country roofing tiles see Fig. 1 of the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13317: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round And Flat Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS133171992_1",
    "text": "IS 13317: 1992 Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round And Flat Tiles [General]\nIS 13317: 1992 Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round And Flat Tiles For detailed information, refer to IS 13317:1992 Specification for clay roofing country tiles, half round and flat tiles. Half Round Tiles Flat Tiles 2.1 SECTION 5 GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS CONTENTS Title Page IS 2095 Gypsum plaster boards (Part I) : 1996 Plain gypsum plaster boards (second revision) 5.3 (Part 3) : 1996 Reinforced gypsum plaster boards (second revision) 5.5 IS 2547 Gypsum building plaster (Part I) : 1976 Excluding premixed light weight plaster (first revision) 5.7 (Part 2) : 1976 Premixed light weight plaster (first revision) 5.9"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part11996_1",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Scope]\nRequirements for gypsum plaster board intended to be used as a vertical or horizontal lining in building. It includes boards manufactured to receive either direct surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Types",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part11996_2",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Types]\nGypsum plaster boards are classified according to their use— a) Gypsum wallboards b) Gypsum Board with reduced water Absorption Rate, c) Gypsum wallboard with improved core Cohesion at high temperatures d) Gypsum plaster baseboard, and e) Gypsum plaster baseboard with improved core cohesion at high temperatures"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part11996_3",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Materials]\nGypsum plaster shall conform to IS 2547 (Part 1) : 1976*. By product gypsum conforming to IS 12679:1987+ shall be used for the preparation of plaster. PART 1 PLAIN GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part11996_4",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [General]\nGypsum plaster boards consist of a gypsum plaster core with or without fibre encased in and firmly bonded to strong durable paper liners to form rectangular boards. Core shall be dried across full width. The face and back papers shall be securely bonded to the core. The paper surfaces may vary according to the use of the particular type of board, and the core may contain additive to impart additional properties. The longitudinal edges are paper covered and profiled to suit the application. The paper covered edges of gypsum wall boards are square, tapered, bevelled or rounded. The paper covered edges of gypsum baseboard are square or rounded. The ends of gypsum plaster board are square-cut. 5. Requirements 5.1Dimensions — See Table 1. *Gypsum plaster boards : Part 1Plain gypsum plaster boar"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part31996_1",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Scope]\nCovers the method of manufacture, tests and sampling of fibrous gypsum plaster boards and glass fibre reinforced gypsum (GRG) boards for use as a linning material for ceiling, dry surfacing material for walls, door panels or for partitions.\n[Materials] See 2 of the standard"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Method Of Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part31996_2",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Method Of Manufacture]\nSee 5 of the standard. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Shape — The boards shall be square or rectangular in shape. 4.2 Dimensions 4.3 Mass of Plaster — See Table 1. 4.4 Density 4.5 Tolerances a) Length + 0 mm - 6 b) Width + 0 mm - 5 c) Thickness ± 1.0 mm 5. Finish The surface of the boards shall be true and free from imperfection that would render the board unfit for use. The edge shall be straight and the corners shall be square. 6. Tests 6.1 Visual Inspection — All boards shall be sound, free from cracks, broken-edges and such other imperfections that would render them unfit for use. 6.2 Thickness — To be measured as per IS 2542. 6.3 Transverse/Flexural Strength 6.3.1 Deflection shall not exceed 19 mm under a load of 340 N. 6.3.2 Flexural strength — See Table 2. 6.3.3 Impact strength —"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS2095Part31996_3",
    "text": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards [Chemical Requirements]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Requirement Sl. Particulars Plaster of Paris Retarded Anhydrous Keene’sPlaster No. Hemihydrate Gypsum Plaster Gypsum Plaster (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) SO3, percent by mass, Min 35 35 40 47 (ii) CaO, percent by mass, Min 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content iii) Soluble magnesium 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 salts, expressed as percentage of MgO, Max iv) Soluble sodium salts, 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 expresed as percentage of Na2 O, Max v) Loss on ignition, Not greater Not greater 3.0 Max 2.0 Max percent by mass than 9 than 9 and less and less than 4 than 4 vi) Free lime, Min – 3* — — percent * Applicable to metal lathing plaster"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976",
    "title": "Gypsum Building Plasters",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2547Part11976_1",
    "text": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976 Gypsum Building Plasters [Scope]\nCovers the classification and chemical and physical requirements for gypsum building plasters which possess a definite set due to hydration of calcium sulphate, anhydrous or hemihydrate, to form gypsum and are used in the manufacture of gypsum building products. Premixed lightweight building plasters are not included. 2. Classification a) Plaster of paris, b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster PART 1 EXCLUDING PREMIXED LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS (First Revision) TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT Requirements S.LNo. Particulars Plaster of Paris Anhydrous Keene’s Plaster Gypsum Plaster Type A (short) Type B (long time setting time setting (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Setting time – – – – minutes: a)Plaster sand 45-120 120-900 – – mixture b)Neat 20-40 60-180 20-360 20-360 plaster ii) Transverse 5 4* – –"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976",
    "title": "Gypsum Building Plasters",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Physical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS2547Part11976_2",
    "text": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976 Gypsum Building Plasters [Physical Requirements]\nSee Table 2. Purity — No material shall be added to gypsum plasters except those which are necessary to control the setting, such as sodium citrate, break drown products of keratin, potassium sulphate, sodium sulplate alum and zine sulphate; or working characteristics such as alkyl - Aryl sulphonate or to impart anti-corrosion such as nitrates and nitrites of alkali metals or fungicidal properties. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 1288:1982 Methods of test for mineral gypsum (second revision) and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products. For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 1):1976 Specification for gypsum building plaster: Part 1 Excluding premixed light weight plasters ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976",
    "title": "Gypsum Building Plaster",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2547Part21976_1",
    "text": "IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Gypsum Building Plaster [General]\nIS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Gypsum Building Plaster PART 2 PREMIXED LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS (First Revision) Note—For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, Concrete and Products. For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Specification for gypsum building plasters: Part 2 Premixed lightweight plasters ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2849: 1983",
    "title": "Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types)",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS28491983_1",
    "text": "IS 2849: 1983 Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types) [Scope]\nRequirements for gypsum partition blocks for use in non-load bearing construction in the interior of buildings and for the protection of columns, elevator shafts, etc, against fire.\n[Types And Shapes] Block may be solid type or hollow type and shall be truly rectangular in shape with straight and square edges and true surfaces. 3. Requirements 3.1 Dimensions 3.2 Tolerances — Length ± 3.0 mm Height and Breadth ± 1.5 mm 3.3 Scoring — When the surfaces of the block are scored, the scoring shall not reduce materially the thickness of the shell. Surfaces of the block shall be such that they afford a suitable bond with plaster.\n[Compressive Strength] Shall be not less than 2.0 N/mm2 based on gross area."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2849: 1983",
    "title": "Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types)",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS28491983_2",
    "text": "IS 2849: 1983 Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types) [General]\nCombustibility — When tested in accordance with 6.2.1 of the standard no block shall: a) Cause the temperature readings of the furnace thermocouple to rise by more than 500C above the initial furnace temperature, b) Cause the temperature readings of the specimen thermocouple to rise by more than 500C above the initial furnace temperature, or c) Flame for more than 10 seconds."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2849: 1983",
    "title": "Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types)",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Visual Appearance",
    "chunk_id": "IS28491983_3",
    "text": "IS 2849: 1983 Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types) [Visual Appearance]\nShall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges and other imperfections. Note — For the Methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2)-1981 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, concrete and products- Part 2 gypsum products (first revision) and IS 3808:1979 Method of test for non-combustibility of building materials (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2849:1983 Specification for non- load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and hollow types) (first revision). Length Height Breadth Hollow Blocks Side and Edge thickness, Min Circular Holes Elliptical or Rectangular Holes L H B t t 700 Max in 700 Max in 60 – – multiples multiples 75 15 20 of 100 of 100 80 – – 100 20 20 125 25 30 150 15 20 Note—\n[All Dimensions In Millimeters] 2. Dimensions other than length, height and breadth for guidance only"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8272: 1984",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster For Use In The",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS82721984_1",
    "text": "IS 8272: 1984 Gypsum Plaster For Use In The [Scope]\nDetails of the zonal distribution of common commercial timbers of India, classified according to their various uses, and information on the availability of these timbers and on some of their important properties."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8272: 1984",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster For Use In The",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Uses",
    "chunk_id": "IS82721984_2",
    "text": "IS 8272: 1984 Gypsum Plaster For Use In The [Uses]\nThe uses are classified under the following categories: a) Constructional purposes, including building construction, houseposts, beams, rafters, cart building, bridges, piles, poles and railway sleepers; b) Furniture and cabinet making; c) Light packing cases; d) Heavy packing cases (for machinery and similar stores); e) Agricultural implements and tool handles; f) Turnery atricles and toys; and g) Veneers and plywood"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8272: 1984",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster For Use In The",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "section": "Zones",
    "chunk_id": "IS82721984_3",
    "text": "IS 8272: 1984 Gypsum Plaster For Use In The [Zones]\nThe territories comprising India, and Bhutan have been divided into five zones as indicated on the Map (See page 85 of the standard), which comprise roughly the following areas: I North Zone Jammu and Kashmir, Punjab, Himachal Pradesh, Delhi, Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan II East Zone A s s a m , M a n i p u r , T r i p u r a , WestBengal, Bihar, Orissa, Sikkim, Bhutan, Andamans, Arunachal and Meghalaya and Nagaland III Centre Zone Madhya Pradesh, Vidharbha areas of Maharashtra State and the North East part of Andhra Pradesh (Godavari delta area) IV West Zone Maharashtra State (except Vidharbha areas), Gujarat and North West part of Karnataka V South Zone Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh (except the Godavari delta area), Kerala and Karnataka (Except North West part)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 399: 1963",
    "title": "Classification Of Commercial Timbers And Their Zonal Distribution",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS3991963_1",
    "text": "IS 399: 1963 Classification Of Commercial Timbers And Their Zonal Distribution [Classification]\nTables I, II, III, IV, and V of the standard list respectively important timbers commercially available in the five zones described under 3 and classified according to their uses given under 2. Against each species of timber, the availability in that zone, average weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability, refractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient are given 4.1 Availability— The availability of timbers is categorized under three classes indicated below: X— Most common, 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) and more per year Y— Common, 355 m3 (250 tonnes) to 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) per year Z— Less common, below 355 m3 (250 tonnes) per year 4.2 Weight — The figure for average weight and range of weight per cubic metre (or ft3) at 12"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS128961990_1",
    "text": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And [Scope]\nCovers the general classification of Indian timber species suitable for door and window shutters and frames. It also lays down the general requirements of quality, seasoning, moisture content and preservative treatmesnt for timber. This standard does not, however, cover the species suitable for flush doors."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS128961990_2",
    "text": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And [General Requirements]\nThe timber of all groups shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed faces, and dead and loose knots. Live knots up to 25 mm diameter, not more than 3 per metre; live knots over 25 mm and up to 40 mm diameter not more than 2 per metre shall be permissible, provided they are evenly distributed and badly checked. Surface cracks not exceeding 2 mm in depth in timber intended for shutters and not exceeding 3 mm in depth in timber intended for frames shall be permitted. 3. Timber / Spices 3.1 Shutters—Timbers species for the manufacture of door an window shutters shall have adequate strength, weight, retention of shape, ease of working, ability to season well, finish smooth and shall be sufficiently durable and/or treatable. In addition,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Seasoning And Moisture Content",
    "chunk_id": "IS128961990_3",
    "text": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And [Seasoning And Moisture Content]\na) Class A—Highly refractory, b) Class B— Moderately refractory, and c) Class C—Non-refractory 4.1 Highly Refractory— Timber species are slow and difficult to season, free from surface and end cracking."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Moderately Refractory Timber Species",
    "chunk_id": "IS128961990_4",
    "text": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And [Moderately Refractory Timber Species]\nMay be seasoned free from surface and end cracking within reasonably short periods, given a little protection againt rapid drying conditions. 4.3 Non-refractory Timber Species— May be rapidly seasoned free from surface and end cracking even in the open air and sun. If not rapidly dried, they develop blue stain and mould on the surface.Timber shall be seasoned to moisure content conforming to IS 287:1993* by a suitable process specified in IS 1141:1993+ and moisture content shall be determined as per IS 11215:1991‡."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Durability And Preservative Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS128961990_5",
    "text": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And [Durability And Preservative Treatment]\nTimbers are classified for durability accoring to the average life of the test specimens as follows: Class Average Life (Months) I 120 and over II 60 and over but less than 120 * Permissible moisture content of timber used for different purposes (third revision). + Seasoning of timber (second revision). ‡ Methods for determination of moisture content of timber products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 12896 : 1990 Specification for Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 190: 1991",
    "title": "Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1901991_1",
    "text": "IS 190: 1991 Coniferous Sawn Timber [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantling) 2. Species Trade Botanical Name Abbreviated Name symbol Chir Pinus roxburghi CHR Cypress Cupressus torulosa CYP Deodar Cedrus deodara DEO Fir Abies spp (Other than Abies densa) FIR Kail Pinus Wallichaiana KAL Khasi pine Pinus insularis KPI Red fir Abies densa RFI Spruce Picea simthiana SPR 3. Dimensions: Length — 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m, 3.0 m, and 3.5 m Cross Section 200 mm × 100 mm, 200 mm × 125 mm 200 mm × 150 mm, 200 mm × 200 mm 250 mm × 125 mm, 250 mm × 150 mm 300 mm × 150 mm 4. Measurement 4.1 Length — The length shall be measured from end to end in metres correct to 0.01m. 4.2 Width and Thickness — The width and thickness shall be measured at the narrowest place correct to 10 mm. 4.3 Volume — The volume shall"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 190: 1991",
    "title": "Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS1901991_2",
    "text": "IS 190: 1991 Coniferous Sawn Timber [Requirements]\nShall be air seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 15 mm from the surface, excluding a l e n g t h of 300 mm from each end."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 190: 1991",
    "title": "Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Grading",
    "chunk_id": "IS1901991_3",
    "text": "IS 190: 1991 Coniferous Sawn Timber [Grading]\nThe coniferous sawn timber shall be of three grades, that is Special Grade, Grade1 and Grade 2, depending upon prohibited and permissible defects. 7. Prohibited and Permissable Defects 7.1 Prohibited Defects— The sawn timber of all the three grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp, any kind of decay or live insect attack. Special grade sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup shakes, borer holes (dead infestation) sapstain (bluestain) and knots also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also. 7.2 Permissible Defects—The defects to the extent specified in Table 1 of the standard ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 190: 1991",
    "title": "Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "End Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS1901991_4",
    "text": "IS 190: 1991 Coniferous Sawn Timber [End Coating]\nTo prevent and to minimize end cracking, splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of at least 25 mm more than the length of longest split, shall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993* *Seasoning timber — Code of Practice. Note — For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2): 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber: (Part 2) Converted timber (first revision). For detail information refer to IS 190:1991 Specifications for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantilings) (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 876: 1992",
    "title": "Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS8761992_1",
    "text": "IS 876: 1992 Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines [General Requirements]\nAfter the poles are felled, their butts shall be sawn square. The bark shall be completely removed and all the branch shall be dressed down flush with the stem. The tops shall be levelled in the shape of an inverted ‘V’ for length equal to top diameter or 100 mm which ever is less.\n[Preliminary Treatment] Shall be given as soon as possible, a prophylactic treatment to prevent insect attack and fungal damage."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 876: 1992",
    "title": "Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Preservative Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS8761992_2",
    "text": "IS 876: 1992 Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines [Preservative Treatment]\nShall be treated with a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable species as possible. 7. Defects 7.1 Defects Totally Prohibited — Dcay, Hallows in the top, cross breaks and large holes. 7.2 Defects permitted to a limited extent-splits, checks, hollow heart, rot, ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, scars, shape and strightness and short crook (see 10.3 of the standard). Table 2 Classes of Wood Pole Full length Ground Line Minimum Circumference at Ground Line Position Indicated in Col 2 of Pole Position from Butt End Class 1, Group Class 2, Group Class 3, Group Class 4, Group Class 5, Group Class 6, Group Class 7, Group A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C m m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm (1) (\n[Scope] Covers the requirements of non- coniferous sawn timber in the form of baulks and scantling."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 876: 1992",
    "title": "Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Species Of Timber",
    "chunk_id": "IS8761992_3",
    "text": "IS 876: 1992 Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines [Species Of Timber]\nRefer to Annex A and Annex B of the standard for the species of timber covered. 3. Dimensions and Measurements 3.1 The sawn timber is generally available in the following lengths and cross sections: Length— 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m, 3.0 m, and 3.5 m Cross Section– 200 mm × 100 mm, 200 mm × 125 mm 200 mm ×150 mm, 200 mm × 200 mm 250 mm × 125 mm, 250 mm × 150 mm, and 300 mm × 150 mm. 3.2 Length — The length shall be measured from end to end in metres correct to 0.01 m. Any end portion of sawn timber that has become rounded or damaged shall be excluded from length measurement. Width and Thickness — The width and thickness shall be measured at the narrowest place in millimetre correct to 10 mm. Volume — The volume shall be computed in cubic metres correct to three places of decimal by the prod"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1326: 1992",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS13261992_1",
    "text": "IS 1326: 1992 Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber [Treatment]\nProphylactic treatment is optional.\n[End Coating] To prevent and to minimize end cracking splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of 150 mm, or at least 25 mm more than the length of larger split (whichever is more) shall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. * Code of practice for seasoning of timber (second revision). Note — For method of measurement of defects in timber refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Method of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber. Part 2 Converted timber ( first revision). For detailed informtion, refer to IS 1326 : 1992 Non-coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (Second Revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1326: 1992",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13261992_2",
    "text": "IS 1326: 1992 Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber [Scope]\nCovers specification of converted timber normally stocked in timber depot both for structural and non-structural purposes. It refers to cut sizes of timber as stocked and does not take into considertion any reductiion or allowance relating to subsequent use. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Cut sizes of timber shall be grouped in terms of width and thickness or sectional area into four groups, namely, (a) batten, (b) plank, (c) scantling, and (d) baulk. The nominal sizes of width and thickness of cut sizes of timber shall be as given in Table 1. The sizes of cut timber specified in Table 1 are at a moisture content of 20 percent. A method for adjustment of dimensions at different moisture contents is given in Appendix A of the standard. 2.2 Length — The preferred length of cut sizes of tim"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1326: 1992",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Grading Of Cut Sizes Of Timber",
    "chunk_id": "IS13261992_3",
    "text": "IS 1326: 1992 Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber [Grading Of Cut Sizes Of Timber]\nCut size of timber shall be graded after seasoning at a moisture content not less than 12 percent. 3.1 Grading for Structural Use — Based on permissible and prohibited defects the cut sizes of timber for structural use a) Grade1 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more than 12.5 percent. b) Grade 2 — The estimated effect in reductiion of the basic strength of timber is not more than 25 percent. c) Grade 3 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more than 37.5 percent. SUMMRY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1331: 1971",
    "title": "Cut Sizes Of Timbers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13311971_1",
    "text": "IS 1331: 1971 Cut Sizes Of Timbers [Scope]\nCovers the species, grades, requirements and treatments for timber used in the construction of cooling towers.\n[Species Of Timber] The species of timber suitable for cooling towers shall be as given in Table 1. Table 1 Timbers for Cooling Towers Botanical Name Trade Name 1. Abies pindrow Fir 2. Cedrus deodara Deodar 3. picea smithiana Spruce 4. Pinus kesiya Khasi pine 5. pinus roxburghii Chir 6. Pinus wallichiana Kail 7. Tectona grandis Teak 8. Pseudotsuga taxifolia Douglas fir 9. Pinus radiata Radiata pine 3. Grading of Timber 3.1 Colling tower timbers shall be of three grades, namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II depending on the defects permitted. 3.2 Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) — Timber with loose grain, reaction wood, heartwood, rot warp, worm holes which are likely to affect strength, pitch pockets, centreheart (pith), shakes twisted grain and wane. 3.3 Permissible Defects — The defects to the exte"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2372: 2004",
    "title": "Timber For Cooling Towers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23722004_1",
    "text": "IS 2372: 2004 Timber For Cooling Towers [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of BALLIES used for geneal purposes.\n[Species Of Timber] The species of timber suitable for BALLIES are given in Appendix A of the standard.\n[Manufacture] Bark shall be completely removed and all the branches and excrescences shall be dressed down flush with the surface. The top and bottom ends shall be cut square."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2372: 2004",
    "title": "Timber For Cooling Towers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS23722004_2",
    "text": "IS 2372: 2004 Timber For Cooling Towers [Dimensions]\nBALLIES shall conform to the dimensions given below; unless otherwise ordered. Class of Diameter at Diameter at Length Ballies the Top the Butt End cm cm m 1 Over 8.5 upto 12.5 Over 15 upto 20 3 to 9 2 Over 6.5 upto 8.5 Over 11.5 upto 15 3 to 9 3 Over 5 upto 6.5 Over 7.5 upto 11.5 3 to 9"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2372: 2004",
    "title": "Timber For Cooling Towers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS23722004_3",
    "text": "IS 2372: 2004 Timber For Cooling Towers [Requirements]\nBALLIES shall be air-dried to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 12 mm from the surface when measured at one third length of the Ballies from its butt end. Shall be reasonably straight, and shall be free from cuts across the grain, live insect attack, any kind of decay (rot), pronounced spiral or twisted grain, hollow heart and dead knots exceeding 5 cm in diameter. 6. Permissible Defects 6.1 Surface Cracks"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3337: 1978",
    "title": "Ballies For General Purposes",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Preservation",
    "chunk_id": "IS33371978_1",
    "text": "IS 3337: 1978 Ballies For General Purposes [Preservation]\nWhenever required shall be preserved by dipping, brushing or spraying with any one of the following composiions: a) Creosote — fuel oil mixture 50:50, b) 6 percent solution of copper-arsenic composition, c) 6 percent solution of acid-cupric-chromate composition, d) 8 percent solution of copper- chrome-boric composition, and e) 1.0 percent solution of sodium pentachlorophenate."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3629: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Timber In Buildings",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS36291986_1",
    "text": "IS 3629: 1986 Structural Timber In Buildings [Scope]\nCovers the various requirements of structural timber for use in buildings. It includes classification and grouping of different species of timber, their suitability for permanent and temporary structures, factors affecting strength, tolerances on dimensions, influence of defects and allowance for such defects in timber. 2. Material 2.1 The species of timber recommended for various constructionl purposes are given in Table 1. 2.2 Based on permissible defects, cut sizes of structural timbers are classified in three grades, namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II, materials maby be structural rejects, not suitable for structural members. 2.3 Moisture content of timber for various situations of buildings in different climate zones of the country shall conform to the requirement of IS 287: 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3629: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Timber In Buildings",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Permissible Stresses",
    "chunk_id": "IS36291986_2",
    "text": "IS 3629: 1986 Structural Timber In Buildings [Permissible Stresses]\nSee Table 2 4.1 TABLE 2 FACTORS OF SAFETY TO BE APPLIED TO BASIC STRESS TO OBTAIN SAFE PERMISSIBLE STRESS. Sl No. Types of Stress Grade 1 (Standard Location) Inside Outside Wet (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Extreme fibre in beams for broard leaved species. Min 5 6 7.5 ii) Extreme fibre stress for beams in conifers 6 7 8.5 iii) Shear along grain 7 7 7 iv) Horizontal shear in beams 10 10 10 v) Compressive stress 4 4.5 5.5 parallel to grain vi) Compressive stress perpendicular to grain 1.75 2.25 2.75 4.2 For other grades permissible stresses given in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 883: 1994",
    "title": "Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8831994_1",
    "text": "IS 883: 1994 Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber [General]\nIS 883: 1994 Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber 1.16 b) For Grade II timber 0.84 5. Dimensions and Tolerances 5.1 Sawn Timber — The cut sizes of timber for Structural purposes and the tolerance shall be those as given in IS 4891: 1988 ‡ except where net dimensions are specifically mentioned Permissible tolerances in measurements shall be as follows — a) For measurements up to and including – 0 mm 100 mm in width or thickness + 3 mm b) For measurements above 100mm – 3 mm in width or thickness + 6 mm c) For measurements of all sizes in – 0 mm length + 10 mm 6. Defects 6.1 Prohibited Defects a) Timber with loose grain, splits, compression wood in coniferous structural timber, heart wood rot and sap rot and crookedness. b) Worm holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets. 6.2 Permissible Defects a) Wanes are permitted provided they are not combined with knots and the reduction in strength on account of the wanes is not more than the reduction with themaximum allowable knots."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 883: 1994",
    "title": "Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8831994_2",
    "text": "IS 883: 1994 Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber [General]\nand sap rot and crookedness. b) Worm holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets. 6.2 Permissible Defects a) Wanes are permitted provided they are not combined with knots and the reduction in strength on account of the wanes is not more than the reduction with themaximum allowable knots. Wanes may also be permitted provided there is no objection to its use as bearing area nailing edge and affects general appearances b) Worm holes other than those due to powder post beetles located and grounded to reduce the strength of timber shall be evaluated in the same way as knots; and c) All other defect which donot affect any of the mechanical properties of timber shall be permitted. + Design of structural timber in building (fourth revision). # Preferred cut sizes of structural timber (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3731: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Squares",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS37311985_1",
    "text": "IS 3731: 1985 Teak Squares [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of various grades of teak squares based on defects. 2. Grades Grade 1 — No single square shall contain more than 2.0 units of defects and the average for the whole consignment shall be not more than 0.75 units of defects. Grade 2 — No sigle square shall contain more than 4.0 units of defects and the average for the whole consignment shall not be more than 1.5 units of defects. Grade 3 — No single square shall contain more than 6.0 units of defects and the averge for the whole consignment shall not be more than 3 units of defects. For squares more than 5m in length the above limits shall be derived by the following equation— Permissible number of defects in squares more than 5m in length — L/5 × Permissible defect value according to grade. where L — length of squares"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3731: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Squares",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS37311985_2",
    "text": "IS 3731: 1985 Teak Squares [General Requirements]\nTeak squares shall be either sawn or hewn to a resonable evenness. All pieces shall have fairly straight and parallel sides with the planes of end-sections fairly perpendicular to the planes of the side surfaces.All squares shall be of good sound wood and free from defects other than those permitted Plugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form.All pieces shall be air-seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent up to a depth of 15 mm from any portion of the surface excluding 30 cm from each end."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3731: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Squares",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS37311985_3",
    "text": "IS 3731: 1985 Teak Squares [Dimensions]\nAll cross-sectional measurements shall be made at mid length of the teak square correct to 0.5 cm Length shall be measured from end to end correct to the nearest lower 0.05m at the corners of the ends, the shortest length parallel to longitudinal edges shall be taken as the length of the teak square.The volume of any piece shall be computed in m3 to the nearest third decimal place. 5. Permissible Defects and Their Evaluation 5.1 Curvature 5.2 Taper 5.3 Wane 5.4 Knots 5.5 Holes 5.6 Shakes 5.7 Checks and Splits 5.8 Other Defects—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 6 of the standard Note —For methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber Part 2 Converted timber (first revision). For"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4891: 1988",
    "title": "Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS48911988_1",
    "text": "IS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber [General]\nIS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber (First revision) TABLE 3 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER FOR PARTITION FRAMING AND COVERING Thickness in mm Width in mm 10 40 50 60 80 —- — — — — 15 40 50 60 80 100 — — — — 20 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 — 25 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240 40 40 — 60 80 100 120 160 200 240 50 — 50 — 80 100 120 160 200 240 60 — — 60 80 100 120 160 200 240 80 — — — 80 100 120 160 200 240 Note — Preferred length of timber : 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4891: 1988",
    "title": "Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS48911988_2",
    "text": "IS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber [General]\n100 120 160 200 240 50 — 50 — 80 100 120 160 200 240 60 — — 60 80 100 120 160 200 240 80 — — — 80 100 120 160 200 240 Note — Preferred length of timber : 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m. TABLE 4 PREFERRED CUT SIZE OF TIMBER FOR DOOR/ WINDOW VENTILATOR COMPONENTS Thickness Width in mm in mm 15 — — — — — — — — — — 160 180 200 220 240 20 — — — — 50 60 80 100 — — — — — — — 25 25 — — — 50 60 80 100 — — — — — — — 30 — 30 — — 50 60 80 100 — — — — — — — 35 — — 35 — 50 60 80 100 — — 160 — — — 240 40 — — — 40 50 60 80 100 — — 160 — — — 240 50 — — — — — — 80 100 120 — — — — — — 60 — — — — — — — 100 120 140 — — — — — Note— Preferred timber lengths"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4891: 1988",
    "title": "Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS48911988_3",
    "text": "IS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber [General]\n— — 40 50 60 80 100 — — 160 — — — 240 50 — — — — — — 80 100 120 — — — — — — 60 — — — — — — — 100 120 140 — — — — — Note— Preferred timber lengths (wall opening module of 100 mm) for frames— 590, 790, 890, 990, 1 190, 1 290,1 990 and 2090 mm. Preferred timber length for shutters— 460, 500, 700, 800, 900, 1 100, 1 200, 1 905 and 2 005 mm For detailed information, refer to IS 4891 : 1988 Specification for preferred cut sizes of structural timber (first revision). Tolerances in door/window/ventilatorscomponents shall be permissible as under — a) Frames ±3 mm b) Shutters 1) Doors i) Width ±3 mm ii) Thickness ±1 mm No tolerance for panels 2) Window/ventilators, etc Width 40 mm and less ±1 mm Above 40 mm ±3 mm Cut sizes of timber as stocked and specified in tables are normall at moisture content of 20 percent. But at the time of fabrication and erection, the timber members are required to possess 12 to 20 percent of moisture content of the oven-dry weight."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4891: 1988",
    "title": "Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS48911988_4",
    "text": "IS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber [General]\nmm Above 40 mm ±3 mm Cut sizes of timber as stocked and specified in tables are normall at moisture content of 20 percent. But at the time of fabrication and erection, the timber members are required to possess 12 to 20 percent of moisture content of the oven-dry weight. Thus a lateral shrinkage effect in the stocked sizes of timber will take place and, therefore, the ultimate shrinkage to which the timber will be subjected to has got to be compensated at the time of converting the timber at 20 percent moisture content for stocking purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4895: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS48951985_1",
    "text": "IS 4895: 1985 Teak Logs [Scope]\nCovers the requiremens of various grades of teak logs intended for conversion purposes. It does not cover the requirements of teak logs for veneering purposes.\n[General Requirements] The logs shall be free from hollow heart, shatter, anykind of decay (rot) and live insect attack. All buttresses, remnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two ends should be clean-cut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible. Plugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form. 3. Permissible Defects 3.1 Curvature 3.2 Shakes 3.3 Flutes 3.4 Knots 3.5 Check and Splits 3.6 Twist 3.7 Holes—For extent of defects permitted refer to 4 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4895: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS48951985_2",
    "text": "IS 4895: 1985 Teak Logs [Grades]\nThe logs of 2.5 m length shall be graded as below depending on cumulative value of the permissible defects: Grade 1 — No single log shall contain more than 2.5 units of defects. Grade 2 — No single log shall contain more than 5 units of defects Grade 3 — No single log shall contain more than 7.5 units of defects For logs more than 2.5 m in length, the limits given above shall be derived by the following equation; Permissible number of defects in logs more than 2.5 m in length = Where L — length of log in m, and P — permissible defect value for 2.5 m in length."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4895: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS48951985_3",
    "text": "IS 4895: 1985 Teak Logs [Dimensions]\nThe minimum dimensions of the logs shall be the following Length — 2.5 m Mid – girth — 1 m Note —For method of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 1) : 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluvation of defects in timber Part 1 Logs (first revision). For detailed Information, refer to IS 4895 : 1985.Specification for Teak logs (first revision) 2.5× L P"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5246: 2000",
    "title": "Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS52462000_1",
    "text": "IS 5246: 2000 Coniferous Logs [Scope]\nCovers the specification of jointed wood poles made of both broad leaved, and coniferous species of timber, grown in India, and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5246: 2000",
    "title": "Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Species Of Timber",
    "chunk_id": "IS52462000_2",
    "text": "IS 5246: 2000 Coniferous Logs [Species Of Timber]\nThree groups, based on the modulus of rupture of small clear specimens tested in the green condition, that is more than 25 percent moisture content.(see Appendix A of the standard). Group A Very strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 850 kg/cm2 and above, represented by sal. Group B Strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 630 to 850 kg/cm2, represented by teak. Group C Moderately strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending 450 to 630 kg/cm2, represented by chir. 3. Classification and Dimensions 3.1 Classification Class 1 Ultimate breaking load not less than 1 350 kg. Class 2 Ultimate breaking load not less than 1 100 kg and not more than 1 350 kg. Class 3 Ultimate breaking load not less than 850 kg and not more than 1100 kg. Class 4 Ultimate bre"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Preliminary Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS60561970_1",
    "text": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines [Preliminary Treatment]\nA prophylactic treatmen shall be given.\n[Preservative Treatment] Shall be treated with a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable species as possible."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS60561970_2",
    "text": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines [General Requirements]\nAs far as possible the upper and lower sectiions shall be of the same species or at least species of the same group. Jointing sections belonging to species of different groups is not recommened. The sections being jointed shall have approximately same girth at the joint. 8. Defects 8.1 Defects Totally Prohibited a) Sap rot, b) Hollows in the top, c) Cross breaks, d) Large holes, and e) Short crooks 8.2 Deffects Permitted to a Limited Extent—Dead streaks, Decay, Spilt or checksHallow heart , Rot,Ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, sears, Shape and straightness . For extent of defects permitted refer to 10 of the standard. 9. Types of Jointed Poles a) Wire bound lap jointed poles b) Z-Type lap jointed poles c) V-Type lap jointed poles d) Angle iron butt jointed poles e) Half — Sleeve Ha\n[Scope] Covers the requirements of three grades of non-coniferous logs, for conversion into sawn timber."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS60561970_3",
    "text": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines [Grades]\nGrade I — No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 3 units of defects Grade II— No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 6 units of defects. Grade III— No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 9 units of defects. For logs other than 2.5 m in length, the limits given in above shall be derived by the following equation— Permissible number of defect in logs other than 2.5 m in length = L/2.5×P Where L = length of log in m, and P = permissible defect value for 2.5 m length\n[Species Of Timber] The logs shall be of the species of timber given in Appendix A of the standard.\n[Dimensions] The minimum dimensions of logs shall be the following : Length 2.5 m Mean mid-girth 1 m"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS60561970_4",
    "text": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines [Requirements]\nThe logs shall not be knobbly. They shall be free from brashness, hollow centre, shatter, spiral grain, any kind of decay (rot), live insect attack and any other defects which may reduce the uefulness of logs for conversion into sawn timber.All buttresses, remnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two ends should be clean cut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible. 6. Permissible Defects 6.1 Bend 6.2 Taper 6.3 End Splits (Including Heart or Star Shakes) 6.4 Surface Cracks 6.5 Cup shakes (Including Ring Shakes) 6.6 Knots 6.7 Wounds 6.8 Flutes 6.9 Buttress 6.10 Twist 6.11 Hollow heart—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 8 othe standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "End Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS60561970_5",
    "text": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines [End Coating]\nShall be adequately coated up to a distance of at least 15 cm with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. *Code of Practice for preservation of timber (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7308: 1999",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS73081999_1",
    "text": "IS 7308: 1999 Non-Coniferous Logs [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of wooden sleepers and wooden specials used for broad gauge ,metre and narrow gauge railway tracks.\n[Species Of Timber] See Appendix A of the standard for recommended species and their composite sleeper Index (CSI). 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Track Sleepers — See Table 1 3.2 Special Sleepers for Bridges and Crossings — See Table 2\n[Preservative Treatment] Sleepers containing sap wood and those without an asterisk mark in Appendix A shall be given preservative treatment."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7308: 1999",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Grading",
    "chunk_id": "IS73081999_2",
    "text": "IS 7308: 1999 Non-Coniferous Logs [Grading]\nClass I and Class II, depending on permissible defects. A sleeper shall be classified as of the Class II even if it is of that class in terms of only one defect and is of the Class I in terms of all other defects. Likewise, a sleeper shall be rejected if the permissible range in any one of the defects is exceeded. Special sleepers shall be of Class I only.\n[Permissible Defects] Refer Table 4 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10394: 1982",
    "title": "Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS103941982_1",
    "text": "IS 10394: 1982 Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track [Scope]\nCovers physical and chemical requirements of paving bitumens for use in roadways, runways and allied constructions. 2. Types and Gades a) Type 1— Paving bitumen from non-waxy crude; and b) Type 2 —Paving bitumen from waxy crude. 2.1 Paving Bitumen Type 1— Shall be classified into six grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 1 with letter ‘S’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limits of the penetration specified for the grade. 2.2 Paving bitumen Type 2— Shall be classified into four grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 2 with letter ‘A’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limit of the penetation specified for the grade."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10394: 1982",
    "title": "Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track",
    "category": "Timber",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS103941982_2",
    "text": "IS 10394: 1982 Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track [Requirements]\nThe material shall be homogeneous and shall not foam when heated to 175°C. For a given lot under each type the softening point for samples taken from different parts of the lot shall not vary by more than 8°C from maximum to minimum and shall not fall outside the range of the test range of the test limits specified in Tables 1 and 2. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN TYPE 1 Sl Characteristics Requirements for Grades S35 S45 S55 S65 S90 S200 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Specific gravity at 27 °C, Min 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 ii) Water, percent by mass, Max 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 iii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C, Min 175 175 175 175 175 175 iv) Softening point °C 50 to 65 45 to 60 45 to 60 40 to 55 35 to 50 30 to 45 v) Penetration at 25oC 100g, 5Second.,1/10 mm 30 t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 73: 1992",
    "title": "Paving Bitumen",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS731992_1",
    "text": "IS 73: 1992 Paving Bitumen [General]\nIS 73: 1992 Paving Bitumen (Second Revision) Penetrationat C g s Penetrationat C g s x 4 200 60 25 100 5 100 0 0 , , , , * Penetration ratio= Note—For methods of tests, refer to. IS 1202 : 1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity (first revision). IS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1448 (Part 69): 1969",
    "title": "Methods Of Tests For Petroleum And Its Products Part 69: Flash And Fire Point By Cleveland (Open) Cup",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1448Part691969_1",
    "text": "IS 1448 (Part 69): 1969 Methods Of Tests For Petroleum And Its Products Part 69: Flash And Fire Point By Cleveland (Open) Cup [General]\nIS 1448 (Part 69): 1969 Methods Of Tests For Petroleum And Its Products Part 69: Flash And Fire Point By Cleveland (Open) Cup IS 9381:1979 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of FRAASS breaking point of bitumen."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10512: 1983",
    "title": "Methods For Determination Of Wax Content In Bitumen.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS105121983_1",
    "text": "IS 10512: 1983 Methods For Determination Of Wax Content In Bitumen. [Scope]\nCovers the requirements of crude coal tar used for general purposes, such as treatment of wooden poles and sleepers, toilet walls, fishing nets, etc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 212: 1983",
    "title": "Crude Coal Tar For General Use",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2121983_1",
    "text": "IS 212: 1983 Crude Coal Tar For General Use [General]\nIS 212: 1983 Crude Coal Tar For General Use (Second Revision) TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CRUDE COAL TAR Sl. No. Characteristics Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Specific gravity 27°C/27°C 1.09 1.24 ii) Water Content percent/ weight — 4 iii) Viscosity BRTA 4mm at 30°Cs, 30 100 iv) Distillation fractions percent w/w Up to 200°C — 4 200 to 230°C 2 10 230 to 270°C 6 12 270 to 300°C 4 7 300 to 350°C 12 17 v) Mineral matter (Ash) 0 1 vi) Matter insoluble in benzene percent by weight 5 25 Note — For methods of tests refer to IS 1202 : 1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific gravity (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1217: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Mineral Matter (Ash)",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12171978_1",
    "text": "IS 1217: 1978 Determination Of Mineral Matter (Ash) [General]\nIS 1217: 1978 Determination Of Mineral Matter (Ash) For detailed information, refer to IS 212:1983 Specification for crude coal tar for general use (second revision). 2. Composition Shall be obtained as a by product"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 215: 1995",
    "title": "Road Tar",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2151995_1",
    "text": "IS 215: 1995 Road Tar [Scope]\nCovers two types of tar each having five grades of road tars with different viscosity ranges suitable for different types of road construction under the climatic conditions prevalling in various parts of the country. 2. Types and Grades 2.1 Types Type A — for surface dressing and dense tarsurfacings. Type B — for open graded premix carpet with or without seal coat. 2.2 Grades — There shall be five grades of road tar as follows : RT-1— For surface dressing under cold weather conditions and use on hill (Third Revision) roads at high altitudes as well as for priming the base; RT-2 — For surface painting in normal climatic conditions; RT-3 — a) For surface painting and renewal coat; b) For premix chipping carpet (top course and light carpets); RT-4 — For premix tar macadam (base course) and de"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1219: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Naphthalene.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12191978_1",
    "text": "IS 1219: 1978 Determination Of Naphthalene. [Scope]\nRequirements for the range of four grades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistencies with softening points varying from 45 to 92°C intended for the production of waterproofing, protective and binding compounds employed in masonary, steel, timber and concrete structures and also for the preparation of roofing felts. Note — Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as a binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquetters, for damp-proof courses, fllooring mastics and as a base for coal tar paints. This is not suitable for formulation of quick drying black enamels nor for road construction."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1219: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Naphthalene.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS12191978_2",
    "text": "IS 1219: 1978 Determination Of Naphthalene. [Grades]\nShall be classified into the following four grades: a) Soft pitch, b) Soft medium pitch, c) Hard medium pitch, d) Hard pitch. 3. Requirements 3.1 Composition — The material shall be: a) either the residue of the direct distillation of crude tar produced by the high temperature carbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts, or b) obtained by fluxing back such pitch residues with high boiling coal tar distillates to give products of the desired softening point. 3.2 The material shall also comply with the requirements, according to grade, given in Table1. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1202:1978 methods of testing tar bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 216: 1961",
    "title": "Coal Tar Pitch",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2161961_1",
    "text": "IS 216: 1961 Coal Tar Pitch [General]\nIS 216: 1961 Coal Tar Pitch (Revised) TABLE 1 EQUIREMENTS FOR COAL TAR PITCH Sl. Characteristics Requirements for Grades No. Soft Pitch Soft Medium Hard Medium Hard Pitch Pitch Pitch (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.20 to 1.30 1.22 to 1.32 1.22 to 1.32 1.28 to 1.38 ii) Softening point 45 to 55°C 58 to 68°C 70 to 80°C 82 to 92°C iii) Distillate : Percent by weight below 270°C, Max 4 4 3 No Test Percent by weight below 300°C, Max 8 8 4 No Test iv) Matter insoluble in toluene (free carbon), percent by weight, Max 25 28 30 35 v) Ash, percent by weight, Max 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.8"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 454: 1994",
    "title": "Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4541994_1",
    "text": "IS 454: 1994 Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude [Scope]\nCovers the physical and chemical requirements of cutbacks bitumen from waxy crude of indigenous origin. 2. Grades a) Light grade — For use as primer. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CUTBACK BITUMEN FROM WAXY CRUDE Sl.No. Characteristics Requirement for Grades Light Medium Heavy Min Max Min Max Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Kinematic viscosity, 600C cst 70 140 800 1600 3000 6000 ii) Flash point, Pensky Martens closed type,0°C 38 — 55 — 55 — iii) Distillate volume, percent of total distillate up to 3600C a) Up to 190° C 10 — 30 — — — b) Up to 225° C 50 — 30 — — — c) Up to 260° C 70 — 30 — — — d) Up to 315° C 85 — 75 — 50 — iv) Residue from distillation up to 360°C, percent by volume (by difference) 55 — 75 — 80 — v) Tests on residue from distillation upto 360°C a) Viscosity at 60° C, p"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 454: 1994",
    "title": "Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS4541994_2",
    "text": "IS 454: 1994 Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude [Requirements]\nSee Table 1 Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first revision). IS 1206 (Part1):1978 Determination of viscosity Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1203: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12031978_1",
    "text": "IS 1203: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene. [General]\nIS 1203: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 702: 1988",
    "title": "Industrial Bitumen",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7021988_1",
    "text": "IS 702: 1988 Industrial Bitumen [Scope]\nCovers the physical and chemical requirements of industrial bitumen for use in buildings and other indusrtrial purposes.\n[Grades] a) 85/25 b) 85/40 c) 90/15 (Second Revision) d) 115/15 e) 135/10 f) 155/6 Note— The two values given in the grade denotes approximately softnening point and penetration respectively"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 702: 1988",
    "title": "Industrial Bitumen",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS7021988_2",
    "text": "IS 702: 1988 Industrial Bitumen [Requirements]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN Sl. Characteristics Requirements for Grades No. 85/25 85/40 90/15 115/15 135/10 155/6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.00 to 1.05 1.00 to 1.05 1.01 to 1.06 1.02 to 1.07 1.02 to 1.071.02 to 1.07 ii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C 225 225 225 225 225 225 iii) Softening point, °C 80 to 90 80 to 90 85 to 100 110 to 120 130 to 140 150 to 160 iv) Penetration at 25°C, 20 to 30 35 to 45 10 to 20 8 to 20 7 to 12 2 to 10 100g, 5 sec, 1/10mm v) a) Loss on heating, percent by mass, Max 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 b) Penetration of the residue at 25°C, 100g, 5s, percent of original Min 60 60 60 60 60 60 vi) Ductility at 27°C, cm, Min 3 3 2 2 1 0 vii) Matter soluble in trichloro-ethylene, percent by mass, Min 99 9"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3117: 2004",
    "title": "Bitumen Emulsion For Roads And Allied Applications (Anionic Type)",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS31172004_1",
    "text": "IS 3117: 2004 Bitumen Emulsion For Roads And Allied Applications (Anionic Type) [Scope]\nPhysical and chemical requirements of grades of bitumen emulsion (anionic type) for roads and allied applcations. 2. Materials 2.1 Bitumen — The bitumen straight or fluxed, used for the manufacture of the emulsion, shall comply with the following requirements. a) The penetration shall be between 100 and 350; b) Softening point (Ring and Ball) shall not be higher than 48°C; c) Solubility in carbon disulphide shall not be less than 99.0 percent; and d) The loss of weight after heating for five hours at 163° shall not exceed two percent of the original weight. After carrying out this test the penetration of bitumen shall not be less than 60 percent of its original value. 2.1.1 If it is desired to modify the performance of the emulsion during periods of low temperature, fluxing the bitumen wit"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9912: 1981",
    "title": "Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS99121981_1",
    "text": "IS 9912: 1981 Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines [Scope]\nRequirements of hot applied coal tar based coatings and their associated primers used for protecting iron and steel pipes. This standard covers two types of coating materials suitable for extremes of temperature (See Table 1)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9912: 1981",
    "title": "Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "Hot Applied Coating Material",
    "chunk_id": "IS99121981_2",
    "text": "IS 9912: 1981 Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines [Hot Applied Coating Material]\nThe material shall be produced by digestion of bituminous coal or its selected fractions suitable for this purpose together with an approved inert filler (like talc, etc) sized to ensure that not less than 100 percent passes through 45-micron IS Sieve. 3. Primers 3.1 The primers shall be of two types, namely, Type A and Type B. 3.2 Type A primer shall be composed of processed coal tar pitch suitably blended with selected grades of solvents, to a fluid that may be applied cold by brushing, spraying or any other method. The primer shall also comply with the requirement given in Table 2. 3.3 Type B primer shall consist of chlorinated rubber and synthetic plasticiser together with solvents needed to give a consistency suitable for application by brush or spray. Type B primer shall comply with"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1207: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12071978_1",
    "text": "IS 1207: 1978 Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature. [General]\nIS 1207: 1978 Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature. For detailed informatiom refer to IS 9912 : 1981 Specifications for coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting iron or steel pipe lines. TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE A PRIMER TABLE 3 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE B PRIMER Sl Characteristics Requirements No. i) Viscosity at 25°C 20 to 40 Second ii) Flash point 35°C (Min) iii) Volatile matter at 60 to 80 percent 100-110°C by weight iv) Drying time Conditions of Appendix C shall apply 2.1 SECTION 8 FLOOR, WALL, ROOF COVERINGS AND FINISHES CONTENTS Title Page GENERAL"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1207: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12071978_2",
    "text": "IS 1207: 1978 Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature. [General]\nflooring tiles (first revision) 8.4 IS 1542:1992 Sand for plaster (second revision) 8.6 IS 2116:1980 Sand for masonry mortars (first revision) 8.7 IS 4457:1982 Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tile (first revision). 8.8 IS 4832 Chemical resistant mortars : (Part 1) :1969 Silican type. 8.9 (Part 2) :1969 Resin type. 8.10 (Part 3) :1968 Sulphur type 8.11 IS 4860:1968 Acid Resistant bricks 8.12 IS 13753:1993 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption E>10 percent Group (B III) 8.13 IS 13754:1993 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6<E ≤ 10 percent Group (B IIb)8.15 IS 13755:1993 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3<E <6 percent Group (BII a) 8.18 IS 13756:1993 Dust pressed ceramic tiles with Low water absorption of E ≤3 percent Group (B I)8.21 IS 14862 :2000 Fibre cement flat sheets 8.24 IS 14871-2000 Products in fibre reinforced cement– Long corrugated or asymetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding 8.27 BITUNINOUS"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1207: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12071978_3",
    "text": "IS 1207: 1978 Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature. [General]\nand fittings for roofing and cladding 8.27 BITUNINOUS IS 1195:2002 Bitumen mastic for flooring (third revision) 8.30 IS 5317:2002 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads (second revision) 8.32 IS 8374:1977 Bitumen mastic, anti–static and electrically conducting grade 8.33"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3462: 1986",
    "title": "Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34621986_1",
    "text": "IS 3462: 1986 Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring [Scope]\nRequirements for cement concrete flooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and terrazo types. Chequered tiles are not covered. 2. Terminology\n[Plain Cement Tiles] Tiles having a wearing surface wherein no pigments and stone chips are used. 2.2 Plain Coloured Tiles– Tiles having a plain wearing surface wherin pigments are used but no stone chips. 2.3 Terrazo Tiles– Tiles at least 25 percent of whose wearing surface is composed of stone chips in a matrix of ordinary or coloured Portland cement mixed with or without pigments and mechanically ground and filled. 3. Classification a) General Purpose — Used for flooring of normally lightly loaded, such as in office building, schools colleges, hospitals and residential buildings. b) Heavy Duty Floor Tiles— Used for heavy conditions, foot paths, entrances and staircases of public buildings, passages of auditoriums and storage godowns. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Size shall be as follows: Length Breadth Thickness mm mm\n[General Quality] Wearing layer of tiles shall be free from projections, depressions , cracks, holes, cavities and other blemishes. Edges of wearing layer may be rounded."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3462: 1986",
    "title": "Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS34621986_2",
    "text": "IS 3462: 1986 Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring [Finish]\nColour and texture of wearing layer shall be uniform throughout its thickness. No appreciable difference in appearance of tiles from point of view of colour of aggregate, its type and its distribution on surface of wearing layer shall be present.\n[Physical Requirements] All tests shall be carried out not earlier than 28 days from the date of manufacture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1237: 1980",
    "title": "Cement Concrete Flooring Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12371980_1",
    "text": "IS 1237: 1980 Cement Concrete Flooring Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements of naturally occurring sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling plastering, and external plastering using mixes of lime, cement, composite lime-cement, activated lime pozzolana mixture (ALMP) or gypsum with or without admixtures and sand. 2. Quality of sand 2.1 General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain clay, silt and dust more than specified. 2.2 Deleterious Materials 2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as, iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells and organic impurities in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening , the strength, the durability or the appearance"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2250: 1981",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Preparation And Use Of Masonry Mortars.",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS22501981_1",
    "text": "IS 2250: 1981 Code Of Practice For Preparation And Use Of Masonry Mortars. [General]\nIS 2250: 1981 Code Of Practice For Preparation And Use Of Masonry Mortars. For detailed information refer to IS 1542:1992 Specificaion for sand for plaster (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1542: 1992",
    "title": "Sand For Plaster",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS15421992_1",
    "text": "IS 1542: 1992 Sand For Plaster [Scope]\nRequirements of naturally occurring sands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry. 2. Quality of Sand\n[General] The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified. 2.2. Deleterious Material 2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar. 2.2.2 Maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall not exceed the following limits: a) Clay, fine silt and fine dust— 1) In natural sand or Not more than 5 percent by crushed gravel sand mass 2) In crushed stone sand Not more than 5 percent by mas"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4457: 1982",
    "title": "Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous Acid Resisting Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS44571982_1",
    "text": "IS 4457: 1982 Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous Acid Resisting Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting titles. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Sizes — (i) 100 × 100 mm or 98.5 × 98.5 mm (ii) 150 × 150 mm or 148.5 × 148.5 mm and (iii) 200 × 200 mm or 198.5 mm × 198.5 mm 2.2 Thickness — Shall be 25, 20, 12 and 10 mm. 2.3 The depth of the grooves on the under side of the tiles shall not exceed 3 mm. Note — The thickness of the tiles shall be measured after filling the grooves with cement mortar and drying. 2.4 Half tiles for use as full tiles, if manufactured, shall have dimensions which shall be such as to make the half tiles, when jointed together, match with the dimension of a full tile. 2.5 Tolerances — Tolerances on length, width and thickness of the tiles shall be ± 2.5 percent. 3. Requirements TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF CERAMIC UN-"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 1): 1969",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4832Part11969_1",
    "text": "IS 4832 (Part 1): 1969 Chemical Resistant Mortars [Scope]\nRequirements of resin type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance to non-oxidizing mineral acid and poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acid. Fairly resistant to inorganic alkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles. 2. Materials 2.1 Resins — Penolic, furane, epoxy, polyester. 2.2 Fillers— Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall be graded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints. 2.3 Catalyst — May be incorporated in fillers\n[General Requirements] Resin shall have viscosity. Filler material shall have properly graded particles that will permit preparation of a minimum joint thickness of 1.5 mm.\n[Chemical Resistance Requirement] The limits may be settled between the purchaser and supplier.\n[Shelf Life] For phenolic and polyster resins is about 3 months and for furance and epoxy resins about 12 months from date of manufacture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 2): 1969",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS4832Part21969_1",
    "text": "IS 4832 (Part 2): 1969 Chemical Resistant Mortars [General]\nIS 4832 (Part 2): 1969 Chemical Resistant Mortars PART 2 RESIN TYPE TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF RESIN TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MORTARS Sl No. Particular Requirements for Type of Mortar Phenolic Furane Epoxy Polyester Type Type Type Type (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Working time at 27 ± 2°C, Min minutes 20 20 20 20 ii) Flexural strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm2 75 75 150 150 iii) Compressive strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm2 350 350 500 500 iv) Bond strength, Max, kgf/cm2 10 10 12 12 v) Absorption, Max, Percent by weight 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Note— In the test for bond strength the joint shall not fail at or below the value specified."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4832Part31968_1",
    "text": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968 Chemical Resistant Mortars [Scope]\nRequirements of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Note — Such mortars have good resistance against most of the acids except concentrated oxidizing acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for jointing acid resistance bricks or tiles. 2. Composition a) Sulphur—55 to 70 percent b) Inert filler—30 to 45 percent c) Sieve analysis of silica filler The percent material retained on different sieves shall not exceed the following: IS Sieve Percentage Retained Designation by Mass 425 micron 5 max 150 micron 10 min 75 micron 35 min Note — For other fillers, requirements gi ven at Sl No. (vii) of Table 1 shall apply."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Physical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS4832Part31968_2",
    "text": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968 Chemical Resistant Mortars [Physical Requirements]\nSee Table 1 PART 3 – SULPHUR TYPE TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIRE- MENTS OF SULPHUR TYPE CHEMI- CAL RESISTANT MORTARS S.No. Property Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Compressive strength at 48 hours, 280 Min, kgf/cm 2 ii) Tensile strength at 48 hours, Min, 30 kg/cm 2 iii) Flexural strength at 48 hours, Min 70 kg/cm 2 iv) Bond strength at 48 hours Min kg/cm 2 10 v) Proportion of original strength retained after Shock test, Min percent 20.0 vi) Moisture absorption, Max, present 1.0 vii) Tendency of aggregate to settle, Max 0.6 variation from unity\n[Chemical Resistance Requirements] The limits may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Shelf Life",
    "chunk_id": "IS4832Part31968_3",
    "text": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968 Chemical Resistant Mortars [Shelf Life]\nShall not be less than 2 years. Shall be placed in a dry place away from fire. Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part 2) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Sulphur type. Note 2— For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS 4442:1980 Code of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (First Revision.) For detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 3 Sulphur type."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4860: 1968",
    "title": "Acid – Resistant Bricks",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS48601968_1",
    "text": "IS 4860: 1968 Acid – Resistant Bricks [Scope]\nRequirements of acid-resistant bricks. Such bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring, etc, subject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or shale with low lime and iron content, felspar, flint or sand and vitrified at high temperatures. 2. Classification 2.1 Class I —Recommended for severe type of corrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks, pickling tanks etc. 2.2 Class II— Recommended for areas subject to occassional pillage of acids, fumes, and contact with dry chemicals as in fertilizer silos.\n[Dimensions] 230 × 114 × 64 mm. 5. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances (mm) (mm) 230 ± 3.5 114 ± 2.0 64 ± 1.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4860: 1968",
    "title": "Acid – Resistant Bricks",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Warpage",
    "chunk_id": "IS48601968_2",
    "text": "IS 4860: 1968 Acid – Resistant Bricks [Warpage]\nNot more than 2.5 mm at any point. Note— For measurement of warp, refer to 2.4.1 of the standard. TABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID RESISTANT BRICKS S. No. Characteristic Requirements Class I Bricks Class II Bricks (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption, percent, Max 2 4 ii) Flexual strength, kgf/cm2 , Min 100 70 iii) Compressive strength, kgf/cm2, Min 700 500 iv) Resistance to acid Loss in weight shall not Loss in weight shallnot exceed 1.5 percent exceed 4.0 percent v) Resistance to wear (optional) Average wear shall not exceed 2 mm Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and Appendix A of IS 1237:1980 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant br"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13753: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS137531993_1",
    "text": "IS 13753: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water [Scope]\nSpecifies sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. 1.1It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic glazed tiles first quality, with a water absorption (E>10%) according to Group B III of IS 13712 : 1993* for use as both wall and floor coverings. Tiles in this group are mainly used in areas not subject to severe mechanical load. They are not intended for applications where conditions of frost may apply. 1.2There is a small production of dust-pressed ceramic unglazed tiles with a water absorption greater than 10% that is not covered by this standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13753: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Description",
    "chunk_id": "IS137531993_2",
    "text": "IS 13753: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water [Description]\nThe surface of tiles and compo- nents belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy, decorated or finished in some other way. It can be glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL).— Tiles may have spacer lugs. 3. Shapes and Sizes 3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size + joint width) in cm are M30×30, M30×15, M25×15, M20×20, M20×15, M15×15, M15×7.5 and M10×10. The manufacturers shall choose the work size (dimension of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 1.5 and 5 mm. 3.2 The most common non-modular nominal sizes in cm are 40×40, 33×33, 30×30, 30×15, 25×25, 21.6×10.8, 20×40, 20×30, 20×20, 20×15, 15.2×15.2, 15.2×7.6, 15×15, 15×7.5, 10.8×10.8 and 10×20. The manufactures shall choose work size such that difference between the work siz"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13753: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Spacer Lug Tiles",
    "chunk_id": "IS137531993_3",
    "text": "IS 13753: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water [Spacer Lug Tiles]\nSpacer Lugs are projections, usually of 0.6 mm, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint . Lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust – pressed tiles may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note— Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and shall not be used to space joints 5. Requirements : See Table 1. * Ceramic tiles — defination, classification, characteristics and marking. TABLE 1 REQU"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13754: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS137541993_1",
    "text": "IS 13754: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With [Scope]\nSpecifies the sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with a water absorption of 3%<E 6% according to Group B IIa of IS 13712 : 1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors floors and walls."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13754: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Description",
    "chunk_id": "IS137541993_2",
    "text": "IS 13754: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With [Description]\nMosaic is a tile of any geometrical shape whose surface area is equal to or less than 90cm2. The surface of tiles and components belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy,decorated or finished in some other way. It can be unglazed (UGL), glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL). Although tiles have visible surface and usually a surface which is intended to be adhered and bears a back panel, they may have identical surface without a panel or marking. Tiles may have spacer lugs. 3. Shapes and Sizes 3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size + joint width) in cm are M10×10, M15×15, M20×10, M20×15, M20×20 and M30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm. 3.2 The m"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13754: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Spacer Hug Style",
    "chunk_id": "IS137541993_3",
    "text": "IS 13754: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With [Spacer Hug Style]\nSpacerlugs are projections, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint Lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust – pressed tiles – may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such case the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note– Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm.These are not intended as spacer lugs and should not be used to space joints."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_1",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\nIS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles WITH WATER ABSORPTION OF 3% < E ≤ 6% (GROUP – B II A) *Ceramictiles— definitions,classification, characteristics and marking TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2) A) Dimensions and Surface Quality S< 90 - 90<S< 190 1 90 < S < 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size ±1.2 ± 1.0 ±0.75 ±0.6 The deviation in % of the average size of each tile(2or4 sides) from the averge size ofthe 10 test specimens (20 or 40 sides) ± 0.75 ±0.5 ± 0.5 ±05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness ± 10 ± 10 ± 5 ±5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_2",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\n± 0.75 ±0.5 ± 0.5 ±05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness ± 10 ± 10 ± 5 ±5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. ± 0.75 ±0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 iv) Rectangularity1)— The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size ±1.0 ±0.6 ± 0.6 ±0.6 ≤ Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2) Test According to IS 13630 S ≤ 90 90 < S ≤ 190 190 < S ≤ 410 s > 410 (A) Dimensions and surface Quality i) Lenght and width Part 1 e The deviation in % of the ± 1.2 ± 1.0 ± 0.75 ± 0.6 average size of each tile (2 or 4 sides) from the work size (W) f The deviation in % of the ±0.75 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 average size of each tile (2 or 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens (20 or 40 sides) ii) Thickness Part 1 The deviation in % of the ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5 average thickness of each tile from the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_3",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\n% of the ±0.75 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 average size of each tile (2 or 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens (20 or 40 sides) ii) Thickness Part 1 The deviation in % of the ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5 average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness iii) Straightness of sides1 (facial sides) Part 1 The maximum deviation from ± 0.75 ± 0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 straightness in % related to the corresponding work sizes iv) Rectangularity1) Part 1 The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work sizes v) Surface flatness Part 1 The maximum deviation from flatness in: a) centre curvature, related to ± 1.0 ± 0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 diagonal calculated from the work sizes b) Edge curvature, related to the ±1.0 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 corresponding work size c) Warpage, related to diagonal ± 1.0 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 calculated from the work sizes vi) Surface quality2) Min 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1 impair the appearance of a major area of tiles B Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight Average 3 <E ≤ 6 Individual Max 11.0 Part"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_4",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\n0.5 calculated from the work sizes vi) Surface quality2) Min 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1 impair the appearance of a major area of tiles B Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight Average 3 <E ≤ 6 Individual Max 11.0 Part 2 ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2 Average ≤ 22, Individual Min 20 Part 6 iii) Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs’ scale) a) Glazed tiles Min 5 b) Unglazed tiles Min 6 iv) Abrasion resistance: a) Resistance to deep abrasion Max 345 Part 12 of unglazed tiles, removed volume in mm3 b) Resistance of abrasion of According to the abrasion class indicated by Part 11 glazed tiles Class I-IV The manufacturer v) co-efficient of linear thermal Max 9 × 10–6 Part 4 expansion from ambient temperature to 1000ºC (K–1) vi) Thermal shock resistance Required Part 5 vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles Required Part 9 viii) Frost resistance Required, if agreed Part 10 ix) Moisture expansion unglazed Max 0.6 Part 3 tiles mm/m C) Chemical Properties i) Resistance to staining of glazed Min Class2 Part 8 tiles Class 1 - 3 ii) REsistance to household chemicals and swimming pool water cleansers,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_5",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\ntiles Required Part 9 viii) Frost resistance Required, if agreed Part 10 ix) Moisture expansion unglazed Max 0.6 Part 3 tiles mm/m C) Chemical Properties i) Resistance to staining of glazed Min Class2 Part 8 tiles Class 1 - 3 ii) REsistance to household chemicals and swimming pool water cleansers, except to cleansing agents containing hydrofluoric acid and its compounds a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D Min Class B Part 8 b) Unglazed tiles Required Part 7 iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis (with the exception of hydrofluoric acid its comounds) a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D Required if agreed according to the chemical ersistance class indicated by the manufacturer Part 8 b) Unglazed tiles Required 4) part 7 1. Not applicalbe for tiles having curved shapes. 2. Because of firing, slight variations fromthe standard colour are unavoidable. This does not apply to intentional irregularities of colour variation of the face of dust pressed tiles of low water absorption( which can be unglazed, glazed or partly glazed) or to the colour variation over a tile area, which is characteristic for this type of tile and desirable. Spots or coloured dots which are introduced for decorative purposes are not considered defect. 3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS137551993_6",
    "text": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles [General]\nof dust pressed tiles of low water absorption( which can be unglazed, glazed or partly glazed) or to the colour variation over a tile area, which is characteristic for this type of tile and desirable. Spots or coloured dots which are introduced for decorative purposes are not considered defect. 3. Certain decorative effects may have a tendency to craze. These shall be identified by the manufacturer, in which case the crazing test in not applicable. 4. If the hue becomes slightly different this is not considered to be chemical attack, For detailed information refer to IS 13755:1993 Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3%<E≤ 6% (Group—BII a)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13756: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS137561993_1",
    "text": "IS 13756: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low [Scope]\nSpecifies the sizes,dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles including tiles premounted on sheets of first quality, with a low water absorption (E ≤ 3%) according to Group BI of IS 13712 : 1993 Ceramic tiles– Efinitions, Classifications, Characteristics and marking. For interior and exterior use on both floors and walls. 2. Shapes and Sizes 2.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size + joint width) in cm are M 10×10, M15×15, M20×10, M20×15, M20×20 and M 30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm. 2.2 The most common non-do"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13756: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Spacer Lug Tiles",
    "chunk_id": "IS137561993_2",
    "text": "IS 13756: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low [Spacer Lug Tiles]\nSpacer lugs are projections, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles so that wen two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust–Pressed tiles– may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note—Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way long certain edges and smaller than 0.3mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and shall not be used to space joints."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13756: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS137561993_3",
    "text": "IS 13756: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low [Requirements]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2) A). Dimensions and Surface Quality S 90 90<S 190 190 < S 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size 1.2 1.0 0.75 0.6 The deviation in % of the average sizeof tile ( 2 or 4 sides) from the average sizeof the10 test specimens ( 20 or 40 sides) 0.75 0.5 0.5 05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness 10 10 5 5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.5 iv) Rectangularity1) — The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size v) Surface flatness T"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14862: 2000",
    "title": "Fibre Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Type Characteristics",
    "chunk_id": "IS148622000_1",
    "text": "IS 14862: 2000 Fibre Cement Flat Sheets [Type Characteristics]\nThis clause applies to Type A sheets only. These tests shall be carried out on products as delivered. Where the tests are carried out on coated sheets, this shall be stated in the report. 4.1 Bending Strength—Shall not be less than the values for the appropriate category specified in Table 1. When tested in equilibrium and wet condition. In addition, the mean modulus of rapture under wet conditions shall be not less than 50 percent of the mean modulus of rapture under equilibrium conditions. 4.2 Water Impermeability—Traces of moisture may appear on the underside of the sheet, but in no instance shall there be formation of drops of water. 4.3 Frost Resistance— For sheets for frost resistant applications, after 50 freeze-thaw cycles, the limit L1 of the average ratio r shall not be less than"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14862: 2000",
    "title": "Fibre Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Use Of Hand",
    "chunk_id": "IS148622000_2",
    "text": "IS 14862: 2000 Fibre Cement Flat Sheets [Use Of Hand]\ntools. Note 1— For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets refer to Annex. B of the standard. Note 2— For method of tests, refer to Annex. C, D, E, F, G, H and J of the standard. For detailed information refer to IS 14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14871: 2000",
    "title": "Products In Fibre Reinforced",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Use Of Hand",
    "chunk_id": "IS148712000_1",
    "text": "IS 14871: 2000 Products In Fibre Reinforced [Use Of Hand]\ntools. Note– 1. For method of testing profile and other dimensions, refer to Annex B of the standard. Note– 2.For method of tests, refer to Annex C & D of the standard. For details refer to IS 14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre reinforced cement— Long corrugated or asymmetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1195: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11952002_1",
    "text": "IS 1195: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring [Scope]\nSpecifies requirements for four grades of bitumen mastic for building, composed of ground limestone, coarse aggregate and pigment, if required, incorporated with asphaltic cements. This standard does not cover special grades of bitumen mastic flooring such as chemical resistant, oil resistant or spark free flooring, for these purpose special bitumen mastics are available. A guide to the selection of the appropriate grade is given in Appendix A of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1195: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS11952002_2",
    "text": "IS 1195: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring [Grades]\nBitumen mastic floorings are graded according to usage as follows: Grade I Special flooring Grade II Light duty flooring Grade III Medium duty flooring Grade IV Industrial factory flooring Grades I and II may be used as a polished flooring for light traffic or as an underlay to other floor coverings. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen used shall conform to the requirements in Table 1. 3.2 Aggregate (Second Revision) 3.2.1 Fine Aggregate — The fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring limestone rock ground to a grading as given in Table 2, and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight 3.2.2. Coarse Aggregate : The coarse aggregates shall consist of clean igneous or calcareous rock or siliceous material obtained from natural deposits either directly or by sc"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1195: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS11952002_3",
    "text": "IS 1195: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring [Composition]\nSee Table 4 TABLE 4 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC Requirement Percentage By Mass Min Max (1) (2) (3) Soluble bitumen 12.0 18.0 Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 40.0 56.0 Passing 212-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75- micron 8.0 25.0 IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212 micron IS Sieve 8.0 32.0 Note— Percentage by mass of bitumen mastic excluding the material retained on a 600-micron IS Sieve."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1195: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Hardness Number",
    "chunk_id": "IS11952002_4",
    "text": "IS 1195: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring [Hardness Number]\nThe hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be as follows— a) At the time of manufacture— Grade I Not more than 15 at 45° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates) Grade II & III Not more than 12 at 35° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates) Grade IV Not more than 40 at 35° C (before addition of specified coarse aggregate) b) At the time of laying— Grade I Not less than 2 nor more than 12 at 45°C Grade II & III Not less than 2 nor more than 12 at 35°C. Note—For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration. IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5317: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS53172002_1",
    "text": "IS 5317: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads [Scope]\nRequirements for bitumen mastic used as a surfacing material for bridge decks and roads. 2. Materials 2.1 Bitumen — See Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN SL. No. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90oC ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100 cm 10 to 40 iii) Ductility at 27oC, Min in cm 3 iv) Loss on heating, percent, Max 1 v) Solubility in carbon disulphide,percent Min 99 2.2 Filler The filler shall be lime stone powder passing 75-micron IS Sieve and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight. 2.3 Aggregates 2.3.1 Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring sand or crushed lime stone or crushed hard-rock. The grading of the fine aggregates inclusive of the filler is given i\n[Hardness Number] The bitumen mastic whose composition is given at Table 3 before the addition of coarse aggregate, shall have hardness number of 60 to 80 at 25°C."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5317: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS53172002_2",
    "text": "IS 5317: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads [Composition]\nSee Table 3 TABLE 3 COMPOSITION OF BITU- MEN MASTIC (WITHOUT COARSE AGGREGATE) Requirement Percentage by Weight of Mastic Without Coarse Aggregate Min Max (1) (2) (3) i) Bitumen 14 17 ii) Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 25 45 iii) Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8 18 and retained on75-micron IS Sieve iv) Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 4 30 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v) Passing 2.36mm IS Sieve and 0 22 retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Note— For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration. IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1216: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene .",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12161978_1",
    "text": "IS 1216: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene . [General]\nIS 1216: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene . For detailed information refer to IS 5317 : 2002 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9510: 1980",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic, Acid – Resisting Grade",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS95101980_1",
    "text": "IS 9510: 1980 Bitumen Mastic, Acid – Resisting Grade [Composition]\nSee Tables 4 and 5 TABLE 4 PERCENTAGE OF COARSE AGGREGATES Sl Thickness of Each Percentage of No. Layer of the Mastic Coarse Aggregates byMass of Total Mastic (1) (2) (3) i) 15 mm 15 to 30 ii) 20 to 25 mm 20 to 35 iii) 25 to 30 mm 30 to 45 TABLE 5 COMPOSITION OF BITU- MEN MASTIC Sl Requirement Percentage by No. Mass of Bitumen Mastic Excluding the Coarse Aggre gate (1) (2) (3) i) Soluble bitumen 13 to 18 ii) Grading of aggregate Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 45 to 55 Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8 to 32 and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 8 to 30 and retained on 212 micron IS Sieve 4. Properties 4.1 Hardness Number– Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and the user, the hardness number of bitumen mastic as laid shall be 4 to 12 at 35oC 4.2 Acid-Resistance– T"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13026: 1991",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS130261991_1",
    "text": "IS 13026: 1991 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products [Scope]\nRequirements of linoleum manufactured as sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as floor covering. Note — This standard does not include jute canvas as backing material. 2. Materials 2.1 The wearing surface of the linoleum shall be made from the following material: a) Oxidized or polymerized linseed oil (conforming to IS 75 : 1973) * or other suitable drying oil, with necessary driers; b) Rosin or resin or their combination: c) Cork flour or wood flour or both: d) Mineral fillers; and e) Colouring material or pigments Note — The material shall be mixed and pressed to a specially smooth surface on the backing (see 2.2). The backing material shall be securely bonded to the wearing surface. 2.2 The type of hessian used for backing is dependent on the type of conform method of manufactu\n[Finish] The wearing surface of linoleum shall be smooth, uniform and shall be free from indentations, cracks and protruding particles."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13026: 1991",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Packing",
    "chunk_id": "IS130261991_2",
    "text": "IS 13026: 1991 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products [Packing]\nThe linoleum sheet shall be tightly wound on cores of mandrels of diameter not less than 75 mm. The rolls shall be wrapped in kraft paper (the weight of which shall not be less than 50 (g/m2) securely tied or otherwise fastend and finally packed in strong hessian or sacking. The ends of the rolls shall be suitably protected by means of cardboard or other suitable disc to avoid any damage. * Linseed oil, raw and refined (second revision) + Indian Hessain Part 2-305 and 229 g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 653: 1992",
    "title": "Linoleum Sheet And Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS6531992_1",
    "text": "IS 653: 1992 Linoleum Sheet And Tiles [Scope]\nRequirements for smooth surfaced homogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are not covered in this standard.\n[Materials] Blended composition of thermoplastic binder (vinyl chloride polymer and/ or vinyl chloride copolymers), asbestos fibre fillers, and pigments. 3. Dimensions and Tolerance 3.1 Size —200 and 250 mm square.— Other size and shape as agreed to mutually.Tolerance, ± 0.4 mm on 200 mm size and ± 0.5 mm on 250 mm size. For larger size tolerance shall be ± 0.2 percent. 3.2 Thickness — 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 mm. Tolerance, ± 0.15 mm.\n[Colour And Finish] Tiles shall be plain or mottled. Plain tiles shall have colour uniformly distributed through tiles. Mottled tiles shall have colours distributed at random throughout thickness of tile."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 653: 1992",
    "title": "Linoleum Sheet And Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Physical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS6531992_2",
    "text": "IS 653: 1992 Linoleum Sheet And Tiles [Physical Requirements]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES S.l.No. Charactristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i)Squareness Gap between the sides of the tile and the arms of the metal jig shall not be greater than 0.15 mm for last 50 mm to wards the farther end from the junction of the arms. ii)Dimensional stability Change in any linear dimension shall not exceed 0.25 percent. iii) Colour fastness Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of daylight the 8 standard patterns of blue dyed woolen fabric specified in IS 686:1985*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3461: 1980",
    "title": "Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS34611980_1",
    "text": "IS 3461: 1980 Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles [General]\nIS 3461: 1980 Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles (First Revision) iv) Volatile matter Loss in weight shall not exceed 1 percent. v) Curling Shall not exceed 0.75 mm vi) Indentation a) At 27 2o C Average indentation at the end of one minute shall not exceed 0.38 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the aver- age by more than 0.05 mm.In relation to the one minute in- dentation figures. The average indentation at the end of 10minutes shall not exceed the value specified and no individual reading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05 mm. b) At 46 2oC Average indentation shall not exceed 0.82 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05mm vii) Residual indentation Shall not exceed 0.15 mm viii) Resistance to various After immersion in various substances and when tested the width of the sceratch on the surface shall not exceed 3 mm. The colour of the treated test piece shall show no significant change when compared with the untreated test piece. ix) Deflection Shall deflect at least 25 mm with out breaking. x) Impact Shall not suffer a fracture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3461: 1980",
    "title": "Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS34611980_2",
    "text": "IS 3461: 1980 Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles [General]\nthe width of the sceratch on the surface shall not exceed 3 mm. The colour of the treated test piece shall show no significant change when compared with the untreated test piece. ix) Deflection Shall deflect at least 25 mm with out breaking. x) Impact Shall not suffer a fracture. xi) Abrasion resistance To be agreed between the purchaser and the supplier. Note 1 : For methods of tests, refer to IS 3464:1980 Methods of test for plastic floor covering and wall tiles (first revision). Note 2 : For categories of tests refer to 6 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3461 : 1980 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles (first revision). * Methods for determination of colour, fastness of textiles materials to daylight (first revision). † For detailed requirements of indentation limits at 27± 2°C, refer to Table 2 of the standard. ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9197: 1979",
    "title": "Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS91971979_1",
    "text": "IS 9197: 1979 Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping [Scope]\nSpecifies dimensions, tolerances, strength and light transmission of glass fibre reinforced translucent plastic sheeting of the profiles specified in IS 277 : 1992*, IS 459:1992** and IS 1254:1991+ for use in roofs.” Recommended temperature range is from —20 to 60°C"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9197: 1979",
    "title": "Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS91971979_2",
    "text": "IS 9197: 1979 Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping [Materials]\nShall be composed of a thermosetting styranated or acrylated polyester resin system reinforced with glass fibre which may include curing agents, catalysts and light stabilizers. Glassfibre shall be in the form of chopped strand mat having a highly soluble modified polyester binder in accordance with IS 11551:1996@ having a density of 450 g/m2 and minimum width of 500 mm. Special grade of unsaturated polyester resin having a refractive index matching that of the glassfibre (that is 1.53) and conforming to the broad specifications given below shall be used. a) Viscosity at 25oC, in cps : 400 to 500 (Brooke –field LVF spindle 2/12 rev 1 min) b) Specific gravity at 20oC : 1.11 c) Acid number, in mg KOH/g : 25 to 30 d) Solids, in percent : 65 3. Profiles, Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Profiles—"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_1",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\nIS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin (GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED) TABLE 1 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES OF GLASSFIBRE REINFORCED CORRUGATED TRANSLUCENT ROOFLIGHT SHEETS All dimensions in millimetres. Sl. Type of Profile Depth of Pitch of Overall Effective Minimum Length of No. Sheet No. Corrugation Corrugation Width Width Thickness Sheet D Tolerance P Tolerance B Tolerance Tolerance T Tolerance A Tolerance (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) i) Corrugated 1 48 + 3 146 + 6 1050 +10 +10 1.1 +0.15 1 750 0.5% asbestos - 5 - 9 -5 -5 2 000 of length cement, profile 2 45 + 3 338 + 6 1100 +10 +10 2 500 in accordance - 5 - 2 -5 -5 3 000 with IS 459:1992 ii) Corrugated 3 17.5 2.5 75 +5 660 +0.15 1 800 0.5% steel 4 12.5 2.5 810 2 200 of length profile in 910 2 500 accordance with 680 2 800"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_2",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\n200 of length profile in 910 2 500 accordance with 680 2 800 IS 277 : 1992 830 3 000 iii) Corrugated 5 19 — 75 +5 650 25 1.1 +0.15 1 800 aluminum sheets 800 25 2 400 0.5% profile in of length accordance with 6 38 — 125 5 795 +25 3 000 ± ± ± ± ± 4.2 Special Finishes – A clear tissue of fibreglass surface mat or polyester mat may be applied to the sheet surface( on the side exposed to weathering ) during manufacture to improve resistance to weathering. Alternatively, PVF and polyester cladding films can be bonded to the sheet surface (on the side exposed to weathering). 5. Performance Requirements: 5.1 Density —The nominal weight of 1.10 + 0.15 mm thick plain sheet shall be 1.85 kg/sq m. 5.2 Glass Content—Shall not be less than 30 percent 5.3 Water Absorption — Shall not absorb water in excess of 0.3 percent 5.4 Hardness (Barcol) – Barcol hardness shall not increase by more than 30 percent of its initial value. 5.5 Bolt Shear Test – Arithmetic mean of the loads at which the first tear appears, shall be not less than 375 N."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_3",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\nShall not absorb water in excess of 0.3 percent 5.4 Hardness (Barcol) – Barcol hardness shall not increase by more than 30 percent of its initial value. 5.5 Bolt Shear Test – Arithmetic mean of the loads at which the first tear appears, shall be not less than 375 N. The load at which the first tear appears while testing any one of the specimens, shall be not less than 250 N. 5.6 Load Deflection Test – Applicable only to corrugated sheets and flats of curved sheets. When three sheets of 1.10+0.15 mm thickness are tested none of the sheets shall rupture although minor cracking around the areas of support or loading shall be permitted. The total load as shown in Table 2 shall produce a deflection of not more than 15mm (that is, span/70) on any of the sheets. TABLE 2 DEFLECTION UNDER TEST LOAD Profile No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_4",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\nthe sheets shall rupture although minor cracking around the areas of support or loading shall be permitted. The total load as shown in Table 2 shall produce a deflection of not more than 15mm (that is, span/70) on any of the sheets. TABLE 2 DEFLECTION UNDER TEST LOAD Profile No. in Total Load Accordance N With Table (1) (2) 1 1 100 2 1 100 3 190 4 190 5 190 6 850 7 750 5.7 Light Diffusion — The gradient constant shall be as per Table 3 TABLE 3 LIGHT DIFFUSION GRADIENT CONSTANT G Diffusion Description Gradient Classification Constant G (1) (2) (3) I Clear Above 0.80 II Moderately diffusing 0.32 to 0.80 III Heavily diffusing 0.10 to 0.32 IV Very heavily diffusing Below 0.10 5.8 Transmission— The gradient constant shall lie within the limits set out in Table 4 for the appropriate class of sheet. TABLE 4 MINIMUM TOTAL LIGHT TRANSMISSION Diffusion Minimum Total Classification Transmission (1) (2) I 80 II 75 III 70 IV 60 Note— for methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to G of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_5",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\nlie within the limits set out in Table 4 for the appropriate class of sheet. TABLE 4 MINIMUM TOTAL LIGHT TRANSMISSION Diffusion Minimum Total Classification Transmission (1) (2) I 80 II 75 III 70 IV 60 Note— for methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to G of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12866 : 1989 specification for plastic translucent sheets made from thermosetting polyster resin (glass fibre reinforced). Table 1 Thickness and Number of Fabric plies Thickness of Sheet Tolerance on Number of Plies RubberJointing or Thickness in RubberInsertion Rubber Insertion Jointing (1) (2) (3) mm mm 0.8 ± 0.2 1 1.5 ±0.2 1 3 ±0.3 2 5 ±0.5 2 6 ±0.6 3 8 and above ±0.7 4 4.2.2.1 Position of plies — In the case of three or more plies of fabric, they shall be so placed within the thickness of the jointing that the rubber layers between the plies are of approximately same thickness. 4.2.2.2 Each outer layer of rubber shall be not less than 0.8 mm thick in all insertions containing two or more plies of fabric. The outer layers of rubber shall in all cases be of equal thickness."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_6",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\njointing that the rubber layers between the plies are of approximately same thickness. 4.2.2.2 Each outer layer of rubber shall be not less than 0.8 mm thick in all insertions containing two or more plies of fabric. The outer layers of rubber shall in all cases be of equal thickness. 4.3 Size — Sizes up to 6 mm thickness shall be supplied in one piece of 1 × 10 metres and sizes above 6 mm thickness the minimum length shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 4.4 Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break— see Table 2 4.5 Accelerated Ageing 4.5.1 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to water and air pressure—After ageing at 70 ± 1°C for a period of 72 hours shall not vary by more than percent for tensile strength and + − 5 15 percent for elongation at break of the corresponding values obtained before ageing."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS128661989_7",
    "text": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin [General]\nJointing to be used for joints subjected to water and air pressure—After ageing at 70 ± 1°C for a period of 72 hours shall not vary by more than percent for tensile strength and + − 5 15 percent for elongation at break of the corresponding values obtained before ageing. 4.5.2 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to steam pressure — The ageing shall be done at 100 ± 1°C for 72 hours and shall not vary by more than + − 10 25 percent for tensile strength and + − 10 35 percent for elongation at break of the corresponding values obtained before ageing"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 638: 1979",
    "title": "Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS6381979_1",
    "text": "IS 638: 1979 Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing for use between flanges and similar joints subjected to water pressure, air pressure or low pressure steam. Note —The recommended low pressure steam is up to 350 kN/m2 (approximately 3.5kgf/cm2) 2. Types: a) Type A — 50 to 65 Hardness in IRHD, and b) Type B —66 to 80 Hardness in IRHD."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 638: 1979",
    "title": "Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS6381979_2",
    "text": "IS 638: 1979 Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing [Grades]\nGrade 1 and 2 4. Requirements 4.1 Material 4.1.1 Jointing Material — Shall be made of one of the following materials: a) Sheet rubber, or b) Sheet rubber reinforced with fabric rubber insertion jointing. 4.1.2 Composition of Rubber Compound — Shall be natural or synthetic rubber or a blend thereof, suitably compounded and vulcanized having the degree of hardness as specified in 2. 4.1.3 Fabric reinforcement for rubber insertion jointing — Shall have a minimum breaking load of 120 N/cm (approx 12 kgf/cm) width for both warp and weft direction. 4.2 Construction and Workmanship 4.2.1 Shall be free from surface defects, such as pitting, blemishes and other irregularities and the rubber used in both shall be homogeneous and be free from porosity and grit as judged visually on surface or any cut"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 809: 1992",
    "title": "Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8091992_1",
    "text": "IS 809: 1992 Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose [General]\nIS 809: 1992 Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose (First Revision) * Indian Hessian, Part 2-305 and 229g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision) Note: For methods of tests refer to Appendices B to F of the standard and IS 3400. Methods of test for vulcanized rubbers Part 2 : 1995 Hardness (first revision) Part 3 : 1987 Abrasion resistance using rotating cylindrical drum device (first revision) Part 10 : 1977 Compression set at constant strain (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 809 : 1992 Specification for rubber flooring materials for general purposes (second revision). 2.1 SECTION 9 WATERPROOFING AND DAMP - PROOFING MATERIALS CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 809: 1992",
    "title": "Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8091992_2",
    "text": "IS 809: 1992 Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose [General]\n1986 Bitumen mastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (first revision) 9.8 IS 3384 : 1986 Bitumen primer for use in water-proofing and damp proofing (first revision) 9.10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1322: 1993",
    "title": "Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13221993_1",
    "text": "IS 1322: 1993 Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing [Scope]\nRequirements for saturated bitumen felts (underlay) and self-finished bitumen felts used for water proofing and damp-proofing. 2. Classification 2.1 Fibre Base Type 1 — Saturated felt for underlay Type 2 — Self finished felt ( for water-proofing) 2.2 Hessian Base Type 3— [Self-finished felt (for water-proofing) Grade 1] [Self-finished felt (for damp-proofing) Grade 2]\n[Weight] Weight of ingredients of bitumen felt for 10 m shall not be less than those specified in Table1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1322: 1993",
    "title": "Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS13221993_2",
    "text": "IS 1322: 1993 Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing [Dimensions]\nIt shall be in width of 90 cm or 100 cm and generally on lengths of 10 m 0r 20 m 5. Other Requirement 5.1 The finished material shall be free from visible external defects, such as holes, oil patches, ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, protuberances and indentations. 5.2 Tests — See Table 2. TABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF BITUMEN FELT (IN KG) Sl Type of Felt For 10m2 Untreated Base Saturant Coatant Bitumen Total Weight of the (see Note) Content Finished Bitumen Felt in Dry with Condition Mica Dusting Powder Min (see Notes 2 and 3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) a) Fibre Base i) Type 1 Underlay 4.0 4.5 -- 3.6 7.6 ii) Type 2 Self finished felt 5.0 5.7 12.9 12.0 22.6 b) Hessian Base i) Type 3 Self finsihed 2.3 1.8 17.7 12.1 23.0 felt Grade 1 iii) Type 3 self finished 2.3 1.8 31.8 20.2 37."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1580: 1991",
    "title": "Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS15801991_1",
    "text": "IS 1580: 1991 Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and tests for bituminous compound, applied cold and used for stopping leaks through cracks of roofs, floors, walls, etc; as sealant for plate joints of wagons, coaches and buses; as caulking agent for crevices and vertical joints between steel plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete cladding, etc; and as adhesives for rainguards for rubber trees. 2. Grades a) Grade 1 – Shall be semistiff, smooth and homogenous paste suitable for application by spreading with hand, trowel, spatula or gun. b) Grade 2 – Shall be of light consistency and homogenous paste suitable for application by putty knife."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1580: 1991",
    "title": "Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS15801991_2",
    "text": "IS 1580: 1991 Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes [Composition]\nThe material shall consist of bitumen and flus oils with or without addition of vegetable or resinous oils, cut back with volatile thinners and intimately mixed with non-gritty absorbent, inorganic fibrous material (with or without powder) in suitable proportions as to comply with the requirements of this standard.(see Table 1)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1580: 1991",
    "title": "Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Keeping Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS15801991_3",
    "text": "IS 1580: 1991 Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes [Keeping Properties]\nWhen stored under cover in a dry place in the original sealed container under normal temperature the material shall retain the specified properties for a period of not less than six months from the date of manufacture as declared on container. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COMPOUNDS Sl. No. Characteristic Requirements Grade 1 Grade 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water content, percent by mass, Max 0.5 0.5 ii) Ash content, percent by mass, Max 40 30 iii) Flow Shall satisfy the Shall satisfy the requirement requirement iv) Flash point oC, Min 35 35 v) Flexibility and adhesion Shall satisfy the Shall satisfy the requirement requirement vi) Consistency a) Before setting (test after 1h) Min 100 225 b) After setting (test after 24 h) Min 80 200"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2645: 2003",
    "title": "Integral Cement Water-Proofing Compounds",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26452003_1",
    "text": "IS 2645: 2003 Integral Cement Water-Proofing Compounds [Scope]\nRequirements for integral cement water- proofing compounds, which shall be assessed by: a) Permeability to water, and b) Physical tests of setting time and compressive strengths of cement mixed with the water-proofing compounds. Note — Proportions as recommended by manufacturers, but not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement. 2. Requirements 2.1 Permeability to water of specimens prepared with the recommended proportion of the compound shall be less than half the permeability of similar specimens prepared without the addition of the compound. 2.2 Setting time of cement mixed with water-proofing– Initial – not less than 30 minutes; final – not more than 600 minutes. 2.3 Compressive Strengths – of mortar cubes using the recommended proportion of waterproofing compound shall be as follows :"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3037: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30371986_1",
    "text": "IS 3037: 1986 Bitumen Mastic For Use In [Scope]\nRequirements for bitumen mastic suitable for water proofing of roofs. This bitumen mastic is not intended to be used as a paving material or to with stand exceptional conditions, such as acid or alkali actions."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3037: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "General Characteristics",
    "chunk_id": "IS30371986_2",
    "text": "IS 3037: 1986 Bitumen Mastic For Use In [General Characteristics]\nIt shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give it a semi fluid consistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer, not less than 10 mm in thickness. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen — See Table 1. Note–For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203:1978*, IS 1205 : 1978 **, IS 1208 : 1978#, IS 1212 : 1978 ^, IS 1216:1978``. 3.2 Aggregate — Aggrates shall be crushed rock or gravel of silicious, granite or limestone origin with mineral fillers, such as, limestone dust or cement. Aggregates used shall be clean and free of all foreign matter. Shall conform to gradings as given in Table 2. Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials— * Determination"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3037: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Hardness Number",
    "chunk_id": "IS30371986_3",
    "text": "IS 3037: 1986 Bitumen Mastic For Use In [Hardness Number]\nThe hardness number of the bitumen mastic at the time of laying shall be between 2 to 8 at 25oC, and 10 to 65 at 45oC. For detailed information, refer to IS 3037 : 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3384: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Primer For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS33841986_1",
    "text": "IS 3384: 1986 Bitumen Primer For Use In [General]\nIS 3384: 1986 Bitumen Primer For Use In WATER–PROOFING AND DAMP–PROOFING (First Revision) TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMER Sl.No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Viscosity by standard tar viscometer,4-mm orifice, in sec, at 25oC 4 to 24 ii) Distillation fractions, percent by volume of the primer– a) Up to 225oC, Min 35 b) Up to 360oC, Max 65 iii) Flash point, Pensky Martens closed type, Min 40 iv) Water content, percent, Max 0.2 v) Tests on residue from distillation up to 360oC a) Ductility, 27oC, Min 3 b) Penetration at 25oC, 100g, 5 sec in 1/100 cm 20 to 50 c) Matter soluble in carbon disulphide or carbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene, 99.0 percent by weight, Min Note— For test rocedures, refer to Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials; IS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5871: 1987",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS58711987_1",
    "text": "IS 5871: 1987 Bitumen Mastic For [Scope]\nRequirements for bitumen mastic used as covering material for damp-proofing of underground tanks, basements of building, water reservoirs, swimming pools, irrigation canals, etc.\n[General Characteristics] It shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in suitable proportions so as to give it a semi fluid consistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen – Physical Properties i) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90oC ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100cm 20 to 40 iii) Ductility at 27oC (Min) in cm 3 iv) Loss on heating, percent Max 1 v) Solubility in CS2, percent Min 99 or Carbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203 : 1978*, IS 1205 : 1978+, IS 1208 : 1978‡ , IS 1212 : 1978§, IS 1216 : 1978//. Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: * Determination of penetration (first revision). + Determ"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5871: 1987",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS58711987_2",
    "text": "IS 5871: 1987 Bitumen Mastic For [Composition]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY ANALYSIS Sl.No. Requirements Percentage by Total Mastic i) Soluble bitumen 15 to 17 ii) Aggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve 42 to 52 iii) Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve 3 to 10 and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve iv) Aggregate passing 600 micron IS Sieve 15 to 25 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v) Aggregate passing 2.36 mm IS Sieve 7 to 20 and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve vi) Aggregate retained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5871: 1987",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Hardness Number",
    "chunk_id": "IS58711987_3",
    "text": "IS 5871: 1987 Bitumen Mastic For [Hardness Number]\nThe hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be between 20 and 50 at 250c. For detailed information, refer to IS 5871 : 1987 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking and damp – proofing (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12027: 1987",
    "title": "Silicone-Based Water Repellents",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Consistency",
    "chunk_id": "IS120271987_1",
    "text": "IS 12027: 1987 Silicone-Based Water Repellents [Consistency]\nThe water repellent shall be of such consistency that it can be readily applicable to masonary by brushing or spraying. 4. Performance Requirement 4.1 Early Water Repellency — Water repellency shall be such that no pool of water shall be completely absorbed within 10 minutes. 4.2 Absorption of Water — The relative absorption of water through treated and untreated faces shall not be more than 10 percent for any one of three test specimens. 4.3 Evaporation of Water — The evaporation ratio of water as determined in Appendix E of the standard shall be not less than 10 percent. 4.4 Durability — When the water repellent is tested as decribed in Appendix F of the standard it shall meet the requirements of 4.1,4.2 and 4.3 after a period of 12 months weathering. Note— For test procedures refer to A"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14695: 1999",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Base Coal",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS146951999_1",
    "text": "IS 14695: 1999 Glass Fibre Base Coal [Scope]\nCovers the requirement for glass fibre base coal tar pitch outerwrap used for corrosion protection of buried mild steel pipelines. 2. Dimensions and Weight 2.1 Dimensions— Glass fibre base outerwrap shall be supplied in width of one metre and in lengths of 100 m. 3.2 Weight — See Table 1. TABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF GLASS FIBRE BASE OUTERWRAPS FOR 10 m2 Untreated Treated Total Weight in Dry Base Base condition Including kg kg Surfacing Material. kg (1) (2) (3) 0.4 4.5 5.5 TAR PITCH OUTER WRAP Note— For test procedure, refer to IS 13826 : 1993 Methods of test for bitumen based felts: (Part 1) Breaking strength test. (Part 2) Pliability test. For detailed information, refer to IS 14695 : 1999 Specification for glass fibre base coal tar pitch outer wrap."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14695: 1999",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Base Coal",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "section": "Other Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS146951999_2",
    "text": "IS 14695: 1999 Glass Fibre Base Coal [Other Requirements]\nSee Table 2 TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF GLASS FIBRE OUTER WRAPS Sl.No. Properties Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Breaking strength a) Wrap 30 in Kg, min b) Weft 15 ii) Pliability after a) Roll shall not conditioning the show cracks on unrolling sample for 3 h at 5 oC. b) Consider any surface repture exceeding 5 mm in length as fracture. 2.1 SECTION 10 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS g CONTENTS Title Page GENERAL"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 775: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Brackets And Supports For Wash-Basins And Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7751970_1",
    "text": "IS 775: 1970 Cast Iron Brackets And Supports For Wash-Basins And Sinks [General]\nIS 775: 1970 Cast Iron Brackets And Supports For Wash-Basins And Sinks (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 782: 1978",
    "title": "Caulking Lead",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7821978_1",
    "text": "IS 782: 1978 Caulking Lead [Scope]\nRequirements for different types of caulking lead suitable for use in water supply and sanitary installations. 2. Type a) Pig Lead — Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines, where it is possible to use cast lead caulking. b) Lead Wool and Lead Yarn – Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines where it is impracticable to use cast lead (such as inverted joints, under water joints, etc.) Such joints will withst and greater displacement than cast lead joints. 3. Material and Quality a) Pig Lead — Shall be of uniform softness and capable of being easily caulked. For detailed information, refer to IS 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision). b) Lead Wool — Free from sulphur. Shall consist of fine strands or plaited ribbons. Section not less than 0.13"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 804: 1967",
    "title": "Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8041967_1",
    "text": "IS 804: 1967 Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks [Scope]\nRequirements for the materials, fabrication, erection and supply for rectangular pressed steel tanks used for the storage of cold and hot water and certain other liquids under pressure not greater than the static head corresponding to the depth of the tank. This specification does not cover the requirements of tanks storing liquids having temperature higher than 100°C, or those tanks subject to earth or other external pressure besides wind pressure. 2. Types Type 1 Tanks with all flanges external. Type 2 Tanks with all flanges internal. Type 3 Tanks with bottom flanges internaland side flanges external. Each of the above types may be either with open top or with covered top. 3. General 3.1 Pressed steel tanks are not recommended for depths greater than 5 m. 3.2 Type 1 tanks are normally us"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 804: 1967",
    "title": "Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS8041967_2",
    "text": "IS 804: 1967 Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks [Tests]\nEach tank shall be tested at site after erec- tion for leakage under full static head. Note — 1. For fabrication and erection, refer to the standard. 2. Refer to Fig 1 of the standard for details of fabrication. 3. For sizes, weights and nominal capacities of tanks and plate thickness refer to Tables 1 to 5 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel tanks (first revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1700: 1973",
    "title": "Drinking Fountains",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17001973_1",
    "text": "IS 1700: 1973 Drinking Fountains [Scope]\nCovers the material, construction, essential hygienic and performance requirements and finish of drinking fountains used in schools, parks and other public places. 2. Materials Sl. No Component Part Material i) Basin or receptacle a) Glazed earthenware b) Vitreousware c) Enamelled cast iron d) Cement concrete with smooth finish e) Stoneware f) Stainless steel ii) Pipe work for jet mechanism a) Brass b) Copper, Solid drawn c) Stainless steel iii) Fittings a) Brass,cast or hot pressed b) Stainless steel iv) Nozzle a) Bronze b) Any other non-oxidizing copperalloy 3. Construction 3.1 Basin or Receptacle — Shall be fixed at such a height that the drinking level is most convenient to persons utilizing the fountain. 3.2 Jet Mechanism — With nozzle mouth not greater than 10 mm diameter or one squa\n[Finish] All metal work shall be chromium plated over a base of nickel plating. Fig. 1 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2963: 1979",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Waste Fittings For Wash-Basins And Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS29631979_1",
    "text": "IS 2963: 1979 Copper Alloy Waste Fittings For Wash-Basins And Sinks [Scope]\nRequirements for materials, manufacture and workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in wash-basins and sinks complying with the prescribed standards. 2. Requirements 2.1 Materials Body — Brass or leaded tin bronze Nut — Brass rod Fordetailed information, refer to IS 2963 : 1979 Specification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (first revision). 2.2 Nominal Sizes – 32 mm for wash basins. 50 mm for sinks Note—For detailed dimensions refer to te figures in the standard. 2.3 Finish — Nickle chromium plated.\n[Materials] Mild Steel sheet conforming to the prescribed standard and having a minimum thickness of 1.60 mm shall be free from lamination and surface cracks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3489: 1985",
    "title": "Enamelled Steel Bath Tubs",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34891985_1",
    "text": "IS 3489: 1985 Enamelled Steel Bath Tubs [Scope]\nRequirements for material, construction and workmanship, patterns, dimensions, tolerances and maintenance for vitreous enamelled steel bath tubs.\n[Pattens] See Fig 1 and Fig. 2. Fig. 1 Bath Tub – Pattern 1 Fig. 2 Bath Tub – Pattern 2 Size1 Size 2 Size 3 Length overall, A 1525 1700 1850 1700 Width overall, B 700 700 700 730 Depth inside (at waste hole), C 440 440 440 430 Roll (at sides), D (see Note) 60-80 60-80 60-80 60-80 Roll (at tap end), E 60-80 60-80 60-80 60-80 Roll (at tap end), F 75-100 75-100 75-100 75-100 Distance of tap holes, centre to centre,G 180 Min 180 Min 180 Min 180 Min Height Overall, H with 35 mm Min seal trap 580 580 580 570 with 70 mm Min seal trap 620 620 620 610 Wast hole - horizontal distance 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min from outside edge of roll at tap end to centre of waste hole, J Overflow centre- vertical 90-105 90-105 90-105 90-105 distance below top edge, K Note— In case of bath tubs pressed from one sheet th"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5219: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Copper Alloys Traps",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS52191969_1",
    "text": "IS 5219: 1969 Cast Copper Alloys Traps [Scope]\nCovers copper alloy cast traps P and S types and their associated components of nominal sizes 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm for use in wash–basins, sinks, bath tubs and similar waste appliances."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5219: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Copper Alloys Traps",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS52191969_2",
    "text": "IS 5219: 1969 Cast Copper Alloys Traps [Materials]\nCastings – Shall be of brass with copper content not less than 56 percent. Pressing – Pressings where used for associated Components shall be forgeable brass with the follow ing composition: Min Max Copper 56.5 60.0 Lead 1.0 2.5 Zinc — Remainder Note— Total impurities not more than 0.75 percent 3. Workmanship and Finish 3.1 Casting shall be sound in all respects, free from blow holes, laps and sand pittings. Both the external and internal surface shall be clean, smooth and free from sand. No casting shall be plugged, stoped or patched. 3.2 The external surface of traps and associated components shall have one of the following finishes— a) Self-colour, free from grease and tool marks; b) Polished; and c) Nickel or chromium plated. 4. Design and Construction Note—Typical illustrations of tra"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8718: 1978",
    "title": "Vitreous Enamelled Steelkitchen Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS87181978_1",
    "text": "IS 8718: 1978 Vitreous Enamelled Steelkitchen Sinks [Tolerances]\nOverall length and width shall not vary by more than +2 percent. Note — Kitchen sinks may be made in other patterns and sizes where mutually agreed.\n[Surface Coating] Interiors of sinks shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of quality complying with requirements given 4.1 to 4.5 of the standard. Atleast one ground or primer coating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating preferably white or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the outer surface. 5.1 Finish — Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform and visually satisfactory . 5.2 Abrasion — shall withstand resisrtance to scratching. 5.3 Alkali Resistance — There shall be no loss in weight after the test. 5.4 Acid Resistancer 5.4.1 White enamelled sinks —There shall be no loss in weight . 5.4.2 Coloured enamelled sinks–Shall conform to classes AA,a and B. 5.5 Defects — Shall be liable to rejection if finish shows any of the following defects: a) Crazing b) Dimples, rund"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8727: 1978",
    "title": "Vitreous Enamelled Steel Wash–Basins",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS87271978_1",
    "text": "IS 8727: 1978 Vitreous Enamelled Steel Wash–Basins [General]\nIS 8727: 1978 Vitreous Enamelled Steel Wash–Basins Note — For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances(second revision), and IS 3972. Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12701: 1996",
    "title": "Rotational Moulded Polyethylene",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS127011996_1",
    "text": "IS 12701: 1996 Rotational Moulded Polyethylene [Finish]\nThe internal and external surface of the water storage tank shall be smooth, clean and free from other hidden internal defects, such as air bubbles, pits and mertallic or other foreign material inclusions. 5. Performance Requirement 5.1 Resistance to deformation – The difference between the circumferiential measurement shall not be greater than 2 percent of the original measurements for cylindrical vertical tanks.The difference between the longitudinal measurements shall not be greater than 3 percent of the original measurements, for rectangular loft tanks. 5.2 Resistance to Impact–The impact shall neither result into cracking nor puncture of the tank. 5.3 Test for Load Resistance —After removal of the load the test specimen shall be inspected for deformation or crack on the surface and af"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12701: 1996",
    "title": "Rotational Moulded Polyethylene",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS127011996_2",
    "text": "IS 12701: 1996 Rotational Moulded Polyethylene [General]\nHole, Hand-Hole Lids 6.1 Man-hole hand-hole lids shall be moulded from polyolefins of moinimum thickness 3 mm and shallhave sufficient ribs to provide adequate stiffness. It shall be stabilized with 2 to ? percent of carbon black having satisfactory dispersions. 6.2 The lid shall fit securely over the top rim of the tank and it shall rest evenly on it in order to prevent the ingress of foreign matter such as insects, mosquitoes or dust through the top of the tank. The lid shall also be provided with suitable locking arrangenment . 6.3 To test the lid being fit securely to the manhole, no clearance in it should permit a 1.6 mm diameter wire to pass through. *Polyethylene for its safe use in contact with Food stuffs, phaunaceuticals and drinking water. For detailed information, refer to IS 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13983: 1994",
    "title": "Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS139831994_1",
    "text": "IS 13983: 1994 Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes [Finish]\nSinks maybe supplied with a bright or dull finish. ° ° °\n[Scope] Requirements for the panels of glass fibre reinforced polyesrter resin (GRP) sectional tanks meant for storing potable water under pressure not exceeding the static head correspondinbg to the depth of the tanks and temperature of exceeding 50°C. GRP panels used in manufacturing tanks as covered in this standard are not compression moulded, using sheet moulding compound (SMC)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13983: 1994",
    "title": "Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS139831994_2",
    "text": "IS 13983: 1994 Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes [Materials]\nShall be composed of unsaturated thermosetting polyester resin (food grade) reinforced with glassfibre. This system will include satalysts and may include pigments (compatible with unsaturated polyester resin) and ultra violet stabilizers. 2.1 Polyester Resin—Shall meet the following characrteristics: a) Specific gravity = 1,13+0.01 at 27°C b) Acid value = 16+4 mg. KOH/g, c) Volatile content = 30 percent +3 percent, d) Gel time at 25°C = 20 to 30 minutes. Cured resin shall also be met with: a) Barcol hardness = 40 BHU min; b) Heat deflection temperature = 80°C to 90°C c) Elongation at break = 1.9 percent,-0+ 25°C d) Water absorption = 1 percent,after 7 day sat 25°C max. 2.1.1 Hydrolysis Test — There shall be no evidence of weight loss (due to break down of the polymer) when tasted as presc"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 407: 1981",
    "title": "Brass Tubes Forgeneral Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Chemical Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS4071981_1",
    "text": "IS 407: 1981 Brass Tubes Forgeneral Purposes [Chemical Composition]\nShall comply with relevant grade of copper as specified in IS 191 (Parts 1 to 10):1980* 7. Physical Properties 7.1 Tensile test TENSILE STRENGTH AND CONSTANT FOR HYDROSTATICTEST .K Condition Tensile Percentage K Strength, Elongation on MPa Gauge Lenght 5.65 So Min Min (1) (2) (3) (4) As drawn(HD) — — 113 i) As such 280 — — ii) Strip cut from tube 250 — — Half Hard (HB) — — 99 i) As such 235 25 — ii) Strip cut from tube 225 25 — Annealed(O) — — 85 i) As such 205 40 — ii) Strip cut — — — from tube 195 45 — The tubes shall also satisfy the following prescribed tests. 7.2 Flattening and Doubling Over test 7.3 Drift Expanding Test 7.4 Non-Destructive testing: a) Eddy-current test b) Hydrostatic test c) Pneumatic test 7.5 Microscopic Examination (for 0 conditononly) 7.6 Hydrogen Embrittlement te"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1230: 1979",
    "title": "Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS12301979_1",
    "text": "IS 1230: 1979 Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings [General]\nround Gutters and Fittings: Nominal size, mm 75 100 125 150 Width, mm 75 100 125 150 Radius, mm 40 50 65 75 Thickness, mm 3 3 3 3 Length of gutters : +13.0 mm Length of gutter fittings : + 3.0 mm Mass : 10 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1230: 1979",
    "title": "Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS12301979_2",
    "text": "IS 1230: 1979 Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings [Freedom From Defects]\nPipes and fittings shall be sound and free from surface and other defects. 4. Tests 4.1 Brinell Hardness Test — The hardness of external unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB. 4.2 Hydrostatic Test — Shall withstand pressure test without showing any leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind. 4.3 Hammer Test— When tested for soundness pipe shall emit a clear ringing sound. 2. Dimensions and Mass 2.1 Pipes and Fittings Length, mm 1800 1800 1800 1800 Minimum weight for 1800 mm length, kg. 5 5.9 7.5 9.1 Nominal Size, mm 50 75 100 125 150 External dia, mm 53 79 104 130 156 Thickness, 3 3 3 3 4 Pipes Projection of spigot bead, mm 1 1 1 1 1 Width of spigot bead, mm 20 20 20 20 20 Length of Width of spigot bead, mm 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 800 Internal dia, mm 63 89 114 139 167 Thickness,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1536: 2001",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS15362001_1",
    "text": "IS 1536: 2001 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Mass]\n(Fourth Revision) Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/ dm3. 4.1 Tolerance on standard mass 5 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1537: 1976",
    "title": "Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS15371976_1",
    "text": "IS 1537: 1976 Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [General]\nIS 1537: 1976 Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage (First Revision) ± HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE FOR FITTINGS Nominal Diameter Test Pressure Fittings without Fittings with Branches or with Branches Branches not Greater than Greater than Half the Half the Principal Principal Diameter Diameter MPa (N/mm2) MPa (N/mm2) Up to and including 300 2.5 (25) 2.5 (25) Over 300 and upto 2.0 (20) 2.0 (20) and including 600 Over 600 and upto 1.5 (15) 1.0 (10) and including 1500 3. Tolerances 3.1 Diameter – 3.3 Length — Type of Fitting Nominal Dia Tolerance mm Socket fittings and Upto and + 20 flange and spigot including pieces 450 Over 450 + 20 - 30 Flanged fittings All diameters 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1538: 1993",
    "title": "Cast Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS15381993_1",
    "text": "IS 1538: 1993 Cast Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Coating]\nWhere coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife. 6. Dimensions 6.1 Sockets and Spigots of Pipes (Lead Joints) Nominal Barrel Internal Diameter Diameter Dia of Socket (DN) (DE) (DI) (mm) (mm) (mm) 80 98 116 100 118 137 125 114 163 150 170 189 200 222 241 250 274 294 300 326 346 350 378 398 400 429 449 450 480 501 500 532 553 600 635 657 700 738 760 750 790 813 800 842 865 900 945 968 1000 1048 1072 1050 1124 1143 1100 1152 1177 1200 1256 1281 1500 1567 1594 Note — Intenal diameter of sockets (DI) given above is applicable to sockets of fittings (lead joint) also. 6.2 Flanges of pipes and fitting inc"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2002: 1979",
    "title": "Sand Cast Iron Spigot And Socket Soil, Waste And Ventilating Pipes, Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Weight",
    "chunk_id": "IS20021979_1",
    "text": "IS 2002: 1979 Sand Cast Iron Spigot And Socket Soil, Waste And Ventilating Pipes, Fittings And Accessories [Weight]\nDensity of cast iron taken as 7.15 kg/dm3 Tolerance : 10 percent.\n[Coating] Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77°C but not so brittle at 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. 3.8 Inverted Branches, Socket and SpigotType— Nominal Size θ Bend Main Pipe 50 100 100 950, 112½0 , 1800 Branch Pipe 50 100 50 3.9 Trap Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.10 Oval Access Doors Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.11 Diminishing Pieces Large Diameter 50 75 100 100 3.12 Straight Inspection Pieces Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.13 Loose Sockets and Collars Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.14 Cast Iron Holderbats Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.15 Ware Balloons Galvanished Steel or Copper Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.16 Sanitary connection 3.16.1 Socket to Fit WC Outlet Nominal"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1879: 1987",
    "title": "Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Compression Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS18791987_1",
    "text": "IS 1879: 1987 Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings [Compression Test]\nShall satisfy the prescribed test. For detailed information, refer to IS 1879 : 1987 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe fittings (second revision).\n[Scope] Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with the details of the fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Shall be capable of being cut with the tools normally used for installation. 3. Tests 3.1 Hardness — not greater than 230 HBS. 3.2 Soundness — When tested for soundness by striking with a light hand hammer, shall emit a clear ringing sound. 3.3 Hydrostatic Test— When hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 0.07 MPa (N/mm2) for 15 seconds the pipes and fittings shall not show any sign of leakage, sweating or other defects of any kind. The test shall be conducted after surface coating."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1879: 1987",
    "title": "Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS18791987_2",
    "text": "IS 1879: 1987 Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings [Sizes]\nNominal Diameter DN, of pipes and fittings are 50, 75, 100 and 150. 4.1 Socket and Spigot Pipes Nominal Diameter 50 75 100 150 Barrel Ext. Dia 57 83 109 161 Internal Dia. of Socket73 99 126 179 Joint thickness 8 8 8.5 9 Length of pipes 1,000 1,500 1,800 2,000 2,500 3,000 4.2 Bends With and Without Access Doors Nominal Dia Angle of Bend 50 75 100 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 4.3 Equal and Unequal Branches With and Without Access door a) Equal Branch Angle θ Nominal Dia 50 75 100 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 b) Unequal Branches Nominal Dia Angle Body Branch 75 50 100 50 100 75 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 100 4.4 Nominal Dia Offsets 50 75 100 75, 115 and 150. 150 4.5 Taper Nominal Diameter Spigot Socket DN dn 75 50 100 50 100 75 150 100 4.6 Access Door — See Table 8 of the Standard. 4.7 Collars Nomin"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3989: 1984",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS39891984_1",
    "text": "IS 3989: 1984 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories [Tolerances]\nTolerances on external diameter of the barrel, internal diameter of the socket and the depth of the socket shall be as follows – (see figures of Table 1 of the Standard). Dimensions Nominal Tolerance Tolerance Diameter Lead Rubber DN Joint Joint (mm) (mm) (mm) i) External diameter 50, 75 3.0 + 3.0 of barrel, DE – 0 100 3.5 + 3.5 – 0 150 4.0 + 4.0 – 0 ii) Internal diameter All diameters 3.0 + 3.0 of socket, DI – 0 iii) Depth of socket, P All diameters 10 10 The tolerance on length of pipes shall be 20 mm. The tolerances on dimensioins of fittings shall be as given below Note–For details on tolerances, refer 7 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3989: 1984",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS39891984_2",
    "text": "IS 3989: 1984 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories [Mass]\nSpecific mass of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Toterance on mass –10 prercent. 7. Coating 7.1 In all cases where the coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. 7.2 Coating shall not be applied to any pipe or fitting unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. Note— For detailed dimensions and body sketches refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3989 : 1984 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision). θ θ ± ± ± ± ± ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3989: 1984",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS39891984_3",
    "text": "IS 3989: 1984 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories [Scope]\nRequirements for materials used for vulcanized solid rubber sealing rings for water supply and drainage systems, drain pipes, sewers and rainwater pipes, all at ambient temerature including gas connections. It covers joint rings for all pipeling materials including iron, steel, stonewares, asbestos-cement, concrete, pitch fibre, plastics and glass reinforced plastics. This standard does not cover dimensional and joint design requirements."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3989: 1984",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Types",
    "chunk_id": "IS39891984_4",
    "text": "IS 3989: 1984 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories [Types]\nSix types, 1 to 6 corresponding to the respective nominal hardness of 40,50,60,70,80 and 88 IRHD. 3. Requirements 3.1 Material — The rubber shall be free from extractable substances which impart taste, odour or toxicity to water. If the pipe is to convey drinking water."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53821985_1",
    "text": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers [General]\nIS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers (First Revision) 3.2 Finish — The rings shall be homogeneous; free from porosity, grit, excessive blooms, blisters or other visible surface imperfections. The fin or flash shall be reduced as much as possible and in any case the thickness of it shall be reduced as much as possible and in any case the thickness of it shall not exceed 0.4 mm and the width 0.8 mm. 3.3 Stretch Test — Stretch gaskets till the circumference is increased by 50 percent, then visually inspect for the following. The surface of the gasket shall be smooth, free from pitting, cracks, blisters, air marks and any other inperfection that may affect its behaviour in service. The body of the gasket shall be free from porosity and air pockets. 3.4 Physical Requirements— See Tables 1 and 2 TABLE 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SL. NO."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53821985_2",
    "text": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers [General]\nthe gasket shall be smooth, free from pitting, cracks, blisters, air marks and any other inperfection that may affect its behaviour in service. The body of the gasket shall be free from porosity and air pockets. 3.4 Physical Requirements— See Tables 1 and 2 TABLE 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SL. NO. CHARACTERISTICS REQUIREMENTS Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Hardness in IRHD 40 ± 5 50 ± 5 60 ± 5 70 ± 5 80 ± 4 88 ± 3 ii) Compression set, percent, Max for 24 h at 70 ± 1°C 25 25 25 25 25 25 – 2 for 72 +0 h at 70 ± 1°C 12 12 12 12 15 15 – 2 iii) Ageing, maximum change for unaged values after 7 days in air at 70oC a) Hardness in IRHD –5 to+ 8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5to + 8 b) Tensile strength, percent 20 20 20 20 20 20 c) Elongation at break, percent –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53821985_3",
    "text": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers [General]\n8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5 to + 8 –5to + 8 b) Tensile strength, percent 20 20 20 20 20 20 c) Elongation at break, percent –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 iv) Water immersion change in volume –0 to+ 8 – 0 to + 8 –0 to + 8 –0 to + 8 –0 to + 8 –0 to + 8 after immersion in neutral water for 7 days at 70oC v) Cold resistance, increase in hardness +5 +5 +5 +5 +5 +5 after 72 hours at 0oC, Max vi) Splice strength, elongation imposed, 100 100 100 100 100 100 percent, Max TABLE 2 TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION FOR DIFFERENT TYPES SL. NO."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53821985_4",
    "text": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers [General]\nin neutral water for 7 days at 70oC v) Cold resistance, increase in hardness +5 +5 +5 +5 +5 +5 after 72 hours at 0oC, Max vi) Splice strength, elongation imposed, 100 100 100 100 100 100 percent, Max TABLE 2 TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION FOR DIFFERENT TYPES SL. NO. POLYMER USED REQUIREMENTS Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Natural rubber (NR) and Isoprene rubber (IR) a) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min 18 18 17 15 11 6 b) Elongation at break, percent, Min 450 450 375 250 175 100 ii) Butadiene-styrene rubber (SBR) a) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min 12 13 14 13 11 8 b) Elongation at break, percent, Min 450 425 400 300 250 150 iii) Ethylene propyiene rubber (EPM) a) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min 11 11 11 11 9 8 b) Elogngation at break, percent Min. 450 400 325 200 125 100 Note — For methods of tests refer to the relevant parts of IS 3400 Methods of test for vulcanised rubber and Appendices B and C of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53821985_5",
    "text": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers [General]\nstrength, MPa, percent, Min 11 11 11 11 9 8 b) Elogngation at break, percent Min. 450 400 325 200 125 100 Note — For methods of tests refer to the relevant parts of IS 3400 Methods of test for vulcanised rubber and Appendices B and C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5382 :1985 Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision). 3.5Water Absorption — shall not absorb more than 10 percent. 3.6 Optional Requirements a) Low temperature Applications b) Streess relaxation in compressions"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5531: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS55311988_1",
    "text": "IS 5531: 1988 Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron specials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 1.2 Applicable to cast iron specials for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement couplings."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5531: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS55311988_2",
    "text": "IS 5531: 1988 Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Materials]\nAs per the psrescribed standard 3. Mechanical Tests 3.1 Tensile Strength — Min. 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness— Not to exceed 215 HBS. 4. Hydrostatic Test 4.1 Shall withstand (without showing leakage, sweating or other defects) the test pressure, maintained for atleast 15 seconds, as specified in IS 1592 : 1989 for the class of asbestos cement pressure pipes with which they are to be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5531: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS55311988_3",
    "text": "IS 5531: 1988 Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Dimensions]\n(mm) 5.1 Cast Iron Plain and Bends Nominal Dia 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Bend Angle 900, 450, 22½0, and 11¼0 5.2 Cast Iron Plain and Bends Nominal Dia 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 Length 125, 130, 135, 140, 150, 153, 160, 165, 170. Nominal Dia 450, 500, 600 Length 175, 180, 185 5.3 Cast Iron Plain and Reducers Nominal Dia Nominal Dia (Large end) (Small end) 100 80 125 80,100 150 80, 100, 125 200 100, 125, 150 225 125,150, 200 250 80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250 300 80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250, 300 350 200, 250, 300, 350 400 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 500 250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500 600 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 5.4 Cast Iron Crosses Nominal Dia 80,100,125,150,250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 5.5 Cast Iron Plain and Flanged Spigots— Nominal Dia 80, 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6163: 1978",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS61631978_1",
    "text": "IS 6163: 1978 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Scope]\nRequirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for conveyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. 1.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having spigots and sockets as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability. 2. Mechanical Tests 2.1 Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds) Up to and including Modulus of Rupture 300 mm nominal dia. 40 kgf/mm2, Min 2.2 Tensile Test 2.2.1 Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds Nominal Dia Tensile Strength Min Over 300 mm and\n[Tests] Hardness of external unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6163: 1978",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydrostatic Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS61631978_2",
    "text": "IS 6163: 1978 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Hydrostatic Test]\nShall withstand test pressure of 17.5 kf/cm2 without showing leakage, sweating or other defects, when kept under pressure for 15 seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure of 6 kgf/cm2 after installation. Note — For method of test refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brimell hardness test for metallic materials(second revision) For detailed information, Refer to IS 6163 : 1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 6. Tolerances a) External diameter of barrel ½f = + (4.5+0.0015 dn) mm b) Internal diameter of socket ½f = + (3+0.001 dn) mm c) Depth of socket Nominal dia up to 600 mm — 5 mm Nominal dia over 600 mm — 10 mm d) Length — 25 mm e) Wall thickness — (1 + 0.05 e) mm f) Maximum deviation from straight line (in mm) shall not"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6163: 1978",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS61631978_3",
    "text": "IS 6163: 1978 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Coating]\nWhere coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow at temperature of 77°C and not so brittle as to chip off at 0°C when scribed lightly with a penknife. When pipes are used for conveying potable water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to the potable water after sterilization and washing of the mains. ± ± ± ± ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6418: 1971",
    "title": "Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Pressure And Temperature Rating",
    "chunk_id": "IS64181971_1",
    "text": "IS 6418: 1971 Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron [Pressure And Temperature Rating]\nTable1 Nominal Typeof Material Design Pressure (N/mm2) at Temperature °C Pressure N/mm2 Cast Iron Malleable –10 150 180 200 220 250 260 300 Cast Iron to 120 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (29) (30) (31) 0.25 15 — 0.25 — — — — — — — 20 — 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.60 15 — 0.60 — — — — — — — 20 — 0.60 0.56 0.52 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.43 0.36 IS : 2107 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50 IS : 2108 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.0 15 — 1.0 — — — — — — — 20 — 1.0 0.92 0.85 0.80 0.80 0.70 0.68 0.60 1.6 20 — 1.60 1.48 1.39 1.30 1.30 1.10 1.08 1.00 — IS : 2107 1.60 1.48 1.52 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.30 — IS : 2108 1.60 1.56 1.52 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.30 2.5 25 — 2.50 2.30 2.12 2.00 1.80 1.80 1.75 1.60 — IS : 2107 2.50 2.30 2.35 2.30 2.20 2.10 2.08 2.00 — IS : 2108 2.50 2.42 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6418: 1971",
    "title": "Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS64181971_2",
    "text": "IS 6418: 1971 Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron [Designation]\nBy nominal size and flange table reference. First part of the table reference is nominal pressure and the second part indicates the material and type of flange as follows a) Grey cast iron— intergral (1) b) Malleable cast iron—integral (2) c) Malleable cast iron — screwed boss (3) TABLE 1 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GRLY AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES For detailed information, refer to IS 6418 : 1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes. Note 2 – For typical illustration of “Integral Flange” and “Screwed Boss Flange “See Figures 1and 2 of the standard. Note 3 – For detailed dimensions see Table 2 to 12 of the standard. 4. Flange Facing a) Smooth — With no visible tool marks, or b) Serrated — With a continuous sprial groove of 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6418: 1971",
    "title": "Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydraulic Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS64181971_3",
    "text": "IS 6418: 1971 Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron [Hydraulic Test]\nTest pressure applied to the joint shall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure for flanges. Table 7 1.6/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure — 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 1000 mm Table 8 1.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 150 mm Table 9 1.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 6 to 150 mm Table 10 2.5/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 500 mm Table 11 2.5/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 150 mm Table 12 2.5/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 6 to 150 mm Note 1— Nominal sizes are 6, 8, 10, 15, 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7181: 1986",
    "title": "Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS71811986_1",
    "text": "IS 7181: 1986 Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Scope]\nSpecifies the requirements and associated test methods applicable to ductile iron pipes manufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand moulds and their joints for the construction of pipe lines : — to convey water, sewage or gas — to be installed below or above ground — operated with or without pressure. 1.2. This standard also specifies requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, mechanical properties and standard coatings and linings of ductile iron pipes. 1.3 The standard applies to pipes, which are — Manufactured with socketted, flanged or spigot ends for jointing by means of various types of gaskets, which are not with in the scope of this standard and normally to be delivered externally and internally lined and are suitable for fluid temperatures between 0°C and 50°C, ex"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8329: 2000",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Rubber Gasket",
    "chunk_id": "IS83292000_1",
    "text": "IS 8329: 2000 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Rubber Gasket]\nAs per IS 5382 : 1985 for push on joints and mechanical joints, and as per IS 638: 1979 for flanged joints. 5. Tests 5.1. Tensile and Elongation Nominal Minimum Minimum Diameter Tensile Elongation (dn) mm Strength at Break, MPa Percent 80 – 1000 420 10 1000 – 2000 420 7 5.2. Brindl hardness shall not exceed 230 HB. 5.3. Hydrostatic test *Rubber sealing rings for Water, Mains, Gas and Sewer (first revision). ++Sheet rubber jointing and Rubber insertion jointing (second Revision)\n[Tolerances] See 15 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8329: 2000",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS83292000_2",
    "text": "IS 8329: 2000 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Coating]\nAny one of the following protection may be applied depending upon the external condition of use : Metallic zinc with finishing layer. Zinc rich paint with finishing layer, bituminous paint. For detailed information, refer to IS 8329:2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron, pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8794: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS87941988_1",
    "text": "IS 8794: 1988 Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*.\n[Metal] As per the prescribed standard. 3. Requirements 3.1 Brinells hardness — Not to exceed 215 HBS. 3.2 Tensile strength — Min. of 150 MPa. 3.3 Hydrostatic test — It should not show any leakage, or sweating or any other defect under a test pressure as per IS : 1592-1989 maintained for minimum of 15 seconds. 4. Dimensions for Flanges and Collars Nominal Class External Dia Dia of AC Pipe dn D2 (1) (2) (3) 80 5,10,15 99.5 20 101.5 25 106.5 100 5,10 120.0 15 121.0 20 126.5 25 132.5 125 5,10 145.0 15 147.0 20 152.5 25 159.5 150 5,10 171.0 15 176.5 20 183.0 25 191.0 200 5 221.0 10 225.0 15 233.5 20 242.5 25 253.5 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES (First Revision) Nominal Class External Dia Dia of AC Pipe dn D2 (1) (2) (3) 250 5 271.0 10 276.5 15 284.5 20 294.5 25 305.5 300 5 322.5 10 328.5 15 340.5 20 3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9523: 2000",
    "title": "Ductile Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS95232000_1",
    "text": "IS 9523: 2000 Ductile Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [General]\nIS 9523: 2000 Ductile Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage (First Revision) *Iron castings with spheroidal modular or modular graphite (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10292: 1988",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS102921988_1",
    "text": "IS 10292: 1988 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber [Scope]\nSpecifies the dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS 8794 : 1988* for joining the asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989+. This standard covers the dimensions of rubber sealing rings having circular cross section only, up to 600 mm nominal diameter.\n[General] Requirements of rubbr sealing rings as specified in IS 5382 : 1985, shall be complied with. The rubber rings shall conform to type 3 of IS 5382 : 1985."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10292: 1988",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS102921988_2",
    "text": "IS 10292: 1988 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber [Dimensions]\nSee Table SEALING RINGS FOR C I D. JOINTS IN ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPING (First Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER SEALING RINGS Nominal Dia of Class Inner Dia Cross Sectional Number Pipe and Joint Y Dia X Per Set mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) ( 5) 80 5,10,15,20 90 14 2 25 90 14 2 100 5,10,15,20 109 14 2 25 115 14 2 125 5,10,15,20 131 14 2 25 138 14 2 150 5,10,15,20 155 14 2 25 165 14 2 200 5,10,15,20 201 14 2 25 219 14 2 250 5,10,15,20 246 14 2 25 264 14 2 300 5,10,15,20 293 14 2 25 316 14 2 350 5,10,15,20 345 16 2 25 362 16 2 400 5,10,15,20 392 16 2 25 412 16 2 450 5,10,15,20 438 18 2 25 459 18 2 500 5,10,15,20 487 20 2 25 510 20 2 600 5,10,15,20 585 20 2 25 613 20 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10292: 1988",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS102921988_3",
    "text": "IS 10292: 1988 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber [Tolerances]\nA tolerance of ± mm shall be allowed on the cross sectional dia. *Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision) +Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 10292 : 1988. Specification for dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings for C I D joints in asbestos cement piping (first revision). *Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision) 5.0 0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10299: 1982",
    "title": "Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS102991982_1",
    "text": "IS 10299: 1982 Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron saddle piece for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*\n[Metal] As per the prescribed standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 10299 : 1982 Specification for cast iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes. CONNECTION FROM ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES 3. Tests"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10299: 1982",
    "title": "Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS102991982_2",
    "text": "IS 10299: 1982 Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service [Tests]\nMinimum 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HB. 4. Dimensions see Table 1 TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SADDLE PIECES Nominal Thickness of Width of Boss Boss Tapping Mass Diameter Saddle or Saddle or Diameter Thickness Size of Pipe Strap Strap (DN) (t) (b) (d) (t1) Max Kg (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 80 11 38 60 13 25 1.7 100 11 42 65 13 25 2.0 125 11 45 75 13 25 2.5 150 12 45 75 14 37 3.0 200 12 45 85 14 37 3.9 * Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision) 5. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances mm Cored holes and other 2 dimensions Drilled holes 1.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10299: 1982",
    "title": "Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS102991982_3",
    "text": "IS 10299: 1982 Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service [Mass]\nShall be calculated by taking the density of the cast iron as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance shall be –5 percent. No unit for plus tolerance is specified. 7. Coating 7.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. 7.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12820: 2004",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS128202004_1",
    "text": "IS 12820: 2004 Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber [Scope]\nSpecifies the dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets to be used in cast iron pipes/fittings for the mechnical joints and push-on flexible joints for carrying water, gas and sewage.\n[Requirement For Gaskets] As per IS 5382 : 1985*. 3. Quality TABLE 1 TYPE OF RUBBER AND HARDNESS Joint Type of Rubber* Hardness IRHD Mechanical Joint 4 60 ± 5 — Bulb 2 50 ± 5 Push-on-joint — Heel5 80 4 + Refer to Table 1 of IS 5382 : 1985"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12820: 2004",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS128202004_2",
    "text": "IS 12820: 2004 Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber [Dimensions]\nRefer to the Figs. in the Standard. See Tables 2 and 3 . GASKETS FOR MECHANICAL JOINTS AND PUSH-ON JOINTS FOR USE WITH CAST IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR CARRYING WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE (First Revision) TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER GASKETS FOR MECHANICAL JOINT All dimensions in millimetres. Nominal Dimensions Diameter DN N Q R T U V (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 80 130 98 32 10 16 6 100 150 118 32 10 16 6 125 176 144 32 10 16 6 150 202 170 35 10 16 6 200 254 222 35 10 16 6 250 308 274 35 10 17 6 300 360 326 35 10 17 6 350 416 378 40 10 19 8 400 467 429 40 10 19 8 450 518 480 40 10 19 8 500 570 532 45 10 20 8 600 675 635 45 10 20 8 700 788 738 45 10 25 8 750 840 790 45 10 25 8 800 892 842 45 15 25 8 900 995 945 45 15 25 8 1000 1098 1048 45 15 25 8 1050 1184 1124 50 15 30 10 1100 1220 1152 55 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12987: 1991",
    "title": "Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS129871991_1",
    "text": "IS 12987: 1991 Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With [Scope]\nCovers the requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) conforming to IS 9627:1980.*\n[Metal] Prescribed Standard 3. Tests Requirements. 3.1 Tensile Strength — Minimum of 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HBs. 3.3 Hydrostatic test—May be carried out for collars only. The collars shall withstand the test pressure specified in Table 1 of IS 9627 : 1980 for 15 Seconds without showing any leakage, sweating or other defects. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Nominal Dia — 50, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200 mm with classes 5 and 10 for each Dia. for flanges and collars. ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES (LIGHT DUTY) Note — Nominal diameter of detachable joint shall refer to the corresponding nominal diameter of the asbestos cement pressure pipes. 5. Coatings 5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust 5.2 All cast iron parts shall be coated exter"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12988: 1991",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS129881991_1",
    "text": "IS 12988: 1991 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber [Scope]\nSpecifies the dimensional requirement for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS : 12987 : 1991* for joining light duty asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS : 9627 1980* 2. General 2.1 The rubber sealing rings shall conform to the general requirement and type 3 of IS 5382:1985++ 3. Dimensions SEALING RINGS FOR CID JOINTS FOR LIGHT DUTY AC PIPES – DIMENSIONAL REQUIREMENTS For detailed information, refer to IS 12988 : 1991 Specification for rubber sealing rings for CID joints for light duty AC pipes–Dimensional requirements. * Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision). † Asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty). ‡ Cast Iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (Light Duty). Nom"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13382: 2004",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS133822004_1",
    "text": "IS 13382: 2004 Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron special castings to be used with pressure pipes for carrying water, gas and sewage for sizes from DN 80 mm up to 1 500 mm cast iron and ductile iron.\n[This Standard Is Applicable To Fittings Meant For Mechanical Joints (Bolted Gland), Push] on-joints (single rubber gasket) and flanged joints."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13382: 2004",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Metal",
    "chunk_id": "IS133822004_2",
    "text": "IS 13382: 2004 Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And [Metal]\nShall conform to appropiate grade of IS 210 : 1993* 3. Joints 3.1 In case of push-on joints the spigot ends of pipes and fittings shall be suitably chamfered for smooth entry of pipe in the socket of the casting fitted with rubber gasket. 3.2 In case of flange and mechanical joint castings, the flanges shall be at right angle to the axis of the joint. The bolt holes shall be cored or drilled. PUSH ON FLEXIBLE JOINTS FOR PRESSURE PIPE LINES FOR WATER, GAS AND SEWAGE (First revision) 3.3 The bolt hole circles shall be concentric with the bore and shall be located off the centre line, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. Where there are two or more flanges, the bolt holes shall be correctly aligned. 3.4 The flanges shall be plain faced over the contact surface with a tool mark finishi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13382: 2004",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Rubber Gaskets",
    "chunk_id": "IS133822004_3",
    "text": "IS 13382: 2004 Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And [Rubber Gaskets]\nShall conform to IS 12820 : 1989+ 5. Tests Requirement 5.1 Tensile Test — Minimum 150 MPa. 5.2 Hardness Test — Not more than 210 HBS. 5.3 Hydrostatic Test — shall not show leakage, sweating or any other defect, under test pressures given below and maintained for 15 s. Nominal Test Presure Diameter dn Castings without Branches Castings with Branches or with Branches not Greater Greater than Half the than Half the Principal Dia Principal Diameter mm MPa MPa (1) (2) (3) Up to and including 300 2.5 2.5 Over 300 and upto 2.0 2.0 and including 600 Over 600 and upto 1.5 1.0 and including 1 500 * Grey iron castings (fourth revision) †Dimensional requirements of rubber gaskets and push-on joints for use with cast iron pipes and fittings for carrying water, gas and sewage. ± For detailed information"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13382: 2004",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Sizes Nominal Diameter Of The Casting",
    "chunk_id": "IS133822004_4",
    "text": "IS 13382: 2004 Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And [Sizes Nominal Diameter Of The Casting]\n80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700,750, 800, 900,1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500. Note — 1 For dimensional and other requirements for socket/ spigot of push on joints mechanicaljoints and flanges see section 2 = ( Tables 5 to10) of the standard. Note — 2 For dimensional and other requirements for castings see section 3 (Tables 11 to 34) of the standard. 7. Tolerances 7.1 Tolerances on Thickness —Tolerances on wall thickness and flange thickness of fittings are limited as follows : Dimensions Tolerances mm Wall thickness -(2+0.05 e) Flange thickness (3+0.05b) Where e = standard thickness of the wall in millimetres, and b = standard thickness of the flanges in millimetres. Note — No limit for the plus tolerances is specified. 7.2 Tolerances on Lengths — Toler"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11925: 1986",
    "title": "Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS119251986_1",
    "text": "IS 11925: 1986 Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes [Scope]\nCovers materials, dimension and methods of testing of pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings in diametrs ranging from 50 to 200 mm for drainage purposes below and above ground level. 1.2 The standard also covers perforated pipes of the same materials for sub-surface drainage. 2. Material 2.1 Pipes shall consist of a preformed felted fibrous structure impregnated, with pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable compound. 2.2 Couplings and fittings shall be made of : a) The same material as the pipe, or b) Polypropylene or other plastics material no less suitable, or c) Mineral fibre moulded from an inert aggregate mixed with an inorganic cement and impregnated with pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable material. 3. General 3.1 Pipes 3.1.1 Length —Between 1.5 to 3.5 m with a tolerance o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11925: 1986",
    "title": "Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Fittings",
    "chunk_id": "IS119251986_2",
    "text": "IS 11925: 1986 Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes [Fittings]\nShall be either moulded to shape, or fabricated from pipe prior to impregnation. 5.2 Polypropylene fittings shall be black and consist of polypropylene polymer or copolymer composed principally of isotatic polypropylene together with suitably compounded stabilizers, lubricants and fillers. 5.3 Body Wall Thickness of Polypropylene Fittings— Nominal Bore, mm Minimum thickness 50 75 100 125 150 200 225 below ground work 3.5 3.5 4.0 5.2 5.2 7.0 7.0 Minimum thickness 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 above ground work ± ± Note—"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS404Part11993_1",
    "text": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993 Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of lead pipes for other than chemical purposes. The lead pipes covered in this standard are not suitable for potable water supply. 2. Freedom from Defects: Shall be sound in all respect and free from laminations, flaws, pronounced extrusion marks or other harmful defects and shall, as far as possible, be circular in cross section, smooth and of uniform wall thickness throughout. 3. Chemical Composition Chemical Composition of Lead Pipes Constituent Grade 1 Grade 2 Percent Percent (1) (2) (3) Lead, Min 99.80 99.25 Antimony, Max 0.06 0.10 Copper, Max — 0.07 Tellurium, Max 0.005 — Tin, Max 0.075 0.50 Zinc, Max — 0.005 Total of all impurities Max 0.20 0.75 4. Nominal Diameters (internal) 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80,100 and 125 mm. 5. Thickness 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Drift Expansion Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS404Part11993_2",
    "text": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993 Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes [Drift Expansion Test]\nShall meet the requirements specified below Drift Expanding Test Nominal Upto Angle of Minimum ID mm and Mandrel Expansion Over Including Degree in OD Percent (1) (2) (3) (4) 10 15 23 100 15 25 35 100 25 — 35 75 For detailed information, refer to IS 404 (Part) : 1993 Specification for lead pipes–for other than chemical purposes (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3076: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30761985_1",
    "text": "IS 3076: 1985 Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for low density black polyethylene pipes of outside diameters up to 140 mm for use in potable water supplies. 2. Classification Class of Pipe WorkingPressure at 27°C Class 1 0.25 MPa Class 2 0.4 MPa Class 3 0.6 MPa Class 4 1.0 MPa Note — The above pipes are recomended for water temperature ranging from –40oC to +38oC. The crecp rupture shergth of the pipe diminishes with the increase in temperature above 20oC and therefor the working pressure should be modified as gives in figure of the wtameland. 3. Material 3.1 The low density polyethylene shall have a base density (virgin polymer) of not more than 0.928 g/ml at 27°C. DIMENSION OF LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES All dimensionsin millimetres Outside Tolerance Diameter on Outside Wall Thickness for Working Pressures Diameter Cl"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3076: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Visual Appearance",
    "chunk_id": "IS30761985_2",
    "text": "IS 3076: 1985 Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies [Visual Appearance]\nThe internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean, and free from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe. 6. Performance Requirements 6.1 Hydraulic Characteristics— When subjected to internal pressure creep rupture test the pipe shall show no signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not rupture during the prescribed test duration. The temperatures, durations of test and stresses for quality and acceptance tests shall be as given in Table 2. Note — For melthod of test refer to 6 of the Standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3076 : 1985 Specification for low density, polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies. (second revision). 6.2 Reversion Test— The dimension shall not change\n[Supply Of Pipes] The pipes shall be supplied on coil of nominal lengths 25, 50, 100, 150 and 200 m."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4984: 1995",
    "title": "High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS49841995_1",
    "text": "IS 4984: 1995 High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply [Classification]\nShall be classified by pressure ratings (working pressure at 270C . Class of Pipe Working Pressure (PN) Class 1 0.25 MPa (2.5kg/cm2) Class 2 0.4 MPa (4.0 kg/cm2) Class 3 0.6 MPa (6.0 kg/cm2) Class 4 0.8 MPa (8.0 kg/cm2) Class 5 1.0 MPa (10.0 kg/cm2) Class 6 1.25 MPa (12.5kg/cm2) Note— The above pipes are recommended for water temperature ranging from + 1 to 450C, The recommended maximum safe working stress for these pipes is 8.6 MPa at 270C. At higher temperature upto 450C the strength of pipes reduce and working pressure shall be modified in accordance with fig1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4984: 1995",
    "title": "High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS49841995_2",
    "text": "IS 4984: 1995 High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply [Composition]\nMaterial shall consist substantially of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride to which maybe added additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of pipe and production of sound and durable pipe of good surface finish mechanical strength and opacity. The monomer consent (VCM) in the resin shall be within the links of IS 10151:1982* 4. Dimension 4.1 Dimensions of UPVC Pipes:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4985: 2000",
    "title": "Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS49852000_1",
    "text": "IS 4985: 2000 Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies [General]\nIS 4985: 2000 Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies (Third Revision) DIMENSION OF UPVC PIPES Nominal outside Mean outside Diameter mm Diameter mm Min Max 20 20.0 20.3 25 25.0 25.3 32 32.0 32.3 40 40.0 40.3 50 50.0 50.3 63 63.0 63.3 75 75.0 75.3 90 90.0 90.3 110 110.0 110.4 125 125.0 125.4 140 140.0 140.5 160 160.0 160.5 180 180.0 180.6 200 200.0 200.6 225 225.0 225.8 280 280.0 280.9 315 315.0 316.0 335 355.0 356.1 400 400.0 401.2 450 450.0 451.2 500 500.0 501.5 560 560.0 561.7 630 630.0 631.9 4.2 Dimensions of UPVC Plain End Pipe for Plumbing in Buildings Nominal Outside Mean Outside Diameter, mm Diameter mm Min Max 20 20.0 20.3 25 25.0 25.3 32 32.0 32.3 40 40.0 40.3 50 50.0 50.3 Note— For detailed dimensions including wall thickness of all classes of pipes and tolerances refer to 7 of the standard. 5. Physical and Chemical Characteristics 5.1 Visual Appearance: The colour of pipes shall be light grey. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth clean and free from grooving and other defects."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4985: 2000",
    "title": "Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS49852000_2",
    "text": "IS 4985: 2000 Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies [General]\nwall thickness of all classes of pipes and tolerances refer to 7 of the standard. 5. Physical and Chemical Characteristics 5.1 Visual Appearance: The colour of pipes shall be light grey. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth clean and free from grooving and other defects. 5.2 Opacity – Wall of the plain pipe shall not transit more than 0.2 percent of the visible light falling on it. + Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and its copoplymers for use in contact with food stuffs, pharmaceuticals and drinking water 5.3 Effect on Water — Pipes shall not have any detrimental effect on composition of water flowing through them. When tested toxic substances extracted from internal walls of the pipes shall not exceed the concentrations in the test solution as given in 10.3 of the standard. 5.4 Reversion Test — A length of pipe 200±20 mm long shall not alter in length by more than 5 percent. 5.5 Vicat Softening Temperature —Shall not be less than 800C. 5.6 Density—Shall be between 1.40 and 1.46 g/cm3 5.7 Sulphated Ash content— Shall not exceed 11 percent. 6. Mechanical properties 6.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics—Shall not fail during the prescibed test duration."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4985: 2000",
    "title": "Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS49852000_3",
    "text": "IS 4985: 2000 Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies [General]\nshall not alter in length by more than 5 percent. 5.5 Vicat Softening Temperature —Shall not be less than 800C. 5.6 Density—Shall be between 1.40 and 1.46 g/cm3 5.7 Sulphated Ash content— Shall not exceed 11 percent. 6. Mechanical properties 6.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics—Shall not fail during the prescibed test duration. 6.2 Resistance to external blows at 00C shall have a true impact rate of not more than 10 percent. Note — For methods of measurements and tests, refer to IS 6307 : 1987 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision) relevant parts of IS 12235 : 1986. Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies, IS1 3360 (Part 3/ sec 1): 1995 Plastics Methods of testing, Part 3 Physical and dimensional properties, Section 1 Determination of density and relative density of noncellular plastics For detailed information, refer to IS 4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834: 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS78341987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834: 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Scope]\nGeneral requirements regarding materials, manufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded PVC socket fittings intended for connection, by using solvent cement, to PVC pipes covered by"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834: 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS78341987_2",
    "text": "IS 7834: 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Materials]\nShall substantially consist of polyvinyl chloride, to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound pipe of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity. 3. Size of Fitting 3.1 Shall be designated by the diameters of their sockets. The inside diameters of the sockets of the fittings shall correspond to the outside diameters of the pipes given in IS 4985 : 2000*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834: 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Socket Length And Diameter At Mid",
    "chunk_id": "IS78341987_3",
    "text": "IS 7834: 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Socket Length And Diameter At Mid]\nPoint of Socket Length. 5.1 Minimum socket length (L) of any fitting shall be = 0.5 D + 6 mm (subject to a minimum of 12 mm) where D is the nominal inside diameter of fittings. * Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision). TABLE 1 - SOCKET DIMENSIONS Nominal Minimum Mean Socket Internal Size Socket Diameter at Mid-Point Length of Socket Length Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) 16 14 16.1 16.3 20 16 20.1 20.3 25 19 25.1 25.3 32 22 32.1 32.3 40 26 40.1 40.3 50 31 50.1 50.3 63 38 63.1 63.3 75 44 75.1 75.3 90 51 90.1 90.3 110 61 110.1 110.4 125 69 125.1 125.4 140 76 140.1 140.5 160 86 160.2 160.5 180 96 180.2 180.5 200 106 200.3 200.6 225 118.5 225.3 225.7 250 131.0 250.4 250.8 280 146.0 280.4 280.9 315 163.5 315.4 316.0 5.2 Out of Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside Diameter"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 2): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part21987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 2): 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 elbows made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length and the tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part31987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [General]\nIS 7834 (Part 3): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies PART-3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 900 ELBOWS First Revision Note— For typical illustration of 90° elbow see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS :7834 (Part 3) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 3 – for 90° elbows (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part31987_2",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [General]\n900 ELBOWS First Revision Note— For typical illustration of 90° elbow see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS :7834 (Part 3) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 3 – for 90° elbows (first revision). TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF 90° ELBOWS Size 900 Elbow Laying Length, mm mm 16 9 1 20 11 1 25 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 32 17 + 1.6 – 1 40 21+ 2 – 1 50 26 + 2.5 – 1 63 32.5+3.2 – 1 75 38.5 + 4 – 1 90 46 + 5 – 1 110 56 + 3 – 1 125 63.5 + 6 – 1 140 71 + 7 – 1 160 81 + 8 – 1 180 91+ 9 – 1 200 101 + 9 – 1 225 114 +10 – 1 250 126 + 11 – 1 280 141 +12 – 1 315 158+13 – 1 2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the socket length shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1) :1987.* ± ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 4): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part41987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 4): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 tee made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements Note — For typical illustration of 90° Tees see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 4) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 4 Specific requirements for 90° tees. (first revision). TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF 900 TEES Size 90° Elbow Laying Length, mm mm 16 9 1 20 11 1 25 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 32 17 + 1.6 – 1 40 21+ 2 – 1 50 26 + 2.5 – 1 63 32.5+3.2 – 1 75 38.5 + 4 – 1 90 46 + 5 – 1 110 56 + 3 – 1 125 63.5 + 6 – 1 140 71 +"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 5): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part51987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 5): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 450 tees made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length Z and Z1 and the tolerance there on shall be as per Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF 450 TEES Size 450 Elbow Laying Length, mm mm z z1 mm mm 16 — — 20 27 3 6 2 – 1 25 33 + 3 7 + 2 – 1 32 42 + 4 8 + 2 – 3 – 1 40 51 + 5 10+ 2 – 3 – 1 50 63 + 6 12+ 2 – 3 – 1 63 79 +7 14 + 2 – 3 – 1 75 94 + 9 17 + 2 – 3 – 1 90 112+ 11 20 + 3 –3 – 1 110 137 +13 24 + 3 – 4 – 1 125 157 +15 27 + 3 – 4 – 1 140 175 + 17 30 + 4 – 5 – 1 160 200 + 20 35 + 4 – 6 – 1 * General requirements Note— For typical illustration of 45o Tees and symbols Z and Z1 see Fig.1 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 5) : 1987 Spe"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 6): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulding Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part61987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 6): 1987 Injection Moulding Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for union made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length Z and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF UNION Size Socket Elbow Laying Length mm mm 16 13.5 ± 1 20 13.5 ± 1 25 13.5 ± 1.2 – 1 32 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 40 15+ 2 – 1 50 17 + 2.5 – 1 63 21±3.2 – 1 Note— For typical illustration of unions, see fig. 1 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 7) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 7 Specific requirements for unions (first revision). * General requirements"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 7): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fitings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part71987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 7): 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fitings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [General]\nIS 7834 (Part 7): 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fitings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies PART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIONS. (First Revision) 2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the length shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1):1987*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987",
    "title": "- Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part81987_1",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987 - Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for caps made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. Note— For General requirements,refer to IS 7834 (Part 1) 1987. For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 8) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for caps (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987",
    "title": "- Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS7834Part81987_2",
    "text": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987 - Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies [Requirements]\nThe diameter of the socket of cap shall be as follows: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,75, 90 110, 12 5, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280 or 315 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part12003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 1): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded andh macined HOPE 90° bends for portable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Nominal Diameter Laying Length mm mm 20 35 ± 1 25 40 ± 2 32 50 ± 2 40 60 ± 2 Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003 injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies: Part I general requirements, for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 2):2003. Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 Specific requirements for 90° bends (first revision) 50 70 ± 2 63 80 ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 2): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part22003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 2): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE 90° tees for portable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Overall laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Nominal Diameter Laying Length mm mm 20 36.5 ± 1 25 39 ± 1 32 46 ± 1 Note — For general requirements, regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc.refer toIS 8008 (Part1):2003. Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : PART 1General requirements for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 3 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part3 specific requirements for 90° tees."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 3): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part32003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 3): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [General]\nIS 8008 (Part 3): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies PART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O TEES (First Revision) 40 63 ± 2 50 75 ± 2 63 80 ± 2 75 88 ± 2 90 98.5 ± 2 110 122.5 ± 3 125 135 ± 3 140 145 ± 3 160 157 ± 3 Note — For typical illustration of 90° tee see Fig.1 of the standard. 2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness at ends for welding shall be in accordance with IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part42003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 4): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE reducers for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Two different diameters at either end shall be concentric. 2.2 Overall laying length and the tolerance thereon shall be as follows: Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part-1):2003. Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fifths. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 4 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 4 specific requirements for reducers (first revision). POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part62003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [General]\nIS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density IS 8008 (PART 5) : 2003 INJECTION MOULDED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FERRULE REDUCERS (First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE pipe ends for potable water supplies. POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 6 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE ENDS (First Revision) Note —For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003. Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fittings For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 6 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements for pipe ends. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Overall dimensions and tolerances there on shall be as follows : Table 1 Dimensions for Injectino and Machined Pipe Ends Sl. Nominal Diameter for Collar PN6 PN 10 No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part62003_2",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [General]\ndensity polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements for pipe ends. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Overall dimensions and tolerances there on shall be as follows : Table 1 Dimensions for Injectino and Machined Pipe Ends Sl. Nominal Diameter for Collar PN6 PN 10 No. Diameter Manufacturing Diameter Laying Collar Welding Laying Collar Welding Length Height Length Length Height Length D D3 D4 Z H L Z H L (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) i) 20 28 47 50 – – 50 7 28 ii) 25 34 57 50 9 28 50 9 27 iii) 32 40 67 50 10 27 50 10 27 iv) 40 49 78 50 11 24 50 11 24 v) 50 60 88 50 12 23 50 12 23 vi) 63 72 103 50 14 16 50 14 16 vii) 75 84 123 50 16 14 50 16 14 viii) 90 99 138 80 17 43 80 17 43 ix) 110 119 158 80 18 37 80 18 17 x) 125 134 188 80 18 42 80 25 35 xi) 140 150 188 80 18 34 80 25 27 xii) 160 170 214 80 18"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part62003_3",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [General]\n14 50 16 14 viii) 90 99 138 80 17 43 80 17 43 ix) 110 119 158 80 18 37 80 18 17 x) 125 134 188 80 18 42 80 25 35 xi) 140 150 188 80 18 34 80 25 27 xii) 160 170 214 80 18 34 80 25 27 xiii) 180 190 214 80 20 30 80 30 20 xiv) 200 210 269 100 24 36 100 32 28 xv) 225 235 269 100 24 46 100 32 38 xvi) 250 261 320 100 25 35 100 35 35 xvii) 280 291 320 100 25 45 100 35 35 xviii) 315 327 370 100 25 35 100 35 35 xix) 355 373 430 120 30 50 120 40 40 xx) 400 427 482 120 33 42 120 46 29 xxi) 450 514 585 120 46 14 130 60 10 xxii) 500 530 585 120 46 24 120 60 10 xxiii) 560 615 685 120 50 10 130 60 10 xxiv) 630 642 685 120 50 30 120 60 20 xxv) 710 737 800 120 50 20 120 – – xxvi) 800 840 905 120 52 18 120 – – xxii) 900 944 1 005 120"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part62003_4",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [General]\n24 120 60 10 xxiii) 560 615 685 120 50 10 130 60 10 xxiv) 630 642 685 120 50 30 120 60 20 xxv) 710 737 800 120 50 20 120 – – xxvi) 800 840 905 120 52 18 120 – – xxii) 900 944 1 005 120 55 15 120 – – xxviii) 1 000 1 047 1 110 140 60 10 140 – – Note 1 — For typical illustration of pipe end see Fig.1 of the standard. Note 2 — Outside diameter and wall thickness of the end to be welded to pipe shall complywith the requirements given in IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 7): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8008Part72003_1",
    "text": "IS 8008 (Part 7): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machine moulded HDFE sandwich flanges Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part I ) :2003 Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements, for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 7 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 7 Specific requirements for sandwich flanges. POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SANDWITCH FLANGES (First Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SANDWICH FLANGES Sl. Nominal Pipe Inside Pitch Cir"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 1): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8360Part11977_1",
    "text": "IS 8360 (Part 1): 1977 Fabricated High Density [Scope]\nGeneral requirements for material, sizes, performance requirements, sampling and marking of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS 4984 :1995* for potable water supplies. 2. Material 2.1 Pipes used for the fabrication of HDPE fittings for potable water supplies shall conform to IS 4984 : 1995. 3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings 3.1 Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters at the free end, which shall correspond to For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part I ) :1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements. POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS outside diameters of pipes given i"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 2): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8360Part21977_1",
    "text": "IS 8360 (Part 2): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water [General]\nIS 8360 (Part 2): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water SUPPLIES PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O TEES 2.2 Ouside diameters and wall thickness of pipes out of which 90° tees are fabricated shall comply with those givenin IS 8360 (Part 1) :1977. Wall thickness of a fabricated 90° tee shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it i to be welded."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8360Part31977_1",
    "text": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene [General]\nIS 8360 (Part 3): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90° bends for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows — Size Overall Laying mm Length mm 20 100 ± 3 25 100 ± 3 30 100 ± 3 40 100 ± 3 50 100 ± 3 63 108 ± 5 75 128 ± 5 90 154 ± 5 110 188 ± 5 125 213 ± 5 140 239 ± 8 160 273 ± 8 180 307 ± 8 200 341 ± 8 225 384 ±10 250 427 ±10 280 478 ±10 315 538 ±10 355 606 ±10 400 683 ±10 450 769 ±10 500 855 ±10 Note — For typical illustration of 90° fabricated bend see Fig.1 of the standard. (HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° BENDS Note—For general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part 1) :1977. Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General Requirements. For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 3) :1977."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS8360Part31977_2",
    "text": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene [General]\n3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° BENDS Note—For general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part 1) :1977. Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General Requirements. For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 3) :1977. Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 3 Specific requirements for 90° bends. 2.2 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes out of which 90° bends are fabricated shall comply with those given in IS 8360 (Part 1) : 1977. Wall thickness of fabricated bend shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it is to be less than that of the pipe to which it is to be welded."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part11988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC sockets for potable water suplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part11988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Marking]\nThe socket shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings : Class of Fitting Colour Class 1 (0.25 MPa) Red Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES Size B Minimum wall thickness ( I) For Working Pressure Min 0.25 0.4 0.6 1.0 MPa MPa Mpa MPa Class1 Class2 Class3 Class 4 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 63 20 – 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 20 – 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 35 1.2 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 35 1.5 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 35 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 45 1.8 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 45 2.1 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 45 2.4 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 45 2.7 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 55 3.0 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 55 3.3 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 55 3.7 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 55 4.2 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 65 4.6 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 65 5.3 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 65 5.9 9.3 13.7 22.4 500 65 6.5 10.3 15.3 24.8 560 75"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 2): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part21988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 2): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC straight reducers for portable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 3): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part31988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 3): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For [Marking]\nThe straight reducers shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow D— Mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*. d— mean outside diameter of a spigot portion, that is mean outside diameter of pipe used for making reducer. L—minimum socket length in accordance with IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*. C—minimum length of spigot portion (plain end) calculated from 0.5 dnom +10mm where dnom is nominal outside diameter of pipe from which the reducer is fabricated. * Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies. T—minimum wall thickness of spigot portion (corresponds to minimum wall thickness o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part41988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC caps for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform toIS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part41988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Marking]\nThe cap shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings— Class of Fitting Colour Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPA) Yellow For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 4) :1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 4 Specific requirements for caps (first revision). Note — For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa pressure class, there are no caps and for these, the caps designed for 0.6 MPa working pressure may be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part51988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC tees for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part51988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies [Marking]\nThe equal tee shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPA) Yellow TABLE 1 DIMENSION OF EQUAL TEES ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES Size B Minimum Wall Thickness (t )For Working Pressures Min 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 63 98 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 115 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 137 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 166 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 188 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 209 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 238 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 267 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 296 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 333 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 369 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 412 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 463 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 521 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 586 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 659 9.3 13.7 22.4 500 731 10.3 15.3 24.8 560 818 11.6 17.2 27.8 630 920 13.0 19.2 31.3 Note — For pipes of"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part61988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC threaded adaptors for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part61988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Marking]\nThe threaded adaptors shall be marked in colour as iindicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part71988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 90 o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part71988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies [Dimensions]\nSee Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 90O BENDS All Dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 297 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 354 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 424 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 519 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 589 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 660 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 754 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 848 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 942 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 1060 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 1178 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 1319 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 1484 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 1673 355 1065 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 1884 400 1200 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 2120 450 1350 9.3 13.7 22.4 500 2355 500 1500 10.3 15.3 24.8 560 2638 560 1680 11.6 17.2 27.8 630 2968 630 1890 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 8): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part81988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 8): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings— Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow Note 1— For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used. Note 2—Y is calculated from × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D) For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 8) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for 90 o bends. (first revision). FIG. 1 90O BEND r o 360 90"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part91988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 60 o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n[Dimensions] See Table 1. FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 9 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 60O BENDS. (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part91988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 60O BENDS All Dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 198 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 236 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 283 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 346 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 393 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 440 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 503 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 566 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 629 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 707 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 786 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 880 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 990 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 1115 355 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part101988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 45 o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n[Dimensions] See Table 1. FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES. PART 10 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 45O BENDS. (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part101988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 45O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 149 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 177 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 212 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 259 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 295 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 330 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 377 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 424 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 471 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 530 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 589 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 660 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 742 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 837 355 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part111988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 30 o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n[Dimensions] See Table 1. FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES. PART 11 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 30O BENDS. (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part111988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 30O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 99 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 118 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 142 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 173 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 197 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 220 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 252 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 283 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 314 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 354 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 393 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 440 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 495 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 558 355 1065"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part121988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 22½ o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part121988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Dimensions]\nSee Table 1. FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 12 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 22½O BENDS (First Revision) TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 22½O BENDS All Dimensions in millimetres Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness (t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 75 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 89 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 106 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 130 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 148 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 165 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 189 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 213 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 236 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 266 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 295 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 330 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 371 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 419 355 1065 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 471 400 1200 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 530 450 1350 9.3 13.7 22.4 500"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part121988_3",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPA) Yellow Note 1– For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this, bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used. Note 2 – Y is calculated from × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D) For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 12) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 12 Specific requirements for 22½ o bends. (first revision). FIG. 1 220–30’ BEND o o 360 2 1 22"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part131988_1",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Scope]\nRequirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 11¼ o bends for potable water supplies.\n[Requirements] The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n[Dimensions] See Table 1. FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PART 13 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 11¼O BENDS (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Marking",
    "chunk_id": "IS10124Part131988_2",
    "text": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting [Marking]\nThe bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1DIMENSIONS FOR 11¼O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 38 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 45 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 53 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 65 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 74 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 83 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 95 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 106 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 118 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 133 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 148 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 165 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 186 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 209 355 1065 7.3 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Restrained",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_1",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Restrained]\nSimilar to 6.1 (a) with supplemental restraining elements. Butt Joint - with laminate over lay. Socket-and spigot with laminated overlay . Socket-and- Spigot-adhesive bounded, flanged and mechanical. 6.3 Gasket— Elastomeric gaskets when used with the pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1985.**"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_2",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Workmanship]\nShall meet the acceptance specified is table 3 ** Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and savers (first revision) Fracture Rupture of laminate surface without complete Maximum diameter, 29 mm penetration. Air bubble Air entrapment within and between the plies of Maximum diameter, 3.0 mm (void) reinforcement. Blister Rounded elevation of the surface of a laminate, Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm; with boundaries that may be more or less Height from surface not to be side sharply defined, some what resembling in shape tolerance. side drawing tolerance.a blister on the human skin. Burned Showing evidence of thermal decomposition None through some discolouration, distortion, or destruction of the surface of the laminate. Fish-eye Small globular mass which has not blended Maximum diameter,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Pipe Stiffness",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_3",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Pipe Stiffness]\nEach length of pipe shall have sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (F/rY) specified in Table 4. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT DEFLECTION Stiffness Minimum Stiffness of Pipe of Class(SN) DN, At 5 percent Deflection, kPa 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm A — — 62 B — — 124 C 248 248 248 D 496 496 496 where F = load per unit length in kN per mete length, and ry = vertical pipe deflection, in metres."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Fittings",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_4",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Fittings]\nAll GRP fittings, such as bends, tees, junctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall be smoothly finished internally. GRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for installation. 9.1Fittings may be made : a) from straight pipes b) by moulding 10. Hydraulic Test 10.1 General — Working pressure Pw in the system shall not exceed the pressure class of the pipe, i.e. Pw PN. When surge pressure is considered , the maximum pressure class of pipe Pw+PN>1.4 PN. 10.2 Soundness— Shall withstand without leakage or cracking the internal hydrostatic test pressures specified in Table 4 of the standard.\n[Longitudinal Strength] Shall withstand without failure the beam loads specified in Table 5 of the standard.\n[Hoop Tensile Strength] Shall meet or exceed the hoop tensile strength shown in Table 6 of the standard.\n[Long Term Hydrostatic Design Pressure Test] Pressure classes specified shall be based on long term hydrostatic design pressure data categorised in accordance with Table 7 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Test To Establish Portability Of Water",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_5",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Test To Establish Portability Of Water]\nshall satisfy the prescribed tests. Note— For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to F of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12709 : 1994 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for potable water supply (first revision) ≤\n[Scope] Requirements of ribbed screen, plain screen and plain casing pipes of nominal diameter 40 to 400 mm produced from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for bore/tubewell for water supply."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Composition",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_6",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Composition]\nThe pipe shall be produced from material consisting substantially polyvinyl chloride conforming to IS 10151 : 1982* which may be added only those additives as are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound pipe with good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use.\n[Colour] Shall be of regular blue colour throughout. Slight colour deviation is permissible."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_7",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Designation]\nPipe shall be designated by its type whether ribbed screen (RS), plain screen (PS) or casing (CS or CM) followed by its nominal diameter DN, slot width and length of the pipe. Example — Ribbed Screen pipe of DN 200 with slot width 1.5 mm and length 2000 mm shall be designated as RS 200 × 1.5 × 2000. 5. Dimensions"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Screen Pipes",
    "chunk_id": "IS127091994_8",
    "text": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply [Screen Pipes]\nSee Table 1 and 2 and also Fig. 1 of the Standard. 5.2 Casing Pipe — See Tables 3 and 4. 5.3 Ribs — Minimum number of ribs provided shall be three ribs per centimetre of the slotted segments on the circumference. Minimum height, h of the rib 5.4 Lengths — See Tables 5 and 6. 5.5 Slots — See Table 7 Tolerances on overall length and segmental lengths of pipes shall be as follows : i) Effective length: l2 — not less than the specified value. ii) Effective Thread length, l3 — a) For DN up to and including 200 shall be 2mm. The ribs should not have sharp edges - spigot end + 0, – 4mm- socket end + 4, – 0 mm b) For DN above 200- spigot end +0.6 mm- socket end + 6,– 0 mm iii) Segmental length,: l4 ± 25 mm (screen portion) iv) Segmental length, l5 + 25, – 0 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12818: 1992",
    "title": "Unplasticised Pvc Screen And Casing Pipes For Bore/Tube Well",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Threading Of Screen And Casing Pipes",
    "chunk_id": "IS128181992_1",
    "text": "IS 12818: 1992 Unplasticised Pvc Screen And Casing Pipes For Bore/Tube Well [Threading Of Screen And Casing Pipes]\nThe screen and casing pipe shall have male threads at spigot end and female threads at the socket end. Screen and casing pipe of nominal diameter from 40 to 80 mm shall have threads in accordance with IS 554 : 1985*. Screen and casing pipes of nominal diameters of 100 to 400 mm shall have threads in accordance with basic profile for metric trapezoidal threads. Rubber element should be used with the trapezoidal threads shall be of shore hardnes 165±5 7. Tests 7.1 Visual Appearance —The internal and external surfaces of each pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from any defects. The ends shall be clean and square with the axis of the pipe. 7.2 Internal Dia —Test mandrel of diameter as specified below of 100 mm length shall pass smoothly through the pipe. 7.3 Specific gravity — Between 1.4 to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_1",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Scope]\nRequirements for plain and socket end unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes with nominal outside diameters 40 mm to 160 mm for soil and waste discharge system inside buildings including ventilating and rain water applications.\n[Types] Type A : for use in ventilation pipe work and rain water applications. Type B : for use in soil and water discharge systems.\n[Sizes] Normal outside diameter DN of pipes as covered are 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140 and 160 mm.\n[Colour Of Pipe] Shall be dark shade of grey."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_2",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Materials]\nShall consist essentially polyvinyl chloride to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound pipes of good surface finish, mechanical strength, and opacity under condition of use. None of these additives PIPES FOR SOIL AND WASTE DISCHARGE SYSTEM FOR INSIDE AND OUTSIDE BUILDINGS INCLUDING VENTILATION AND RAIN WATER SYSTEM TABLE 1 DIAMETER AND WALL THICKNESS All dimensions in millimetres Nominal Mean Outside Wall Thickness Outside Outside Diameter Diameter Diameter at Any Point Type A Type B DN Min Max Min Max Min, Max Min, Max (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) 40 40.0 40.3 39.5 40.5 1.8 2.2 3.2 3.8 50 50.0 50.3 49.4 50.6 1.8 2.2 3.2 3.8 63 63.0 63.3 62.2 63.8 1.8 2.2 3.2 3.8 75 75.0 75.3 74.1 75.9 1.8 2.2 3.2 3.8 90 90.0 90.3 88.9 91.2 1.9"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Diameter And Wall Thickness",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_3",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Diameter And Wall Thickness]\nSee Table 1. 6.2 Length — Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2, 3, 4 or 6 metres either plain or with sliding/grooved socket. Tolerances on specified length shall be + 10 mm and – 0 mm. 6.3 Socket of pipe— See Tables 2, 3 , 4 and Figs. 2 & 3 of the standard. TABLE 2 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF SOCKETS ON PIPES All dimensions in millimetres Nominal S2,Min S3,Min Outside Diameter DN Type A Type B Type A Type B (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 40 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 50 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 63 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 75 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 90 1.7 2.9 1.1 2.4 110 2.0 2.9 1.2 2.4 125 2.3 2.9 1.4 2.4 140 2.6 3.2 1.6 2.7 160 2.9 3.6 1.8 3.0 TABLE 3. DIMENSIONS FOR SLIDING SOCKETS All dimensions in millimetres Nomina Socket Mean Inside Diameter Outside Depth, C of Socket at Midpoint, Diameter Min D1 Max Min (1) (2) (3) (4)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Visual Appearance",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_4",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Visual Appearance]\nThe internal and external surface of the pipes shall be smooth and clean, and free from groovings and other defects. the end shall be clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Reversion Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_5",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Reversion Test]\nA length of pipe of approximately 300 mm shall not in length by more than 5 percent. 7.3 Stress Relief Test—This test shall be carried out for socket end pipes only. When tested the test specimens shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or cracking or signs of weld line splitting. 7.4 Vicat Softening Temperature—Not less than 790C. 7.5 Effect of Sunlight—When exposed to sun for atleast 1600 h at ambient temperature it shall not show any difference in colour or physical appearance. 8 Resistance to Sulphuric Acid —The mass of specimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g, nor decrease by more than 0.13 g when tested as per IS 12235 (Part 7) : 1986. 9. Mechanical 9.1. Impact Strength at 0oC — When tested by the method in IS : 12235 (Part 9) : 1986, the pipe sample shall not frac"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Tensile Strength And Elongation",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_6",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Tensile Strength And Elongation]\nNot less than 45 MPa and 80 percent. Note— For methods of tests refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision), IS 8543 (Part 4/sec 1) 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties and relevant parts of IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies. For detailed information, refer to IS 13592 : 1992 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system. 9.3 Axial Shrinkage (for Type B Pipes Only) — The axial shrinkage shall not exceed 2 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Water Tightness Of Joints",
    "chunk_id": "IS135921992_7",
    "text": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) [Water Tightness Of Joints]\nAssemble the fit- tings with teh scaling devices, fill with water ensuring all air is removed. Jointing of solvent cementing joints is to be created out using selvent conforming to IS 14182"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Wall Thickness",
    "chunk_id": "IS143331996_1",
    "text": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage [Wall Thickness]\nShall be as given in Tables 3,4 and 5 of the standard.\n[Coiling] The pipes supplied in coils shall be coiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the nominal diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of pipe is prevented."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Visual Appearance",
    "chunk_id": "IS143331996_2",
    "text": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage [Visual Appearance]\nThe internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. 7. Performance Characteristics 7.1 Hydraulic Characteristics — Shall not show signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not burst during the prescribed test duration. 7.2 Reversion Test — Longitudinal reversion shall not be greater than 3 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS143331996_3",
    "text": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage [Scope]\nRequirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and sampling of machine made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use at pressure upto 1 500 kPa for conveyance of sewerage, industrial waste and water (other than potable) such as river water, well water, sea water and storm water. 2. Classification"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Pressure Classes (Pn)",
    "chunk_id": "IS143331996_4",
    "text": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage [Pressure Classes (Pn)]\nFive pressure classes of pipes namely, PN3, PN6, PN9, PN12 and PN15 correspond to the working pressure ratings of 300, 900, 1200 and 1500 kPa respectively. 2.2 Stiffness Classes (SN) — Four stiffness classes of pipes namely A, B, C, and D corresponding to minimum pipe stiffness values of 62, 124, 248 and 496 kPa respectively at 5 percent deflection. Notes – 1. The working pressure ratings mentioned above may have to be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than 43.5oC in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. The above pressure classes correspond to the long term hydrostatic design pressure categories."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS143331996_5",
    "text": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage [Nominal Sizes]\n200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600, 1 800, 2 000, 2 200, 2 400, 2 600, 2 800, 3 000 mm. 4. Materials 4.1 Resins —Appropriate type of unsaturated polyester resin systems conforming of IS 6746 : 1994* shall be used. 4.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcement —Glass fibre reinforcement shall be of commercial grade E type and shall conform to IS 11273 : 1992+, IS 11320 : 1997‡ or IS 11551 : 1996§, as appropriate. * Unsaturated polyester resin system (first revision) † Woven roving fabrics of ‘E’ glss fibre (first revision) ‡ Glass fibre rovings for the reinforcement of polyester and epoxideresin systems(first revision) § Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resinsystems (first revision) DN ID ID Min Max 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Lengths",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_1",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Lengths]\nPipes shall be supplied in effective lengths of 6 m, 9 m and 12 m. The tolerance on effective length shall be within ±15 mm.\n[Out Of Squareness Of Pipe] All points around each end of a pipe unit shall fall within ± 6.5 mm or ± 0.5 percent of the nominal diameter of the pipe whichever is greater, to a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 5.5 Wall Thickness — Shall be such as to satisfy inside and outside diameter specified."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Joints",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_2",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Joints]\nThe pipe shall have a joining system that shall provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition. 6.1. Unrestrained a) Coupling or Socket and Spigot Gasket Joints. b) Mechanical couplings 6.2. Restrained a) Joints similar to those in 6.1.1 with supplemental restraining elements. b) Butt joint, with laminated overlay. c) Socket-and-spigot, with laminated overlay. d) Socket-and-spigot, adhesive bonded. e) Flanged f) Mechanical.\n[Gaskets] Elastomeric gaskets when used with this pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1995*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_3",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Workmanship]\nShall meet the acceptance criteria specified in Table 3 Pit (pinhole) Maximum diameter, 0.8 mm; depth less than 20 percent of wall thickness. Porosity (pinhole) Maximum of 50 pits (pinholes) Pre-gel Maximum dimension, 13 mm; height above surface not to be outside drawing tolerance. Resin-pocket Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm Resin-rich edge Maximum 0.8 mm from the edge. Shrink-mark (sink) Maximum diameter 14 mm; depth not greater than 25 percent of wall thickness. Wash Maximum dimension, 29 mm Wormhole Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm Wrinkles Maximum length surface side, 25 mm maximum length opposite side, 25 mm depth less than 15 percent of wall thickness. Scratch Maximum length, 25 mm; maximum depth, 0.255 mm Short None Note— For definations of defects see Table 3 of the standard. * rubber sealing ri"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Pipe Stiffness",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_4",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Pipe Stiffness]\nEach length of pipe shall have sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (f/∆y) specified in Table 4. Pipe stiffness = where F = Load per unit length in kN per metre length; and ∆y = vertical pipe deflection, in metres. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT DEFLECTION Stiffness Minimum Stiffness of Pipe Class (SN) of DN, at 5 Percent deflection, kPa 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm and above A – – 62 B – 124 124 C 248 248 248 D 496 496 496 9. Fittings 9.1 General — All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees, junctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall be smoothly finished internally. GRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for installation. 9.2 Fittings may b"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Chemical Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_5",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Chemical Requirements]\nShall be capable ofbeing deflected, without failure, at the 50 year strain level given in Table 9 of the standard . When exposed to I.ON. sulphuric acid. f ∆ y ≥"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_6",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Scope]\nRequirements for Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride (upvc) injection moulded fittings for jointing with solvent cement or elastomeric sealing ring to the UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and out side building including ventilation and rain water system covered in IS 13592 : 1992*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Type Of Fittings",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_7",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Type Of Fittings]\nFitting shall be of one of the following types : a) tee (87. 5o ), Wye (45o) single, double (cross) or reducing, with or without inspection doors; b) Bend, with or without inspection doors (87.5o,45o and 22½o); c) Reducer ; d) Coupler; e) Socket plug ; f) Cleansing pipe; g) Adaptor (for connecting UPVC pipes to other materials); h) Vent cowl; j) Pipe clip; and k) Waste trap with strainer (Nahani trap with Jali)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_8",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Designation]\nShall be designated by the diameters of their sockets. The nominal inside diameter of the fitting shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the pipes given in IS 13592 : 1992.\n[Colour Of Fittings] Shall be uniform dark shade of grey."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS144021996_9",
    "text": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable) [Materials]\nShall consist essentially of polyvinyl chloride , to which may be added only those additive that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound and durable fittings of good surface finish , mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use , together with such pigments as are necessary to meet the requirements of 4.The material shall contain not less than 2.5 percent by mass of titanium dioxide. The addition of the manufacturer’s own clean rework material produced during manufacturer and work testing, complying with this standard is permissible upto 10 percent . 6. Dimensions 6.1 Wall Thickness — See Table 1. TABLE 1 WALL THICKNESS SI Nominal WallThickness No. Diameter DN At Plain End At Socket e e2 e3 Min Max Min Max mm mm mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 40 3.2 3.8 2.9 2.4 ii"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14735: 1999",
    "title": "Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Chamfer",
    "chunk_id": "IS147351999_1",
    "text": "IS 14735: 1999 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems [Chamfer]\nThe spigot ends of fittings shall be chamfered to an angle of 15o ± 1o; to the the axis of the pipe.\n[Sealing Rings] As per IS 5382 : 1985* with IRHD hardness of 50 ± 5. *Specification for rubber lings for gas mains, water mains and sowers. 0 2 − +"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14735: 1999",
    "title": "Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS147351999_2",
    "text": "IS 14735: 1999 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems [Workmanship]\nBoth the inner and outer surface of the fitting shall be cleanly finished, smooth and free from grooving, blistering or other deleterious defects, when viewed without magnification. Each end of the fitting shall be square to the axis of the approximate line. 9. Requirements 9.1 Sockets of fittings shall be either of solvent cement type or rubber ring type. 9.2 Socket and Spigot Configurations — A fitting shall have any of the following configrations of socket and spigot. a) Asolvent cement type of socket at each end of the fittings; b) A rubber ring type of socket at each end of fitting; c) A solvent cement type socket at one or two ends, and a spigot at the other end, or at each of the other ends ( as applicable) of the fitting; d) A rubber ring type socket at one or two ends, and a spigo\n[Resistance To Sulphuric Acid] The mass of the specimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g not decrease by more than 0.13 g.\n[Sulphated Ash Content] Not more than 10 oercent by mass. 13. Mechanical Properties 13.1 Impact Test (Drop Test) — Shall not fracture or crack through its complete wall thickness.\n[Water Tightness Of Joint] Assembly of fitting with the pipe shall show no leakage."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14735: 1999",
    "title": "Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Titanium Dioxide Content",
    "chunk_id": "IS147351999_3",
    "text": "IS 14735: 1999 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems [Titanium Dioxide Content]\nShall not be less than 2.5 percent by mass. Note – For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12235: 1986",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies Part 6 Stress Relef Test: Part 7 Resistance To Sulphuric Acid.",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS122351986_1",
    "text": "IS 12235: 1986 Methods Of Test For Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies Part 6 Stress Relef Test: Part 7 Resistance To Sulphuric Acid. [General]\nIS 12235: 1986 Methods Of Test For Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies Part 6 Stress Relef Test: Part 7 Resistance To Sulphuric Acid. For detailed information, refer to IS 14735 :1999 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fittings for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TUBES – LIGHT Nonimal Outside Diameter Thickness Mass of Tube Bore Plain End Screwed and Maximum Minimum (kg/m) Socketed mm mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 6 10.1 9.7 1.8 0.360 0.363 8 13.6 13.2 1.8 0.515 0.519 10 17.1 16.7 1.8 0.670 0.676 15 21.4 21.0 2.0 0.947 0.956 20 26.9 26.4 2.3 0.138 0.139 25 33.8 33.2 2.6 1. 98 2.00 32 42.5 41.9 2.6 2.54 2.57 40 48.4 47.8 2.9 3.23 3.27 50 60.2 59.6 2.9 4.08 4.15 65 76.0 75.2 3.2 5.71 5.83 80 88.7 87.9 3.2 6.72 6.89 100 113.9 113.0 3.6, 9.75 10.00"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1239Part12004_1",
    "text": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings [Scope]\nRequirement for welded and seamless plain end or screwed and socketed steel tubes intended for the use in water, gas airlines and steam. Medium and heavy tubes only are recommended for carrying steam services. The maximum permissible pressure and temperatures for different sizes of tubes are given in Annex A of the standard for guidance only."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1239Part12004_2",
    "text": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings [Designation]\nShall be designated by their nominal bore, and shall be further classified as light, medium and heavy depending on the wall thickness; and screwed and socketed or plain- ended to denote end condition, and black or galvanized to denote surface condition. 3. Manufacture 3.1 Seamless — Seamless steel tubes shall be made from tested quality steel manufactured by any approved process and shall be fully killed. The Sulphur and phosphorus requirement in steel shall not exceed 0.04 percent each. 3.2 Steel tubes shall be manufactured by one of the following processes: a) Hot finished seamless (HFS) b) Electric resistance welded (ERW) c) High frequency induction welded (HFIW) d) Hot finished welded (HFW) and e) Cold fiished seamless (cds) 4. Dimensions TABLE 3 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TUBES HEAVY Nonimal\n[Joints] All screwed tubes shall be supplied with pipe threads conforming to IS554 : 1999*\n[Lengths] 4 to 7 m including one socket for screwed and socketed tubes. 7.1. Tolerances on Length : mm on exact length and ±150 mm of approximate length.\n[Galvanizing] All tubes shall be galvanized. Coating shall be as per IS 4736 : 1986†. Tubes which are to be screwed shall be galvanized before screwing."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Leak Tightness Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS1239Part12004_3",
    "text": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings [Leak Tightness Test]\nEddy current test may be done in place of hydrostatic test subject to mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Hydrostatic test when carried out a pressure of 5 MPa, maintainted for at least 3 seconds and shall not show any leakage in the pipe. 10.Test on Finished Tubes\n[Tensile Strength] Not less than 320 MPa,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Elongation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1239Part12004_4",
    "text": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings [Elongation]\nThe elongation percentage on a gauge length of 5.65. , where So is the original cross-sectional area of the test specimen, shall be as follows : Nominal Bore Elongation Percent Min a) For steam services 20 percent for all sizes b) For other services Up to and including 25 mm 12 percent Over 25 mm up to and 20 percent including 150 mm 10.3 Bend Test – (Upto 50 mm nominal dia.) – Shall be capable of withstanding the bend test without showing any signs of fracture or failure. 10.4 Flattering Test – (for tubes above 50 mm nominal bore) - No opening shall occur by fracture in the weld until the distance between the plates is less than 75 percent of the original outside diameter of the pipe and no crack on breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS1239Part12004_5",
    "text": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings [Workmanship]\nAll pipes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from injurious defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with axis of the pipe. The tubes shall be reasonably straight. Note — For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2329: 1985",
    "title": "Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section).",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23291985_1",
    "text": "IS 2329: 1985 Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section). [Scope]\nRequirements for butt welded and seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed steel tubulars and other welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The requirements of backnuts are covered in IS 3468 : 1991+"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2329: 1985",
    "title": "Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section).",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS23291985_2",
    "text": "IS 2329: 1985 Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section). [Designation]\nMild steel sockets and tubular shall be designated by their nominal bore. Other wrought steel fittings shall be designated giving the following particulars in the sequence shown : a) Type of fittings, and b) Size designation 3. Manufacture 3.1 Tubulars shall be made from tubes which comply with all the appropriate requirement of IS 1239 (Part 1): 1990. 3.2 Sockets shall be manufactured from any of the following processes : a) Hot- finished seamless (HFS) b) Electric resistance welded (ERW) c) High frequency induction welded (HFIW) and d) Hot finished welded (HFW) 3.3 The steel from which the fittings are made shall show a minimum tensile strength of 320 MPa. The percentage elongation shall not be less than 9500 divided by the tensile strength.\n[Chemical Composition] Shall not show Sulphur and Phosphorus is amounts exceeding 0.06 percent each."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2329: 1985",
    "title": "Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section).",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Dimensions Of Tubulars",
    "chunk_id": "IS23291985_3",
    "text": "IS 2329: 1985 Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section). [Dimensions Of Tubulars]\nPieces, Nipples (close Tape, running and barrel nipples) long screws, bends, springs, return bends and mild steel sockets having, nominal bore 6, 0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65,80,100,125 and 150mm. Note— For details of dimensions and figures see tables 1 to 6 of the standard. 6. Dimensions of Wrought Steel Fittings (other than tubulars) 6.1 Screwed ends of fittings — Nominal size of outlet 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150. 6.2 Elbows, tees and croses, equal — Nominal size of outlet 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80,100, 150. 6.3 Elbows, Tees and crosses, equal — Nominal size of outlet 8×6, 10×6, 10×8, 15×8, 15×10, 20×8, 20×10, 20×15, 25×10, 25×15, 25×20, 32×15, 32×20, 32×25, 40×15, 40×20, 40×20, 40×25, 40×32, 50×15, 50×20, 50×25, 50×32, 50×40, 65×50, 80×25"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydraulic Pressure Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS35892001_1",
    "text": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Hydraulic Pressure Test]\nThe hydraulic test pressure shall be the pressure calculated from the following formula, except that the maximum test presure shall not exceed 5 MPa. D t S P 2 = where P = test pressure in MPa, S = Stress in MPa which shall be taken as40 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength t = specified thickness in mm. D = specified outside diameter in mm. Test pressure shall be applied and maintained for sufficiently long time for proof and inspection. Note — Normally 5 seconds are sufficient for the purpose of the test. NDT test may be carried out in place of hydraulic pressure test. Method of NTD and the acceptance level shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser 12. Joints and Ends a) Plain ends or bevelled ends for buttwelding (see Fig. 1A and 1B of the Standard) u"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS35892001_2",
    "text": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Workmanship]\nAll pipes shall be cleanly finished and when visually inspected, shall be free from defects such as cracks, surface flaws, laminations, etc. The ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with the axis of the pipe. For detailed information, refer to IS 3589 : 2001 Specification for seamless or electrically welded steel Sipes for water, gas and sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.140 Dimentions of Plain Casing Pipes Nominal Bore Outside Diameter Thickness of Pipe of Pipe of Pipe (mm) (mm) (mm) 100 1 14.3 5.0 125 1 41.3 5.0 150 1 68.3 5.0 175 1 93.7 5.4 200 2 19.1 5.4 225 2 44.5 6.0 250 2 73.0 7.1 300 3 23.9 7.1 350 3 55.6 8.0,10.0 and 12.0 400 4 06.4 8.0,10.0,12, 14.0 400 4 06.4 10.0,12.0 and14.0 450 4 57.2 10.0 Dimensions and Masses of Drive Pip"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS35892001_3",
    "text": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Scope]\nRequirements for steel tubes used for water wells, such as, casing, drive pipe and housing,having the following types of joints a) Screwed and socketed butt joints, b) Screwed flush butt joints, and c) Plain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS35892001_4",
    "text": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Grades]\nTubes shall be one of the following types and grades of steel: Type of Tube Grade of Steel Hot Finished Seamless (HFS) Electric Automatic/semi-automatic Fusion Welded (EFW) Electric resistance welded (ERW)and Fe 410 High frequency induction Fe 450 welded (HFIW)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS35892001_5",
    "text": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage [Manufacture]\nSteel used shall be made by open- hearth, electric or basic oxygen process, having not more than 0.06 percent each of sulphur and phosphorous. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Length — Random lengths of 4 to 7 m. Dimensions of Screwed and Socketed Casing Pipes All dimensions in millimetres. Nominal Outside Thickness Socket Overall Bore of Diameter of Pipe Outside Length of Pipe of Pipe Diameter Socket, Min 100 114.3 5.4 130.0 114.3 125 141.3 5.4 157.0 120.6 7.1 150 168.3 5.4 184.0 27.0 7.1 175 193.7 6.4 211.6 152.4 8.0 200 219.1 6.4 237.0 152.4 8.0 225 244.5 7.1 262.5 165.1 9.0 250 273.1 8.0 291.0 177.8 10.0 300 323.9 8.0 346.0 177.8 10.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Condition Of Pipes",
    "chunk_id": "IS42702001_1",
    "text": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells [Condition Of Pipes]\nAll pipes shall be, free from harmful defects, of good commercial finish and free from loose scale and rust. When required, the ends shall be cut square with the axis of the pipe. 8. Tests 8.1 Tensile Test—Tensile strength and elongation. Grade Tensile Yield Elongation Min strength strength 5.65 MPa MPa Percent (N/mm2) (N/mm2) Fe 450 275 13 Fe 410 235 15 For detailed information, refer to IS 4270 : 2001 Specification for Steel tubes used for water wells (third revision) 8.2 Flattening Test – Shall not show crack or flaw. 8.3 Alignment Test – When two tubes are screwed together till they butt, and their axes shall not then be out of line by more than 100 mm in each 6 metre length. Note — This test is not applicable to the plain end pipes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydraulic Pressure Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS42702001_2",
    "text": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells [Hydraulic Pressure Test]\nEvery pipe shall withstand the test pressure as calculated by the following formula for 3 s. Grade Test Pressure N/mm2 Fe 410 280 t/D Fe 450 350 t/D where t = thickness of pipe in mm, and D = outside diameter of pipe in mm. The maximum pressure applied shall be 7 MPa."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Coating Of Tubes",
    "chunk_id": "IS42702001_3",
    "text": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells [Coating Of Tubes]\nThe tubes shall be externally coated with a bituminous solution or any other protective anti-corrosion coating. Where tubes are required to be galvanized, the zinc coating on the tubes shall be in accordance with IS 4736 :1986*. 10. Protection of ends 10.1 All threads shall be coated with a petroleum jelly or other suitable rust preventing compound. 10.2 All tubes with V-form threads shall have the threads protected with plastic rings or sleeves. 10.3 All tubes with square form threads shall have the exposed male threads protected with steel rings or sleeves and the female threads protected with steel nipples or bushes. 10.4 No protection of the ends shall be provided for tubes for Butt Welding unless specially called for by the purchaser. * Hot-dip zinc coatings on mild steel tubes (first"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS42702001_4",
    "text": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells [Scope]\nRequirements of spiral seam welded steel pipe over 457 mm dia and upto 2000 mm dia with wall thickness upto 12.5 mm inclusive. The pipe is intended for general use. The suitability of pipe for various purposes is dependent on its dimensions, properties and condition of service. The purpose for which the pipe is intended should be stated in the enquiry and order."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS42702001_5",
    "text": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells [Manufacture]\nSteel used shall be produced by open hearth a electic or one of the basic oxygen processes. The helical seam shall be welded by one of the following processes : a) Electric fusion butt welding internally and automatic are welding externally. b) Electric resistance welding c) Automatic submerged are welding. 3. Chemical Composition 3.1 Ladle analysis C percent S percent P percent Max Max Max 0.25 0.05 0.05 3.2 Product analysis Element Variation Over and Above Specified Limit, percent C 0.02 P 0.005 S 0.005 4. Physical Tests 4.1. Tensile Test U.T.S Min Y.S. Min E Percent Min on 5.65 410 MPa 240 MPa 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5504: 1997",
    "title": "Spiral Welded Pipes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydrostatic Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS55041997_1",
    "text": "IS 5504: 1997 Spiral Welded Pipes [Hydrostatic Test]\nShall be tested at mill to a hydrostatic pressure, equal to a minimum of 150 percent of working pressure required. In no case the maximum stress produced exceeds 40 percent of minimum ultimate tensile strength envisaged in the steel. Note — Steel tensile strength may be assumed as 410 MPa normally and unless otherwise agreed. The pressure shall be calculated from the following equation : P = 2 st/D where P = test pressure MPa, s = stress in MPa (normally 40 percent of 410 MPa, that is 164 MPa) t = specified wall thickness in mm, and D = specified outside diameter in mm. 6. Permissible Variations in Dimensions 6.1 Lengths — Steel pipe shall be supplied in single random length between 4 to 7 m or double random length of 7 to 14 m. 6.2 Thickness and Diameter — The tolerance on wall thickness"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5504: 1997",
    "title": "Spiral Welded Pipes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS55041997_2",
    "text": "IS 5504: 1997 Spiral Welded Pipes [Finish]\nThe finished pipe shall be reasonably straight, free from injurious defects. S o For detailed information, refer to IS 5504 : 1997 Specification Spiral welded pipes (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.143"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6286: 1971",
    "title": "Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS62861971_1",
    "text": "IS 6286: 1971 Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service [Scope]\nRequirements for 4 grades of seamless and electric welded steel pipe for conveying fluids at sub-zero temperature.\n[Manufacture] Stell used shall be made by open hearth, electric, basic oxygen or a combination of these 2.1 Steel shall be of fully killed type. 2.2 Pipes of grades 1,2 and 3 shall be made either by seamless or electric welded process. Pipes of grade 4 shall be made by seamless process only. 3. Chemical Requirements see Table 1 3.1 Ladle Analysis 3.2 Product Analysis — The mxaimum permissible variation of various elements in the case of product analysis from the limits stated in 2.1 shall be bas follows: Percent Carbon ± 0.02 Manganese 0.03 Phosphorus + 0.005 Sulphur + 0.005 4. Dimensions Nominal Outside Thickness Bore Diameter mm mm mm 6 10.2 1.8,2.0 and 2.65 8 13.5 1.8,2.35 and 2.9 10 17.2 1.8,2.35 and 2.9 15 21.3 2.0,2.65 and 3.25 20 26.9 2.35, 2.65 and 3.25 25 33.7 2.65,3.25, 4.05 and 4.85 32 42.4 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6286: 1971",
    "title": "Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS62861971_2",
    "text": "IS 6286: 1971 Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service [Workmanship And Finish]\nPlain-end pipes of 60.3 mm outside diameter and larger shall be furnished withthe ends bevelled to an angle 30o of measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the pipe and with a root face of 1.6 0 0.8 mm. The end finish for pipes smaller than 60.3 mm outside diameter shall be as specified by the purchaser. 5.1 All defects shall be explored for depth when the depth is in excess of 12.5 percent of the nominal wall thickness or encroaches on the minimum wall thickness, such defects shall be considered injurious. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 Carbon percent Max 0.30 0.30 0.19 0.12 Manganese percent 0.40 to 1.06 0.29 to 1.06 0.90 Max 0.50 to 10.5 Phosphorus percent Max 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 Sulphur percent Max 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 Silicon percent - 0.10 Min 0.13 to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6286: 1971",
    "title": "Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Hydrostatic Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS62861971_3",
    "text": "IS 6286: 1971 Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service [Hydrostatic Test]\nWhen subjected to a test pressure P for 5 seconds, there shall be no leakage. P (kgf/cm2 )=200St D Where P = hydrostatic test pressure in kgf/cm S = fibre stress in kfg/mm2 , t = speceified outside diameter in mm\n[General] Destructive Tests — Any mutually agreed. SP 21 : 2005 10.145"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 651: 1992",
    "title": "Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS6511992_1",
    "text": "IS 651: 1992 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [Scope]\nCovers dimensions and performance requirements for the following glazed stoneware pipes and fittings— Straight pipes and taper pipes; Bends; Taper bend; Junctions; Half-section channels, straight and taper; Channel junctions; Channel bends; Channel interceptors; Gully traps; and Inspection pipes. The pipes covered in this standard are not meant for potable water applications. Dimensions are grouped into two sections A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form pact of pipe line and which are subject to same conditions, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used but do not form. Section B being hand rounded articles, their conformity to dimensional specifications is not req"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 651: 1992",
    "title": "Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6511992_2",
    "text": "IS 651: 1992 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [General]\nhand and Left-hand Fittings— A right-hand fitting is such that when viewed from the spigot towards the socket, the arm of a junction or the socket of a bend projects to the right. A left-hand fitting is such that when viewed as above, the arm of socket projects to the left."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 651: 1992",
    "title": "Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General Quality",
    "chunk_id": "IS6511992_3",
    "text": "IS 651: 1992 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [General Quality]\nAll pipes and fittings shall be sound and free from visible defects which impair the strength, durability and serviceability. The glaze of pipes and fittings shall be free from crazing. The pipes and fittings shall give a sharp clear note when struck with a light hammer. Colour of pipes/fittings may vary from yellow to dark brown/black."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 651: 1992",
    "title": "Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Glazing",
    "chunk_id": "IS6511992_4",
    "text": "IS 651: 1992 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [Glazing]\nThe interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and fittings which remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed. The glaze shall be obtained by the action of fumes of volatized common salt on the material of the pipes and fittings during the process of burning or glaze shall be ceramic glaze consisting of glazing material, applied prior to firing. 5. Tests 5.1 Hydraulic Test — Straight pipes shall withstand the internal hydraulic test pressure of 0.15 MPa on the barrels and fitting covered in Section A of the standard and 0.075 MPa for fitting covered in Section B of the standard, without showing signs of injury or leakage. 5.2 Absorption Test — Maximum increase in mass shall be as follows : Thickness of Pipe or Increase in Fitting, mm Mass Percent Upto and including 20 6 Over 20 and upt"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3006: 1979",
    "title": "Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30061979_1",
    "text": "IS 3006: 1979 Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [Scope]\nMaterial and performance equirements for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper bends; junctions; half section channels; straight and taper ; channel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings are grouped into two sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form a part of a pipe line and which are subject to the same conditions, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used and which do no form a part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in Section B being hand-moulded, their conformity to dimension"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3006: 1979",
    "title": "Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Grooving",
    "chunk_id": "IS30061979_2",
    "text": "IS 3006: 1979 Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings [Grooving]\nThe interior of the sockets, and the exterior of the spigots shall be grooved circumferentially and such grooving on the spigot shall be for a length equal to one and a half times the depth of the sockets, and the depth of such grooves shall be between 1mm and 2 mm. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the standard. Note 2 – For test procedures, 6 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision). ± ± SP 21 : 2005 10.149"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 1): 1979",
    "title": "Glazed Fire–Clay Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part11979_1",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 1): 1979 Glazed Fire–Clay Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nGeneral requirements for materials, manufacture, finish, methods of test, sampling and inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances. 2. Material and Manufacture 2.1 Fire – Clay bodies are moderately fine, porous, off-white bodies using natural fire clays, ball clays or stoneware clays and clay grogs covered by a glaze properly matured and fitted to the body. 2.2 Permissible defects and blemishes – See Table 1 TABLE 1 BLEMISHES AND DEFECTS PERMITTED IN VARIOUS APPLIANCES SL LOCATION BLEMISH OR MAXIMUM PERMITTED DEFECT (1) (2) (3) (4) i) General Warpage Not to exceed ± 2% on all planes or 10 mm which ever is less Spots and A total of not over 6 Bilsters ii) Service Bubbles, A total of not over 8 space, top of pinholes rim and or slab, specks inside of bowl Polishing A total of not"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 2): 1985",
    "title": "Glazed Fire – Clay Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part21985_1",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 2): 1985 Glazed Fire – Clay Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nLays down the pattern and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and laboratory sinks made of fire-clay. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test and inspection shall conform to Part-1 (General requirements) of the standard. 2.2 Patterns and Sizes Pattern Sizes mm a) Kitchen sinks 750 × 450 × 250 600 × 450 × 200 600 × 450 × 200 b) Laboratory sinks 600 × 400 × 200 500 × 350 × 150 450 × 300 × 150 400 × 250 × 150 2.3 Thickness — The minimum thickness of the walls and bottom of the sinks of sizes mentioned shall not be less than 25 mm and 15mm, respectively for 2.2(a) and 2.2(b). 3. Tolerances a) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4 percent;and b) On dimensions less than 50 mm ± 2 mm. 4. Construction 4.1 The kitchen sinks shall be o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part51979_1",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979 Glazed Fire Clay Appliances, [Scope]\nLays down the sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finish of stall urinals made of fire-clay. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test and inspection, shall conform to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. 2.2 Type and Size Note— For details of dimensions and tolerances see Table 2 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 3/ Sec. 2) : 1985 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances Part 3 Specific requirements of Section 2 Stall urinals (third revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.153 PART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SHOWER TRAYS (Second Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 5) : 1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part 5 Specific requirements of shower trays (s"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part51979_2",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979 Glazed Fire Clay Appliances, [Construction]\nShower trays shall be of one piece construction. The inside surface of the shower trays shall be uniform and smooth except for grooves provided for skid resistance. The shower trays shall have a circular waste hole into which the interior of the tray shall drain. The waste hole shall be rebated or bevelled internally."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part71981_1",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981 Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances, [Scope]\nLays down the pattern, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances of slop sinks made of fire-clay. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test , sampling and inspection, shall conform to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. 2 .2 Pattern and Size — The wall mounted slope sink shall be size 610 × 630 mm. The floor mounted slop sink shall be of size 430 × 460 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS771Part71981_2",
    "text": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981 Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances, [Construction]\nThe slop sink shall be of one piece construction and shall have a suitable flushing rim which may be boxed or open type. In the case of box rim, adequate number of holes on allsides shall be provided for clean flushing of the bowl of the sink. The rim shall have an inlet or supply horn of dimensions conforming to those given in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 of the standard for connecting the flush pipe. The wall mounted slop sink shall have an integral trap with outlet. The floor mounted slop sink shall have an integral trap with P or S outlet. The inside surface of the slop sink and trap shall be uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush. The serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed extrenally. 4. Tolerances a) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4% and b) On dimensions less than 50"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 772: 1973",
    "title": "General Requirement For Enamelled Cast Iron Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7721973_1",
    "text": "IS 772: 1973 General Requirement For Enamelled Cast Iron Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nGeneral requirement of material, thickness, warpage, enamelling, acid and alkali resistance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliance like water-closets and commodes.\n[Requirements] Thickness of cast iron base not less than 6.5 mm.Tolerance ± 3 percent on specified dimensions. Warpage shall not exceed 5 mm per metre for edges set against wall or floor and 7.5 mm per metre for other edges. Finishing in vitreous enamel fused to cast iron base; enamel thickness not less than 0.5 mm. 2.1 Defects — Not more than one of the following when examined through inspection window is permitted: a) Crazing; b) Dimples, rundown, sagging; c) Blisters— not more than on interior surface: d) Pinholes — not more than two for coloured wares and not more than four for white wares; Note- For test procedures refer to the Standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 772:1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision). e) Specks — les"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 773: 1988",
    "title": "Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7731988_1",
    "text": "IS 773: 1988 Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type [Scope]\nRequirements for material, workmanship, manufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast iron-railway type water-closets generally used in the coaching stock of the Indian Railways.\n[Requirements] Shall be of one piece construction. Each water closet shall have flushing pipe housed in the water closet casting. Bottom flange shall not be less than 13 mm thick and shall be provided with not less than six holes of 10 mm diameter.The inlet or supply horn shall consists of a threaded adopter, nipple fixed to a plain hole of the water closet and secured rigidly by a socket union"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 773: 1988",
    "title": "Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS7731988_2",
    "text": "IS 773: 1988 Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type [Finish]\nThe inside and outside surfaces of each fixture shall be coated with vitreous enamel thoroughly fixed to the cast iron base. The enamel shall be uniform, non-crazing and free from discoloration, and shall posses an impervious surface. Note 1— These shall conform to the requirement of IS 772 : 1973 General requirement of enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances. Note 2 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 773 : 1988 Specification for enamelled cast iron water - closets, railway coaching stock type (third revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.157"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1726: 1991",
    "title": "Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS17261991_1",
    "text": "IS 1726: 1991 Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames [Materials]\nof appropriate grade of grey cast iron as per prescribed standard. 4. Basic and Performance Requirements\n[Scope] Lays down basic and performance requirements for manhole covers and frames in castiron, intended for use in drainage and water works. 2. Grades and Types Grades Grade Type/Shape Designation of Covers Light-duty LD-2.5 Rectangular, Square Circular Medium-Duty MD-10 Circular Rectangular Heavy- Duty HD-20 Circular Lamphole Square Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole) Extra-Heavy EHD-35 Circular Duty Square Rectangular (Scrapper manhole) 2.1 Recommended Locations LD-2.5 - Rectangular, Square or Circular Solid Types — Suitable for use within residential and institutional complexes/areas with pedestrain but occassional light motor vehicle traffic. These covers are also used for `Inspection Chambers MD-10 Circular or Rectangular Types – SP 21 : 2005 10.160 5. Manufacture 5.1 Covers and Frames — Covers a"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1726: 1991",
    "title": "Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Load Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS17261991_2",
    "text": "IS 1726: 1991 Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames [Load Test]\nShall with stand without fracture, the loads specified in 4 for a minimum period of 30s. Note 1— For dimensions and tolerances, see 7 of the standard Note 2— For testing procedure see 10.2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1726 : 1991 specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2326: 1987",
    "title": "Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23261987_1",
    "text": "IS 2326: 1987 Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals [Scope]\nLays down the materials, nominal sizes, construction, performance requirements and finish for automatic flushing cisterns of the type used for flushing urinals.\n[Materials] Cast iron, vitreous china or enamelled pressed steel compiled with specified requirements."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2326: 1987",
    "title": "Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS23261987_2",
    "text": "IS 2326: 1987 Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals [Nominal Sizes]\n5 and 10 littres with a tolerance of ± 0.5 litres. Note — The nominal size of any urinal cistern shall be based on a minimum capacity of 2.5 litres per urinal served. 4. Construction a) Cistern – The thickness of the body and the cover shall not be less than 5 and 6 mm for cast iron and vitreous china cisterns respectively. The body of the pressed steel cistern shall be of seamless or welded construction. The thickness of body and cover shall not be less than 1.60 mm and 1.25 mm respectively before coating and shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise protected against corrosion by equally efficient coating. b) Depth of Cistern Body — The depth of the body of cistern shall provided for a clearance of not less than 25 mm between the highest level that can be reached by water before siphonag"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2326: 1987",
    "title": "Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS23261987_3",
    "text": "IS 2326: 1987 Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals [Finish]\nCast iron cisterns shall be painted inside with suitable anti-corrosive paint and with a protective coating on the outside before delivery. Alternatly, cast iron cisterns shall be protected against corrosion by a coating of enamel. 6. Performance Requirements a) Shall deliver not less than 2.5 litres per urinal of not less than 10 minutes and not more than 20 minutes. b) Shall discharge at an average of not less than 5 litres in 7 seconds when fitted with a straight open ended flush pipe of 20 mm bore and 900 mm length."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2326: 1987",
    "title": "Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Endurance Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS23261987_4",
    "text": "IS 2326: 1987 Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals [Endurance Test]\nShall be operated for 3000 times and after this test, the cistern and component parts shall not show any damage or defects and all the parts shall be satisfactory For detailed information, refer to IS 2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (other than plastic cisterns)(second revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.162"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part11996_1",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 1): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For [Scope]\nRequirements for thermoplastic seats and covers for water-closets.\n[Grades] 1 and 2 based on deflection characteristics 3. Materials 3.1 Seats and Covers a) Polystyrene or b) Polypropylene conforming to requirments specified 3.2 Hinging Device — Bronze or brass or mild steel with nickel chromium plating or aluminium alloy with anodic coating or suitable plastic (with reinforcement), conforming to the prescribed standards. 4. Manufacture 4.1 Seat — The underside of the seats may be either flat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is recessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any point. The seats may be of the closed or open front pattern (see Fig. 1). 4.2 The cover shall completely cover the aperture of the seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of being raised easily from the seat"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part21996_1",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, [General]\nIS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, PART 2 – THERMOPLASTIC SEATS AND COVERS (Fifth Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SEATS AND COVERS ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES. SL NO. DESCRIPTION DIMENSION Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Distance from centre line of hinge 445 475 bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A ii) Length of opening at longest point, B 250 290 iii) Width of opening at widest point, C 215 240 iv) Overall width at widest point, D 380 -v) Distance between inner and outer rims, E 55 -vi) Centre-to-centre distance of seat bolt holes, F 145 175 vii) Distance from centre line of hinge bolts to 85 -inner rim of seat at the back, G viii) Thickness of seat at thinnest point 3 -ix) Thickness of cover at thinnest point 3 -- SP 21 : 2005 10.164 A FIG. 1 SP 21 : 2005 10.165 4.4 Finish – The surfaces of the seats, covers and components shall be smooth, free from blisters and delamination and reasonably free from flowlines, contamination, streaking and unintended colour variation colour variation."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part21996_2",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, [General]\nat thinnest point 3 -- SP 21 : 2005 10.164 A FIG. 1 SP 21 : 2005 10.165 4.4 Finish – The surfaces of the seats, covers and components shall be smooth, free from blisters and delamination and reasonably free from flowlines, contamination, streaking and unintended colour variation colour variation. 4.6 Hinging Device – The bolts shall have a minimum shank length of 65 mm and a coarse thread of M8 size within 25 mm of the flange of fixing to the pan. 4.7 Buffers and Distance Pieces – Each seat (if not provided with distance pipes) shall be provided with not less than three rubber or plastic buffers of size 25 mm × 40 mm × 10 mm for closed front seats and not less than 4 for open front seats, which shall be securely fixed to underside of the seat. 5. Test 5.1 Strength – The seats shall withstand, without permanent distortion of the seat or the hinge fit tings or damage to any finish, a load of 1 150 N applied for a period of 30 minutes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part21996_3",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, [General]\nfront seats, which shall be securely fixed to underside of the seat. 5. Test 5.1 Strength – The seats shall withstand, without permanent distortion of the seat or the hinge fit tings or damage to any finish, a load of 1 150 N applied for a period of 30 minutes. 5.2 Water Absorption – The increase in mass shall be 0.75 percent, Max and on visual in spection after immersion, it shall shown no impairment. 5.3 Impact Resistance 5.3.1 Seats – When tested for impact, the seat, hinges and buffers/distance pieces shall show no visible damage. 5.3.2 Covers – When tested for impact, the cover, cover hinges and cover buffers shall show no visible damage."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part21996_4",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, [General]\nvisual in spection after immersion, it shall shown no impairment. 5.3 Impact Resistance 5.3.1 Seats – When tested for impact, the seat, hinges and buffers/distance pieces shall show no visible damage. 5.3.2 Covers – When tested for impact, the cover, cover hinges and cover buffers shall show no visible damage. 5.4 Rigidity 5.4.1 Seats — The maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is removed, the seats shall not show any fracture (See Annex F of the standard) Grade Deflection, mm 1 12.5 2 20.0 5.4.2 Covers – The maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is removed, the cover shall not show any fracture and no part of the edge of the cover shall be pushed through the seat opening Grade Deflection, mm 1 25 2 40 5.5 Staining by Seats and Covers — There shall not be any visible colour transfer to the white cloth. 5.6 Staining and/or Other Surface Deterioration of Seats and Covers — There shall not be any change of colour or other adverse change in surface characteristics."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2548Part21996_5",
    "text": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets, [General]\nmm 1 25 2 40 5.5 Staining by Seats and Covers — There shall not be any visible colour transfer to the white cloth. 5.6 Staining and/or Other Surface Deterioration of Seats and Covers — There shall not be any change of colour or other adverse change in surface characteristics. 5.7 Surface Hardness - Minimum value of Rockwell Hardness Number (HR) shall be `L45'. 5.8 Endurance Test for Seats, Covers and Buffers— Neither seat, cover or buffer should be damaged or dislocated. This is a type test. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendixs B to M of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2548 (Part 1) : 1996 Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets: Part 1 Thermoplastic seats and covers (fifth revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.166"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part11994_1",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nGeneral requirements relating to terminology, material and manufacture, glazing, defects, minimum thickness, tolerance, performance and methods of test for vitreous sanitary appliances covered by various parts of the standard.\n[Material And Glazing] Vitreous sanitary ware is a strong high grade ceramicware made from a mixture of suitable clays and finely ground minerals, such as quartz and felspar. It shall be coated on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze giving a white or coloured finish. The vitreous glazing medium shall be thoroughly fused to the body. All exposed surfaces of an appliance shall be uniformly glazed, shall be free from craze and discolouration and shall posses an impervious surface. In case of certain coloured glaze, the lead content, if any, shall not exceed 5 percent of the weight of the glaze."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Permissible Blemishes And Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part11994_2",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Permissible Blemishes And Defects]\nSee Tables 1, 2 and 3. TABLE 1BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN WC PANS BIDETS, SQUATTING PANS, URINALS, PARTITION PLATES, PEDESTALS AND ACCESSORIES Location Blemish of Defect Maximum Permitted Wavy finish None on all visible surfaces Warpage WC an and bidets Squatting pans Not more than 6 mm a) Not more than 6 mm for long pattern of 580 m size. b) Not more than 10 mm for long pattern of 630 mm size and Orissa patterns of 580. General Other appliances Not more than 1 mm per 100 mm; total warpage not more than 6 mm. Accessories Not to exceed 5 mm on any plane Discoloration None on all visible surfaces Spots, blisters and pinholes A total of not over three; no grouping, for coloured appliances, blister and pinhole limited to one each. Flushing surface and horizontal face of rims of Bubbles a"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Minimum Thickness",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part11994_3",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Minimum Thickness]\nAt any place in an appliance shall not be less than 6 mm. 5. Tolerances (a) On dimensions 75 mm and more ± 2 percent of the specified dimension or ±2 mm which ever is more. (b) On dimensions less than 75 mm ± 5 percent of the specifed dimension or ± 2 mm whichever is more. (c) On the height of the flush outlet of P-Traps,or horizontal outlets ± 5 mm; and (d) On all angles ± 3o. SP 21 : 2005 10.168 Note — For method of tests, refer to 10 and Appendics A to C of the standard. For detailed information refer to IS 2556 (Part 1) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 1 General requirements (third revision). 6. Performance Requirements 6.1 Warpage — Feeler gauge of maximum thickness specified (see Tables 1, 2 or 3) should not slide under the appliances witho"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part21994_1",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 2): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [General]\nIS 2556 (Part 2): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances (VITREOUS CHINA) PART 2 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASHDOWN WATER CLOSETS (Fourth Revision) FIG. 1 PATERN 1 AND PATTERN 2 WATER CLOSETS SP 21 : 2005 10.170 Note 1 — For method of tests refer to 8 of the standard. Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 2 Specific requirements of wash-down water closets (fourth revision). FIG. 2 PATTERN 3 WATER CLOSET WITH HORIZONTAL P– TRAP FIG. 3 PATTERN 4 WATER CLOSET WITH CONCELATED S-TRAP SP 21 : 2005 10.171"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Aplliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part41994_1",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Aplliances [Scope]\nRequirements, patterns and sizes, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, sampling and marking provisions for vitreous wash basins. 2. Requirements 2.1 Patterns and Sizes TABLE 1 PATTERNS AND SIZES Pattern Size Flat Back 660 × 460 (Surgeon's basin) 630 × 450 550 × 400 450 × 300 Angle Back 600 × 480 400 × 400 Note1 — All dimensions in millimetres Note 2 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to 5 of the standard. . (VITREOUS CHINA) PART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH BASINS (Third Revision) Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 4) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 4 Specific requirements of wash basins (third revision). 2.2 One piec\n[Finish] Inside surfaces of wash basins shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient draining. SP 21 : 2005 10.174"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part91994_1",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nRequirements for patterns, construction,dimensions and tolerances, finish, inspection and marking of pedestal type bidets made of vitreous china. 2. Patterns i) Pattern 1 — Pedestal bidets with flushing rim and spray hole (See Fig. 1A &1B). FIG. 1 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF BIDET (WITH FLUSHING RIM) (VITREOUS CHINA ) PART 9 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OFPEDASTAL TYPE BIDETS (Fourth Revision) ii) Pattern 2 — Pedestal bidets without flushing rim and over rim supply (See Fig. 2A & 2B).\n[Construction] Shall be of one piece construction."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part91994_2",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Finish]\nThe inside surface of the bidet and waste outlet shall be glazed uniform, smooth for effcient drawing. SP 21 : 2005 10.189 FIG. 2 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF BIDET WITHOUT FLUSHING RIM Note1 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to 6 of the standard. Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 general requirements of the standard. For detailed information, Refer to IS : 2556 (Part 9) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china)Part 9 Specific requirements of pedestal type bidets (Fourth Revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.190"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part141994_1",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Scope]\nRequirements for patterns, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for integrated vitreous sqatting pans. 2. Requirements 2.1 Pattern — Long pattern 500. Other sizes and patterns may be made, however, except functional dimensions, all other requirements shall be complied with. 2.2 Shall be provided with either box or open rim. 2.3 Anti - syphonage vent horn shall be provided where required by the sanitation authority. 2.4 Depth of water seal shall in no case be less than no case be less than 50 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2556Part141994_2",
    "text": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances [Finish]\nInside surface of the integrated pan shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush. (VITREOUS CHINA ) PART 14 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF INTEGRATED SQATTING PANS (First Revision) Note1 — For method of test, refer to 8 of the standard. Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 general requirements of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part 14) : 1995 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances (Vitreous China): Part 14 Specific Requirements of Integrated Squatting Pans (First Revision) 4. Flushing Test 4.1 Toilet Paper Test — When repeated four times, the pan shall discharge the full charge of the paper atleast thrice. 4.2 Smudge Test — Immediately after the flush there shall be no smudge left in the pan. 4.3 Holding capacity Test —"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5455: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Iron Steps For Manholes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS54551969_1",
    "text": "IS 5455: 1969 Cast Iron Steps For Manholes [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron steps for manholes.\n[Materials] Suitable quality of grey cast iron as specified. 3. Requirements 3.1 Patterns Pattern 1 — Minimum weight 4.5 kg (see 1A) Pattern 2 — Minimum weight 5.3 kg (see 1B) 3.2 Portion of step projecting from the wall of the man hole shall have a raised chequred design.\n[Tolerances] ±2 mm on all dimensions"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5455: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Iron Steps For Manholes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS54551969_2",
    "text": "IS 5455: 1969 Cast Iron Steps For Manholes [Coating]\nShall be coated with a material having tar base or with a black bituminous composition or cashew-nut shell liquid. The coating shall be smooth and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of temperature of 63°C and shall not brittle as to chip of at a temperature of o°C."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5455: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Iron Steps For Manholes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS54551969_3",
    "text": "IS 5455: 1969 Cast Iron Steps For Manholes [Tests]\nshall with stand a load of 225 kg at a point at the centre of the front tread for 1 minute All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 1A CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 1) SP 21 : 2005 10.194 Note — For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5455: 1969. Specification for cast iron steps for manholes. All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 1B CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 2) SP 21 : 2005 10.195 + Cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5961: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS59611970_1",
    "text": "IS 5961: 1970 Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements for cast iron gratings for use in drainage works.\n[Materials] Frame and cover shall be of grey cast iron. Hinge pin shall be of mild steel wire.\n[Manufacture And Workmanship] Frame and cover shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts and warping. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Size of frame = 600 × 560 mm (Outside dimensions) Height of frame = 100 mm 4.1 Tolerance — On internal dimensions of the top of For detailed information, refer to IS 5961 : 1970 Specification for cast iron gratings or drainage purposes. the frame ± 2 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5961: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS59611970_2",
    "text": "IS 5961: 1970 Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes [Coating]\nShall be with a material having tar base with a black bituminous composition. Coating shall be smooth and tenacious which will not flow at a temperature of 63°C, and which is not so brittle as to chip off at 0°C."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5961: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS59611970_3",
    "text": "IS 5961: 1970 Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes [Tests]\nGratings shall withstand without fracture a load of 35 tonnes for a minimum period of 30 seconds when subjected to loading test described in IS 1726 : 1991+. SP 21 : 2005 10.196"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7231: 1994",
    "title": "Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS72311994_1",
    "text": "IS 7231: 1994 Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals [General]\nIS 7231: 1994 Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals (Second Revision) T Talc as filler if used shall not exceed 20% Note— For materials of other components See Table1 of the standard. SP 21 : 2005 10.197 Note — For method of test, refer to 9 and Appendices B to D of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7231 : 1994 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (second revision). 4.3 Freedom from Self Siphonage — The siphonic system shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action when the water is at the working water level, but shall not self-siphon or leak into the flush pipe when the water is up to 1 cm above the invert of the overflow pipe. 4.4 Reduced Water Level – The discharge shall operate satisfactorily when the cistern is filled to a level up to 1 cm below the working water level. 4.5 Discharge Capacity – Cistern of 5 litres and 10 litres capacities, when required to give a full flush, shall respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation of ± 0.5 litres."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7231: 1994",
    "title": "Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS72311994_2",
    "text": "IS 7231: 1994 Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals [General]\nwhen the cistern is filled to a level up to 1 cm below the working water level. 4.5 Discharge Capacity – Cistern of 5 litres and 10 litres capacities, when required to give a full flush, shall respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation of ± 0.5 litres. Dual-flush cistern of 10 litres capacity shall discharge alternatively a short flush of 5 ± 0.5 litres. Dual flush western 6/3 liture capacity shall discharge 6 ± 0.5 liters and atternatively a half flush of 3 ± 0.5 litre 4.6 Discharge Rate – The discharge rate shall be 10 ± 0.5 litres within 6 seconds and 5 ± 0.5 litres and 6±0.5 litre within 6 s and 3 ± 0.5 litres within 35 for liters of capacity 6/3 litre. 3 seconds for cistern of capacities 10 litres and 5 litres respectively. 5. Tests 5.1 Distortion Resistance Test — The cistern shall not buldge more than 6 mm and the cover shall not be dislodged."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7231: 1994",
    "title": "Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS72311994_3",
    "text": "IS 7231: 1994 Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals [General]\n6 s and 3 ± 0.5 litres within 35 for liters of capacity 6/3 litre. 3 seconds for cistern of capacities 10 litres and 5 litres respectively. 5. Tests 5.1 Distortion Resistance Test — The cistern shall not buldge more than 6 mm and the cover shall not be dislodged. 5.2 Dead Load Test – When tested by the application of a dead load of 230 N applied 6 mm from the end of the operating lever arm for 30 seconds, shall not distort to such an extent that any part becomes detached. 5.3 Front Thrust Test – Only to cisterns intendent for low level use shall not distort to such an extent as to be inoperable or unsighhtly when the load is removed. 5.4 Impact Test – The cistern, complete with its fittings, shall show no defect after one impact. 5.5 Endurance Test – The cistern and its component parts shall not show any damage or defects and all the parts shall be satisfactory, after 3000 operations. SP 21 : 2005 10.198"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11246: 1992",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS112461992_1",
    "text": "IS 11246: 1992 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester [Scope]\nRequirements for material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance and testing for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) pourflush type squatting pans conact moulded as well as compression moulded. RESIN (GRP) SQUATTING PANS (First Revision) * Glass fibre rovings for reinforcement of polyester and epoxide resin systems (first revision) + Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resin systems (first revision) 2. Material 2.1 Glass Fibre — As per IS 11320: 1997* and IS 11551 : 1996+ Low alkali glass with glass content of the laminate minimum 30 percent by weight. FIG. 1 SQUATING PAN TABLE 1 FUNCTIONAL DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION REF IN FIG. 1 DIMENSIONS (mm) (1) (2) (3) Width of front profile (semi-circle) A 125 Wdith at rear profile (sem\n[Polyster Resin] Unsaturated polyster resin shall be isopthalic type"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11246: 1992",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Sheet Moulding Compound (Smc)",
    "chunk_id": "IS112461992_2",
    "text": "IS 11246: 1992 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester [Sheet Moulding Compound (Smc)]\nShall be of low profile grade and shall consist of glass fibre reinforcements pre-impregnated with filled unsaturated polyester resin system in sheet form. 2.4Surface Coat a) Gel coat. b) Polyurethane resin coat 3. Thickness and Mass 3.1 Thickness i) With gel coat — 2.0 mm, Min ii) With PU coat — 1.8 mm, Min At the point of additional reinfore cement, that is rim and bottom outlet, the minimum thickness shall be 2.8 mm with gel coat and 2.6 mm with PU coat. 3.2 Mass – The minimum mass of hand laid pans shall be 750 gm and for sheet moulding compound (SMC) shall be 900 gms. 4. Performance requirements 4.1 Warpage — Feeler guage of 4mm shall not slide under it without application of force. 4.2 Thickness – See 3.1 4.3 Impact Resistance — Shall not show any cracks in the surface coat. 4.4 Craz"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7781984_1",
    "text": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves [Scope]\nRequirements of copper alloy gate, globe and check valves of nominal sizes 8 to 100 mm suitable for working temperatures up to 450 C and non shock working pressure up to 16 MPa, for water works purposes. This standard may be used for other fluids, but the physical and chemical testing shall be done for the same fliud. 2. Nominal Sizes 2.1 Screwed End Valves 8(1/4), 10(3/8) , 15(1/2), 20(3/4), 25(1) 32(1.1/4), 40 (11/2), 50(2), 65(21/2), 80(3) and 100 mm(4) The nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the size of screw threads. 2.2 Flanged Valves Shall be as follows 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 65, 80, and 100mm. FOR WATER WORKS PURPOSES (Fourth Revision) TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENT PARTS OF GATE, GLOBE AND CHECK VALVES SL. NO. COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) I) Body a)Brass b) Leaded tin bron"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Design And Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS7781984_2",
    "text": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves [Design And Manufacture]\nSee 7 of the standard. 6.1 Body end port shall be circular end of a diameter not less than the nominal size of the ports of the valve 6.2 Area of water way through and between the ports of the value shall be not less than area of a circle of diameter equal to the nominal size of the valve except to globe and check valves where area may be reduced through the valve seats to 85 percent of the fullwater way area. 6.3 Bonnets shall be screwed in bonnet, screwed on bonnet or bolted bonnet. 6.4 Gland shall be of one piece or two piece design consisting of a sleeve sliding in the stuffing box and secured by a gland nut or bolted flange. 6.5 Stem shall be in one piece and designed to prevent the wedge or disc from leaving the stem. Note — For details of design see 7 of the standard. For details in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS7781984_3",
    "text": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves [Dimensions]\nThe overall length of stop valves shall be as given below with a tolerance of +3 mm Nominal mm Size Internally Externally Mixed Threaded Threaded Ends 8 45 65 55 10 50 75 62 15 60 85 70 20 70 100 85 25 85 125 105 32 100 135 115 40 110 145 125 50 135 175 155 Tolerance ±3mm Note— For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS7781984_4",
    "text": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves [Finish]\nThe bib taps shall be always polished bright. The stop valves may be polished bright or they may have an unpolished as `cast' finish. The bib taps or stop valves may also nickel-chromium plated. The plating shall be capable of taking high polish and shall not easily tarnish."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS7781984_5",
    "text": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves [Tests]\nWhen tested in closed position under hydraulic pressure of 1.5 MPa minimum maintained at that pressure for a period of at least 2 minutes during which it shall neither leak nor sweat. For details information, refer to IS 781 : 1984 Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 781: 1984",
    "title": "Castcopper Alloyscrew Down Bib Taps Andstopvalves For Waterservices",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7811984_1",
    "text": "IS 781: 1984 Castcopper Alloyscrew Down Bib Taps Andstopvalves For Waterservices [Scope]\nRequirements for copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves suitable for cold non- shock working pressure up to 1.0 MPa. Bib taps shall have screwed male inlet. Stop valves shall have screwed female end or male ends or mixed ends (mixed ends means one end screwed male and the other end screwed female). Note — Cold service means a temperature not exceeding 45ºC. 2. Nominal sizes a) Bib taps shall be 8, 10, 15, 20 and 25 mm. b) Stop valves shall be 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Nominal size of the bib tap and stop valves shall be designated by the nominal bore of the socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is normally fitted. 3. Materials Sl No. Component Material i) Body and bonnet a) Cast brass b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Spindle nuts Brass (extruded rolled or forged) iii"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1701: 1960",
    "title": "Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17011960_1",
    "text": "IS 1701: 1960 Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose [Scope]\nRequirements regarding sizes,materials, manufacture and workmanship, and testing of float valves (horizontal plunger type ) for water supply purposes.\n[Classification] a) High Pressure — High Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'HP'and are designed for use on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above. b) Low Pressure — Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'LP', and are designed for use on mains having a pressure less than 0.175 MPa."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1701: 1960",
    "title": "Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS17011960_2",
    "text": "IS 1701: 1960 Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose [Nominal Sizes]\n5, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard 4. Materials TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR BODY AND COMPONENT PARTS OF FLOAT VALVES SL. NO COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body and parts of a) Cast Brass fittings (except lever rod and back nut) b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Lever rod Brass rod iii) Back nut and a) Brass rod nuts for inlet pipe b) Leaded tin bronze iv) Washer Synthetic rubber v) Inlet pipe Brass 5. Construction 5.1 The inlet shank shall be horizontal in case of 15 mm size it may be either horizontal or vertical. 5.2 The lever may be made in one piece or the short aim and rod may be seperately constructed. 5.3 Floats shall conform to IS 9762 : 1994+ 6. Testing 6.1 Hydraulic Test — Every float valve while in closed position shall withstand an internally"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1703: 2000",
    "title": "Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17032000_1",
    "text": "IS 1703: 2000 Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type) [Scope]\nRequirements for self-closing taps with or without stuffing box.\n[Nominal Sizes] 15 mm and 20 mm. Nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the inlet connection.\n[Design] The opening of the tap shall be performed by hand pressing of the handle up or down or turning sideways or by pressing in of the pushbutton, and the tap shall close when the handle or pushbutton is released. The force required for operating the selfclosing tap for its full opening shall not exceed 70 N. For self-closing tap which operate against heads exceeding 2 m, a non-concussive function is essential and provision to this effect shall be made in the design."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1703: 2000",
    "title": "Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS17032000_2",
    "text": "IS 1703: 2000 Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type) [Finish]\nAll machining shall be so carried out that the parts are true to shape and are in correct adjustment when assembled. All machined surfaces shall be smoothly finished. If the body is of lead tin bronze, the outside surface shall be polished bright. 6. Tests 6.1 Shall withstand an internelly applied hydraulic pressure of 2MPa for a minimum period of 2 minutes without leakage or sweating. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS FOR SELF – CLOSING TAPS SL. NO COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body, cover and lever or a) Grey cast iron lever or push-button b) Malleable iron castings c) Cast brass d) Leaded t in bronze ii) Spindle a) Mild steel b) Leaded tin bronze iii) Spindle spring a) Phosphor bronze wire b) Spring steel wire c) Any corrosion resisting alloy having a tensile strength of phosphor bro"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1711: 1984",
    "title": "Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17111984_1",
    "text": "IS 1711: 1984 Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish and testiang of pillar taps.\n[Nominal Sizes] 15 mm and 20 mm. The nominal size of the pillar taps shall be designated by the nominal bore of the pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1711: 1984",
    "title": "Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS17111984_2",
    "text": "IS 1711: 1984 Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes [Materials]\nSee Table 1 4. Construction 4.1 For detailed dimensions of body, backnut, bannet and gland, capstan head, spindle and washerplate and screw threads refer to the standard. 4.2 Anti- splash device shall be fitted, if required"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1711: 1984",
    "title": "Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finished Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS17111984_3",
    "text": "IS 1711: 1984 Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes [Finished Mass]\nMinimum finished mass of 15 mm and 20 mm size pillar taps shall be 650 g and 1175 g respectively. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS PART OF PILLAR TAPS SL. NO. COMPONENT MATERIAL i) Body, body components, a) Cast brass capstan head and washer plate b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Spindle, gland, washer a) Brass rod plate and nut (extruded or rolled) b) Brass"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1795: 1982",
    "title": "Pillar Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS17951982_1",
    "text": "IS 1795: 1982 Pillar Taps For Water Supply Purposes [Finish]\nShall be nickel-chromium plated. Shall be capable of taking high polish.\n[Tests] Shall withstand internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20Kgf/cm2) for 2 minutes without leakage or sweating. SP 21 : 2005 10.207"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2692: 1989",
    "title": "Ferrules For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26921989_1",
    "text": "IS 2692: 1989 Ferrules For Water Services [Scope]\nLays down nominal sizes and requirements regarding material, manufactrue and workmanship, construction, sampling and testing of copper alloy screwdown ferrules for use on water supply mains. 2. Nominal Size 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2692: 1989",
    "title": "Ferrules For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS26921989_2",
    "text": "IS 2692: 1989 Ferrules For Water Services [Tests]\nEvery ferrule, complete with its component parts, shall withstand hydraulic pressure of at least 1.5 MPa, applied for two minutes, and during this period it shall neither leak nor sweat. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT PARTS OF FERRULES SL. COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body, plug and Leaded tin cap bronze ii) Washer plate Brass and nut (extrudedrolled, cast, diecast) Leaded brass iii) Resilient washer Leather Vulcanized fibre, rubber iv) Copper washer Copper Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard. For detailed informaton, refer to IS 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water services (second revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.208"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3004: 1979",
    "title": "Plug Cocks For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30041979_1",
    "text": "IS 3004: 1979 Plug Cocks For Water Supply Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of plug cocks of 15 mm, 20 mm and 25 mm nominal size with a key head for use underground for water supply purposes up to 1 MPa working pressure. 2. Requirements 2.1 Types of End — Plug cocks shall have each body end suitable for one of the following types of joints: a) Plain ends for lead (wiped) joint, b) Socket end for capillary solder joint, c) Union and tail piece for lead (wiped) joint, d) Union and tail pipe for capillary solder joint, and e) Union for copper tube compression joint. 2.1.1 Ends for (b), (d) and (e) by mutual agreement. 2.2 Nominal Size — 15, 20 and 25 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard. 2.3 Materials — Cast brass and leaded tin bronze for bodies and components. Brass rod for washers, plug SP 21 : 2005 10.209"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3311: 1979",
    "title": "Waste Plug And Its Accessories For Sinks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS33111979_1",
    "text": "IS 3311: 1979 Waste Plug And Its Accessories For Sinks [Scope]\nRequirements of washers for water services suitable for use in bib taps, stop valves, self- closing taps, flush valves, pillar taps and ferrules, covered under respective standards. 2. Effects on Potable Water and Metals 2.1 Effect on Potable Water – Material used for tap washer shall not impart any taste to water having a residual cholride content not exceeding 0.2 mg/l or have any toxic effects or foster growth of bacteria, it shall also not impart colour when exposed for a second time in normal potable water for 24 hours in a glass containing 250 ml of water at 10º and 45ºC. 2.2 Effect on Metal – The material of the washer shall not corrode the metal seating or the washer plate sufficiently to impair the performance and life of a tap or valve. 3. Materials a) Synthetic or natural vulcan"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4346: 1982",
    "title": "Washers For Use With Fittings For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS43461982_1",
    "text": "IS 4346: 1982 Washers For Use With Fittings For Water Services [General]\nIS 4346: 1982 Washers For Use With Fittings For Water Services (First Revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.211"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS5312Part12004_1",
    "text": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004 Swing Check Type Reflux [Scope]\nRequirements for flanged reflux valves of single door, swing check type used for water works purposes of sizes 50 to 600 mm. 2. Nominal Pressure Sizes of Valves Nominal Pressure (PN) mm MPa 50 to 125 1.6 150 to 300 1.0 350 to 600 0.6 3. Nominal Sizes 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the water way. The actual bore at any point shall not be less than the nominal size. 4. Materials TABLE 1MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT COMPONENT PARTS OF REFLUX VALVES Sl. No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body, cover, door Grey cast bearing holder and iron door face disc ii) Hinge pin, door pin Stainless steel and door suspension iii) Body seat rings Leaded in bronze iv) Door face ring leaded tin bronze v) Bearing bushes/"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS5312Part12004_2",
    "text": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004 Swing Check Type Reflux [Coating]\nShall be smooth, glossy and tenacious, sufficiently hard so as not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77oC and not so brittle at a temperature of 15oC as to chip off when scratched lightly with a point of a per knife. Note— For alternative material see Table of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 2004. Specification for swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes Part 1- Single door pattern (second revision). 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Body Test — Shall not show any leakage or permanent distortion under the specified pressure . 7.2 Hydrostatic Seat Test — shall show no leakage when subjected to the prescribed pressure. SP 21 : 2005 10.213"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS5312Part21986_1",
    "text": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986 Swing Check Type Reflux [Scope]\nRequirements for flanged reflux valves of multi-door, swing check type used for water works purpose of sizes from 400 to 1200 mm.\n[Class] PN 0.6 and PN 1.0 where PN is Nominal Pressure defined as the maximum permissible gauge working pressure in MPa."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS5312Part21986_2",
    "text": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986 Swing Check Type Reflux [Nominal Sizes]\n400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100 and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the water way. 4. Materials Sl. No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body with hinge Grey cast iron and diaphragm ii) Hinge pin High tensile brass iii) Bolts Carbon steel iv) Nuts, nuts for Carbon hinge pins steel v) Bearing bushes Leaded tin bronze vi) Face and seat Leaded tin rings bronze vii) Flange jointing Rubber material (NON-RETURN) VALVES FOR WATER WORKS PURPOSES PART 2 MULTI - DOOR PATTERN (First Revision) Note— For alternative material see Table 1of the standard. 5. Design and Manufacture 5.1 Body may be made in two parts-inlet shell (having duck foot support) and outlet shell. 5.2 Area of waterway through the multidoor in the diaphragm shall not be less than the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS5312Part21986_3",
    "text": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986 Swing Check Type Reflux [Coating]\nShall be smooth-glossy and tenacious sufficiently hard so as not to flow when scratched lightly with the point of a pen knife. 7. Testing: 7.2 Body Test – Shall not show leakage or permanent distortion of any coponent when subjected to the prescribed test. For detailed information, refer to IS : 5312 (Part 2) : 1986 Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return) valves for waterworks purposes Part 2- Multi-door door pattern. SP 21 : 2005 10.214"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8931: 1993",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Pressure Resistance Characteristic",
    "chunk_id": "IS89311993_1",
    "text": "IS 8931: 1993 Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services [Pressure Resistance Characteristic]\nNo permanent deformation in the part of the taps and valves situated upstream or down stream shall be produced 7.3 Hydraulic Characteristic (Flow Rate) – Shall not be less than a) 12.l/min for 15 mm nominal size single and combination tap and valve. b) 23.l/min for 20 mm nominal size.\n[Mechanical Strength Characterist] No permanent deformation or loosing of any part of the tap and valve."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8931: 1993",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS89311993_2",
    "text": "IS 8931: 1993 Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services [Finish]\nThe significant surfaces of taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves shall be nickle-chromium plated. However, the body of concealed stop valve and side stop valve of pillar mounting combination tap assembly may be polished bright or may have an unpolished surface, as 'Cast' finish. 7. Performance Tests"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8931: 1993",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Water Tightness Characteristsic",
    "chunk_id": "IS89311993_3",
    "text": "IS 8931: 1993 Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services [Water Tightness Characteristsic]\nShall not show any leakage of water or escape of airbubbles through the walls of the body, bonnet and diverto assembly. For detailed information, refer to IS 8931 : 1993. Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves for water services (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.216"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9338: 1984",
    "title": "Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS93381984_1",
    "text": "IS 9338: 1984 Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements for flanged cast iron screwdown stop valves from 15 to 300 mm nominal sizes of the following types used for water supply up to 450 C : Globe stop valve; Angle stop valve; oblique stop valve; Globe stop and check value and Angle stop and check valves."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9338: 1984",
    "title": "Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Pressure",
    "chunk_id": "IS93381984_2",
    "text": "IS 9338: 1984 Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Nominal Pressure]\nValves shall be designated by nominal pressure (PN) defined as the maximum permissible gauge working pressure in MPa for the sizes indicated as follow: Nominal Pressure (PN) Nominal Sizes MPa mm 1.0 200 to 300 1.6 Up to and including150 3. Nominal Sizes : 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of thewater way. Note – For dimensions, refer to Figs 1 to 5 and Table 2 to 5 of the Standard. 4. Material Sl.No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body, bonnet, Cast iron handwheel,gland (one piece) and back seat intergal ii) a) Fasteners/bolting Carbon steel b) Nut -doiii) Stem a) High tensile brass b) Stainless Steel iv) Body seat a) Leaded tin ring/disc bronze facing ring b) Stainless Steel v) Solid disc a) Leaded tin w"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9338: 1984",
    "title": "Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS93381984_3",
    "text": "IS 9338: 1984 Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Coating]\nShall be smooth glossy and sufficiently tenacious so as not to flow when exposed to temperature of 77ºC and not become so brittle to a temperature of 15ºC so as to chip off when scratched lightly with the point of a pen knife."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9338: 1984",
    "title": "Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS93381984_4",
    "text": "IS 9338: 1984 Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Tests]\nEach valve shall be subjected to hydrostatic test as per following Table 1 and the value shall show no sign of leakage. SP 21 : 2005 10.217 Note — For method of test refer to Appendix B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9338 : 1984 Specification for Cast Iron screw-down stop valves and stops and check valves for water works purposes (first revision) TEST PRESSURE (GAUAGE) AND TEST DURATOIN OF VALVES PN Rating of Valve Test Test Pressure (Gauge), Min Test Duration, Min (1) (2) (3) (4) MPa MPa min 1.6 Body test 2.4 5 Seat test 1.6 2 Back seat test 2.4 5 (Where specified) 1.0 Body test 1.5 5 Seat test 1.0 2 Back seat test 1.5 5 (Where specified) SP 21 : 2005 10.218"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9739: 1981",
    "title": "Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97391981_1",
    "text": "IS 9739: 1981 Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System [General]\nIS 9739: 1981 Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System (Third Revision) 4.3 Screen of the strainer shall have a minimum unobstructed open flow area (total area of holes ) equal to or greater than twice the nominal pipe flow area. The maximum hole demension of the screen shall not exceed 1/12 of the valve orifice escape diameter. 5. Performance Requirements 5.1 Hydrostatic Test – When subjected to hydrostatic pressure of 1.722 5 MPa at its inlet and an equal back pressure on the reduced pressure side, there shall be no leakage or distortion of parts that will affect the performance of the valve. 5.2 Reduced Pressure Deviation – The reduced pressure delivered by the reducing valve shall not deviate by more than 0.007 MPa for every 0.07 MPa change in the inlet pressure. 5.3 Minimum Reduced Pressure – When water flows through a pressure reducing valve at the rate given in Table 2, with the inlet pressure being maintained at 1.7225 MPa the valve shall be capable of adjustment to a reduced pressure as low as 0.17225 MPa."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9739: 1981",
    "title": "Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97391981_2",
    "text": "IS 9739: 1981 Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System [General]\nchange in the inlet pressure. 5.3 Minimum Reduced Pressure – When water flows through a pressure reducing valve at the rate given in Table 2, with the inlet pressure being maintained at 1.7225 MPa the valve shall be capable of adjustment to a reduced pressure as low as 0.17225 MPa. TABLE 1 CAPACITIES OF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES Nominal size (mm) 15 20 25 32 40 50 Flow (1/s) 0.63 1.05 1.58 2.65 3.46 4.89 5.4 Reduced Pressure Adjustment Range — The reducing valve shall be provided with a reduced pressure adjustment range of not less than 0.172 25 MPA. 5.5 Capacity – The reducing valve shall have minimum capacity as shown in Table 1 when maintaining a reduced pressure of 0.117 1 MPa less than its no-flow set pressure and the inlet pressure maintained at 0.344 5 MPa higher than the reduced point pressure. Note— For methods of tests, refer 6 to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9739 : 1981 specification for pressure reducing valves for domestic water supply system. SP 21 : 2005 10.219"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9758: 1981",
    "title": "Flush Valves And Fittings For Water",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS97581981_1",
    "text": "IS 9758: 1981 Flush Valves And Fittings For Water [Scope]\nRequirements for flush valves, flush pipes and stop valves for water closet and urinals.\n[Materials] See Table 1. Sl.No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body of flush valve a) Cast brass b) Die casting brass ii) Flush pipe a) Steel tubes seamless or welded completely protected, inside and outside, either by vitreous enamelling (see IS 3972-1968) or hot dip galvanishing (see IS2629-1985) b) PVC c) High density polythylene d) Lead iii) Washers Rubber iv) Springs a) Phosphor bronze b) Stainless steel v) Stop valve Cast brass vi) Spindle to stop valve Extruded brass lever or flush valve"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9758: 1981",
    "title": "Flush Valves And Fittings For Water",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS97581981_2",
    "text": "IS 9758: 1981 Flush Valves And Fittings For Water [Nominal Sizes]\n15, 25 and 32 mm. Nominal size shall be the nominal bore of the supplypipe to which the valve is connected. For detailed information, refer to IS 9758:1981 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and urinals. CLOSETS AND URINAL 4. Manufacture and Construction 4.1 Flush valve of nominal sizes 15, 25 and 32mm shall have an outlet of 20, 32 and 40mm outside diameter respectively. 4.2 Fush valve shallbe self closing and non-concussive in action. 5. Performance & Consturction – 5 litres 10 litres 5.1 Discharge Rate — Flush valves shall discharge at anaverage rate of 5 litres with a tolerance of plus 0.5 litre in 3 seconds and there shall be no appreciable change in the force of the flush during the period of discharge. 5.2 Working Pressure — It shall be capable of working"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9758: 1981",
    "title": "Flush Valves And Fittings For Water",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS97581981_3",
    "text": "IS 9758: 1981 Flush Valves And Fittings For Water [Finish]\nThe outside of the body shall be polished bright and chromium plated. The plating shall be capable of taking high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scaled off. For concealed work concealed parts need not be plated. ± 0.5 litre SP 21 : 2005 10.220"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9762: 1994",
    "title": "Polyethylene Floats (Spherical) For Float Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS97621994_1",
    "text": "IS 9762: 1994 Polyethylene Floats (Spherical) For Float Valves [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nSee Table 1. 5. Testing 5.1 Leakage and Water Absorption Test – The increase in mass of the float shall not be more than 0.5 percent and shall show no leakage. 5.2 Deflection Test — The float shall not deflect by more than 7 mm. 5.3 Impact Test — Floats when dropped from a height of 1500 mm on to a concrete floor at ambient temperature shall not develop any crack or damage. 5.4 Boss Test — The boss and/or float shall not be visibly distorted or damaged. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendices Ato C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9762 : 1994 Specification for polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.221"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_1",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, dimensions, construction finish, and testing of plastic bib taps, pillar taps, stop valve & angle valves for hot and cold water services.\n[Materials] See Table 1. Component Recommended Material Body of Tap/valve PP copolymer, Nylon 66, PBT, Nylon 66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS, ABS-PC Alloy, PVC Bonnet of tap/valve PP Copolymer, Nylon 66, PBT, Nylon66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS, ABS-PC Alloy Spindle of tap/valve PP Copolymer, Nylon 66,PBT, Nylon 66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS, ABS-PC Alloy Handle of Tap/valve PP Copolymer, PBT, Polyacetal, ABS, ABS-PC Alloy Seal of Tap/Valve Rubber, Nitrile PVC,Thermo plastic polyster based elastomer. 2.1 Chemical and Hygiene Requirements — All plastic materials coming into contact with water indented for human consumption shall not present any health risk upto a temperature of 900 C. They shall not cause any change to the drinking water in terms of quality, appearance, smell or taste. Materials shall be resistant to corrosio"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_2",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Nominal Sizes]\nPlastic taps and stop valves shall be of the nominal sizes: 15 mm (1/2”) and 20 mm (3/4”). Note — The figures within brackets refer to the size and designation of the threaded end The nominal bore of the socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is normally fitted shall designate nominal size of taps or valves."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_3",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Dimensions]\nThe thickness in any portion of the body and bonnet shall not be less than 2.5 mm for all sizes. Note — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Identification",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_4",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Identification]\nThe control devices for taps shall be indentified by: a) The colour blue, preferably, or the letter C for cold water b) The colour red, preferably, or the letter H for hot water. The cold water control device shall be on the right and hot water control device on the left,when viewed from the front"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_5",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Finish]\nOnly Plastic materials impervious to plating solutions shall be allowed to come in to contact with solution during plating. SP 21 : 2005 10.222 Note — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9763 : 2000 Specification for plastic bib taps, pillar taps angle valves and stop valves for hot and cold water services (second revision). 7. Test 7.1 Resistance to Residual Chlorine in Water — Plastic taps and valves shall remian unaffected after being immersed in a 10 percent solution of hydrochloric acid for 24 hours. 7.2 Drip Proofness Test — This test shall be carried out by applying a hydraulic pressure of 0.1MPa maintained for 15 minutes. There shall be no leakage of water during the test. Alternatively, the test can be performed using 0.04 MPa of pneuma"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Hydraulic And Shut",
    "chunk_id": "IS97632000_6",
    "text": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services [Hydraulic And Shut]\noff Test — The float valve shall be capable of with standing 2.0 MPa water presssure for 60 seconds without leak or sweating when held in the closed position. The diaphragm valve when assembled in working condition but without flow restrictors and with the float immersed to half its volume shall remain closed against a test pressure of 1.05 MPa.\n[General] siphonage Test — The float valve shall have no back siphonage as indicated by the presence of water in the catch pot. This shall be type test.\n[Flow Test] The float valve shall be capable of delivering at least 9 litres of water in 3 min into its container\n[Endurance Test] The float valve shall be capable of completing 200,000 cycles and shall then be capable of satisfying hydraulic and shut-off test. This shall be type test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12234: 1988",
    "title": "Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS122341988_1",
    "text": "IS 12234: 1988 Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services [Scope]\nSpecifies materials, workmanship, performance and sampling requirements besides where appropriate, dimensions and tolerances, of diaphragm type float operated valves for water services up to 45oC for use in flush tanks, overhead water tanks, etc. 2. Materials Sl. No Components/Parts Material (1) (2) (3) 1. Valve body, inlet shank Polyacetal vale seat and back nut 2. Discharge horn Polyacetal (if provided) or Polypropylene or polyethylene or Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) or Ethylene Vinyl Acetate (EVA) or any other suitable material 3. Diaphragm Synthetic rubber"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12234: 1988",
    "title": "Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS122341988_2",
    "text": "IS 12234: 1988 Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services [Nominal Sizes]\n15 mm 4. Construction 4.1 Inlet shank shall be not less than 48 mm in length. 4.2 Valves shall be supplied with a high pressure (HP) or a low pressure (LP) seal. 4.3 Diaphragms made of synthetic rubber shall have the form and dimension as required for the operation of the valve. 4.4 Float aim and assembly shall have not more than 25mm, Inlet diflection after the test additional deflection after boading for 28 days shall not be more than 12mm. 5. Performance Tests 5.1 Hydraulic Test — Shall be capable of witstanding whilst held in the closed position, an internally applied hydraulic pressure of MPa for a period of 0 5 60− + seconds, without leaking. 5.2 Shut-off Test — When assembled in working condition but without flow restrictions and fitted with the relevant seat and the float immersed"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13049: 1991",
    "title": "Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS130491991_1",
    "text": "IS 13049: 1991 Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services [General]\nIS 13049: 1991 Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services Note— For method of test refer to Appendices Aot C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 13049 : 1991 Specification for diaphragm type (plastric body) float operated valves for cold water services. 0 025 .0 2 − + SP 21 : 2005 10.225 1. Scope : Requirements for forged brass gate, globe and check valves suitable for working temperatures up to 45ºC and non-shock maximum hydraulic working pressure of 2 MPa for water works purposes. 2. Nominal Sizes : 8(1/4), 10(3/8), 15(1/2), 20(3/ 4),25(1),32(1.1/4), 40(1.1/2) and 50(2) mm. Note : The nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the size of screw threads. 3. Materials: See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13049: 1991",
    "title": "Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS130491991_2",
    "text": "IS 13049: 1991 Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services [General]\ntemperatures up to 45ºC and non-shock maximum hydraulic working pressure of 2 MPa for water works purposes. 2. Nominal Sizes : 8(1/4), 10(3/8), 15(1/2), 20(3/ 4),25(1),32(1.1/4), 40(1.1/2) and 50(2) mm. Note : The nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the size of screw threads. 3. Materials: See Table 1. TABLE 1 MATERIALS Component Material Body, bonnet, Forged brass cover stuffing box,disc, wedge and hinge Gland, gland nut, Forged brass ball, stem, stem or free cutting nut, hinge pin brass Handwheel Cast iron (see Note) Gland packing a) Hemp and jute b) Asbestos c) Any other equally efficient packing material suitable for cold water Spring (in case Phosphor check valve is bronze wire spring loaded) Note : Handwheels may also be made either in steel, aluminium alloy, zinc alloy or of non- metallic materials. 4. Types a) Gate valves b) Globe valves"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13114: 1991",
    "title": "Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS131141991_1",
    "text": "IS 13114: 1991 Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nSee Tables 2 & 3 6. Design and Manufacture 6.1 Flow way area at any point shall be not less than that of a circle having an equivalent diameter as specified. However, globe and check valves with plug types discs and discs guided from below shall have a flow way area of not less than 85 percent of that specified for above. 6.2 For globe valves and check valves the direction of flow shall be with the upstream pressure under the disc. 6.3 Handwheel shall close the valve by turning in clockwise direction, when facing the wheel. 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Test 7.1.1 Test Pressures : Shall show no visible leakage during the test under conditions as below: a) Shell Test : 1.5 × maximum working pressure of 2 MPa. b) Seat and Backseat Test : 1.1 × maximum working pressure of 2MPa. 7.1.2. Test Durat"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13114: 1991",
    "title": "Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS131141991_2",
    "text": "IS 13114: 1991 Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes [Scope]\nCovers single faced vertically sliding type cast iron sluice gates of nominal sizes from 300 to 2500 mm, suitable for mounting on the flange of cast iron wall thimble. These sluice gates are meant for use for water supply and waste water application. These sluice gates are designed for either seating head or unseating head or unseating head, or both. Sluice gates as per this standard in addition to manual may be adapted to electric, hydraulic or pneumatic power operation. Requirements for actuating gear except in case of manual operation is left to the mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Sluice gates as per this standard may be of the conventional-closure or of flush-bottom closure type. 2. Classification a) Class 1 : Suitable for maximum Sluice gates unbalanced he"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_1",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [Materials]\nsee Table 3 TABLE 3 MATERIALS Sl. No. Item Material (1) (2) (3) 1. Thimble, frame, guide, Cast iron extension guide, slide (shutter), gear box, pedestal, stem guide, bracket, wedging devices, flush bottom seal support bar 2. Yoke (Bridge) Cast Iron structural steel 3. a) Wedges Cast iron Naval brass Phosphor bronze Leaded tin bronze Stainless steel b) Wedge facings Naval brass Phosphor bronze Leaded tin bronze Stainless Note : For materials of other components, refer to Table 3 of the standard SP 21 : 2005 10.228"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Surface Preparation And Painting",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_2",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [Surface Preparation And Painting]\nAfter cleaning, the surfaces shall be primed by application of either one shop coat of zinc chromate or coaltar coating suitable for use in potable water and applied. After painted surfaces are dry, the machined or bearing surfaces and the holes, both plain and threaded, shall be coated with grease to offer temporary protection to the surfaces until the time of installation. Surfaces of thimble and stem guides which would be in contact with the concrete shall not be coated. 7. Manual Lifting Devices : Shall be ungeared or geared operatable by handwheel or a cracle handle. Geared mechanism may be either single ordual speed as necessary. Note : For details see 9 of the standard. 8. Shop Testing a) Seat Clearance Check b) Smooth Movement Test c) Shop Leakage Test 8.1. Hydrostatic Test : Water"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_3",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [Scope]\nRequirements of single air valve (small and large orifice) double air valves (small and large orifice with or without integral isolating valve) and kinetic air valves with or without separate isolating sluice valve for use on water mains. 2. Types a) Single Air valve : Small orifice type (S 1) : Large orifice type (S 2) b) Double Air valve : Standard type with in-built isolating valve (DS1) or without isolating valves (DS2) c) Kinetic Air valve : Kinetic air valve (DK)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Nominal Pressures",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_4",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [Nominal Pressures]\nMaximum permissible gauge working pressures of PN 1.0 and PN 1.6 MPa. 4. Nominal Sizes a) Single air valve S 1 : (Small orifice type) 15,25,40 mm b) Single air valve S 2 : (Large orifice type) 25,40,50 mm c) Double air valve : (All types) (DS 1,2) 40,50, 80,100,150 and 200 mm d) Kinetic air valve : 40,50,80,100, (DK) 150 and 200 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Temperature Rating",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_5",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [Temperature Rating]\nAll air valves shall be suitable for continuous use at their PN rating within the temperature of 45o C. 6. Service Application 6.1 Single Air Valve (Small Orifice)–For automatically releasing air which may accumulate under pressure in a section of pipe line during normal working condition. 6.2 Single Air Valve (Large Orifice)– For automatically releasing/admitting air that may accumlulate under pressure in a section of pipe line at the time of initial charging or draining of mass. 6.3 Double Air Valves–These valves are simply a combination of small and large orifice air valves with common connection to the main, small orifice function being similar to that of a single air valve. Large orifice serves for automatically exhausting air when a pipe is being filled with water, or automatically v"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "End Connection",
    "chunk_id": "IS133491992_6",
    "text": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates [End Connection]\nEnd connection of single air valves (Small and large orifice) shall be either flanged or screwed. Double air valves shall have flange ends machined and drilled. For kinetic air valves, all flanges including that of the isolating sluice valve shall be machined and drilled 8. Materials TABLE 1 MATERIALS Sl.no. Component / Body Material i) Body, Cover, Grey cast iron Valve, Stuffing box,Valve guide, Cowl, gland, cap, Joint supprting ii) Stem High tensile brass iii) Low Pressure Natural Seatring & Face ring rubber v) High Pressure Orifice Leaded tin bronze vi) Stem nut Leaded tin bronze vii) Body seat ring Leaded tin bronze viii) Bolts Carbon steel SUMMMARY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14845: 2000",
    "title": "Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS148452000_1",
    "text": "IS 14845: 2000 Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes [Coating]\nAll coatings shall be carried out after satisfactory testing of the valves prior to despatch. All unmachined ferrous surfaces of the valve (both inside and outside) shall be thoroughly clean, dry and shall be free from rust and grease before painting All exposed machined ferrous surfaces shall be painted with one coat of aluminium red oxide primer. 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Test TEST PRESSURE FOR SLUICE VALVES PN Rating Test for Test Pressure Body/Seat MPa (Gauge) PN 1.0 Body 1.5 Seat 1.0 PN 1.6 Body 2.4 Seat 1.6 TEST DURATION FOR SLUICE VALVES Valve Size Test for Test Duration (mm) Body/Seat (Minutes) 50 to1200 Body 5 Seat 2\n[Liquid Penetrant Test] After forming of a collar no stem shall show any sign of flaw when subjected to liquid penetrant flaw detection test in accordance with IS : 3658.\n[Scope] Requirements for non-rising stem type sluice valves from 50 to 1 200 mm sizes used for water supply up to 45º C and having double flanged ends for connections.\n[Nominal Pressures] (Maximum permissible gauge working pressur) Nominal Pressure (PN) Nominal Sized MPa mm PN 1.0 50 to 1200 PN 1.6 50 to 600"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14845: 2000",
    "title": "Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS148452000_2",
    "text": "IS 14845: 2000 Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes [Nominal Sizes]\n50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150,200,250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500, 600, 700, 750,800, 900, 1000,1100 and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the waterway. The actual bore at any point shall not be less than the nominal size. 4. Materials Sl.No. Component Material i) Body, Bonnet, Grey cast iron Dome, Stool cover, Wedge, Stuffing box, gland, thrust Plate and Cap ii) Hand wheel Grey Cast iron iii) Stem Stainless Steel iv) Wedge nut, Leaded tin Shoe, Channel Bronze v) Body seat ring, Leaded tin Wedge facing Bronze ring and Bushes vi) Bolts Carbon Steel vii) Nuts Carbon Steel viii) Gasket Rubber ix) Gland Packing Jute and hemp x) Gear Spheroidal graphite iron xi) Gear Housing Grey cast iron xii) Pinion & Pinion Wrought Shaft Carbon Steel"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14846: 2000",
    "title": "Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS148462000_1",
    "text": "IS 14846: 2000 Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes [Scope]\nCovers terminology, construction, technical characteristics, metrological characteristics and other requirements of water meters with threaded end connections of size up to and including 50 mm, having nominal flow rates in the range of 1.5 to 15 kl/h, suitable for measuring the flow of cold potable water at a nominal pressure of 1 MPa (Max) and ambient temperature. This standard is appliable both for semipositive (piston type) and inferential (turbine type) including magnetic type water meters having dry or wet dial.\n[Nominal Sizes] 5, 20, 25, 40 and 50 mm.\n[Classes] A and B depending on maximum verification scale interval and metrological characteristics."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14846: 2000",
    "title": "Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS148462000_2",
    "text": "IS 14846: 2000 Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes [Materials]\nBody / Component Materials Body a) Bronze b) Brass Registration box a) Bronze b) Brass c) Plastic Strainers a) Plastics b) Brass c) Stainless steel Impellers, pistons a) Ebonite and chambers (for piston only) b) Vulcanite (for piston only) c) Plastics Measuring chamber a) Brass b)Bronze c) Plastics (Semi positive meters only) Gears, gearshaft and pinions a) For use under water i) StainlessSteel ii) Nickel alloy iii) Plastics b) For use above water i) Brass rod ii) Brass sheet (for gears only) iii) Stainless iv) Plastics c) Dia Copper duly Enamelled or powder coated 5. Indicating Device : Indicating device shall be able to record 9999 kl (min) for meter size of 15, 20 and 25 mm and 99999 kl (min) for size 40 and 50 mm and shall thereafter indicate zero. For digital indicators the visible di"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 779: 1994",
    "title": "Water Meters (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Fabrication And Fittings",
    "chunk_id": "IS7791994_1",
    "text": "IS 779: 1994 Water Meters (Domestic Type) [Fabrication And Fittings]\nLocking arrangement may be provided either with a dog-and-clamp arrangement or alternatively, by means of a padlock. Suitable anchorage for fixing box to concrete or masonry bed plate shall be provided."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 779: 1994",
    "title": "Water Meters (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7791994_2",
    "text": "IS 779: 1994 Water Meters (Domestic Type) [Scope]\nRequirements for materials, dimensions and construction of boxes for water meters of nominal size conforming to IS 779 – 1994*. 2. Sizes and Shape 2.1. Shall be of two sizes and suitable for the water meters of following sizes : Size 1 – for 15, 20 and 25 mm water meters, and Size 2 – for 40 and 50 mm water meters. 2.2. Shape : Oval or rectangular."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 779: 1994",
    "title": "Water Meters (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS7791994_3",
    "text": "IS 779: 1994 Water Meters (Domestic Type) [Dimensions]\nMinimum inside clear dimensions : Size Length Width Height mm mm mm 1 600 600 500 2 900 600 600 4. Manufacture For detailed information, refer to IS 2104 : 1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type) ( first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2104: 1981",
    "title": ". Water Meter Boxes (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS21041981_1",
    "text": "IS 2104: 1981 . Water Meter Boxes (Domestic Type) [General]\nIS 2104: 1981 . Water Meter Boxes (Domestic Type) (First Revision) * Water meters (domestic type) (sixth revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.235"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2373: 1981",
    "title": "Water Meters (Bulk Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23731981_1",
    "text": "IS 2373: 1981 Water Meters (Bulk Type) [Scope]\nCovers bulk type water meters of the following types : a) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters from 50 to 300 mm ; and b) Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm 2. Nominal size : (Bore of inlet) 50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 and 500 mm. 3. Ranges of Registration : Nominal Ranges of Registration of Water Size Meters in Litres Minimum Resistration Maximum in Dial Division Not Registration tobe More Than Not to be Less than 50 10 100 000 000 80 10 100 000 000 100 100 100 000 000 150 100 100 000 000 200 100 1000000000 250 100 1000 000 000 300 100 1000 000 000 350 100 1000 000 000 400 1 000 10 000 000 000 450 1 000 10 000 000 000 4. Performance Requirementst 4.1. Temperature : Up to 45oC. 4.2. Hydrostatic Test : Shall satisfactorily withstand a pressure of 1.6 MPa (16 kgf/cm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS204Part11991_1",
    "text": "IS 204 (Part 1): 1991 Tower Bolts [Scope]\nRequirements for tower bolts made of ferrous metals. 2. Types Type Description a) Barrel Tower Bolts 1A Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt. 1B Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolt. b) Semi-Barrel Tower Bolts 2A Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steels sheet pressed barrel and mild steel bolt. 2B Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and cast iron bolt. 3A Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and mild steel bolt. 3B Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and cast iron bolt. c) Riveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolts 4A Mild steel tower bolts riveted type with back p"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS204Part21992_1",
    "text": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992 Tower Bolts [General]\nIS 204 (Part 2): 1992 Tower Bolts PART 2 NON FERROUS METALS (Fifth Revison) 1. Scope Requirements for tower bolts made of nonferrous metals. 2. Types Type Description a) Barrel Tower Bolts 1 Brass barrel tower bolts with cast brass barrel and rolled or cast brass bolts. 2 Brass barrel tower bolts with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn brass. 3 Brass barrel tower bolts with brass sheet barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt. 4 Aluminium barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium alloys. 5 zinc barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of die-cast zinc alloy. b) Skeleton Tower Bolts 6 Brass skeleton tower bolts with cast brass plate and staples and rolled or drawn brass bolt. 7 Brass skeleton tower bolts with staples and plate of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn brass bolt. 8 Aluminium skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium alloy. 9 Zinc skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolts of die-cast zinc alloy. 3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS204Part21992_2",
    "text": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992 Tower Bolts [General]\nBrass skeleton tower bolts with staples and plate of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn brass bolt. 8 Aluminium skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium alloy. 9 Zinc skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolts of die-cast zinc alloy. 3. Materials i) Aluminium alloy tubes ii) Aluminium alloy extruded rods iii) Brass sheets iv) Cast brass v) Extruded brass vi) Zinc base alloy die casting. Note— For details of materials see 4 and Table 3 of the standard. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Barrel Tower Bolts — 75, 100 ,125, 150,175, 200, 225, 250 and 300 mm sizes 4.2 Skeleton Tower Bolts— 375, 450, 600,750, and 900 mm sizes. Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerances on them, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. 5. Finish a) Barrel Tower Bolts 1) Brass tower bolts (Types 1 to 3) — Bolt and barrel polished or plated as specified by the purchaser. 2) Aluminium alloy tower bolts (Type 4) — Bolts and barrel anodized. The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified by the purchaser."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS204Part21992_3",
    "text": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992 Tower Bolts [General]\na) Barrel Tower Bolts 1) Brass tower bolts (Types 1 to 3) — Bolt and barrel polished or plated as specified by the purchaser. 2) Aluminium alloy tower bolts (Type 4) — Bolts and barrel anodized. The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified by the purchaser. 3) Zinc alloy tower bolts (Type5) — Bolt and barrel oxidized, bronzed or plated as specified by the purchaser. b) Skeleton Tower Bolts 1) Brass skeleton bolts (Types 6 and 7) Bolt, plate and staples bright finished. 2) Aluminium alloy skeleton tower bolts (Type 8) —Bolt, plate and staples anodized. The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified by the purchaser. 3) Zinc alloy tower bolts (Type 9) — Bolt and barrel oxidized, bronzed or plated as specified by the purchaser. For detailed information, refer to IS 204 (Part 2) : 1992 Specification for tower bolts Part 2 :Non ferrous metals (fifth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 205: 1992",
    "title": "Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2051992_1",
    "text": "IS 205: 1992 Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements for mild steel Tee and strap hinges that are commonly used in generall building construction. 2. Types 2.1 Tee hinges shall be of the following types— Type Designation 1 Light weight 2 Medium weight 3 Heavy weight 2.2 Strap hinges shall be of the following types — Type Designation 1 Light weight strap 2 Medium weight 3 Heavy weight 3. Materials i) Mild steel sheet ii) Mild steel wire 4. Dimensions 4.1 Light Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, and 400 mm sizes. 4.2 Medium Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm sizes. 4.3 Heavy Weight Tee Hinges — 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes. 4.4 Light Weight Strap Hinges– 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 mm sizes. 4.5 Medium Weight Strap Hing"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 205: 1992",
    "title": "Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2051992_2",
    "text": "IS 205: 1992 Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges [Finish]\nTee and strap hinges shall be either bright finished or stove enamelled black, as specified by the purchaser. Note – For details of materials, see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 206 : 1992 Specification for tee and strap hinges (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 206: 1992",
    "title": "Tee And Strap Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2061992_1",
    "text": "IS 206: 1992 Tee And Strap Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements for materials, manufacture, dimensions and finish of door handles of the type that are commonly fixed to doors. 2. Types Type 1 Cast Type 2 Pressed oval Type 3 Pressed half oval Type 4 Fabricated 3. Materials Type 1 Cast iron, malleable cast iron, cast brass, cast aluminium or zinc and 3 alloydiecasting, Type 2and 3 Mild steel, and Type 4 Brass or aluminium alloy."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 206: 1992",
    "title": "Tee And Strap Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS2061992_2",
    "text": "IS 206: 1992 Tee And Strap Hinges [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nShall conform to Tables 2A and 2B, read with Figures 1 to 4 of the standard. Note– The material used shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 208 : 1996 Specification for door handles (fifth revision). Dimensions Tolerance mm mm Up to 100 ± 1 101 to 200 ± 1.5 201 and above ± 2 5. Finish Type 1– Bright satin finish, nickel chromium plated or copper oxidised or bronze finish for cast brass and zinc die cast handles. Stove enamelled black or copper oxidized for cast iron and malleable cast iron handles. Aluminium anodized to a bright natural, mat or stain finish or dyed. Type 2– Stove enammelled black. Type 3– Stove enammelled black. Type 4– Bright satin finish, nickel plated or copper-oxidized, bronze finish for brass handles."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 208: 1996",
    "title": "Door Handles",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2081996_1",
    "text": "IS 208: 1996 Door Handles [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding door bolts commonly used in general building constrcution for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks. 2. Types i) Plate Type, and ii) Clip or bolt type. 3. Sizes (a) Plate type sliding bolts— 150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm; and (b)Clip or bolt type sliding bolts— 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm 4. Materials Mild Steel Mild Steel Wire Mild Steel Rod Note— For details of material see 5 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 208: 1996",
    "title": "Door Handles",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes A) Plate Type Sliding Bolts",
    "chunk_id": "IS2081996_2",
    "text": "IS 208: 1996 Door Handles [Sizes A) Plate Type Sliding Bolts]\n150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm. b) Clip or bolt type sliding bolts – 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm 5.1 Tolerances–Length of bolt - Sizes up to and including 300 mm ± 2 mm Sizes 375 mm and 450 mm ± 3 mm Note— Size represents length of the bolt. For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 6 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 208: 1996",
    "title": "Door Handles",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2081996_3",
    "text": "IS 208: 1996 Door Handles [Finish]\ni) Sliding Bolts, Plate Type – Back plate straps and staple plate shall be stove enamalled black before assmebling. Hasp and bolt shall be finished bright or copper-oxidized or shall be plated with nickel or chromium. ii) Sliding Bolts, Clip or Bolt Type — Hasp, bolt, staple and clips or fixing bolts shall be copper oxidized or shall be plated with nickel or chromium . Note—When the sliding bolts is to be finished bright, a thin coating of rust preventive shall be given. For detailed information, refer to IS 281 : 1991 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolt for use with padlocks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 281: 1991",
    "title": "Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2811991_1",
    "text": "IS 281: 1991 Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, manufactre, finihs. ,marking and packing of parliament hinges. 2. Types Type 1 Cast (Cast brass) Type 2 Pressed (Mildsteel, Alluminium alloy) Type 3 Fabricated (Extruted Alluminium alloy) Note— Materials for different types are given above within brackets. For requirements of materials, see Table 1 of the standard. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Alluminium Alloy Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 2 of the standard. 3.2 Cast Brass Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 3 of the standard. 3.3 Mild Steel Parliament Hinges —50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 4 of the standard"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 281: 1991",
    "title": "Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS2811991_2",
    "text": "IS 281: 1991 Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Manufacture]\nHinges shall be well made and be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Washer shall be provided between knuckles for Type 1 and Type 3 hinges. Washer shall be made of nylon, plastic or any other suitable material. In locations susceptible to corrosion, use of brass or phosphor bronze hinge pins is recommended in case of brass hinges. All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 281: 1991",
    "title": "Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2811991_3",
    "text": "IS 281: 1991 Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Finish]\nBrass parliament hinges shall have either bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discoloration. 5.1 Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed. 5.2 Mild steel parliament hinges shall be finished bright or electro-galvanized as specified by the purchaser. For detailed information, refer to IS 362 : 1991 Specification for parliament hinges (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 362: 1991",
    "title": "Parliament Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS3621991_1",
    "text": "IS 362: 1991 Parliament Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, manufacture and finish of hasps and staples. 2. Types Type Description 1. Mild steel, brass or aluminium alloy hasps and staples—safety type.\n[Mild Steel Hasps And Staples] wire type. 3. Sizes 3.1 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples Type 1— 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm. 3.2 Brass or Aluminium Alloy Hasps and Staples Type 1 – 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm. 3.3 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples Type 2 — 65,75, 90, 100, 125,150 and 175 mm. For tolerances see Tables 2, 3 and 4 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 362: 1991",
    "title": "Parliament Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS3621991_2",
    "text": "IS 362: 1991 Parliament Hinges [Finish]\na) Mild steel hasps — Stove enamelled, black and staples b) Brass hasps – Oxidized or covered with staples clear lacquer after polishing as specified by the purchaser c) Aluminium alloy – Anodized. Note— For details regarding materials see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information,refer to IS 363 : 1993 Specification for hasps and staples (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 364: 1993",
    "title": "Fan Light Catch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS3641993_1",
    "text": "IS 364: 1993 Fan Light Catch [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of fan light catches commonly used on ventilators in buildings. 2. Types a) Mild steel fan light catches, b) Aluminium alloy fan light catches,and c) Cast brass fan light catches. 3. Materials a) Mild steel sheet shall satisfy prescribed bend test. b) Mild steel wire shall have a tensile strength of 40 kg /mm 2 , minimum and shall satisfy the prescribed wrapping test. Note— For details regarding material, see 4 of the standard. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Dimensions — The leading dimensions shall conform to those specified in Fig. 1 of the standard. 4.2 Tolerances Dimension Tolerance mm mm Up to and including 5 ± 0.2 Above 5 and up to and ± 0.5 including 25 Above 25 ± 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 364: 1993",
    "title": "Fan Light Catch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS3641993_2",
    "text": "IS 364: 1993 Fan Light Catch [Finish]\nAluminium alloy fan light catches shall be anodized after the initial fabrication work. A coating not less than 0.015 mm is recommended for normal use. The anodic film may be transparent or dyed as desired by the purchaser. For exterior use, where sunlight falls on the fittings, only light fast colours like light fast bronze or light fast gold or plain anodic finishes shall be employed and the thickness of the anodic film shall be not less than 0.025 mm. 5.1 Brass fan light catches shall have satin finish or other finish as specified by the purchaser. 5.2 Mild steel fan light catches may be stove enam- elled to a colour and finish as specified by the purchaser. For detailed information,refer to IS 364 : 1993 Specification for fan light catch (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 452: 1973",
    "title": "Door Spring Rat- Tail Type",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS4521973_1",
    "text": "IS 452: 1973 Door Spring Rat- Tail Type [General]\nIS 452: 1973 Door Spring Rat- Tail Type (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 453: 1993",
    "title": "Double-Acting Spring Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4531993_1",
    "text": "IS 453: 1993 Double-Acting Spring Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements for material, dimensions manufacture, finish and tests of double-acting spring hinges and corresponding blank hinges used generally for swing doors. 2. Types a) Mild Steel double-acting spring hinges, and b) Brass double-acting spring hinges. 3. Sizes Size of Spring Size of Blank Hinge Hinge mm mm 100 70 125 75 150 75"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 453: 1993",
    "title": "Double-Acting Spring Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS4531993_2",
    "text": "IS 453: 1993 Double-Acting Spring Hinges [Dimensions]\nSee Fig 1 and 2 of the standard. 5. Performance Test a) Door when pushed through 900 and released 2 000 times on each side in quick sucession, the hinge and its components shall show no sign of damage. b) Door shall require force of 2.0 ± 0.5 kg for 100 mm hinge and 3.0 ± 0.5 kg. For 125 mm and 150 mm hinges, at a distance of 45 cm from the hinge pin to move the door through 900"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 453: 1993",
    "title": "Double-Acting Spring Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS4531993_3",
    "text": "IS 453: 1993 Double-Acting Spring Hinges [Finish]\na) Mild Steel Hinges — Stove-enamelled black or copper-oxidized. b) Brass Hinges — Satin, bright, nickel plated, or copper-oxidized. Note— For details regarding materials see 4 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 453 : 1993 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1019: 1974",
    "title": "Rim Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10191974_1",
    "text": "IS 1019: 1974 Rim Latches [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for general use.\n[Handling Of Rim Latches] Left hand latch if fitted on left hand door. Right hand latch if fitted on right hand door. 3. Types Type 1— Opens when handle is turned in one direction only. Type 2 — Opens when hande is turned in any direction. 3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be ‘left-hand’ or ‘right- hand’.\n[Sizes] 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1019: 1974",
    "title": "Rim Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS10191974_2",
    "text": "IS 1019: 1974 Rim Latches [Materials]\nShall be of the mild steel, brass, aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy. 6. Dimensions (in mm) Size Length × Breadth × Depth 75 75 × 60 × 14 100 100 × 70 × 20 125 125 × 70 × 20 150 150 × 70 × 20 Tolerance + 1 mm 6. Finish Brass latches Bright or satin finish Aluminium latches Anodized finish Steel latches Black japanned, stove enamelled black or copper oxidoized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1019: 1974",
    "title": "Rim Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Performance Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS10191974_3",
    "text": "IS 1019: 1974 Rim Latches [Performance Requirements]\nWhen knob of latch is turned, the catch bolt shall draw smoothly into the body and shall be flush with the face of the body. Note— For requirements for material of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1019 : 1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1341: 1992",
    "title": "Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13411992_1",
    "text": "IS 1341: 1992 Steel Butt Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt hinges. 2. Types a) Light weight hinges b) Medium weight hinges c) Broad type hinges d) Square type hinges e) Heavy type I and II hinges 3. Materials i) Flap – Mild steel ii) Pin – Mild steelwire Note—For details on materials, see 4 and Table1of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1341 : 1992 Specification for steel butt hinges (sixth revision). 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Light Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 15, 25,40, 50, 65, 75 and 100 mm sizes. 4.2 Medium Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 20, 25, 40, 50, 65, 75, 90, 100, 125 and 150 mmsizes. 4.3 Broad Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm sizes. 4.4 Square Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 65, 75, 90 and 100 mm siz\n[Finish] Hinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1823: 1980",
    "title": "Floor Door Stoppers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS18231980_1",
    "text": "IS 1823: 1980 Floor Door Stoppers [Scope]\nRequirements for floor door stopper suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40, and 45 mm thickness.\n[Materials A) For Body Or Housing And Cover Plate] Aluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or aluminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast brass or brass gravity die casting. b) For Spring— Phosphor bronze or hard drawn steel wire. c) For Tongue—Aluminium alloy pressure die casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic. 3. Requirements a) Four countersunk holes for fixing door stopper to floor. b) Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws. c) Rubber piece shall be attached to extreme end to absorb shocks. 4. Dimensions (in mm) Thickness of door 30 35 40 45 shutter Overall length of 140 140 150150 cover plate Width of cover plate. 40 40 40 40 Thickness of cover plate 4.5 for castings 3 for sheet metal 4.1 Tolerances a) On overall length of cover plate ± 0.5 mm b) On thickness of cover pla"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1823: 1980",
    "title": "Floor Door Stoppers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS18231980_2",
    "text": "IS 1823: 1980 Floor Door Stoppers [Workmanship And Finish]\nStoppers shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Aluminium door stoppers shall be anodized and brass stoppers be finished smooth. Stoppers may also be chromium or nickel plated, anodized or oxidized. The exterior of door stopper shall be flush with floor and be finished bright or satin. For detailed information, refer to IS 1823 : 1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision). } SUMARRY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1837: 1966",
    "title": "Fan Light Pivots",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS18371966_1",
    "text": "IS 1837: 1966 Fan Light Pivots [Scope]\nRequirements for fan light pivots (also known as ventilator hinges) 2. Types Type 1 – Mild steel pivots Type 2 – Aluminium pivots Type 3 – Brass pivots 3. Dimensions (in mm) No. Thickness Pivot Pivot Pin Pin Dia of Ventilator Length Breadth Projection Shutte Type 1 Type 2 and 3 1 25 20 50 10 10 9.5 2 30 25 50 12.5 12.5 12.5 3 30 25 65 12.5 12 12.5 4 35 25 65 15 16 15 5 35 25 75 15 16 15 Note — For requirement for materials see 3.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1837 : 1966 Specification for fan light pivots (first revision). 3.1 Tolerances Pivot length and breadth ± 0.5 mm Pin Projection ± 0.2 mm Pin dia ± 0.2 mm Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.coverplate 4. Finish Type 1 – Bright finished with smooth surface Type 2 – Natural or anodized finish"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2209: 1976",
    "title": "Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS22091976_1",
    "text": "IS 2209: 1976 Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [Scope]\nRequirements for mortice locks (vertical type)\n[Sizes] 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note 1—Mortice locks of other size may be made if mutally agreed. Note 2 — For typical design of mortice lock see Fig. 1 of the standard\n[Materials] Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 2 and 3 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2209: 1976",
    "title": "Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS22091976_2",
    "text": "IS 2209: 1976 Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [General]\nInterchangeability — Two lever locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. In case of locks with more than two levers, these shall have non- interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum 100 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS 2209 : 1976 Specification for mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision). 5. Manufacture a) Body—Clear depth 15 mm, Max. b) Locking bolt— Section not less than 8 × 25 mm. c) Lever spring — Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand the prescribed tests without showing signs of permanent set. d) Lock shall be capable of being opened with the key from both inside and outside."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2209: 1976",
    "title": "Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS22091976_3",
    "text": "IS 2209: 1976 Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [Finish]\na) Brass body – Finished smooth. b) Steel body – Protective coating such as painting. c) Aluminium alloy body – Anodized. d) Face plate and striking plate— Finished smooth and polished bright or satin (or may be chromium plated anodized or oxidized).\n[Tests] Shall withstand the performance and endurance tests as given in 9.1 and 9.2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2681: 1993",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26811993_1",
    "text": "IS 2681: 1993 Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts [Scope]\nRequirements for exposed type hydraulically regulated door closers for vertical hinge type doors opening to one side only and weighing more than 80 kg. This does not cover the requirements for concealed type hydraulic door closers and also the pneumatic or mechanical type of door closers. 4. Materials i) Non porous body Cast iron /Aluminium and back plate alloy / Zinc alloy ii) Piston or Pack- Cast iron / Steel piston / pinion Aluminium alloy/Zinc alloy Note— For materials for other components see 7 and Table 2 of the standard. 5. Essential Requirements 5.1 The closer shall be manufactured in three sizes conforming to the requirements given in Table 1, in accordance with the direction of the opening of the door either clockwise or anti-clockwise. 5.2 The closing time shall be easily adjust"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2681: 1993",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS26811993_2",
    "text": "IS 2681: 1993 Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts [Finish]\nPolished or painted and finished with lacquer In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized. Mild steel parts shall be pickled and given phosphate treatment. Note—For methods of test, refer to Annex B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3564 : 1995 Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3564: 1995",
    "title": "Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS35641995_1",
    "text": "IS 3564: 1995 Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer [Nominal Sizes]\nThe nominal sizes of door closers in relation to the mass and the width of the door size, to which it is intended to be fitted, shall be as given in Table 1. TABLE 1 DESIGNATION OF DOOR CLOSERS Sl. Designation of Mass of the Width of the Remarks No. Closer Door(kg) Door (mm) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) 1. Up to 35 Up to 700 For light doors, such as double leaved and toilet doors ii) 2 36-60 701 to 850 Interior doors, such as of bedrooms, kitchen and store iii) 3 61 to 80 851 to 1 000 Main doors in a building, such as entrance doors ±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3564: 1995",
    "title": "Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS35641995_2",
    "text": "IS 3564: 1995 Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer [Scope]\nRequirements for continuous (piano) hinges. 2. Material Name of Material Component Flap a) Mild Steel sheet b) Aluminium alloy sheet c) Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets Pin a) Mild steel wire b) Aluminium alloy sheet"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3564: 1995",
    "title": "Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS35641995_3",
    "text": "IS 3564: 1995 Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nDimension of type I, II, III and IV and permissible tolerances shall conform to those specified in Fig. 1 to 3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3818 : 1992 Specification for continuous (piano) hinges ( third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3828: 1966",
    "title": "Ventilator Chains",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS38281966_1",
    "text": "IS 3828: 1966 Ventilator Chains [Scope]\nCovers types and the requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of steel back flap hinges.\n[Types] a) Light weight hinges, and b) Heavy weight hinges\n[Materials] a) Flap Steelcover plate b) Pin Mild Steel wire For detailed information, refer to IS 3843 : 1995 Specification for steel back flap hinges ( second revision). 4. Sizes 4.1 Light Weight Hinges — 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 65 and 75 mm 4.2 Heavy Weight Hinges — 25, 40, 50, 65 and 75 mm Note—For details of dimensions and tolerances refer to Table 1 and 2 of the standard.\n[Requirements] All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk.\n[Finish] The hinges shall be oxidized or finished bright with smooth and rust free surface."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3843: 1995",
    "title": "Steel Back Flap Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS38431995_1",
    "text": "IS 3843: 1995 Steel Back Flap Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements for mortice night latches for general use.\n[General] Nominal size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Termed ‘Left hand’ if fitted on ‘Left hand door’ and ‘Right Hand’ if fitted in ‘Right Hand door’. Two lever latches and latches with more than two livers shall have non-interchangeable keys for a batch of minimum 12 and 60 latches respectively.\n[Materials] For body, body covers, i) Mild Steel (shall satisfy the prescribed bend test) Note— For methods of tests refer to 10 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3847: 1992",
    "title": "Mortice Night Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS38471992_1",
    "text": "IS 3847: 1992 Mortice Night Latches [Finish]\nAssembled bolt shall be satin finished or bright polished. Aluminium bolts shall be anodized.\n[Tests] Shall satisfy the prescribed tests.\n[Scope] Requirements for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3847: 1992",
    "title": "Mortice Night Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS38471992_2",
    "text": "IS 3847: 1992 Mortice Night Latches [General]\nOperation of bolt may be achieved either by gear work or by displacement. Normally made in two sizes, namely, size 1 and size 2. When the bolt is drawn, it shall show the word “ENGAGED” on red background, and when it is withdrawn it shall show the world “VACANT” on green background. 3. Material a) Body, knob Aluminium alloy casting, and indicating Extruded aluminium alloy, spindle Brass casting, Extruded brass, Zinc base alloy die casting. b) Indicating disc Aluminium alloy sheet, Brass casting For detailed information, refer to IS 4621 : 1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision). c) Gears Alumminium alloy casting, Brass casting 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Size 1 Size 2 Tolerance (mm) (mm) (mm) Length of bolt 75 85 ± 1 Breadth of bolt"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4621: 1975",
    "title": "Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS46211975_1",
    "text": "IS 4621: 1975 Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories [Scope]\nRequirements for welded wire fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill and crates. Not intended to cover fabric for concrete reinforcement. 2. Materials 2.1. Mild steel wire used for the manufacture of welded fabric shall coaform to IS 280. 2.2 Stainless steel wire used for the manufacture of welded fabric shall conform to grade X 04 Cr 17 Ni 12 Mo 2 or X 04 Cr 18 Ni 10 of IS 6528*. 2.3 Tolerance on Diameter For size of wire 1.6 to 5.6 mm ± 0.050 For size of wire over 5.6 mm ± 0.060"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4621: 1975",
    "title": "Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Mesh Sizes Commonly Available (In Mm)",
    "chunk_id": "IS46211975_2",
    "text": "IS 4621: 1975 Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories [Mesh Sizes Commonly Available (In Mm)]\nRefer to Annex A of the standard. 4. Tolerance 4.1 In any individual mesh, the maximum variation between two members when measured between centre to centre shall not vary more than 5 percent. 4.2 The length of flat sheets or rolls measured on my wire may vary by 25 mm or one percent whichever is greater."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4621: 1975",
    "title": "Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Test For Welding",
    "chunk_id": "IS46211975_3",
    "text": "IS 4621: 1975 Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories [Test For Welding]\nThe minimum average strength value of the weld shall not be less than 21 kgf/mm2 and the area of the wire to be taken into consideration for calculation is the longitudional wire. Fabric having a diameter difference between transverse and longitudinal wire greater than 2 mm shall not be subjected to weld shear test. Note 1 — For quality of wire refer to 3 of the standard. Note 2 — For method of test, refer to 6 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 4948 : 2002 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4948: 2002",
    "title": "Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49482002_1",
    "text": "IS 4948: 2002 Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use [Scope]\nRequirements for door handles for operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered in IS 2209 : 1976.*\n[Types] Handle type and knob type.\n[Materials] Brass, mild steel, aluminium alloy, etc.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] Size of Door handle knob housing = (150 ±5) × (40 ± 2 )mm Length of handle = 90 ± 2 mm. * Mortice lock (vertical type) (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4948: 2002",
    "title": "Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Performance Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS49482002_2",
    "text": "IS 4948: 2002 Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use [Performance Requirements]\nA sample picked out at random from a lot of 100, when fitted to a lock and operated 1 000 times shall not show any damage or ineffectiveness in working. When the handle is in its extreme position in the lock and pulled horizontally with a load of 100 kgf, it shall not develop cracks, lose shape or get damaged.\n[Workmanship] All sharp edges shall be removed."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4948: 2002",
    "title": "Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS49482002_3",
    "text": "IS 4948: 2002 Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use [Finish]\nBrass handles shall have natural finish or shall be bright chromium electroplated. Aluminium alloy handles shall be anodized. Zinc base alloy die cast handles and mild steel handles shall be bright chromium plated."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4992: 1975",
    "title": "Door Handles For Mortice Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49921975_1",
    "text": "IS 4992: 1975 Door Handles For Mortice Locks [Scope]\nRequirements for flush bolts for use in cupboards and doors\n[Material A) Body And Plate] Cast brass, cast aluminium and extruded aluminium alloy b) Bolt— Cast brass, extruded brass and extruded aluminium alloy. c) Spring— Phosphor bronze and steel strip."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4992: 1975",
    "title": "Door Handles For Mortice Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS49921975_2",
    "text": "IS 4992: 1975 Door Handles For Mortice Locks [Manufacture]\nRod shall be retained in its maximum bolting position by the spring. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Type Size FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia Length Min. (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 100 100 20 8 ± 1 For detailed information, refer to IS 5187 : 1972 Specification for flush bolt (first revision). Type Size FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia Length Min. (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 150 150 25 8 ± 1 1 200 200 30 8 ± 1 2 100 100 15 8 ± 1 2 150 150 15 8 ± 1 2 200 200 15 8 ± 1 2 250 250 15 8 ± 1 2 300 300 15 8 ± 1 Note— For detailed dimensions and tolerances, See 5 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4992: 1975",
    "title": "Door Handles For Mortice Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS49921975_3",
    "text": "IS 4992: 1975 Door Handles For Mortice Locks [Workmanship And Finish]\nShall have smooth and easy working when assembled. Brass bolts shall be satin or bright polished, or nickel or chromium plated or copper oxidized. Aluminium flush bolts shall be anodized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5187: 1972",
    "title": "Flush Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS51871972_1",
    "text": "IS 5187: 1972 Flush Bolts [General]\nIS 5187: 1972 Flush Bolts (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5899: 1970",
    "title": "Bath Room Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS58991970_1",
    "text": "IS 5899: 1970 Bath Room Latches [Scope]\nRequirements for material, size and finish of bathroom latches. 2. Shape and Size Overall size — 40 × 50 mm Thickness – 10 mm Note— For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Material For detailed information, refer to IS 5899 : 1970 Specification for bathroom latches. a) Body – Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy, and aluminium extrusions. b) Bolts – Brass cast, brass extruded, mild steel rod, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions. c) Knob – Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions.\n[Workmanship And Finish] Latch shall be smoothly finished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Cast brass body shall be given a protective coating such as painting."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5930: 1970",
    "title": "Mortice Latch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS59301970_1",
    "text": "IS 5930: 1970 Mortice Latch [Scope]\nRequirements for mortice latches for use on doors, such as bath room doors, W.C. doors and doors to private rooms.\n[Sizes] 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note — For typical illustration of a mortice lock see fig.1 of the standard.\n[Materials] Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n[Interchangeability] Component parts of latches of the same size and type shall be completely interchangeable."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5930: 1970",
    "title": "Mortice Latch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS59301970_2",
    "text": "IS 5930: 1970 Mortice Latch [Manufacture]\na) Body— Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking Bolt – Section not less than 18 × 25 mm. c) Mechanism – Latch shall operate easily from both sides of the door. Bolt shall turn into locking position when the thumb turn knob is turned through 900. d) Lever Spring — Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand following tests without showing signs of permanent set. i) Lever spring shall be pressed down so as to touch top edge of lever and released. Repeat six times. ii) Lever spring shall also stand a transverse load of 15 kgf before failure of joint between lever and spring."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5930: 1970",
    "title": "Mortice Latch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS59301970_3",
    "text": "IS 5930: 1970 Mortice Latch [Workmanship And Finish]\nBrass body shall be finished smooth. Steel body shall be given a protective coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be finished smooth and polished bright or satin, or chromium plated, anodized or oxidized.\n[Tests] The finally assembled latch shall withstand tests given in 9.1.1 to 9.1.3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6315: 1992",
    "title": "Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS63151992_1",
    "text": "IS 6315: 1992 Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors [Scope]\nRequuirements for concealed type floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6315: 1992",
    "title": "Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS63151992_2",
    "text": "IS 6315: 1992 Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors [Construction]\nOil check shall work satisfactorily at all temperature between 490C and –100C without requiring any other change except by the adjustment of the capstan nut. Note— For typical details of floor springs see fig. 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6315: 1992",
    "title": "Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS63151992_3",
    "text": "IS 6315: 1992 Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors [Materials]\nFor foundation Cast brass, Brass box, main body sheet. Mild steel sheet, and half cover Cast iron, Aluminium alloy sheet, Zinc base alloy pressure die-casting. Note — For details of material see 5 and Table 1 of the standard 4. Performance Requirements 4.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or deterioration in working after it has been subjected to 50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. 4.2 Closing time of floor spring shall be easily adjustable between 3 and 20 for which a suitable device to adjust the speed shall be provided. 4.3 Door leaf when opened through 900 plus and released, the door shall stand open till pushed back in the closing position. When opened to an angle less that 900, the door shall swing back automatically. 4.4 Force not more th"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6318: 1971",
    "title": "Plastic Window Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS63181971_1",
    "text": "IS 6318: 1971 Plastic Window Stays And Fasteners [Scope]\nLays down performance and functional requirements of window stays made of polypropylene and fasteners (handles) made of nylon. 2. Material Requirements of polypropylene a) Density, 0.900 to 0.910 g/ml b) Tensile strength at yield, Min 315 kgf/cm2 c) Impact strength, Min 3.7 kgf/cm (of notch) d) Water absorption, 3.7 Max 0.04 percent e) Deflection temperature, Min 540C f) Weather resistance — Shall retain at least 50 percent of original elongation g) Deformation underload, Max 6.0 percent, 500C and 70 kg/cm2. Note — For test procedures see 4 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6318 : 1971 Specification for plastic window stay and fasteners. 3. Size and Shape Length of window stay = 300 mm Length of window fastener = 110 mm Note — For typical illustration see Fig 1 of the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6343: 1982",
    "title": "Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS63431982_1",
    "text": "IS 6343: 1982 Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated) [Scope]\nRequirements for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weighing up to 40 kg.\n[Material A) Cylinder] Brass tube mild steel tube/ aluminium tube, b) Piston/Piston Rod—Steel/cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy. c) Brackets and Fittings — Mild steel/ cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy/ cast brass, d) Spring — Steel, and e) Regulating Screws—Brass/bronze/aluminium alloy/ steel/zinc alloy."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6343: 1982",
    "title": "Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS63431982_2",
    "text": "IS 6343: 1982 Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated) [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nShall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 4. General Requirements 4.1 The surface of closer shall be clean, without sharp edges, free from cracks, dents, burrs or any other visible surface defects. 4.2 After fixing, the closer shall operate smoothly and quietly without any undue play during opening and closing operation. 4.3 The closer shall work satisfactorily at all temperatures between 40ºC and 10ºC without requiring any other change except by adjustment of regulating screw. 4.4 The speed of closing the door shall be adjusted by increase or decrease in the tension of helical spring. Note — For requirements regarding manufacture and details of finishing, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6343 : 1982 Specification for door closers (pneu"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6343: 1982",
    "title": "Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS63431982_3",
    "text": "IS 6343: 1982 Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated) [Finish]\nThe exposed surface shall be polished or pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free from all visible defects with hard and tough film of enamel strongly adhering to the surface. All components shall be finished in colour as agreed to mutually."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6607: 1972",
    "title": "Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS66071972_1",
    "text": "IS 6607: 1972 Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [Scope]\nRequirements for rebated mortice locks suitable for use on double leaf doors with rebated meeting stiles.\n[Sizes] 65, 75 and 100 mm. Sizes shall be denoted by length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end over the body in mm. The measured length shall not vary more than ± 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note — For typical design of rebated mortice locks see Fig. 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6607: 1972",
    "title": "Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS66071972_2",
    "text": "IS 6607: 1972 Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [General]\ninterchangeability – Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 100 locks. 4. Requirements a) Body – Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking bolt – Section shall not be less than Note — For requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6607 : 1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type). 12 × 16 mm for all sizes of locks. c) Mechanism — Locking mechanism shall be lever type with not less than two levers. d) Lever Spring — Shall withstand the prescribed test. e) Keys — Two for each lock usable from inside and outside. f) Latch Bolt — Section not"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6607: 1972",
    "title": "Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS66071972_3",
    "text": "IS 6607: 1972 Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type) [Workmanship And Finish]\nBrass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Rebated face plate and striking plate may be polished, chormium plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given protective coating. Steel parts shall be given specified protective teatment before painting.\n[Tests] Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7196 : 1974 Specification for hold fast."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7196: 1974",
    "title": "Hold Fast",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS71961974_1",
    "text": "IS 7196: 1974 Hold Fast [Scope]\nRequirements for mild steel hold fasts for use with wooden doors and window frames. 2. Size and Dimensions Shall be as given in Fig. 1\n[Manufacture] Shall be made from mild steel flats not less than 5 mm thick, and without any burrs or dents.\n[Finish] Shall be given a coat of bitumen and sanded. All dimensions in millimetres. Fig. 1 Mild Steel Hold Fast"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS71971974_1",
    "text": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs [Scope]\nRequirements for concealed type floor springs (without oil check) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. For doors having more than one leaf, the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.\n[Types] For typical details of a floor spring see Fig.1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Material A) Foundation Box, Main Body And Half Cover",
    "chunk_id": "IS71971974_2",
    "text": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs [Material A) Foundation Box, Main Body And Half Cover]\nBrass sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Mild steel sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Cast iron; aluminium alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick; aluminium alloy sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick or zinc base alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick. b) Spring Rod – Mild steel Note — For requirements for materials for other parts of floor spring see Table 1 of the standard.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer. For detailed information, refer to IS 7197:1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS71971974_3",
    "text": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs [Construction]\nFloor spring shall be covered by brass or aluminium sheet which only shall be flush with the floor. Provision shall be made in floor springs for adjusting door leaf to final closed position by turning the adjusting screw."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Performance Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS71971974_4",
    "text": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs [Performance Requirements]\nA sample mounted to a door leaf weighing 125 kg shall be subjected to 50,000 operations (that is, movement of door leaf through 1800) at the rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. Floor spring shall not show any damage or deterioration at the end of test. A force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required at a distance of one metre from the door frame, to open the door leaf weighing 125 kg through 900."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS71971974_5",
    "text": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs [Finish]\nCover sheet, shoe and top centre pivot shall be polished, electroplated or anodized. Mild steel and cast iron parts shall be given a synthetic stoving enamel finish according to prescribed specifications. The finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument. Aluminium parts shall be anoidized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS75341985_1",
    "text": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Scope]\nRequirements for mortice dead locks. Note – Mortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing reasonable degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional lock for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS75341985_2",
    "text": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Sizes]\n45, 65 and 75 mm. Size is denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the face end to the rear end. Measured length shall not be more than ± 3 mm from the specified size Note — For typical details of mortice dead locks see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Material"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Body, Body Cover",
    "chunk_id": "IS75341985_3",
    "text": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Body, Body Cover]\nMild steel, cast brass, brass sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and zinc base alloy casting. Note — For requirements of materials for other component parts, see Table 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS75341985_4",
    "text": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks [General]\ninterchangeability — Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a match of a minimum of 100 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS 7540 : 1974 Specification for mortice dead locks 5. Manufacture a) Body Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm b) Locking Bolt Section shall not be less than 10 × 30 mm. c) Levers Not less than two. d) Lever spring Shall withstand the prescribed tests with out showing any sign of permanent set. e) Keys Two for each."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS75341985_5",
    "text": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks [Finish]\nBrass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be polished, painted, plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given suitable protective coating.\n[Tests] Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7540: 1974",
    "title": "Mortice Dead Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS75401974_1",
    "text": "IS 7540: 1974 Mortice Dead Locks [Scope]\nRequirements for mortice sliding door locks having lever mechanism.\n[Sizes] 30 mm, 50 mm, 70 mm and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of the body in millimetres measured from the outside face of the fore–end to rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7540: 1974",
    "title": "Mortice Dead Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Shape And Design",
    "chunk_id": "IS75401974_2",
    "text": "IS 7540: 1974 Mortice Dead Locks [Shape And Design]\nAny shape but shall be capable of being opened with key from both sides. Note — For typical illustration of mortice sliding door lock see Fig 1 of the standard.\n[Dimensions] As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7540: 1974",
    "title": "Mortice Dead Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS75401974_3",
    "text": "IS 7540: 1974 Mortice Dead Locks [General]\ninterchangeability – Two lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS : 8760 1978. Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever mechanism (first revision). Locks with more than two levers shall have non interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 100 locks. 6. Finish Brass body Finished smooth Steel body Suitable protective coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy Anodized body Face plate and Finished smooth and striking plate polished bright or satin. May be chromium plated, anodized or oxidized where so desired by purchaser.\n[Tests] Shall withstand the tests specified in 10 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8760: 1978",
    "title": "Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS87601978_1",
    "text": "IS 8760: 1978 Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rising butt hinges. 2. Types Type Material 1. Cold rolled mild steel 2. Cast iron 3. Extruded brass 3. Materials Flap (i) Mild steel (ii) Cast iron (iii) Extruded brass Pin – Mild steel wire Note — For details on material see 3 and Table1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to : IS 9106 :1979 Specification for rising butt hinges."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8760: 1978",
    "title": "Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS87601978_2",
    "text": "IS 8760: 1978 Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism [Sizes]\nSteel rising butt hinges – 75 and 100 mm Cast iron rising butt hinges – 75 and 100 mm Brass rising butt hinges – 75,100, and 125 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerances see Table 5 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8760: 1978",
    "title": "Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS87601978_3",
    "text": "IS 8760: 1978 Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism [Finish]\nHinges shall be well made and shall be free from flaws and defects. Hinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces. The brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discolouration."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS91061979_1",
    "text": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges [Scope]\nRequirements for materials, construction, dimensions and finish of rim locks of two types commonly fixed to single and double-leaf doors in buildings. 2. Types Type 1 – Left hand or right-hand, and Type 2 – Reversible"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS91061979_2",
    "text": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges [Sizes]\n100 and 150 mm The size of the rim lock shall be denoted by the length of face over the body in millimetres. The measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm, from the length specified for the sizes.\n[Materials] Shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n[General] Interchangeability — The rim locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Construction A) Body",
    "chunk_id": "IS91061979_3",
    "text": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges [Construction A) Body]\nOverall depth of the body shall be not more than 15 mm. b) Locking bolt — Section not less than 8×22 mm c) Mechanism — Shall be of ordinary lever type or any other type approved by the purchaser. d) Latch Bolt — Section not less than 8×14 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS91061979_4",
    "text": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges [Finish]\nBrass rim locks shall have bright or satin finish, and aluminium locks anodized finish. The steel locks shall be japanned, stove eamelled black or copper oxidized as specified by the purchaser."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS91061979_5",
    "text": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges [Tests]\nThe finally assembled block shall with stand the tests given in 12.1.1 to 12.1.6 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9131 : 1979 Specification for rim locks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9131: 1979",
    "title": "Rim Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS91311979_1",
    "text": "IS 9131: 1979 Rim Locks [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of stays and fasteners made of mild steel of the types that are commonly used in windows. 2. Types a) Type 1 – Mild steel stays and fasterners having tabular cross section, and b) Type 2 – Mild steel stays and fasterners made out of one piece sheet. 3. Materials i) Mild steel sheets ii) Mild steel bars Note— For details of materials see 3 and Table 1 of the standard.\n[Dimensions] Shall be as given in Fig 1 and 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9131: 1979",
    "title": "Rim Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Test For Window Stays",
    "chunk_id": "IS91311979_2",
    "text": "IS 9131: 1979 Rim Locks [Test For Window Stays]\nThe stay shall be capable of holding the window shutter in three different positions so as to make angles of 30º, 60º and 90º with the window frame. Tolerances in such positions shall not exceed + 5º.\n[Finish] Shall be either copper oxidized or a holding galvanised or electro-galvanised. For detailed information, refer to IS 10019 : 1981 Specification for mild steel stays and fasteners."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10019: 1981",
    "title": "Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS100191981_1",
    "text": "IS 10019: 1981 Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of numericals. 2. Materials i) Cast brass ii) Cast bronze iii) Cast aluminium Note— For details of materials see 2 and Table 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10019: 1981",
    "title": "Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS100191981_2",
    "text": "IS 10019: 1981 Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners [Sizes]\n25, 50, 75, 100, 150 and 300 mm. The thickness of the numericals shall not be less than 2 mm, and the width shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacrurer. 4. Manufacture a) Shall be manufactured in one piece and shall be free from all defects. b) Projecting lugs or pins at the back or countersunk screw holes shall be provided for fixing."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10019: 1981",
    "title": "Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS100191981_3",
    "text": "IS 10019: 1981 Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners [Finish]\nBrass and bronze numericals shall be finished smooth, and shall have bright or satin finish, or they shall be plated. They shall be suitably protected from discoloration. They shall be suitably protected from discoloration. Aluminium numericals shall be anodized. For detailed information, refer to IS 10090 : 1982 Specification for numericals."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10090: 1982",
    "title": "Numericals",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS100901982_1",
    "text": "IS 10090: 1982 Numericals [General]\nIS 10090: 1982 Numericals"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10342: 1982",
    "title": "Curtain Rail System",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS103421982_1",
    "text": "IS 10342: 1982 Curtain Rail System [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, testing and finish of rails, runners and hooks used in the curtain rail system. Note — This standard, however does not cover the requirements for drop curtain rail system used in theaters, auditoriums, etc. 2. Types and Materials Type 1 – Cast, (brass, aluminium) Type 2 – Pressed, (mild steel or brass or aluminium alloy sheet). Type 3 – Fabricated, (extruded brass or aluminium alloy) Note— For details of materials see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. 3. Shape and Dimensions 3.1 The curtain ring shall be either ‘I’ or ‘C’ section 3.2 Dimension for ‘C’ rails : 900, 1 200, 1 800, and 2 400 mm length with a tolerance of ± 3 mm. 3.3 Dimensions for ‘I’ rails : 1 800, 1 200 and 2 400 mm length with a tolerance of ± 3 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10342: 1982",
    "title": "Curtain Rail System",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS103421982_2",
    "text": "IS 10342: 1982 Curtain Rail System [Finish]\nAll components of curtain rail system shall be finished smooth. Aluminium components shall be anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or shall be dyed. Brass components shall have bright or satin finish and may be lacquered, nickel plated, or copper oxidized or bronze finished. Mild steel components shall be stove enamelled or electrogalvanized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12817: 1997",
    "title": "Stainless Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS128171997_1",
    "text": "IS 12817: 1997 Stainless Steel Butt Hinges [Scope]\nCovers the dimensions and requirements for PVC handrail covers for use on metal strip handrails.\n[Materials] Handrails covers are manufactured by extrusion using plasticized PVC compound of desired formulation and colour."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12817: 1997",
    "title": "Stainless Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS128171997_2",
    "text": "IS 12817: 1997 Stainless Steel Butt Hinges [Sizes]\nPVC handrail covers are normally made available in widths to match the desired width of metal TABLE 1 - REQUIREMENTS OF PVTC HANDRAIL COVERS Sl. No. Characteristics Requirements i) Heat ageing and exudation No exudation of plasticizer shall be apparent nor shall there be any change in appearance. ii) Tensile strength test Tensile strength shall not be les than 10 N/mm2 iii) Elongation Minimum elongation shall be 115 percent iv) Hardness Minimum value of Rockwell hardness number shall be L65 v) Resistance to combustion The specimen shall not burn to the 25 mm mark and shall not show any flame or after glow after 5 s after the burner has been removed. strip, suitably welded as part of the handrail, with a view to providing comforable grip. The common sizes shall suit metallic flats of width"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12817: 1997",
    "title": "Stainless Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS128171997_3",
    "text": "IS 12817: 1997 Stainless Steel Butt Hinges [Requirements]\nSee Table 1 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard and IS 8543 (Part 4/ Sec 1): 1984 Method of testing plastics: Part 4 short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties. Note 2 — Method of installation is given in Annex D of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12867 : 1989 Specification for PVC handrail covers."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12867: 1989",
    "title": "Pvc Hand Rail Covers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS128671989_1",
    "text": "IS 12867: 1989 Pvc Hand Rail Covers [Scope]\nRequirement for concealed type hydraulically operated door closers, fixed in concealed position within the thickness of the panel on vertical, hinge type doors opening to one side only and not weiging more than 80 kg. This standard does not cover overhead type door closers covered in IS 3564 : 1995* or pneumatic type door closers or closers working on only mechanical device. 2. Nominal Sizes Designation Mass of Door Width of Door No. 1 Up to 60 kg Up to 850 mm No. 2 60 to 80kg 851 to 1 000 mm 3. Materials Non porous body – Aluminium alloy Piston – Steel / Cast iron Note— For materials of other components see Table 2 of the standard. *Hydraulically regularated door closers. 4. Requirements a) Closing time shall be easily adjustable between 5 to 20 seconds by means of regu lating screws. b)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12867: 1989",
    "title": "Pvc Hand Rail Covers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Test A) Performance Requirement",
    "chunk_id": "IS128671989_2",
    "text": "IS 12867: 1989 Pvc Hand Rail Covers [Test A) Performance Requirement]\nWhen opened through 90º, the door shall swing back to 200 50 with normal speed but thereafter speed should automatically get retarded and should smoothly negotiate, with the latch (where provided) b) Endureance test – After 50,000 operations against maximum load specified, the closure shall show no defects, failure or leakage of oil etc. For detailed information, refer to IS 14912 : 2001. Specification for door closers–concealed type (hydraulically regulated)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14912: 2001",
    "title": "Door Closers - Concealed Type",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS149122001_1",
    "text": "IS 14912: 2001 Door Closers - Concealed Type [Scope]\nCovers the dimensions, such as length, measurement for wood based panel materials. The wood based panels considered are plywood, blockboard, hardboard, fibre insulation board, particle board, veneered particle board, particle board for insulation and high density particle board. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Plywood 2.1.1 Size– Plywood panels shall be of the sizes specified below Length Width mm mm 2400 × 1200 2100 × 1200 2100 × 900 1800 × 1200 1800 × 900 2.1.2 Thickness–The thickness shall be as given in the specification. 2.2 Hardboard 2.2.1 Size– Hardboards shall be of the sizes specified bel ow: Length Width mm mm 4800 × 1200 3600 × 1200 3000 × 1200 2400 × 1200 2100 × 1200 2100 × 900 1800 × 1200 1800 × 900 1200 × 1200 2.2.2 Thickness –The thicknesses shall be as given in the specification. 2.3 Blo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 849: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8491994_1",
    "text": "IS 849: 1994 Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood [Scope]\nRequirements for cold setting casein glue used in the wood panel industry, wood-work and joinery industry.\n[General Quality] The glue shall be in the form of powder, the adhesive constituent of which shall be mainly casein conforming to IS 850 : 1994*. When prepared in water in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction, it shall yield a homogeneous pasty fluid, free from grit and of satisfactory consistency. The glue shall be supplied in non-absorbent airtight containers. 3. Tests 3.1 Adhesive Strength— The mean failing load shall be not less than 270 kg and 45 kg (2 700 N and 450 N) for dry and wet tests, respectively. 3.2 Mycological Test— Where specified by the purchaser, the mycological test shall be conducted. The test pieces shall comply with the requirements specified under 3.1 for wet test. 3.3 Test for Chloride Content –The aqueous extract of the paper joined with casein glue shall not contain chlo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 849: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Keeping Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS8491994_2",
    "text": "IS 849: 1994 Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood [Keeping Properties]\nThe glue after being manufactured when stored in the original closed containers in a cool place for 12 months or for the period specified by the manufacturer shall comply with the requirements specified under 3.1. * Natural sour [(lactic)] casein for glue manufacture (first revision). Note: For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 849 : 1994 Specification for cold setting casein glue for wood (first revision) TABLE 1 TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SYNTHETIC RESIN ADHESIVES Resistance To Water Dry Test Test Resistance to Requirements Gap Close Boiling Water Test Hot Water Test Cold Water Test Micro-Organism Joint Contact Joint Gap Close Gap Close Gap Close Gap Close Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Joint Joint"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 851: 1978",
    "title": "Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8511978_1",
    "text": "IS 851: 1978 Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction [Scope]\nRequirements for synthetic resin adhesives suitable for wood work (non-structural) and joinery.\n[Types] Synthetic resin adhesives for wood shall be of the following four types : Boiling Water Proof BWP Boiling Water Resistance BWR Warm Water Resistance WWR Cold Water Resistance CWR 2.1 Gap filling and close contact adhesives of four types shall have following symbols : WORK (NON-STRUCTURAL) IN WOOD (First Revision) Type Symbol Gap -Filling Close Contact Adhesive Adhesive Boiling Water Proof BWP/GF BWP/CC Boiling Water Resistance BWR/GF BWR/CC Warm Water Resistance WWR/GF WWR/CC Cold Water Resistance CWR/GF BWP/CC"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 851: 1978",
    "title": "Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Keeping Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS8511978_2",
    "text": "IS 851: 1978 Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction [Keeping Properties]\nAdhesives shall comply with the test requirements given in Table 1, after the resin and hardener have been stored in the original closed containers according to the manufacturer’s instructions and up to the date recommended by the manufacturer. } 4.2 Close-Contact Joints — See Table 3. TABLE 3 RESISTANCE TO WATER (CLOSE-CONTACT JOINTS) Type Temperature of Water in Which Time of Mean Failing Test Pieces Shall be Immersed Immersion Load (1) (2) (3) (4) oC h kg BWP 100 6 150 (or at the boiling point of water) BWR 100 3 115 (or at the boiling point of water) WWR 70 ± 2 3 150 CWR 27 ± 2 16 to 24 200 Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B to G of the standard and IS1734 (Part 7) : 1983 Methods of test for plywood Part 7 Mycological test. For detailed Information, refer to IS 851: 197"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 851: 1978",
    "title": "Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Resistance To Micro",
    "chunk_id": "IS8511978_3",
    "text": "IS 851: 1978 Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction [Resistance To Micro]\norganism (Mycological Test) 5.1 Gap Joints— Average failing load shall not be less than 180 kg for all types. 5.2 Close- Contact Joint — Average failing load shall not be less than 200 kg for all types"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 852: 1994",
    "title": "Animal Glue For General Wood-Working Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8521994_1",
    "text": "IS 852: 1994 Animal Glue For General Wood-Working Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of animal glue for general wood-working purposes.\n[Materials] The glue shall be prepared from skin or bone material. It shall be supplied in the form of sheets, cakes, granules, pearls, flakes or powder, or in a kibbled form, as specified by the purchaser. 3. Requirements 3.1 Odour – The odour of a freshly prepared hot solution of the glue shall not be objectionable. 3.2 Keeping Quality —The glue shall keep not less than six days without evidence of liquefaction, purefaction or mould growth. 3.3 Storage Properties – The glue shall retain all the properties specified under 3.1and 3.4 to 3.7 for at least 12 months from the date of manufacture, when stored in a cool dry place. 3.4. Moisture Content 3.4.1 The average moisture content of the glue, shall be not greater than 14 percent and no individual value shall be greater than 18 percent. 3.4.2 Should t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 303: 1989",
    "title": "Plywood For General Purpose",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS3031989_1",
    "text": "IS 303: 1989 Plywood For General Purpose [Dimensions And Tolerances]\n6.1 The dimension of plyboards shall be as follows 2400 mm × 1200 mm 2100 mm × 1200 mm 1800 mm × 1200 mm 2100 mm × 900 mm 1800 mm × 1200 mm Note – Any other dimension as agreed to between the manufactuer and the purcheser may also be used. 6.2 Thickness — See Table 3. TABLE 3 THICKNESS OF PLYWOOD BOARDS BOARD THICKNESS mm (1) (2) 3 ply 3,4,5,6, 5 ply 5, 6, 8, 9 7ply 9,12,15,16, 9 ply 12, 15, 16, 16 11 ply 19, 22, 25 Above 11 ply As ordered The thickness shall be measured up to one place of decimal. 6.3 Tolerances Dimensions Tolerance a) Length : + 6 mm : – 0 mm b) Width : + 3 mm – 0 mm c) Thickness (1) Less than 6 mm : ± 10% (2) 6 mm and above : ± 5% d) Squareness : 0.2% e) Edge straightness : 0.2% 7. Tests 7.1 Glue adhesion — Shall have an average and minimum shear strength not less than"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1328: 1996",
    "title": "Veneered Decorative Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13281996_1",
    "text": "IS 1328: 1996 Veneered Decorative Plywood [Scope]\nCovers types of plywood with ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for decorative purposes, such as furniture making, panelling of all kinds, including panelling for railway coaches, buses and ships. 2. Grades and Types . 2.1 Determine decrotave plywood shall be of two grades, namely BWR and MR 2.2 Decorative plywood shall be of two types, namely Type 1 and Type 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1328: 1996",
    "title": "Veneered Decorative Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS13281996_2",
    "text": "IS 1328: 1996 Veneered Decorative Plywood [Materials]\nThe species of timber commonly used for decorative veneers or decorative plywood shall be specified by the purchaser. Commonly used species are given in Annex. B of the standard. Any species of timber may be used for cores and backs of decorative veneered plywood. However, a list of species, given in Annex B of IS 303 : 1989* may be used for guidance The adhesive for bonding of veneers shall be MR and BWR type synthetic resin adhesive, conforming to IS 848: 1974.+ for MR and BWR grade veneered decorative ply respectively. Plywood, when used in the manufacture of veneered decorative plywood of MR and BWR grade shall be MR and BWR type conforming to IS 303 : 1989.* 4. Requirements 4.1 Type 1—Open splits, checks or open Joints not more than 150 mm in length and 0.5 mm in width shall be permis"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1328: 1996",
    "title": "Veneered Decorative Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS13281996_3",
    "text": "IS 1328: 1996 Veneered Decorative Plywood [Finish]\nThe edges of the decorative plywood shall be trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth finish. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. Note—For method of tests, refer to the standard and IS 1734 (Part 1) : 1983 Method of tests for plywood, Part1 determination of density and moisture(second revision). For detailed Information, refer to IS 1328 : 1996 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (third revision). * Plywood for general purpose (first revision) + Synthetic resin adhesive for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4990: 1993",
    "title": "Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49901993_1",
    "text": "IS 4990: 1993 Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work [Scope]\nRequirements of plywood for concrete shuttering and form work.\n[Types] Plywood for concrete shuttering work shall be preservative treated, of BWP grade and shall be of three types as given below Type Description Designation 1 Plywood for concrete CS shuttering work (plain) 2 Plywood for concrete CSC shuttering work with plastic coating (coated) 3 Plywood for concrete CSFF shuttering work with suitable overlay (film faced) 3. Materials 3.1 Timber — Any species of timber may be used , However a list of species given in Annex B of the standard may be used for selection of species. 3.2 Adhesives for Bonding of Veneers—Shall be of the hot press synthetic resin (phenol formaldehyde) type and shall conforn to BWP type specified in IS 848 : 1974.+ 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1. Size Unless otherwise specified, plywood boards for concrete shuttering work shall be o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4990: 1993",
    "title": "Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS49901993_2",
    "text": "IS 4990: 1993 Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work [Workmanship And Finish]\nShall be smooth and the faces and back shall be free from harmful discolouration, pleats, overlaps and loose knots. The edges shall be of smooth uniform finish. * Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. Gaps and open joints shall be permitted as follows a) In Face — The gap or opening shall not exceed a width of 0.4 mm, If it exceeds 0.4mm this may be rectified by well-fitted veneer inserts of suitable width provided the grain of the veneer insert does not deviate by more than 10 percent from the grain direction of the surrounding veneer. b) In Core (Cross-Band) — The width of the opening shall of exceed 1 mm in the case of 3- ply and 5-ply, and 2 mm in the case of plywod of more than 5 ply, pnomided that such openings are not less than 300 mm apart in any reneer"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4990: 1993",
    "title": "Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS49901993_3",
    "text": "IS 4990: 1993 Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work [Tests]\n6.1 Moisture Content – Shall be not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent. 6.2 Glue Adhesion in Dry State 6.2.1 Glue shear strength – Average failing load shall be not less than 1350 N (135 kgf) and no individual value shall be less than 1100 N (110 kgf ). 6.2.2 Adhesion of plies – The veneers shall offer appreciable resistance to separation and the fractured samples shall show some adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly. 6.3 Water Resistance Test Note — For method of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1734 : 1983 Method of tests for plywood (second revision) For detailed informations, refer to IS 4990 : 1993 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work (second revision). 6.3.1 Glue shear strength – The average failing load shall be not less than 1000 N (1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5509: 2000",
    "title": "Fire Retardant Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS55092000_1",
    "text": "IS 5509: 2000 Fire Retardant Plywood [Scope]\nCovers the fire retardant chemicals, method of treatment, retentions and requirements of fire retardant plywood. 2. Types\n[Flame Retardants] Flame retardant chemicals used for treatments of plywood shall generally be the following – Type 1 Ammonium phosphate Type 2 Boron compounds Type 3 Ammonium sulphate Type 4 Combination of ammonium phosphate and boron compounds Type 5 Combination of ammonium sulphate and ammonium phosphate 2.2 Where flame retardant treatment and preserva – tive treatment are required together, the types of chemical and their retention, shall be as given IS 12120 : 1987 +\n[Preparation Of Plywood For Treatment] Plywood shall conform to BWR grade of IS 303:1989t and shall have a moisture content of notexceeding 15 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5509: 2000",
    "title": "Fire Retardant Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Fire Retardent Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS55092000_2",
    "text": "IS 5509: 2000 Fire Retardant Plywood [Fire Retardent Treatment]\nType of treatment shall be either of the two below : a) Pressure impregnation, and b) Soaking treatment * Code of practice for preservation of plywood and other panel products. t Plywood for general purposes (third revision)\n[Conditioning After Treatment] Plywood after treatment shall be conditioned to suitable equilibrium moisture content of not more than 20 percent.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] The dimensions and tolerance of fire retardant plywood shall conform IS 12049 : 1987‡\n[Workmanship And Finish] The finished plywood shall be reasonably clean to handle and free of dirt and stain other than any uniform colour of the flame retardant solution. 8. Tests Requirement"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5509: 2000",
    "title": "Fire Retardant Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Moisture Content",
    "chunk_id": "IS55092000_3",
    "text": "IS 5509: 2000 Fire Retardant Plywood [Moisture Content]\nShall not exceed 20 percent 8.2 Flammability– The time taken for the second ignition shall not be less than 30 minutes. 8.3 Flame Penetration – Time taken for flame penetration shall not be less than 15 minutes for every 6 mm thickness. 8.4 Rate of Burning —The time taken to lose weight from 30 percent to 70 percent shall not be less than 20 minutes. 8.5 Other Tests – Glue shear strength in dry state mycological test, water resistance test and any other mechanical property as per IS 303 : 1989. ‡ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. t Plwood for general purposes (and revision). Note — For method of test refer IS 1734. (Part 1) : 1983 Method of test for plywood – Part 1– 1983. Determination of density and moisture content ( second revision) Methods of test for p"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5539: 1969",
    "title": "Preservative Treated Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS55391969_1",
    "text": "IS 5539: 1969 Preservative Treated Plywood [Scope]\nTreatment of plywood for protection against fungi, termites and other insects and marine borers and requiremments of preservatives treated plywood. 2. Type of Preservatives a) Type 1 ( Oil Type) – Coal tar creosote with or without admixture with various grades of petroleum and other oils having high boiling point. b) Type 2 ( Organic Solvent Type)– Copper/zinc naphthenate, trichlorophenol, Lindane. c) Type 3 ( Water Soluble Non- fixing Type)– Zinc chloride, boric acid, borax, sodium fluoride and sodium pentachlorophenate. d) Type 4 ( Water Soluble ‘Fixed’ Type)–Copperchrome arsenic composition, acid Copper chrome composition, chromated zinc chloride and copper chrome boric composition."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5539: 1969",
    "title": "Preservative Treated Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Preparation Of Plywood For Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS55391969_2",
    "text": "IS 5539: 1969 Preservative Treated Plywood [Preparation Of Plywood For Treatment]\nPlywood for preservative treatment shall have moisture content not exceeding 16 percent and shall have been bonded with water resistant glue of BWR type. TABLE 1 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS Sl. Service Conditions Timber used in Plywood Type of Mode of Minimum No for Treated Plywood According to Relevant Preservative Treatment Retention Indian Standard on Plywood Recommemded Recommended kg/m3 Required to be Treated (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Plywood in direct contact All Type 4 (Copper Pressure 12.0 with water or ground and chrome-arsenic process required to be painted as composition or Veneer for pontoons, boats, rafts acid- copper-chorme treatment 12.0 tugs, fence posts, box, composition) colums, etc ( IS 710 : 1976*) ii) Plywood in di"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5539: 1969",
    "title": "Preservative Treated Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Choice Of Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS55391969_3",
    "text": "IS 5539: 1969 Preservative Treated Plywood [Choice Of Treatment]\nThis is governed by the timber species in the plywood, sapwood content and use after treatment. Recommended practice on choice of preservative and amount of absorption and service conditions is given in Table 1. Note – For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timber see Appendix B of the standard. 5. Modes of Treatment a) By pressure impregnation after manufacture. b) By soaking or surface application after manufacture. c) By treatment of dry or wet veneers before assembly."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5539: 1969",
    "title": "Preservative Treated Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Conditioning",
    "chunk_id": "IS55391969_4",
    "text": "IS 5539: 1969 Preservative Treated Plywood [Conditioning]\nPlywood after treatment shall be conditioned to a moisture content of not more than 14 percent for interior use and 18 percent for exterior uses. If the plywood is to be painted subsequently the moisture content shall be between 6 and 14 percent. Sl Service Conditions Timber used in plywood Type of Mode of Minimum No for Treated Plywood According to Relevant Preservative Treatment Retention Indian Standard on Plywood Recommemded Recommended Required to be Treated (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) iii) Marine structures exposed All Type 1[Creosote or Pressure 200.0 to marine borer danger creosote fuel oil process (IS : 710 -1976) + mixture (50:50] iv) Concrete shuttering plywood All Type 4 ( Copper- Pressure 12.0 IS : 4990 -1993†) chrome arsenic process composition or acid-copper-chrome- Veneer 12.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7316: 1974",
    "title": "Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS73161974_1",
    "text": "IS 7316: 1974 Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces [Scope]\nCovers decorative plywood with ornamental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers meant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of buildings, buses, ships, etc. and for decorative furniture of all types. 2. Material 2.1 Timber – Shall be according to IS 303 : 1989*. Non durable timbers and sapwood of all other timber shall be given a preservative treatment. 2.2 Adhesive – Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or WMR. 2.3 Plywood – When used, shall be BWR or WWR synthetic resin bonded type."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7316: 1974",
    "title": "Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Permissible Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS73161974_2",
    "text": "IS 7316: 1974 Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces [Permissible Defects]\nOpen splits, checks or open joints not more than 150 mm long and 0.5 mm wide, provided the same are rectified with a matching veneer insert bonded with BWR or WWR adhesive. Decorative veneered surface shall be free from torn grain, dote, worm hole, discolouration or other visual defects. 4. Standard Dimensions Length 240, 210, 180, 150, 120 and 90 cm Width 120 and 90 mm Thickness 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 19, and 25 mm *Plywood for general purposes (third revision) 5. Tolerances Length up to 120 cm +3 mm – 0 mm Length over 120 cm +6 mm – 0 mm Width up to 90 cm +3 mm – 0 mm Width above 90 cm +6 mm – 0 mm Thickness = + 0.2 mm +5 percent of nominal thickness = – 0.1 mm+2.5 percent of nominal thickness Rectangular panels shall have their diagonal length not varying beyond 9 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7316: 1974",
    "title": "Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS73161974_3",
    "text": "IS 7316: 1974 Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces [Finish]\nTrimmed square and sanded to a smooth finish. 7. Tests 7.1 Moisture Content— Not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent . 7.2 Water Resistance Test – Shall not show delamination or blister formation Note — For method of test refer to the standard and IS1734 (Part 1) 1983 Method tests for plywood Part 1 Determination of density and moisture content (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 7316 : 1974 Specification of decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS107011983_1",
    "text": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood [Scope]\nRequirements of plywood for structural purposes, such as stressed skin panels, plywood web beams, sheathing, silos, rail and ship containers. 2. Materials 2.1 Timber –The species of timber recommended for use shall be from the species mentioned in Appendix A of the standard. 2.2 Adhesive — Shall conform to BWP type specified in IS 848 : 1974*.\n[Plywood] Shall conform to BMP grade in accordance with IS 303 : 1989 +.\n[Treatment] Shall be given preservative treatment with fixed type of preservatives as per IS 5539 :1969 ++.\n[General Requirements] See Table 1. 6. Dimensions and Tolerances"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS107011983_2",
    "text": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood [Sizes]\nStructural plywood panels shall be of the sizes given below: 240 × 120 cm; 210 × 120 cm;180 × 120 cm; 240 × 90 cm; 210 × 90 cm;180 × 90 cm; TABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ON VENEERS USED IN MANUFACTURE OF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Requirements Sl. No. Defects Face Core i ) Blister Nil Nil ii) Checks Nil No restriction iii) Discolouration 3 percent of the area if it will 6 percent of the area if it not impair the board properties. will not impair the board properties. iv) Dote Nil 5 cm/m2 v) Insect holes Nil No restriction vi) Knots (dead) Nil 2 up to 12mm dia/m2 Pin knots (dead) Nil 2/m2 Pin knots (live) Permitted provided they do not mar No restriction the appearance Knots (tight) 3 up to 25 mm dia/m2 6 up to 25 mm dia/ m2 vii) Split on each panel One split not more than 2 splits not"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Thickness",
    "chunk_id": "IS107011983_3",
    "text": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood [Thickness]\nThickness of plywood panels shall be as given below – No. of Plies Thickness m m 3 4 5 6 9 7 12 16 9 16 19 11 19 25 { { { + Plywood for general purposes(third revision) ++ Preservative treated plywood. * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision) } TABLE 2 MINIMUM AVERAGE FAILING LOAD AND WOOD FAILURE REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Dry State Resistance to Water Resistance to Micro Organism Average Average Average Average Average Average Failing Wood Failing Wood Failing Wood Load, N Failure Load, N Failure Load, N Failure Percent Percent Percent 1324 and above No restriciion 981and above No restriction 981 and above No restriction 1226-1323 60 883- 980 60 883- 980 60 1079-1225 80 785- 882 80 785- 882 80 <1079 Panel to be <785 Panel t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS107011983_4",
    "text": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood [Tolerances]\nThe tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished panels shall be as given below: Length ± 6 mm – 0 mm Width ± 3 mm – 0 mm Thickness up to and excluding ±10 percent 6mm 6 to 9 mm ±7 percent Above 9 mm ±5 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS107011983_5",
    "text": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood [Workmanship And Finish]\nThe faces of plywood panels shall be smooth. 8. Tests 8.1 Moisture Content – Shall not be less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent. 8.2 Glue Shear Strength in Dry State— See Table 2 8.3 Resistance to Water —See Table 2 8.4 Resistance to Micro Organism — See Table 2 8.5 Preservation Retention — Shall not be less than 12 kg m3 for water soluble fixed type. 8.6 Tensile strength — See Table 3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13957: 1994",
    "title": "Metal Faced Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS139571994_1",
    "text": "IS 13957: 1994 Metal Faced Plywood [Scope]\nCovers manufacture and requirements of metal faced plywood composite. The scope is limited to the use of galvanized iron sheet or aluminium sheet only, as metal sheet. 2. Materials 2.1 Plywood — Shall be BWR grade conforming to IS 303 : 1989*. 2.2 Galvanised Iron Sheets— Shall conform to IS 277 : 1992++. 2.3 Aluminium Sheet — Shall conform to IS 737 : 1986 @. 2.4 Adhesive 2.4.1 Phenol formaldehyde (PF) resin — Phenol formaldehyde resol resin shall be used for bonding galvanized sheet or aluminium sheet with plywood. 2.4.2 Polyvinyl acetal resin ? Polyvinyl formal or polyvinyl butyral resin shall be used in combination with phenol formaldehyde resol resin."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13957: 1994",
    "title": "Metal Faced Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS139571994_2",
    "text": "IS 13957: 1994 Metal Faced Plywood [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nThe dimensions of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given for plywood in IS 12049 :1987§. Thickness of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given in Table 1. TABLE 1 THICKNESS OF METAL FACED PLYWOOD Board Thickness mm (1) (2) 3 ply 3, 4, 5 ,6 5 Ply 5, 6, 8, 9 7 Ply 9,12,15, 16 9 Ply 12.15.16.19 11 Ply 19,22,25 Above 11 Ply As ordered 3.1 Tolerances – The tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished boards shall be as specified in IS 12049:1987."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13957: 1994",
    "title": "Metal Faced Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS139571994_3",
    "text": "IS 13957: 1994 Metal Faced Plywood [Workmanship And Finish]\nThe metal faced plywood boards shall be of uniform thickness within the tolerance limits specified. 5. Tests 5.1 Bond Quality Test – A specimen shall be considered to have passed the test if : a) No visible delamination has occured in the glue lines of plywood and if no visible delamination has occured between the plywood faces and the metal sheet, and b) On forcible seperation using a suitable lever, wood fibres are found adhered to the metal sheet uniformly over the entire surface. 5.2 Optional Tests : a) Modulus of elasticity b) Modulus of rupture c) Core shear stress d) Facing stress Note—For method of tests refer to the standard. For detailed Information, refer to IS 13957 : 1994.Specification for metal faced plywood. ++ Galvanized steelsheet (plain and corrugated) (fifth revision). *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1658: 1977",
    "title": "Fibre Hard Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS16581977_1",
    "text": "IS 1658: 1977 Fibre Hard Boards [Scope]\nRequirements of fibre hardboards for general purposes. This standard does not cover requirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards (chip boards), and similar boards.\n[Types] Classified according to their method of manufacture, density, mechanical and physical properties: a) Medium hardboard – Density between 0.35 g/cm3 and 0.8 g/cm3 b) Standard hardboard – Density more than 0.80 g/cm3 c) Tempered hardboard–Hardboard further treated during manufacture to modify their properties."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1658: 1977",
    "title": "Fibre Hard Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS16581977_2",
    "text": "IS 1658: 1977 Fibre Hard Boards [Dimensions And Tolerances]\na) Thickness (mm) i) Medium hard board 6 8 10 12 Tolerance(mm) ± 0.5 ±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.9 ii) Standard hardboard iii) Tempered 3 4 5 6 9 hardboard Tolerance ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.5 ±0.7 (mm) b) Width 1.2 m; tolerance ±0.3 mm c) Length – 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.8 and 5.5m; tolerance ± 0.5 mm d) Boards shall be rectangular and shall have square edges. Difference between lengths of two diagonals shall exceed ±3 mm per metre length of diagonal Note — For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 1658 : 1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1659: 2004",
    "title": "Block Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS16592004_1",
    "text": "IS 1659: 2004 Block Boards [Scope]\nEssential requirements of commercial and decorative blockboards meant for interior and exterior uses. 2. Grades and Types 2.1 Block boards shall be of the following two grades: a) BWP Grade– Such block board may be used for bus bodies, railway coaches, prefabricated houses, etc, where it is likely to be exposed to high humidity and for external use. b) MR Grade – Such block board may be used for interior use such as furniture, partition, panelling, ceiling, etc. 2.2 Each of the grades specified in 4.1 shall be of the following two types. a) Decorative Type– These are block boards with decorative face veneers on one or both sides for use in high class furniture, panelling, interior decoration, partitions, etc. b) Commercial Tyep – These are block boards with veneers of commerical timber on"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3087: 1985",
    "title": "Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30871985_1",
    "text": "IS 3087: 1985 Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of medium density wood particle boards for general purposes, having specific grativity in the range 0.5 to 0.9. This standard does not cover veneered particle boards, moulded particle boards, high and low density particle boards or particle boards faced by impregnated paper surfaces. 2. Classes and Grades 2.1 The particle boards shall be of the following classes : Class Grade Designation Flat pressed, single layers — FPS Flat pressed, three layer, 1 FPT-1 multilayer and graded II FPT-2 Extrusion pressed solid — XPS Extrusion pressed,tubular — XPT 3. Materials 3.1 Any species of wood or any other ligno-cellulosic material may be used in the manufacture of particle board. 3.2 Adhesive —Any suitable type of synthetic resin conforming to IS 848:1974* may be used . However, for fla"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3087: 1985",
    "title": "Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Mechanical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS30871985_2",
    "text": "IS 3087: 1985 Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes [Mechanical Properties]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF VARIOUS TYPES OF PARTICLES BOARDS S.l. Properties Flat Presses Flat Presses Extrusion Extrusion No. Single Layer Three Layers Pressed Pressed multi Layers Solid Tubular & Graded (XPS) (XPT) Grade1 Grade 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1.1 Density variation ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 1.2 Water absorption percent, 2 h soaking 25 10 40 40 40 24 h soaking 50 20 80 80 80 1.3 a) Linear expansion (Swelling in water) percent 2 h soaking i) Length 0.5 0.5 0.5 2 2 ii) Width 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 b) Thickness swelling percent 2 h soaking 10 8 12 5 5 1.4 Swelling due to surfce absorption percent, 9 6 9 4 4 1.5 Modulus of rupture, N/mm2 up to 20 mm thickness 11 15.0 11 2 1 above 20 mm thickness 11 12.5 11 2 1 1.6 Tensile strength perpendicular to surface,N/mm2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3087: 1985",
    "title": "Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Preservative Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS30871985_3",
    "text": "IS 3087: 1985 Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes [Preservative Treatment]\nA suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of the adhesive. The following percentages of preservatives are regarded as suitable : a) Sodium pentachlorophenate – 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles,or b) Trichlorophenol – 5percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix. Note — For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials.(first revision) For detailed Information, refer to IS 3087 : 1985 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision). b) Veneers for cross-band and faces shall be either sawn or rotary cut or sliced and shall be smooth c) Adhesive used for bonding veneers shall be BWP or BW\n[Finish] All boards shall be flat and squarely cut. Both faces shall be sanded to a smooth even surface."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3087: 1985",
    "title": "Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances A) Length",
    "chunk_id": "IS30871985_4",
    "text": "IS 3087: 1985 Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes [Dimensions And Tolerances A) Length]\n480, 365, 300, 270, 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, 100 and 90 cm. Tolerance ± 5 mm up to 150cm and ± 10 mm above 150 cm. b) Width — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90 and 45 cm. Tolerance same as for length. c) Thickness — 6, 10, 12, 20, 25, 30, 40, 45 and 50 mm Tolerance ± 1 mm. d) Length of two diagonals shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm. e) Edges shall be straight with a maximum deviation of 3 mm. Note – Other thickness or sizes may be manufactured on special demand as specified by the manufacturer. 6. Tests 6.1 Density —Density of each specimen shall not vary from mean density by more than ± 10 percent. 6.2 Moisture Content — Average value shall be between 7 to 16 percent. 6.3 Water Absorption — Value shall not exceed 25 percent for 2 h soaking and 50 percent for 20 h soaking. 6.4 Water Resistance Te"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3097: 1980",
    "title": "Veneered Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30971980_1",
    "text": "IS 3097: 1980 Veneered Particle Boards [Scope]\nRequirements, such as, grades and types, material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for veneered particle boards.\n[Grades] Shall be of two grades, namely, Grade I and Grade II 2.1 Each grade of veneered particle board shall be of the following four types : a) Type 1 — Solid core, general purpose (boards with faces of veneer of general purpose type). b) Type 2 — Solid core, decorative (boards with solid core but faced with ornamental veneers on one or both sides). c) Type 3 —Tubular core, general purpose boards with tubular core and faced with veneer of general purpose type). d) Type 4 — Tubular core, decorative (boards with tubular core faced with decorative veneers on one or both sides). 2.2 Designation —The grades and types shall be designated as follows : Sl .Grade Type Designation No. 1. Grade I Solid core, general purpose SO GP - I 2. Grade l Solid core, decorative SO D - I 3. Grade I Tubular core, genera"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3129: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS31291985_1",
    "text": "IS 3129: 1985 Low Density Particle Boards [Scope]\nEssential requirments of low density particle boards having specific grativity not exceeding 0.4 2. Material 2.1 Timber and Other Ligno-Cellulosic Material — Timber and other ligno-cellulosic matrerial like bagasse, solapith, jute sticks, rice husk, pea-nut shells, etc, may be used for the manufacture of these boards. These shall be light weight materials of bulk density preferably not exceeding 400 kg/m3 and shall be free from exttraneous matter and dust. 2.2 Adhesive— Shall be BWR or BWP type conforming to IS 848 : 1974*. and shall be either a phenolformaldehyde or urea-formaldehyde type fortified with melamine. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 The sizes of insulation particle boards shall be as given below : Length in mm : 3650,3000,2700,2400, 2100,1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 900, 600, 450,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3129: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Thickness",
    "chunk_id": "IS31291985_2",
    "text": "IS 3129: 1985 Low Density Particle Boards [Thickness]\nThe thickness of insulation particle boards in mm shall be 50, 45, 40, 30, 27, 25, 22, 19, 16 and 12. 3.3. Tolerances: Dimension Nominal Size Tolerance Length for all lengths ± 8 mm Width for all width ± 8 mm Thickness above 25 mm ± 1 mm up to and including 25 mm ± 0.8 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3129: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Preservative Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS31291985_3",
    "text": "IS 3129: 1985 Low Density Particle Boards [Preservative Treatment]\nA suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of adhesive. a) Sodium pentachlorophenate— 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles or b) Trichlorophenol – 5 percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix. 4.1Sizing Material – A suitable sizing material like paraffin wax or wax emulsion withnot exceeding1.5 percent of the oven dry weight of the particles. Suitable fire retardant chemicals like mono or diammonium phosphate, tri-sodium phosphate, borax or boric acid shall be added to the particle mix at the manufacturing stage or alternatively the board shall be coated or painted on their surface and edges with fire retardant formulations or both the treatment given at their respective stages so that the board meets the requirements given in Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3129: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS31291985_4",
    "text": "IS 3129: 1985 Low Density Particle Boards [Finish]\nThe surface of the boards may be plain, embossed with design or perforated. It may be treated or coated with fire-retardant composition and should be able to take a coat of oil distemper or plastic emulsion paint. 6. Physical Properties 6.1Water Absorption — There shall be no splitting of edges and no signs of disintegration of board when tested as per standard. 6.2See Table 1– for other tests. * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision.) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW DENSITY PARTICLES BOARDS Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Minimum Sound Minimum Density Variation Moisture Modulus Swelling Thermal Absorption† Fire Resistance kg/m3 In Density Content Of Rupture Due to Conductivity Surface Frequency Absorption Ignitability Surface"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3308: 1981",
    "title": "Wood Wool Building Slabs",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS33081981_1",
    "text": "IS 3308: 1981 Wood Wool Building Slabs [Scope]\nRequirements for insulating boards made of wood or sugarcane fibre. It also covers the following special types of fibre insulation boards Type of Board Nominal Tolerance on Thickness Thickness mm mm cm cm Fibre insulation 9 ± 0.75 365,300 180,150 board, ordinary or 12 ± 0.75 270,240 120,100 flame retardant type 18 ± 1.00 210,180 90,60 25 ± 1.25 150,120 45and Bitumen bonded fibre 9 ± 0.50 100, 90 30 Insulation board, 12 ± 0.50 60, 45 18 ± 0.75 and 30 25 ± 0.75 Tolerance on length ± 3 mm upto 120cm and and width ± 6 mm above120cm 3. Requirements 3.1 Density — Shall not exceed 0.4g/cm3 3.2 Transverse Strength Type of Board Thickness Mean Breaking Load Approximate Modulus of Rupture mm min, kg for Nominal Thickness,kg/cm2 Fibre insulation 9 7.2 20 board ordinary or flame 12 12.8 20 retardant t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3348: 1965",
    "title": "Fibre Insulation Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Special Requirement For Flame Retardant Boards",
    "chunk_id": "IS33481965_1",
    "text": "IS 3348: 1965 Fibre Insulation Board [Special Requirement For Flame Retardant Boards]\nAverage maximum area of char, when tested for surface spread of flame, shall not exceed 75cm2. Note — For test procedures, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3348 : 1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards. Type Grade Density Moisture Mimimum Minimum Water Resistance Content Modulus Tensile Absorption to Boiling of Strength After 24 h Water After Rupture Immersion 3h Immersion g/cm3 percent kg/cm2 kg/cm2 percent,max Type 1 Grade A 1.2 3 to 7 450 350 10 shall not show any sign of Grade B 0.9 Min 5 to 6 400 300 25 delamination Grade A 1.2 5 to10 300 225 15 Not specified Type 2 Grade B 0.9 Min 5 to16 250 200 25 Maximum Permissible – – – Variation in Individual Specimen from the Mean Max +10 Max+2 Percent Percent\n[Scope] Requirements of high density wood particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3348: 1965",
    "title": "Fibre Insulation Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Types",
    "chunk_id": "IS33481965_2",
    "text": "IS 3348: 1965 Fibre Insulation Board [Types]\n(Depending on Synthetic Resin Used) and Grades ( depending on extent of resin content) Type1 — BWR type of resin—Grades A and B. Type2 — MR type of resin —Grades A and B. Each type and grade may be in flat sheet form or moulded form. 3. Materials 3.1 Timber — Any suitsable species. 3.2 Adhesive —As in 2. In grade A resin content is 20 to 50 percent and in gade B, 8 to 12 percent 3.3 Sizing — Paraffin wax up to 1 percent, Max."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3348: 1965",
    "title": "Fibre Insulation Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimension And Tolerances For Flat Sheet",
    "chunk_id": "IS33481965_3",
    "text": "IS 3348: 1965 Fibre Insulation Board [Dimension And Tolerances For Flat Sheet]\na) Length — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and 45 cm b) Width— 150, 120, 100, 90, and 45 cm. c) Thickness — 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 22, 20, 16, 12, 9 m 6 and 4 mm. d) Tolerance— Length and width, ± 6 mm Thickness ±5 percent up to 25 mm., ±2.5 percent above 25 mm. Lenght of diagonals of a board shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm/m length of diagonal. Edge shall be straight with tolerance of 3 mm.\n[Physical Requirements] Shall be as specified in table given below:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3478: 1966",
    "title": "High Density Wood Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS34781966_1",
    "text": "IS 3478: 1966 High Density Wood Particle Boards [General]\nIS 3478: 1966 High Density Wood Particle Boards Note —For test procedures, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1997 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision ) and 9.3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3478 :1966 Specification for high density wood particle board"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 2003",
    "title": "Medium Density Fibre Boards For",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS124062003_1",
    "text": "IS 12406: 2003 Medium Density Fibre Boards For [Scope]\nRequirements of medium density fibre boards for general purposes having density in the range of 600 – 900 kg/m3. This standard does not cover veneered or laminated or other specially treated boards, moulded boards, etc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 2003",
    "title": "Medium Density Fibre Boards For",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Types",
    "chunk_id": "IS124062003_2",
    "text": "IS 12406: 2003 Medium Density Fibre Boards For [Types]\nMedium density fibreboards for general purpose shall be of one type only, that is flat pressed single layer. It may, however, be of two grades, designated as follows— Grade Designation Solid board Grade-1 SBF-I Solid board Grade-2 SBG-II 3. Materials 3.1 Wood —Any spicies of wood or any other lignocellulosic material may be used 3.2 Adhesive—Any suitable type of synthetic resin adhesive be used. For the purpose of bonding to comply with physical and mechanical requirements given in Table 1. 3.3 Sizing Material—Paraffin wax dissolved in mineral spirit, or alternatively emulsified with water, or melted shall be used as sizing material. + Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 2003",
    "title": "Medium Density Fibre Boards For",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS124062003_3",
    "text": "IS 12406: 2003 Medium Density Fibre Boards For [Finish]\nMedium density fibre board shall be flat and of uniform thickness and density throughout the length and width of the boards. Both surfaces of the boards shall be sanded to a smooth finish."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 2003",
    "title": "Medium Density Fibre Boards For",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS124062003_4",
    "text": "IS 12406: 2003 Medium Density Fibre Boards For [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nThe boards shall be rectangular and , unless otherwise specified, shall have square edges. The lengths of the two diagonals of the board shall not differ by more than ±3 mm per metre length of the diagonal. a) Thickness – The thickness of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below— 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 22, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm the tolerance on thickness shall be ± 0.3 mm b) Width and Length—Unless otherwise specified, the width and length of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below– a) Width — 1.22 m b) Length — 5.49, 4.89, 3.66, 3.05, 2.44, 1.83, 1.22m Any other dimesions as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer may be used. Tolerance on length and width shall be ±3 mm /m. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIEMENTS OF MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARDS Sl. Properties Gr"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12823: 1990",
    "title": "Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS128231990_1",
    "text": "IS 12823: 1990 Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards [Finish]\nThe finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049:1987.* 6. Tests 6.1 Density — 500 to 900 kg/m3 6.2 Moisture Content — 5 to 15 percent 6.3 Resistance to Steam – Shall not show any sign of blister, delamination or change in surface finish. There may be slight colour change in dark colours/ patterns. 6.4 Crack Resistance – Shall not show any sign of cracks or delamination. 6.5 Resistance to digarette Burn — shall not leave any mark or stain on the specimen after cleaning with water or solvent. 6.6 Resistance to Stain — Shall not leave any stain on the specimen after cleaning with water, solvent or detergent. 6.7 For Other Tests —See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12823: 1990",
    "title": "Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Mechanical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS128231990_2",
    "text": "IS 12823: 1990 Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards [Mechanical Properties]\nSee Table1. + Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision). * Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Properties Flat, Pressed three layers, Multilayer and Graded Grade I Grade II i) Density variation Max, percent ±10 ±10 ii) absorption, Max, percent a) 2 hours 7.0 15.0 b) 24 hours 15.0 30.0 iii) Thickness swelling, Max, percent, 5.0 8.0 a) 2 hours iv) Modulus of rupture, Min, N/mm2— a) Up to 20 mm thickness 15.0 11.0 b) Above 20 mm thickness 12.5 11.0 v) Tensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm2— a) Up to 20 mm thickness 0.45 0.3 b) Above 20 mm thickness 0.4 0.3 vi) Tensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm.2 a) After cyclic test 0.2 __ b) After accelerated water resis"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14276: 1995",
    "title": "Cement Bonded Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS142761995_1",
    "text": "IS 14276: 1995 Cement Bonded Particle Boards [Scope]\nRequirements of cement bonded wood particle boards.This standard does not cover particle boards bonded with synthetic resin adhesives.\n[Materials] Species of wood which do not hinder the process of setting of cement shall be used. Suitable additives such as sodium silicate conforming to IS 381 : 1995* and aluminium sulphate conforming to IS 260 : 1969 +shall be used to prevent inhibitive effect of setting of cement when other species are used. Cement conforming to IS 8112 : 1989++ shall be used. 3. Finish The particle boards shall be of uniform thickness and density throughout the length and width of the boards. All particle boards. shall be flat and smooth."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14276: 1995",
    "title": "Cement Bonded Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS142761995_2",
    "text": "IS 14276: 1995 Cement Bonded Particle Boards [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nThe sizes of cement bonded particle boards shall be as follows : Length 3050 mm and 2440 mm Width 1220 mm Thickness—The thickness of cement bonded particle boards shall be as given below 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30 and 40 mm. Tolerances – The following tolerances for the dimensions shall be permitted: Length ± 5 mm Width ± 5 mm Thickness i) Unsanded boards 6 mm to 12 mm ± 1 mm 12 mm to 20 mm ± 1.5 mm 20 mm and more ± 2 mm ii) Sanded boards For all thickness ) ± 0.3 mm Edge straightness 2 mm per1000 mm Squareness 2 mm per1000 mm 5. Physical characteristics : See Table 1 TABLE1REQUIREMENT OF PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARDS SL. NO PROPERTY REQUIREMENT i) Density Min kg/ m3 1250 ii) Moisture content,percent 6 to12 iii) Water absorption, Max , percent 2 h S"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 1988",
    "title": "+",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS124061988_1",
    "text": "IS 12406: 1988 + [Scope]\nRequirement of prelaminated medium density fibre board for general purposes and also for special applications.\n[Grades] Based on surface abrasion characteristics. The grades and types of prelaminated medium density fibre boards shall be represented by symbols as follows : Grade and Type Designation Grade I Type I PLMDF-11 Type II PLMDF-12 Type III PLMDF-13 Type IV PLMDF-14 Grade II Type I PLMDF-21 Type II PLMDF-22 Type III PLMDF-23 Type IV PLMDF-24 3. Materials 3.1 Medium Density Fibre Board —Synthetic resin bonded medium density fibre board shall conform to 3.2 Impregnated Base Paper – Printed or plain colour absorbant basepaper having a weight of 60-140 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent shall be used:\n[Impregnated Overlay] An absorbant tissue paper having a weigth of 18-40 g/m3 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent, shall be used.\n[Finish] The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used. .\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049 : 1987 ++\n[Mechanical Properties] see Table 1. + Medium density fibre boards for general purposes. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14587: 1998",
    "title": "Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS145871998_1",
    "text": "IS 14587: 1998 Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board [General]\nIS 14587: 1998 Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES PROPERTY REQUIREMENT Grade I Grade II 1.1 Density variation Max, percent ±10 ±10 1.2 Water absorption Max, percent: a) 2 hours 6 9 b) 24 hours 12 18 1.3 Thickness swelling Max, percent, 2 hours 4 7 1.4 Modulus of rupture Min, N/mm2: a) Up to 20mm thickness 28 28 b) Above 20mm thickness 25 25 1.5 Tensile strength perpendicular to surface Min, N/mm2: a) Up to 20mm thickness 0.8 0.7 b) Above 20mm thickness 0.7 0.6 1.6 Tensile strength perpendicular to surface Min, N/mm.2: a) After cyclic test 0.4 __ b) After acceleratedwater resistance test 0.25 __ 1.7 Screw withdrawal strength(Min),N: a) Face 1500 1500 b) Edge 1250 1250 1.8 Abrasion resistance (Min) in number of revolutions: a) Type I 1000 1000 b) Type II 450 450 c) Type III 250 250 d) Type IV 75 75 6.1 Density – 500 to 900 kg/m3 6.2 Moisture Content – 5 to 15 percent. 6.3 Resistance to Steam — Shall not show any sign of blister, delamination or change in surface finish. There many be slight colour change in dark colour/patterns."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14587: 1998",
    "title": "Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS145871998_2",
    "text": "IS 14587: 1998 Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board [General]\nIII 250 250 d) Type IV 75 75 6.1 Density – 500 to 900 kg/m3 6.2 Moisture Content – 5 to 15 percent. 6.3 Resistance to Steam — Shall not show any sign of blister, delamination or change in surface finish. There many be slight colour change in dark colour/patterns. 6.4 Crack Resistance – Shall not show any sign of cracks or delamination. 6.5 Resistance to Cigarette Burn — Shall not leave any mark or stain on the specimen after cleaning with water or solvent. 6.6 Resistance to Stain — Shall not leave any stain on the specimen after cleaning with water , solvent or detergent. 6.7 For Other Tests – See Table 1 Note: For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulsic materials (first revision). For detailed Information, refer to IS 14587:1998 Specification for prelaminated medium density fibre board."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1586: 1988",
    "title": "Method For Rockwell Hardness Test For Metallic Material",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS15861988_1",
    "text": "IS 1586: 1988 Method For Rockwell Hardness Test For Metallic Material [General]\nIS 1586: 1988 Method For Rockwell Hardness Test For Metallic Material ii) IS 1708 : 1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimen of Timber (second revision) iii) IS 1734 (Part 9) : 1983 Methods of test of plywood : Part 9 Determination of tensile strength. (second revision) iv) IS 1998 : 1962 Method of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets. v)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3513 (Part 4): 1966",
    "title": "High And Medium Density Wood Based Laminates (Compreg) : Part 4 Sampling And Tests.",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS3513Part41966_1",
    "text": "IS 3513 (Part 4): 1966 High And Medium Density Wood Based Laminates (Compreg) : Part 4 Sampling And Tests. [Scope]\nRequirements of resin treated compressed wood laminates (compregs) for general purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements for solid compressed wood. 2. Grades and Types 2.1 Grades a) High density b) Medium density 2.1.1.General purpose high density grade (or Grade GH) – This shall be a partially impregnated high density material suitable for textile and jute mills accesories and tools, engineering and general engineering applications. This grade shall have four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI. 2.1.2 General purpose medium density grade (or Grade GM) —This shall be a partially impregnated medium density material suitable for general purposes. This shall have four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI .2.2. Types – a) Type II – The grain orientation of the constituent vene\n[Varnishes] Shall conform to IS 524 : 1983+ and IS 525 : 1968‡ .\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] 4.1 Boards 4.1.1 Sizes — Shall generally be the following : mm mm mm mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14616: 1999",
    "title": "Laminated Veneer Lumber",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS146161999_1",
    "text": "IS 14616: 1999 Laminated Veneer Lumber [Scope]\nCovers laminated veneer lumber (LVL) of density range 0.6 to 0.75 in which most natural structural wood fall. Its applications include all the end uses to which structural wood has been traditionally used, such as, beams, rafters, stringers, joists, posts and framework construction, stiles, rails and frames of doors and windows, vehicle bodies, railways coaches, containers, framework of furniture, cabinets, shelving etc. 2. Terminology Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) — A structural composite made by laminating veneers, 1.5 to 4.2 mm thick, with suitable adhesive and with the grain of veneers in successive layers aligned along the longitudinal (length) dimension of the composite. 3. Materials 3.1 Veneers 3.1.1 Veneers of the required thickness shall be obtained from timber logs grown in plant"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 848: 1974",
    "title": "+ Shall Be Used For Making Lvl.",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS8481974_1",
    "text": "IS 848: 1974 + Shall Be Used For Making Lvl. [Dimensions]\nDimensions of LVL composite supplied shall be inclusive of margin required for dressing and finishing over and above the size of finished component desired, unless finished components (ready for painting) are ordered. The margin for dressing and finishing shall not exceed 3 mm in the width and thickness and 12 mm in the length. 5. Permissible defects Defects Permissible Limits Jointing Not more than 3 mm wide, Gaps Provided they are well staggered in their spacing and position between the successive plies. Slope of Not exceeding 1in 10 in Grain The face layers. Tight knot Three numbers up to 25 mm diameter in one square metre provided they are spaced 300 mm or more apart. Warp Not exceeding 1.5 mm per metre length. 6. Requirements : 6.1 Moisture Content —Between 5 to 15 percent. ++ Code of"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13958: 1994",
    "title": "Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS139581994_1",
    "text": "IS 13958: 1994 Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes [Scope]\nCovers the method of manufacture and the requirements of bamboo mat board used for general purposes. 2. Materials 2.1 Bamboo – Any suitable species of bamboo may be used for making bamboo mat board. 2.2 Adhesive – Adhesive for bonding bamboo mat board shall be of phenolic type conforming to BWR type specified in IS848:1974. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1. The dimension of bamboo mat boards shall be as given for plywood in IS 12049 : 1987++.Thickness of bamboo mat boards shall be specified depending upon the number of plies. The thickness shall be measured up to one decimal place of millimetre."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13958: 1994",
    "title": "Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS139581994_2",
    "text": "IS 13958: 1994 Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes [Tolerances]\nThe following tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished boards shall be permissible Dimension Tolerance a) Length +6mm – 0mm b) Width +3mm – 0mm + Synthetic resin adhesives fcr plywood (phenolic and amino plastic) (first revision) ++ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material For detailed information, refer to IS 13958 : 1994 Specification for Bamboo mat board for general purposes. c) Thickness Less than 6 mm ±10 percent 6mm and above ± 5 percent d) Squareness 0.2 percent e) Edge Straightness 0.2 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13958: 1994",
    "title": "Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS139581994_3",
    "text": "IS 13958: 1994 Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes [Workmanship And Finish]\nThe bamboo mat boards shall be of uniform thickness within the tolerance limit specified. The faces of bamboo mat boards shall be reasonably smooth and uniform in colour. 5. Tests 5.1 Internal Bond Strength Test 5.1.1 In Dry State– Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.7 N/mm2 and 0.5 N/mm2 respectively. 5.1.2 In Wet State – Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and 0.3 N/mm2 respectively. 5.2 Mycological Test – Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and of 0.3 N/ mm2 5.3 Surface strength Test – (Alternate)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1003Part12003_1",
    "text": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and testing of timber door shutters with timber, plywood, blockboard, veneered particle board, asbestos cement sheet, wire guage and glass panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. The shutters could be single panelled or multipanelled with or without glazing. This standard does not cover timber door shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Timber",
    "chunk_id": "IS1003Part12003_2",
    "text": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters [Timber]\nTimber suitable for manufacture of door shutters shall be in accordance with IS 12896 : 1990.* 2.1 Timber used for rails and stiles shall be of the same species. The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall be as specified in IS 287 : 1993+. 2.2 All timbers shall be kiln-seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and heartwood and sapwood of nondurable species shall be treated with suitable preservative (except the water soluble leachable type). as specified in IS 401‡ 2.3 The timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed faces. 2.4 The timber shall be graded as First Grade and Second Grade on the basis of the permissible defects in the timber as given in Table 1 of the standard. Note: For details of material see 5 of the\n[Glazing] 6.1 The glass used for panels shall be weighing not less than 10 kg/m2 and the thickness shall not be less than 4mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS1003Part12003_3",
    "text": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters [Tests]\nDoor shutters shall be subjected to following tests as specified : (i) Dimensions and defects for squareness (ii) General flatness (iii) Local planeness (iv) Impact intendation (v) Flexure (vi) Edge loading (vii) Shock resistance (viii) Buckling (ix) Misuse (x) Slamming, and (xi) Screw withdrawal resistance. For detailed information,refer to IS 1003 (Part 1) : 2003 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter: Part1 door shutters (fourth revision). *Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 1 Operations and workmanship + Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 2 Schedules"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS1003Part21994_1",
    "text": "IS 1003 (Part 2): 1994 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters [Tests]\nShutters shall be tested for resistance to slamming as per the procedure given in Annex C of the standard. there shall be no visible damage caused in any part of the shutter after 50 drops. This test is not applicable to glazed and wire gauzed panelled shutters. For detailed information, refer to IS 1003 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter: Part 2 Window and ventilator shutter (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1826: 1961",
    "title": "Venetian Blinds For Windows",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS18261961_1",
    "text": "IS 1826: 1961 Venetian Blinds For Windows [Scope]\nCovers material, constructional details, sizes and requirements of open head custom made Venetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats. 2. Grades a) Grade 1 i) Shall have aluminium slats, ii) Shall have provision for locking slats or have dual ladder for each slat (so that may not flutter), and iii) Shall be capable of being removed instanteously. b) Grade 2 Shall have wooden slats. 3. Materials 3.1 Timber – Wooden slats and rails shall be made from timbers having durability of class I and II timbers as given in IS 399 : 1963.* 3.2 Metal – Aluminium alloy used for rolling of slats shall conform to the prescribed standard. 4. Requirments 4.1 Grade 1 – Shall not exceed 500 cm in width and 10 m2 in area. Grade 2 – Shall not exceed 275 cm in width and 7.5 m2 in area. 4.2 Slat Size 4.2.1 W"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part11983_1",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers. 2. Types Core Type Abbreviation Cellular Decorative CD Non-decorative CN Hollow Decorative HD Non-decorative HN 3. Sizes Designation Width Height mm mm 8 DS 20 700 1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700 2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800 1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800 2005 (2045) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945) 10 DS 21 900 2005 (2045) 12 DS 20 1100 1905 (1945) 12 DS 21 1100 2005 (2045) Note 1 – In case the modular height is taken from the finished floor level. the height of the doors hall be the one given in bracket. Note 2 – In arriving at the standard widths and heights, an allowance has been made of 60 mm for door fram"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part11983_2",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Workmanship And Finish]\nAll the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. ± 6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture. If required by the purchaser, all surfaces of shutters which are required to be painted shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat or primer. In the case of shutters to be polished or varnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given before delivery. However, only unpainted doors shall be subjected to the tests."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part11983_3",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Tests]\nShall satisfy the following tests: 7.1 End Immersion Test 7.2 Knife Test 7.3 Adhesion Test Note : For methods of test, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part21983_1",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden flush door shutters of cellular and hollow core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and unveneered) and hard board face panels. 2. Types and designation 2.1 Cellular— Decorative with skins of CDPV decorative veneered particle board. Non-decorative with CNP skins of particle boards unveneered Non-decorative with skins CNPV of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers. 2.2 Hollow — Decorative with skins of HDPV decorative veneered particle board. Non-decorative with skins HNP of particle boards unveneered. Non-decorative with HNPV skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part21983_2",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nShall be as given in IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983. 4. Materials 4.1 Timber – As specified in IS 2191(Part 1) : 1983 Note : For details of materials see 4 of the standard. 5. Requirements 5.1 Face Panels — Particle board or veneered particle board shall not be less than 6 mm thick for cellular core and not less than 9 mm thick for hollow core shutters. Hardboard thickness shall not be less than 4 mm for cellular core and not less than 6 mm for hollow core shutters. 5.2 Shutter shall be shop-prepared for taking mortice locks or latches."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part21983_3",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Workmanship And Finish]\nAll the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS2191Part21983_4",
    "text": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Tests]\nAs per 9 of IS 2191 (Part 1) :1983. For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 2) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2202Part11999_1",
    "text": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding types, sizes, material, consttruction, workmanship and finish, and tests, of solid core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers. 2. Type and Construction Sl.No. Core Type Abbreviation (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Blockboard Decorative BD Non-decorative BN ii) Particle board Decorative PD with or without Non-decorative PN blockboard iii) Medium density Decorative MD fibreboard with Non-decorative MN or without blockboard 3. Sizes Sl. Designation of Width Height No. doors mm mm i) 8 DS 20 700 1905 (1945) ii) 8 DS 21 700 2005 ( 2045) iii) 9 DS 20 800 1905 (1945) iv) 9 DS 21 800 2005 ( 2045) v) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945) vi) 10 DS 21 900 2005 ( 2045) vii) 12 DT 20 1100* 1905 (1945) viii) 12 DT 21 1100* 2005 ( 2045) Note 1 – D–Doors, S –\n[Workmanship And Finish] All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. Both faces of the door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS2202Part11999_2",
    "text": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [Tests]\nFlush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests – i) Dimensions and squareness test ii) General flatness test iii) Local planeness test iv) Impact indentation test v) Flexure test vi) Edge loading test vii) Shock resistance test viii) Buckling test ix) Slamming test x) Misuse test xi) Varying humidity test xii) End immersion test xiii) Knife test xiv) Glue adhesion test xv) Screw withdrawal test. Note - For details of requirements please refer 11 of the standard. Note — For methods of test, refer to IS 4020 (Part 1 to 16) : 1998 Door shutters - methods of test. For detailed information, refer to IS 2202 : 1999 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) Part 1 Plywood face panels (sixth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2202 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS2202Part21983_1",
    "text": "IS 2202 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters [General]\nIS 2202 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters (SOLID CORE TYPE) PART 2 PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS (Third Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2202 (Part 2) :1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) : Part 2 Particle board and har board face panels (third revision). 2.1 0 3 ± − +"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4021: 1995",
    "title": "Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS40211995_1",
    "text": "IS 4021: 1995 Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, construction, workmanship and sizes of timber door, window and ventilator frames generally used in residential and institutional buildings. 1.1 This standard does not cover timber door, window and ventilator frames for commercial, industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages. 2. Timber 2.1 Indian timbers suitables shall be in accordance with IS 12896 : 1990.* For imported timber see Annex B of the standard. 2.2 Moisture Content—Shall be as per IS 287:1993+. 2.3 Seasoning and Treatment – Shall be well seasoned as per IS 1141 : 1993‡. and treated as per IS 401 : 1982§. 2.4 Defects Prohibited – Timber for frames shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pocket or streakes on exposed faces. 2.5 Defects Permitt"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4021: 1995",
    "title": "Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS40211995_2",
    "text": "IS 4021: 1995 Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames [Workmanship]\nAll members of frame shall be exactly at right angles. The depth of rebate in frame for housing the shutter shall in all cases be 15 mm except for small window and ventilator frames where it shall be 12 mm. 3.1 Joinery Frames of timber doors, windows and ventilators shall be assembled by any of the following simple, neat and strong joints: a) Single dovetail joint b) Closed mortice and tenon joint. c) Haunched mortice and tenon joint. 4. Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances 4.1 Dimensions — See Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS Requirements Dimensions, mm Door Window Ventilator Size > 120 cm < 120 cm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) a) Width of frame carrying one set of shutter i) For 35, 40 mm shutter 100 100 90 90 ii) For 25, 30 mm shutter 90 90 90 90 b) Width of frame carryin"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4021: 1995",
    "title": "Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS40211995_3",
    "text": "IS 4021: 1995 Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames [Finish]\nThe unexposed surfaces in contact with eiter wall or lintel shall be properly painted with coal tar pitch. 5.1 All surfaces of door, window and ventilator frame which are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat of wood primer. 5.2 In the case of frames to be polished or varnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given. For detailed information, refer to IS 4021 : 1995 Timber door, window and ventilator frames (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4962: 1968",
    "title": "Wooden Side Sliding Doors",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49621968_1",
    "text": "IS 4962: 1968 Wooden Side Sliding Doors [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, type, shape fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear components and fittings.\n[Types] Classified in accordance with mode of sliding of panels into the frame unit. Types 1 to 5 give clear opening, while Types 6 and 7 need no space at the sides. Overall size of door shall be such as to cover modular opening completely. Note – For typical arrangement of panels of side sliding door see Fig. 2 of the standard. 3. Materials 3.1 Rolled steel sections shall be of weldable quality conforming to the prescribed standard. 3.2 Tracks – Made of 2 mm thick structural steel sheet, galvanized. 3.3 Roller – Shall conform to the prescribed standard. 3.4 Guides – Gun metal. 3.5 Brackets – Cast iron. 3.6 Shutter – Made of wood in accordance with the prescribed standard.\n[Operation] Shall be capable of being operated in either direction with force not exceeding 3 kg/m of panel width, when panel is in motion.\n[Finish] All components machined and finished smooth. Roller guides, fittings for locking arrangement, brackets, etc may be hot-dip galvanized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6198: 1992",
    "title": "Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS61981992_1",
    "text": "IS 6198: 1992 Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship and finish of ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters. 2. Material 2.1 Timber – Suitable for manufacture shall be as per IS 12896 : 1990.* Moisture content shall be between 8 to 14 percent. 2.2 All timbers shall be kiln seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and heartwood and sapwood of nondurable species shall be treated with suitable preservative (except the water soluble leachable type). 2.3 Timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streakes on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks. 2.4 Timber shall be graded as first or second grade as given in Table 1 of the standard on the basis of permissible defects."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6198: 1992",
    "title": "Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS61981992_2",
    "text": "IS 6198: 1992 Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters [Designation]\nDoor shutter shall be designated by symbols denoting the width, type and height of door in succession in the following manner : a) Width –It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the width of door opening. b) Type – D = Door, S = Single shutter, T = Double leaf shutter. c) Height – It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the height of door opening. TABLE 1 DIMENSION OF DOOR SHUTTERS Designation ` Width Height of Doors mm mm 8 DS 20 700 1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700 2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800 1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800 2005 (2045) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945) 10 DS 21 900 2005 (2045) 12 DT 20 1100+ 1905 (1945) 12 DT 21 1100+ 2005 (2045) * Classification of indian timbers for doors and window shutters and frames. + Combined width of double leaf shutter in closed positi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6198: 1992",
    "title": "Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS61981992_3",
    "text": "IS 6198: 1992 Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters [Workmanship And Finish]\nAll battens of the shutter shall be sanded and finished smooth. 5.1 Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces exposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with cross-gained plug (round or dovetailed) of similar spices of timber and shall be properly glued. All the surfaces of door shutters which are required to be painted or polished or varnished ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by protective coat of primer polish or varnish. 6. Tests a) Slamming test, b) Shock resistance test, c) Edge loading test and d) Resistance to buckling test type tests only. For detailed information, refer to IS 6198 : 1992. Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 15380: 2003",
    "title": "Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS153802003_1",
    "text": "IS 15380: 2003 Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors [Scope]\nThis standard lays down requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish and tests for high density fibre (HDF) panel doors. 2. Types Door shuttes shall be of following two types: (a) Heavy Duty – having void area less than 35 percent, and (b) Light Duty – having void area not exceeding 65 percent 3. Size 3.1 Sizes of the door shutters shall generally conform to teh sizes given in table 1. Other sizes, that is, width and height, as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser, are also permitted provided they are in modules of 5 mm 3.2 The nominal thickness of the shuttes shall be 30 mm, 35 mm and 40 mm 4. Material 4.1 Timber 4.1.1 Any species of timber having minimum bulk density of 450 kg/m3 at 12 percent moisture content may be used for rails,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 15380: 2003",
    "title": "Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS153802003_2",
    "text": "IS 15380: 2003 Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors [Requirements]\nFor details refer 11 of the standard TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR RAISED PANEL FIBREBOARD SKINS Sl. No. Requirements Permissible Limits Method of Test (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Density, kg/m3 > 1 000 2380 (Part 3) ii) Moisture content, percent Max 8 2380 (Part 3) iii) Water absorption, percent 2380 (Part 3) After 2 h < 16 After 24 h < 36 iv) Swelling in water, percent, Max 2380 (Part 17) a) General absorption, 24 h: 1) Thickness 20 2) Length 0.70 3) Width 0.70 b) Surface absorptiong 9 v) Modulus of rupture, N/mm2 Min 35 2380 (Part 4) vi) Internal bond strength, N/mm2 Min. 2380 (Part 5) a) Dry state 1.0 b) Wet state ( 2 h boiling) 0.3 vii) Immersion in boiling water at No. 100 ± 3ººC for 4 h Disintegration viii) Formaldehyde emission < 9 mg / 100 g 13745 For detailed information, refer to IS 15380 : 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1038: 1983",
    "title": "Steel Door, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS10381983_1",
    "text": "IS 1038: 1983 Steel Door, Windows And Ventilators [Finish]\n(Fifth Revision) * Symbolic designation of directions of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters. 10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6 10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12 Painting or phosphating and painting or hot dipped galvanizing."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1361: 1978",
    "title": "Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing",
    "chunk_id": "IS13611978_1",
    "text": "IS 1361: 1978 Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings [Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing]\nHoles for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections (and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash). Holes for glazing clips shall also be provided. 7. Fittings and Fixing Materials 7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an inner and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator through at least 850 and so balanced that the ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any desired position. 7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a pulley with centre of the bottom section of the ventilator, and attached with screws. 7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall have a bronze spring catch in the centre of the top sectio\n[Scope] Deals with steel windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.\n[Handing] Handing and direction of closing of sashes shall be according to IS 4042 : 1969. *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1361: 1978",
    "title": "Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS13611978_2",
    "text": "IS 1361: 1978 Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings [Designation]\nBy symbols denoting in sequence, IN (to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules × Type (F= fixed sash, C=centre- hung sash, B=bottom hung sash, T= top hung sash) × Height expressed in number of modules. Examples a) IN 10 C 15 indicates industrial window for open ing 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre hung ventilator. b) IN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10 IN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15 indicates the combination of four windows, two of the type IN10 C 10 on top and two of the type IN10 C 15 at the bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 4. Sizes and Tolerances a) Window Sizes IN 10 C 10 IN 22 C 10 IN 16 C 15 IN 10 T 10 IN 22 T 10 IN 16 T 15 IN 10 B 10 IN 22 B 10 IN 16 B 15 IN 16 C 10 IN 10C 15 IN 22 C 15 IN 16 T 10 IN 10 T 1\n[Composite Windows] Shall be desptached unassembled, but complete with necessary coupling components. Each coupling member will increase the overall height or width by 25 mm maximum which includes manufacturing tolerances."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1361: 1978",
    "title": "Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Glass",
    "chunk_id": "IS13611978_3",
    "text": "IS 1361: 1978 Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings [Glass]\nSizes shall be as given below: Pane Designation— a b c d e f Width, mm 269 304 292 304 304 292 Height, mm 425 425 460 460 492 492 Note — For number of glass panes for each type of window see Fig. 4 of the standard.\n[Finish] All sashes and coupling members shall be either galvanised or painted."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1948: 1961",
    "title": "Aluminium Doors, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Positions Of Bolts, Fixing Screws And Lugs",
    "chunk_id": "IS19481961_1",
    "text": "IS 1948: 1961 Aluminium Doors, Windows And Ventilators [Positions Of Bolts, Fixing Screws And Lugs]\nOuter frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections. Note — For details regarding positions of fixing holes and member of fixing lugs see 7 of the standard. 7. Finish 7.1 Matt, scratch-brush or polished. May be anodized additionally. 7.2 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied by suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement during construction. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed. For detailed information, refer to IS 1948 : 1961 Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1949: 1961",
    "title": "Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS19491961_1",
    "text": "IS 1949: 1961 Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings [Scope]\nDeals with aluminium windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.\n[Designation] By symbols IN ( to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules × Type (F = fixed sash; C=centre hung sash; B = bottomhung sash; T = top-hung sash) × Height expressed in number of modules. Examples a) IN 10 C 15 indicates window for opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre-hung ventilator. b) Composite windows IN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10 IN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15 Indicates the combination of four windows, twoof the types IN 10 C 10 on top and two of the type IN 10 C 15 at bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 3. Sizes and Tolerances a) Sizes IN10C10 IN22C10 IN16C15 IN10T10 IN22T10 IN16T15 IN10B10 IN22B10 IN16B15 IN16C10 IN10C15 IN22C15 IN16T10 IN10T15 IN22T15 IN16B10 IN10B15 IN22B15 IN10C20 IN22C20 IN16F15 IN10T"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1949: 1961",
    "title": "Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing",
    "chunk_id": "IS19491961_2",
    "text": "IS 1949: 1961 Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings [Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing]\nHoles for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash. Holes for glazing chips shall also be provided, one hole being located in web of the section or tee, on each side of each pane. 6. Fitting and Fixing Materials 6.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair of cup-pivots made out of aluminium alloy sheet or chromium plated brass and each pivot consisting of an inner and outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator though at least 85º. The venitlator shall be so balanced that it can remain open in any desired position. 6.2 Centre-hung and bottom-hung ventilators shall have cast aluminium or bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section, s"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4351: 2003",
    "title": "Steel Door Frames",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS43512003_1",
    "text": "IS 4351: 2003 Steel Door Frames [Scope]\nRequirements regarding material, dimensions and construction of steel door frames for internal and external use.\n[Materials] Shall be manufactured from the materials conforming to relevant Indian standards as per Table 1 of the standard.\n[Standard Sizes, Tolerances And Designation] For details refer 6 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4351: 2003",
    "title": "Steel Door Frames",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Base Ties",
    "chunk_id": "IS43512003_2",
    "text": "IS 4351: 2003 Steel Door Frames [Base Ties]\nBase ties of pressed mild steel angle size of 20 mm × 20 mm × 1.25 mm thick either screwed or welded as per Fig. 3 of the standard to suit floor thickness of 25, 30, 35 or 40 mm. 5. Fittings 5.1 Fixing Lugs – There shall be three adjustable lugs with split end tail to each jamb without fan light, and For detailed information, refer to IS 4351 : 2003 Specification for steel door frames ( second revision). four for jamb with fan light. For details refer 10.1 of the standard. 5.2 Hinges - Frames shall be provided with any one type of the hinges, conforming to the relevant Indian standards as given in Table 3 of the standard. 5.3 Lock-Strike Plate of Steel – A slot suitable for lock strike plate shall be pierced into the rebate of the frame and necessary fixing arrangement and mortar guard fro\n[Finish] For details refer 11 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_1",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Scope]\nRequirements regarding mateials, fabrication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling grills for normal use. Note – Since the term ‘rolling shutters’ is more commonly used, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters. However, since rolling shutters and rolling grills are similar in design, construction and operation, all reference to rolling shutters in this standard shall apply of rolling grills also. Special features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutters have also been given."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_2",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Sizes]\nSpecified by clear width (W) and clear height (H) of the opening. Width shall always be mentioned first. Stopper height shall be 10 cm less than clear height, unless otherwise specified."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Types And Applicable Sizes A) Self",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_3",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Types And Applicable Sizes A) Self]\nCoiling Type (Push-Pull Type or Manual Type) – For size up to a clear areas of 8m2 without ball bearings and 12 m2 with ballbearings. b) Gear-Operated Type (Mechanical Type)— Shall be fitted with ball bearings. Used for a clear area up to 25m2 if operated by bevel gear-box and crank handle, and up to 35 m2 if operated by chain wheel and hand chain, mounted directly on the worm shaft. c) Electrically-Operated Type — For use up to about 50m2 clear area. Operated by electric motor on 400 / 440 V,3 phase, 50 cycles AC supply. Speed of movement of curtain shall not exceed about10 cm/s. 4. Requirements 4.1 Curtain shall be built up of interlocking lath section formed from cold rolled steel strips. Thickness of sheets not less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m width and 1.20 mm for 3.5 m width"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Rolling Grills",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_4",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Rolling Grills]\nCurtains may be built of aluminium alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of 0.9 mm thickness assembled on tubes or rods, or out of 8 mm dia mild steel or aluminium alloy round bars. 5.1 Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill — In situations where a certain amount of ventilation combined with safety is called for the rolling shutter may have a small rolling grill portion either at top or at bottom or at both places. Height of grill portion shall be 0.5 m maximum."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Painting",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_5",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Painting]\nAll components parts (except springs and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one coat of a brusing quality ready mixed primer before despatch. Portions where there is contact between aluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc chromate prier. Note – For details regarding types based on position of fixing, materials, fabrication, optional features, operation, etc, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6248 : 1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills (first revision). 4.2 Tolerances 4.2.1 Thickness of the sections — Rolling tolerances on thickness of section shall be ± 0.2 mm. 4.2.2 Radii of curvature – A tolerance of ± 0.5 mm shall be permitted on the nominal value of radii of curvature except where maximum radii has been indicated."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS62481979_6",
    "text": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills [Finish]\nThe rolled steel section shall be free from rolling defects, such as knot, steep bends, overlaps, waviness on edges, unparallel flanges, rolling marks and shall be suitable for punching and welding or both. The section shall be straightened by roller straightening machine or any other suitable machine ensuring that twist will not be more than 5 degree over a length of 3 m. The section shall be packed in such a way as to avoid damage in transit.\n[Tests] Shall satisfy the prescribed test in 9 of the standard. Note – Refer to Annex A of the standard for recom mended use of sections."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7452: 1990",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS74521990_1",
    "text": "IS 7452: 1990 Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, nominal dimension and mass, dimensional and mass tolerances, surface finish and packing for hot rolled steel sections used for doors, windows, ventilators and sashes. 2. Designation and Mass Designation Mass Designation Mass (kg/m) (kg/m) T 2 1.036 F500 1.955 T 3 1.14 F501 2.250 T 6 0.839 F502 1.955 F2 1.46 F503 2.840 F3 2.280 F4B 2.28 F5 1.55 F7D 1.419 F8 1.75 FX8 2.31 FX6 2.52 FZ5 2.52 FZ7 1.90 K12B 2.30 K11B 1.80 Note 1 – Profiles of the sections shall be as given in Fig 2 of the standard. Note 2 – Mass of the sections as given have been arrived keeping in view the nominal dimensions of the sections and assuming density of the steel as 7.85 gm/cm3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7452: 1990",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS74521990_2",
    "text": "IS 7452: 1990 Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators [Materials]\nSteel as per prescribed standards. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Dimensions – Shall be as given in Fig 2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7452 : 1990 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10451: 1983",
    "title": "Steel Sliding Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS104511983_1",
    "text": "IS 10451: 1983 Steel Sliding Shutters [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, type, shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of the top hung steel sliding shutters.\n[Sizes] The size of the shutter shall be greater than the actual opening for weather protection. The height of the shutter shall be at least 150 mm more and width at least by 300 mm more that the size of the opening. 3. Material 3.1 Angles, Tees, Flats, Channels etc, shall be of rolled sections conforming to the prescribed standards. 3.2 Top Runner (Track) – These shall be of cold rolled mild steel conforming to the prescribed standard, capable of taking the design load for a smooth operation. 4. Fabrication 4.1 Angles of size not less than 50×50×5mm for shutter upto 2 m width and 2.5m height and 65×65×6mm for bigger sizes shall be used. 4.2 Top track shall be either of the following types– Type A – Track made out of 12×80 mm flat securely anchored to the wall, Type B – Cold rolled inverted U type\n[Finish] The shutters shall be finished with a coat of red oxide primer. For detailed information, refer to IS 10451 : 1983 Specification for steel sliding shutters (top hung type)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10521: 1983",
    "title": "Collapsible Gates",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS105211983_1",
    "text": "IS 10521: 1983 Collapsible Gates [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, fabrication and finish of different types of collapsible gates. 2. Types a) Gates fixed under the lintel, b) Gates fixed outside the opening, c) Gates fixed inside the opening, and d) Gates fixed on movable top and bottom channels with swinging arrangement on either side. The above types may be with single panel collapsible at the right end or left end, or with double panels collapsible at respective ends with wheels attached to the gates rolling on bottom or top runners. 3. Sizes 3.1 Collapsible gates are recommended for a maximum height of 3 m. there is no restriction in width. 3.2 When the gate is fitted under the lintel, the width and height of the gate shall be the same as that of the opening. But when the gate is fixed inside or outside the opening,\n[Finish] Fabricated parts shall be finished with a coat of red oxide primer. For detailed information, refer to IS 10521 : 1983 Specification for collapsible gates."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14856: 2000",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS148562000_1",
    "text": "IS 14856: 2000 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use [Scope]\nRequirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance requirements and sampling of fibre glass reinforced plastic door shutters for use in residential and industrial building. 2. Materials 2.1 Glass Fibre Chopped Strand Mat (CSM) – The glass fibre chopped strand mat used shall be as per IS 11551 : 1996* 2.2 Glass Fibre Rovings – The glass fibre rovings shall be as per IS 11320 : 1997. ** 2.3 Isophthalic Resin – Isophthalic resin shall be as per IS 6746 :1994.+ 2.4 Curing Agents – Catalyst used shall be methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP), benzyl peroxide, acetyl acto peroxide etc. Accelerator used shall be cobalt napthalate, cobalt octonate, N.N.Dinethyl Anilene etc. 2.5 Fillers and Additives – Permissible fillers and french chalk powder (talc) and c"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14856: 2000",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS148562000_2",
    "text": "IS 14856: 2000 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use [Finish]\nThe surface of the moulded shutters shall be free from any visible defects such as small pores, crazing, blistering, wrinkling, impurities, defective impregnation, colour blots and aggregates defects. Scattered pin holes duly repaired and finished by applying resing and not noticeable shall be acceptable. Panels, rails and stiles of the doors shutters shall be flat and shall have smooth and level surface. Surface shall be finished in colour and design as required by the purchaser. 5. Tests 5.1 Test on materials TABLE 3 TESTS ON GRP LAMINATE Sl No. Test Acceptable Value 1. Fibre Glass content 25% (Min) 2. Barchol hardness 30 BHU(Min) 3. Tensile Strength (Mpa) 100(Min) 4. Bending Strengths (Mpa) 120(Min) 5. Elastic Modulus in bend(Mpa) 1500 (Min) 6. Water Absorption 5% (Max) 7. Fire Retardan"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 280: 1978",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2801978_1",
    "text": "IS 280: 1978 Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirement for mild steel wire of sizes 0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general engineering purposes. 2. Sizes Diameter in mm 0.125 0.315 0.80 2.00 5.00 0.140 0.355 0.90 2.24 5.60 0.160 0.400 1.00 2.50 6.30 0.180 0.450 1.12 2.80 7.10 0.200 0. 500 1.25 3.15 8.00 0.224 0. 560 1.40 3.55 9.00 0.250 0.630 1.60 4.00 10.00 0.280 0.710 1.80 4.50 11.2 12.5 Note – Other sizes by mutual agreement. 3. Tolerance on Diameter Applicable to coils only a) Galvanized – All sizes ± 2.5 percent with a minimum of ± 0.025 mm. b) Other finishes – Size of Wire Tolerance (mm) (mm) Up to 0.25 ± 0.01 Over 0.25 up to 0.50 ± 0.015 Over 0.50 up to 1.00 ± 0.02 Over 1.00 up to 1.50 ± 0.03 Over 1.50 up to 2.50 ± 0.04 Over 2.50 up to 5.00 ± 0.05 Over 5.0 ± 0.06 4. Mechanical Properties 4.1 Tensile Test Condition Tensile"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 280: 1978",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2801978_2",
    "text": "IS 280: 1978 Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes [Finish]\nAnnealed; annealed cleaned and limed; bright drawn; dull grey (dry drawn); galvanized; coppered; or tinned. Note 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals. Tensile testing (second revision),"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1755: 1983",
    "title": "Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard.",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17551983_1",
    "text": "IS 1755: 1983 Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard. [Scope]\nRequirements of mild steel and medium tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for use as reinforcement in concrete. 2. Types and Grades a) Mild steel bars; Grade I and Grade II, and b) Medium tensile steel bars. Note – Grade II bars are not recommended for use in structures located in earthquake zones subjected to severe damage and or structures subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind loading).\n[Freedom From Defects] Finished bars shall be sound and free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1755: 1983",
    "title": "Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard.",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS17551983_2",
    "text": "IS 1755: 1983 Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard. [Nominal Sizes]\nDiameter of round bars or side of square bars shall be 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45 and 50 mm. 5. Tolerance 5.1 Bars in Straight Length 5.1.1 Size Size Tolerance Over Up to and Including mm mm mm - 25 ±0.5 25 35 ±0.6 35 50 ±0.8 50 80 ±1.0 80 100 ±1.3 100 – ± 6 percent of dia or side width"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS432Part11982_1",
    "text": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982 Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement [General]\nIS 432 (Part 1): 1982 Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement PART 1 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS (Third Revision) 5.1.2 Ovality and out-of-square— Permissible ovality for round bars and out-of-square of square bars shall be 75 percent of total tolerance (plus and minus) specified on size. 5.1.3 Weight Size Tolerance Percent Over Up to and Including mm mm — 10 ± 7 10 16 ± 5 16 — ± 3 5.2 Coiled Rounds and Squares 5.2.1 Size – ± 0.5 mm for size up to and including 12 mm. 5.2.2 Out of shape – Permissible value at any cross section shall not exceed 0.65 mm. Note 1 – Size shall be diameter in case of round bars and side width in case of squre bars. Note 2– No weight tolerance shall be applicable in case of coiled round and square bars. 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress andpercentage elongation shall be as given in Table 1. 6.2 Bend Test — Shall withstand the specified test. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS Sl Type and Nominal Ultimate Yield Elongation No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS432Part11982_2",
    "text": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982 Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement [General]\napplicable in case of coiled round and square bars. 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress andpercentage elongation shall be as given in Table 1. 6.2 Bend Test — Shall withstand the specified test. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS Sl Type and Nominal Ultimate Yield Elongation No. Size of Bar TensileStress Stress Percent* Min Min Min i) Mild Steel Grade I For bars up to and including 20 mm. 410 250 23 For bars over 20 mm, up to and including 50 mm 410 240 23 ii) Mild Steel Grade II For bars up to and including 20 mm. 370 225 23 For bars over 20 mm, up to and including 50mm 370 215 23 iii) Medium Tensile Steel For bars up to and including 16 mm 540 350 20 For bars over16 mm, up to and including 32 mm 540 340 20 For bars over 32 mm, up to and including 50 mm 510 330 20 *Elongation on a gauge length 5.65 So where So is the cross-sectional area of the test piece. Note 1 – For test procedures , refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals- tensile testing (second revision),"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1599: 1985",
    "title": "Method For Bend Test, (Is 2062:1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes, And 9 Of The Standard.",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS15991985_1",
    "text": "IS 1599: 1985 Method For Bend Test, (Is 2062:1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes, And 9 Of The Standard. [General]\nIS 1599: 1985 Method For Bend Test, (Is 2062:1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes, And 9 Of The Standard. Note 2 — For chemical composition refer to see 4 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 432 (Part I) : 1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1566: 1982",
    "title": "Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS15661982_1",
    "text": "IS 1566: 1982 Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement [Scope]\nRequirements for hard-drawn steel wire fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel with cross wires electrically welded to them for use as concrete reinforcement\n[Types] a) Oblong mesh, and b) Square mesh\n[Materials] Wire used shall be hard-drawn steel wire suitable for welding\n[Sizes Of Sheets Or Rolls] Width of fabric shall be such as to fit in with modular size of 10 cm module"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1566: 1982",
    "title": "Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS15661982_2",
    "text": "IS 1566: 1982 Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement [Mass]\nCalculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area per metre run. Actual weight is determined by weighing any convenient size and if possible at least one sqare metre. 6. Tolerances a) Pitch ± 7½ Percent b) Sizes of Sheet ± 25 mm for dimensions upto 5 m. ± ½ percent for dimensions over 5 mm. c) Mass Percent i) When neither maximum nor ± 6 minimum mass is specified ii) When maximum mass + 0 specified – 12 iii) When minimum mass +12 specified 7. Mechanical Properties 7.1 Shall meet the minimum requirements for physical properties as prescribed in IS 432 (Part 2) :1982*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1566: 1982",
    "title": "Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS15661982_3",
    "text": "IS 1566: 1982 Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement [Tests]\nTest piece shall with stand one complete cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size indicated below– Diameter of Specimen Wire Diameter of Pin 7.5 mm and under Equal to diameter of specimen Over 7.5 mm Equal to twice the diameter of specimen * IS 432 (Part 2) : 1982 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 2 Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision). Note.1 – For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see Appendix A of the standard. Note.2 – For test procedures, refer to IS1 608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision), IS 1716 : 1985 Method for reverse bend test for metallic wire (second revision) and 11 of the standard. For detailed informat"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1786: 1985",
    "title": "Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17861985_1",
    "text": "IS 1786: 1985 Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement [Scope]\nRequirements for high tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete.\n[Chemical Composition] The ladle analysis of steel shall show that steel contains no more than 0.050 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.050 percent of phosphorus."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1786: 1985",
    "title": "Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS17861985_2",
    "text": "IS 1786: 1985 Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement [Nominal Sizes]\n10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28 and 32 mm. 4. Tolerances a) Nominal Size : ±0.5 mm for bars upto 25mm ±0.6 mm for bars above 25mm b) Mass : ±5 percent for bars upto 16mm ±3 percent for bars above 16 mm 5. Physical Requirements Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, Min 980 N/mm2 Proof stress Notlessthan 80 percent of minimum specified tensile strength Elongation at rupture 10 percent on a gauge length 5.65 A , Min (Where A is the area of cross-section) The relaxation of stress in the bar, shall not exceed 49 N/mm2 at the end of 1000. Note—For test proceedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals – Tensile testing (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2090 :1983 Specification for high tensile steel bars usd in prestressed concrete ("
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2090: 1983",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20901983_1",
    "text": "IS 2090: 1983 High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, supply and testing of intended hard-drawn and stress-relieved wire for use in prestressed concrete.\n[Chemical Composition] The ladle analysis shall show that the steel contains not more than 0.04 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.04 percent of phosphorus."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2090: 1983",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Nominal Sizes",
    "chunk_id": "IS20901983_2",
    "text": "IS 2090: 1983 High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete [Nominal Sizes]\n3.00, 4.00 and 5.00 mm.diameter. 4. Geometrical Characteristics 4.1 The shape and pattern of indentation shall be as mutually agreed provided the indentations are placed in two lines, diametrically opposite and are staggered. 5. Tolerances 5.1 The tolerance on the nominal diameter shall be ± 0.05 mm. 5.2 Where ovality is more than half of the total diameter tolerance, check on section by weighing shall be made. Nominal mass and tolerance on nominal mass of finished wire shall be as given below: Nominal Nominal Mass Tolerance Diameter rmm g/m g/m 5.00 154 ± 3.1 4.00 98.9 ± 2.0 3.00 55.5 ± 1.5 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Tensile Strength Nominal Diamete Tensile Strength mm Min, N/mm2 5.00 1 570 4.00 1 715 3.00 1 865 6.2 Proof Stress – Not less than 85 percent of minimum tensile strength. 6."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6003: 1983",
    "title": "Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS60031983_1",
    "text": "IS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete [General]\nIS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete (First Revision) Note – For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6003 : 1983 Specification for intended wire for prestressed concrete (first revision). 1. Scope : Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of uncoated, stress relieved, high tensile steel strands for use in prestressed concrete. The following types of strands are covered: a) Two wire strand b) Three wire strand c) Seven wire strand–Class 1 and Class 2 (For classification, see Table 2 and 3) 2. Manufacture 2.1 Wire 2.1.1 The elements wire to be used for strand shall be cold-drawn from plain carbon steel and shall contain not more than 0.040 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.040 percent of phosphorus. 2.1.2 The wire used shall be sound and free from splits, surface flaws, piping. and any other defects."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6003: 1983",
    "title": "Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS60031983_2",
    "text": "IS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete [General]\nelements wire to be used for strand shall be cold-drawn from plain carbon steel and shall contain not more than 0.040 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.040 percent of phosphorus. 2.1.2 The wire used shall be sound and free from splits, surface flaws, piping. and any other defects. 2.2 Strand – Seven wire strand shall have a centre wire at least 1.5 percent greater in diameter than the surrounding wires enclosed tightly by six helically placed outer wires with a uniform length of lay of at least 12 times but more than 16 times of nominal diameter of the TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF TWO AND THREE WIRE STRANDS Designation Nominal Tolerance on Nominal Cross Nominal Diameter of Diameter of Sectional Mass of Element Wire Element Wire Area of Strand Strand (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) mm mm mm2 kg/m 2-ply 2 mm 2.0 ±0.03 6.28 0.0493 2-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 14.14 0.111 3-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 21.21 0.166 strand. The length of lay for the two and three wire strands shall be uniform throughout and shall be 24 to 36 times the diameter of element wire."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6003: 1983",
    "title": "Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS60031983_3",
    "text": "IS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete [General]\nkg/m 2-ply 2 mm 2.0 ±0.03 6.28 0.0493 2-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 14.14 0.111 3-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 21.21 0.166 strand. The length of lay for the two and three wire strands shall be uniform throughout and shall be 24 to 36 times the diameter of element wire. The wires in the strand shall not unravel when the strand is cut and they shall not fly out of position when the strand is cut without seizing. 3. Size and Designation 3.1 Two Wire Strand and Three Wire Strand – They shall be designated by the number of element wires (plies) and the diameter of the element wire making the strand, for example , 2-ply 2 mm strand will mean a strand consisting of two element wires of diameter 2.0 mm each. (see Table 1) 3.2 Seven Wire Strand – The seven wire strand shall be designated by the approximate overall diameter of the strand and number of element wires (plies) making the strand, for example, 6.3 mm 7-ply strand will mean a strand of approximate diameter 6.3 mm and made out of seven (six outer and one central) wires. (See Table 2) 4."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6003: 1983",
    "title": "Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS60031983_4",
    "text": "IS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete [General]\nshall be designated by the approximate overall diameter of the strand and number of element wires (plies) making the strand, for example, 6.3 mm 7-ply strand will mean a strand of approximate diameter 6.3 mm and made out of seven (six outer and one central) wires. (See Table 2) 4. Dimensions and Tolerances : See Tables 1 and 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6006: 1983",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Strand For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS60061983_1",
    "text": "IS 6006: 1983 Uncoated Stress Relieved Strand For Prestressed Concrete [Scope]\nRequirements of hot-rolled mild steel wire rods in coils or straightened and cut lengths. 2. Chemical Composition 2.1 The ladle analysis : See Table TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Constituent, Percent (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Carbon Manganese Sulphur, Max Phosphorus, Max 1 0.06 Max 0.35 Max 0.050 0.050 2 0.08 Max 0.25 to 0.400 0.050 0.050 3 0.10 Max 0.70 Max 0.050 0.050 4 0.08 to 0.13 0.30 to 0.60 0.050 0.050 4M 0.08 to 0.13 0.60 to0.90 0.050 0.050 5 0.10 to 0.15 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 6 0.13 to 0.18 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.050 6M 0.13 to 0.18 0.60to0.90 0.050 0.050 7 0.15 to 0.20 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.050 7M 0.15 to 0.20 0.60to0.90 0.050 0.050 8 0.18 to 0.23 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 8M 0.18 to 0.23 0.60 to0.90 0.050 0.050 9 0.20 to 0.25 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 10 0.22 to 0.28 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.05"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7887: 1992",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Condition Of Material On Delivery",
    "chunk_id": "IS78871992_1",
    "text": "IS 7887: 1992 Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes [Condition Of Material On Delivery]\nThe hot-rolled wire rod shall be supplied in the form of coils or straigtened and cut lengths.The size and weight of coils shall be as agreed.\n[Freedom From Defects] The finished material shall be free from such s urface defects and internal flaws as would be deterimental to the end use of the material. These defects, however, will be ignored in the one metre length of coil from both ends 5. Sizes and Tolerances 5.1 Size – the nominal dia shall be 5mm on wards with an inceament of 0.5 mm. 5.2 Tolerance and out of shape as given in Table 3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7887: 1992",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Physical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS78871992_2",
    "text": "IS 7887: 1992 Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes [Physical Properties]\nAs mutually agreed. TABLE 3 TOLERANCE OF WIRE ROD Nominal Diameter Tolerance on Out of shape Diameter mm mm Over Up to and including (1) (2) (3) (4) - 15 ± 0.4 0.60 15 25 ± 0.5 0.75 25 30 ± 0.6 0.90 30 — — * Tolerance should be agreed at the time of ordering. For detailed information, refer to IS 7887 : 1992. Specification for mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7887: 1992",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS78871992_3",
    "text": "IS 7887: 1992 Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nCovers deformed steel reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by electrostatic spray method. 2. Coating Materials 2.1 The coating material shall meet the requirements specified in Annex A of the standard. 2.2 The patching or repairing material or both, shall be compatible with the coating, inert in concrete and feasible for repairs at the coating plant or in the field. 3. Reinforcing Steel Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall conform to IS 1786 : 1985* 4. Surface Preparation 4.1 The surface of the steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall be cleaned by abrassive blast cleaning to near white metal. The surface profile shall be free from mill scale ,rust and foreign matter when viewed under well-lit conditions. 4.2 The coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as so"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7887: 1992",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Application Of Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS78871992_4",
    "text": "IS 7887: 1992 Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes [Application Of Coating]\nThe coating shall be applied as an electrostatically charged dry powder sprayed onto the grounded steel bar using an electrostatic spray gun . The powder may be applied to either a hot or cold bar. The coated bar shall be given a thermal treatment specified by the manufacturer of the epoxy resin which will provide a fully. cured finish coating. Temperature shall be controlled to ensure a workman like job without blistering or other defects. 6. Requirements of Coated Bars 6.1 Coating Thickness – For acceptance purposes at least 90 percent of all coating thickness measurement shall be 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm after curing. The coating thickness limits do not apply to patch areas. 6.2 Continuity of Coating – The coating shall be visually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14268: 1995",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Low",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS142681995_1",
    "text": "IS 14268: 1995 Uncoated Stress Relieved Low [Scope]\nRequirements for manufacture, supply and testing of un-coated,stress relieved ‘low relaxation’ seven -ply steel strand for prestressed concrete. RELAXATION SEVEN- PLY STRAND FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE . TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Class Nominal Breaking 0.2% Proof Load Dia of Strand Strength of Strand (90% of Breaking Strength) mm kN kgs kN kgs (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1 9.5 89.0 9078 80.1 8170 11.1 120.1 12250 108.1 11026 12.7 160.1 16330 144.1 14698 15.2 240.2 24500 216.2 22052 II 9.5 102.3 10434 92.1 9394 11.1 137.9 14065 124.1 12658 12.7 183.7 18737 165.3 16860 15.2 260.7 26592 234.6 23929 Note — The Modulus of Elasticity is to be taken as 195 ±10 kN/mm2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14268: 1995",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Low",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Dimension, Tolerances And Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS142681995_2",
    "text": "IS 14268: 1995 Uncoated Stress Relieved Low [Dimension, Tolerances And Mass]\nSee Table 2. TABLE 2 DIMENSION, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF WIRE STRANDS Class Nominal Tolerance Nominal Nominal Dia of Strand Area of Strand Mass of Strand (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) mm mm mm2 kg/km 1 9.5 ±0.40 51.6 405 11.1 ±0.40 69.7 548 12.7 ±0.40 92.9 730 15.2 ±0.40 139.4 1094 II 9.5 +0.66 54.8 432 –0.15 11.1 +0.66 74.2 582 –0.15 12.7 +0.66 98.7 775 –0.15 15.2 +0.66 140.0 1102 –0.15"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14268: 1995",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Low",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "section": "Class",
    "chunk_id": "IS142681995_3",
    "text": "IS 14268: 1995 Uncoated Stress Relieved Low [Class]\nClass I or class II depending upon breaking strength of strand given in Table 1 4. Mechanical Properties 4.1 Breaking Strength and 0.2 Percent Proof Load– It shall be not less than the values specified in Table 1. 4.2 Elongation – The total elongation under load shall not be less than 3.5 percent on a minimum gauge length of 600 mm. 4.3 Relaxation Properties – Low relaxation strand, when initially loaded to 70 percent of specified minimum breaking strength of the strand shall have relaxation losses of not more than 1.8 percent after 100 h and not more than 2.5 percent after 1000 h. Note — For test procedures, refer to 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 of the standard and IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile testing (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 14268 : 1995 Specif"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12313: 1988",
    "title": "Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS123131988_1",
    "text": "IS 12313: 1988 Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet [Scope]\nRequirements of low carbon steel plates, sections, flats, bars, etc. for general structural purposes in the tensile range of 290 to 470 MPa. 1.1 The steels are equally suitable for bolted and riveted structures and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 When welding is employed for fabrication and guranteed weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996. Metal-arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels (first revision)’.\n[Grades] These shall be three Grades – Fe 290, Fe 330, and Fe 370."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12313: 1988",
    "title": "Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS123131988_2",
    "text": "IS 12313: 1988 Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet [Freedom From Defects]\nThe finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations; rough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects. 3.1 Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness. 4. Chemical Analysis : See Table – 1 TABLE1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Ladle Analysis, Percent, Max Designation C Mn S P (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Fe 290 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 330 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 370 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1977: 1996",
    "title": "Low Tensile Structural Steel",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS19771996_1",
    "text": "IS 1977: 1996 Low Tensile Structural Steel [Tests]\nFor bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an internal diameter not greater than that given in Table 2 without cracking.\n[Dimensions] Nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this specification shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard . Currently available Indian Standards are listed in Table 4 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1977: 1996",
    "title": "Low Tensile Structural Steel",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS19771996_2",
    "text": "IS 1977: 1996 Low Tensile Structural Steel [Tolerances]\nRolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in IS 1852 : 1985 ++. ++ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revision). Note — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1977: 1996 low tensile structural steels. (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20621999_1",
    "text": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of steel plates, strips, sections, flats, bars, etc, for use in structural work. 1.1 The steels are suitable for welded, bolted and riveted’ structures, and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 Where welding is employed for fabriction and guaranteed-weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996 `Metal are welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels - Recommendations (first Revision):.\n[Grades] There shall be three grades: Grade Designation A Fe 410W A B Fe 410W B C Fe 410W C"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS20621999_2",
    "text": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes [Freedom From Defects]\nThe finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations; rough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects. (Fifth Revision) Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness. 4. Mechanical Properties :"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS20621999_3",
    "text": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes [Tests]\nAs a rule, test pieces with a proportional guage length complying with the requirements L0=5.65 So should be used for the tensile test, where L0 is the gauge length and S is the cross sectional area of the test. 4..2 Bend Test – For bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an internal diameter not greater than that given in Table1 without cracking. 4.3 Impact Test – It shall meet therequirements given in Table 1 provided no individual value shall be less than 70 percent of the specified value. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade Designation Tensile Yield Stress, Min, MPa Percent Elongation Internal Charpy V-Notch Strength at Gauge length Diameter Impact Energy Min,MPa <20 20-40 >40 5.65 So of bend J, Min mm mm mm min min (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS20621999_4",
    "text": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes [Dimensions]\nThe nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this standard shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard. Currently available Indian Standard are listed in Table 4 of the standard"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS20621999_5",
    "text": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes [Tolerances]\nThe rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in S 1852 : 1985++ + Testing and evaluation procedure for Y groove crackability test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8500: 1991",
    "title": "Structural Steel- Micro Alloyed",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS85001991_1",
    "text": "IS 8500: 1991 Structural Steel- Micro Alloyed [General]\nIS 8500: 1991 Structural Steel- Micro Alloyed (MEDIUM AND HIGH STRENGTH QUALITIES) (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11587: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Weather Resistance Steels",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS115871986_1",
    "text": "IS 11587: 1986 Structural Weather Resistance Steels [Scope]\nRequirements for high strength low alloy weather resistant structural steels in the form of plates, strips, sections and bars for welded, riveted or bolted construction requiring atmospheric corrosion resistance.\n[Grades] There shall be following three grades of structural weather resistant steel: a) WR-Fe 480A, b) WR-Fe 480B, and c) WR-Fe 500"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11587: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Weather Resistance Steels",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Weldability",
    "chunk_id": "IS115871986_2",
    "text": "IS 11587: 1986 Structural Weather Resistance Steels [Weldability]\nAll steel grades specified in this standard are of weldable quality. 3.1 If the weather resistant steels are to be used unpainted, it is advisable to select the welding electrodes with matching weathering characteristics."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11587: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Weather Resistance Steels",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS115871986_3",
    "text": "IS 11587: 1986 Structural Weather Resistance Steels [Freedom From Defects]\nThe finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough jagged and imperfect edges, and all other harmful defects. 5. Mechanical Properties 5.1 Tensile Test — See Table1 TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade Tensile Yield Strength, Min, Mpa Percentage Strength MPa Elongation Min on MPa Up to and Over 12 mm Over 25 mm Over 40 mm Gauge Including Up to and Up to and Up to and Length 12 mm Including Including Including 5.65 So 25 mm 40 mm 50 mm min WR-Fe 480A 480 345 325 325 - 21 WR-Fe 480B 480 345 345 345 340 21 WR-Fe 500 500 355 - - - 20 5.2 Bend Test – The test piece when cold shall with stand the test without cracking as prescribed in the standard. 5.3 Impact Test – The mean valves after the test shall be as given in Table 2. TABLE 2 CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST VALU\n[Dimensions] Shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards. Currently available Indian Standards are listed in Table 5 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11587: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Weather Resistance Steels",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS115871986_4",
    "text": "IS 11587: 1986 Structural Weather Resistance Steels [Tolerances]\nRolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in IS 1852 :1985+. +Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revision) Note 1– For test proceedures, refer to the standard, IS1599 : 1985 method of bend test (second revision), IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1757: 1988",
    "title": "Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17571988_1",
    "text": "IS 1757: 1988 Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials [Scope]\nRequirements of plain galvanized steel sheets and strips coils, and corrugated galvanized sheets.\n[Classification] See Table 1 TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF GRADES OF GP/GC COILS AND SHEETS Type Designation GradeReference of Base Metal IS1079/IS 513 (1) (2) (3) (i) Deep drawing GPD Grade ‘DD’ (ii) Extra deep drawing GPED Grade ‘EDD’ (iii) Interstitial free GPIF Grade ‘IF’ (iv) Corrugated ordinary GC Grade ‘O’ Note – Spangles should not be allowed to form on the surface of strips / sheets during galnerizing"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1757: 1988",
    "title": "Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Zinc Coating",
    "chunk_id": "IS17571988_2",
    "text": "IS 1757: 1988 Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials [Zinc Coating]\nThe zinc coating shall conform to the requirement of any one of the grades prescribed in Table 2. The mass of coating referred to in this standard shall represent the total mass of zinc, both sides inclusive. 3.1 The following are recommended grades of zinc coating for the various thickness of sheets – Thickness Grade of mm Zinc Coating 0.18 to 0.28 (both inclusive) 200 0.30 to 0.55 (both inclusive) 220 0.63 to 1.0 (both inclusive) 275 above 1.00 mm 350 Note 1 – The recommended thickness for roofing applications is 0.63 mm and corresponding recommended grade of coating shall be minimum 275 gm/m2. Note 2 – If agreed to between the manufacture and the uprchaser for thickness 0.18 mm to 0.28 mm (both inclusive), other coating grades 180 and 120 may be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 277: 2003",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Sheets",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS2772003_1",
    "text": "IS 277: 2003 Galvanized Steel Sheets [Tests]\nSamples of galvanized steel sheets shall withstand bending through 180º around a mandrel having diameter specified in Table 3 of the Standard without peeling or flaking of zinc coating. Crack or fracture of base metal, shall not be permitted. However, Cracks of the base metal developing at the edge of the specimen or coarse grain developing at the line of the bend shall be disregarded. 5. Coating Test 5.1 Determination of Mass of Zinc Coating – The average masses of zinc coating shall conform to both the values specified in Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 277: 2003",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Sheets",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS2772003_2",
    "text": "IS 277: 2003 Galvanized Steel Sheets [Freedom From Defects]\nGalvanized plain sheets, corrugated sheets and coils shall be reasonably flat and free from bare spots, holes, tears and other harmful defects. 6.1 Coils, however, may contain some abnormal imperfections which render a portion of the coil unusable since the imperfections in the coil cannot be removed as in the case with cut length."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 277: 2003",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Sheets",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS2772003_3",
    "text": "IS 277: 2003 Galvanized Steel Sheets [Mass]\nSee Table 4 of the Standard. 8. Dimensions and Tolerances of Plain Sheets/Coils. 8.1 Sizes of Plain Sheets a) Length - 1 800, 2 200, 2 500, 2 800 and 3 000 mm b) Width - 750, 900, 1 000 and 1 200 mm c) Thickness - 0.18, 0.22, 0.25, 0.28, 0.32, (uncoated 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.63, sheets) 0.70, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, and 1.60 mm. Note : Sheets for other sizes (length, width and thickness) may also be supplied subject tothe mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 8.2 Unless other wire agreed, the internal diameter of sheet supplied coil shall be 450, 510 or 610 mm. 8.3 Tolerances 8.3.1 No sheet shall be smaller in length than that specified. Tolerances on length on plus side shall be 15 mm or 0.5 percent of length whichever is greater. 8.3.2 The diagonal distance between o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 412: 1975",
    "title": "Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4121975_1",
    "text": "IS 412: 1975 Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For [Scope]\nRequirements for expanded metal steel used for general purposes.\n[Size Of Mesh] Based on measurements of shortway of mesh (SWM) and longway of mesh (LWM) of diamond, and width and thickness of the strands."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 412: 1975",
    "title": "Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS4121975_2",
    "text": "IS 412: 1975 Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For [Dimensions]\nSee Table 1. GENERAL PURPOSES (Second Revision) Ref. No. Size of Mesh Largest Standard Size of Sheet (Nominal)` Size of Sheets Normally Stocked SWM LWM LWM SWM mm mm mm mm mm 1 100 250 3.75 10.97 2 100 250 3.75 14.63 3 100 250 3.75 21.97 4 75 200 3.75 7.30 5 75 200 3.75 7.30 2.50 × 3.75 6 75 200 3.75 14.60 7 40 115 2.50 3.75 8 40 115 2.50 4.85 9 40 75 2.50 4.85 10 40 75 2.50 7.30 11 40 115 2.50 7.30 2.50 × 3.75 12 40 75 3.75 7.30 and 13 40 115 2.50 7.30 1.25 × 3.75 14 40 75 3.75 7.30 15 25 75 2.50 4.85 2.50 × 3.75 16 25 75 2.50 4.85 2.50 × 3.75 17 25 75 2.50 4.85 and 18 25 75 2.50 4.85 1.25 × 3.75 19 20 60 2.50 3.75 20 20 50 3.75 3.75 2.50 × 3.75 21 20 60 2.50 3.75 22 20 50 3.75 3.75 2.50 × 3.75 23 20 60 2.50 3.75 and 24 20 50 3.75 3.75 1.25 × 3.75 25 20 60 2.50 4.85 26 20 50 3.75 3.75 27\n[Freedom From Defects] Finished expanded metal sheets shall be free from flaws, joints, welds, broken strands, laminations, etc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 412: 1975",
    "title": "Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Preservative Treatment",
    "chunk_id": "IS4121975_3",
    "text": "IS 412: 1975 Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For [Preservative Treatment]\nShall be given a suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion. Note 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals tensile testing (second revision),and IS 1599:1985 Method for bend test (second revision), Note 2 – For chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 412 : 1975 Expanded metal–Steel sheets for general purposes (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 513: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS5131994_1",
    "text": "IS 513: 1994 Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Scope]\nRequirements of cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips for bending and drawing purpose and where the surface is of prime importance. It covers sheets and strips up to 4 mm thick both in coil form and cut lengths."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 513: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Classification Of Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS5131994_2",
    "text": "IS 513: 1994 Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Classification Of Grades]\nSheets and strips shall be classified in the following grades – O – Ordinary quality D – Drawing quality DD – Deep drawing quality, and EDD – Extra deep drawing quality 3. Chemical Composition 3.1 Ladle Analysis – The ladle analysis of steel, shall be as given in Table 1. 3.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the case of product analysis from the limits specified in Table 1 shall be as given in Table 2. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Constituent, percent, Max Carbon Manganese Sulphur Phosphorus (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Ordinary (O) 0.15 0.60 0.055 0.055 Drawing (D) 0.12 0.50 0.040 0.040 Deep drawing (DD) 0.10 0.45 0.035 0.035 Extra deep 0.08 0.40 0.030 0.030 drawing (EDD) TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS Constituent Variation Over Specified Limit, Percent,Max Car"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10175 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Mechanical Testing Of Metals – Modified Erichsen Cupping Test – Sheet And Strip : Part 1 Thickness Upto",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS10175Part11993_1",
    "text": "IS 10175 (Part 1): 1993 Mechanical Testing Of Metals – Modified Erichsen Cupping Test – Sheet And Strip : Part 1 Thickness Upto [Freedom From Defects]\nThe finished sheets and strips shall be free from harmful defects, such as scale rust, blisters lamination, pitting, porosity, cracked or torn edges any other defects which are harmful to the intended use. 6. Dimensions 6.1 Thickness – Dimensions of cold rolled sheets and strips shall be as given below – Thickness, mm 0.18, 0.20,0.22,0.25,0.28 0.30, 0.32, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50 0.55, 0.63, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, 1.20, 1.25, 1.40, 1.50, 1.60, 1.80, 2.00, mm 6.1.1 The following are the preferred thickness for sheets above 2.00 mm, 2.50 mm, 2.65 mm, 3.00 mm, 3.25 mm, 3.50 mm and 4.00 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_1",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Scope]\nRequirements of Hot rolled carbon steel sheets including pack rolled sheets and strips intended for cold forming, drawing and general engineering purposes.\n[Grades] There shall be 4 grades of hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip designated as follows. a) O— Ordinary quality : intended for general fabrication purposes where sheets or strips are used in the flat or for bending, moderate forming and welding operation b) D – Drawing quality c) DD – Deep drawing quality c) EDD – Extra deep drawing quality Note – D, DD and EDD are intended for applications where drawing, severe forming and welding are involved."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tensile Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_2",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Tensile Properties]\nShall be as follows: Grade Tensile Yield Percent Elongation strength Stress, at Guage length MPa MPa 5.65 Min O – – – D 240-400 – 25 DD 260-390 – 28 EDD 260-380 – 32"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_3",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Tests]\nThe test piece shall be bent cold through 1800 .The test piece shall be deemed to have passed the test if the outer convex surface is free from cracks after complete bending.The internal diameter of bend for different grades shall be as follows Steel Grade Internal Diameter of Bend O 2 t D t DD Close EDD Close Note— Where is the thickness of test piece. * Dimensions for steel plates sheets,strips and flats for general engineering purposes (second revision) + Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products ( fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Cupping Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_4",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Cupping Test]\nCupping Test may be carried out only for sheets strips of D , DD and EDD grades having thickness from 0.5mm upto2.00mm. The test and test values shall be as agreed mutually."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Strain Ageing Test",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_5",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Strain Ageing Test]\nThe test is to be carried out on grades where steel is supplied with non-ageing properties / guarantee and shall be as agreed. The test piece shall not develop crack near the bend, after prescribed test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_6",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Freedom From Defects]\nThe finished material in cut lengths shall be free from harmful defects which will affect the end use. When the material is supplied in the form of coils, the degree or amount of surface defects are expected to be more than in cut length sheets. 8. Dimensions and Tolerances 8.1 Dimensions of steel sheet and strip shall conform to the dimension specified in IS 1730 : 1989.* 8.2 Tolerance on length, width,thickness,and mass of the steel sheet and strip shall confirm to the limits specifiedin IS 1852:1985.+ 8.3 For Camber tolerances, flatness tolerances and out of square tolerances refer 13 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Weight",
    "chunk_id": "IS10791994_7",
    "text": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips [Weight]\nThe mass of the material shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3: Note1 — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision). IS 1608 : 1995. Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision)and IS 10175 (Part 1) :1993.Mechanical testing of metals modified erichsen cupping test-Sheet and strip,Part 1– Thickness upto 2 mm (first revision). Note2— For chemical composition, refer to the standard. For detail information, refer to IS 1079 : 1994 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and strips (fifth revision). So"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3502: 1994",
    "title": "Steel Chequered Plates",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS35021994_1",
    "text": "IS 3502: 1994 Steel Chequered Plates [Scope]\nRequirements for cold-rolled medium, and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness up to 3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for general engineering purposes.\n[Chemical Composition] Carbon content (percent) on ladle analysis shall be as follows :\n[Hardness Test] When subjected to Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS 1586 : 1988* or IS 5072 : 1988+ shall conform to the requie ments given below :\n[Freedom From Defects] Shall be free from scales, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked edges."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3502: 1994",
    "title": "Steel Chequered Plates",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Edge Condition",
    "chunk_id": "IS35021994_2",
    "text": "IS 3502: 1994 Steel Chequered Plates [Edge Condition]\nShall be supplied with mill, trimmed or slit edges. Medium Carbon High Carbon High Carbon Low Alloy C40 C55 C70 C80 C85 C98 120Cr35 110Cr35W2 0.35-0.45 0.50-0.60 0.65-0.75 0.75-0.85 0.80-0.90 0.90 - 1.05 1.10- 1.30 1.0 -1.20 Note — For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, chromium and tungsten contents, refer to 4 of the standard. DESIGNATION ANNEALED HARDNESS, MAX ANNEALED AND RE-ROLLED HARDNESS, MAX HRB Equivalent HV HRC Equivalent HV C40 83.4 160 28 290 C55 85.0 165 35 350 C70 87.9 175 35 350 C80 91.6 190 35 350 C85 91.6 190 35 350 C98 94.8 205 35 350 120 Cr 35 97.5 220 35 350 110 Cr 35W2 97.5 220 35 350"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7226: 1974",
    "title": "Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS72261974_1",
    "text": "IS 7226: 1974 Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes [Finish]\nBright Finish. Note – For rolling tolerances see 9 of the standard. * Methods for rockwell hardness tes for metallic material (second revision). + Method for rockwell superficial hardness test (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7226: 1974",
    "title": "Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS72261974_2",
    "text": "IS 7226: 1974 Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of terne coated carbon steel sheets for use in automobile industry, as a roofing and other similar application the thickness of the sheet shall be between 0.3 to 2.0 mm. The thickness other than this may be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 2. Terminology 2.1 Terne (Lead Alloy)— In the context of this standard, any lead-based alloy in commercial use for the hot-dip coating of steel sheet. Tin is the most common alloying element, but antimony is also commercially used, or combinations of both elements. If a specific alloy composition is required, it shall be by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 2.2 Designation System Terne coating and qualities – The produced hot-tip terne coating is designated T0 (the `0’ is inserted to fill a compute"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1148: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11481982_1",
    "text": "IS 1148: 1982 Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars [Scope]\nRequirement for hot-rolled steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter used for the manufacture of hot forged rivets for structural purposes. 2. Chemical Composition 2.1 Ladle Analysis – Ladle analysis of the steel,shall be as given below: Constituent Per cent,Max Carbon 0.23 Sulphur 0.050 Phosphorus 0.050 2.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the case of product analysis, from the limits specified under 2.1 shall be as fallows: Constituent Variation Over the Specified Limit Percent,Max. Carbon 0.02 Sulphur 0.005 phosphorus 0.005 2.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceed ±0.3 percent. 2.4 When steel is silicon – killed, silicon content on the pro\n[Freedom From Defects] The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be determined to the end use of the material.\n[Lengths] In multiples of 250 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1148: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Dimensional Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS11481982_2",
    "text": "IS 1148: 1982 Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars [Dimensional Tolerances]\nThe bar shall comply with the following dimensional tolerances: : Diameter of Bar Total Tolerance mm mm Below 20 0.40 20 0.45 22 and 24 0.50 Over 24 2 percent of diameter All the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances. When special plus and minus tolerances are required by the purchaser, the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified as less than the above total tolerances. 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, MPa 410- 530 Min Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and 260 including 12mm b) Over 12 mm upto 250 and including 20 mm c) Over 20 mm upto 240 and including 40mm Elongation percent, Min, guage length 5.65 Min 22 6.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6mm 6.2 Dump Test – Minor surface fiaws which do not tend to open out wide"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1149: 1982",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11491982_1",
    "text": "IS 1149: 1982 High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes [Scope]\nRequirement for high tensile steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter for structural purposes. 2. Chemical Composition 2.1 Ladle Analysis – Ladle analysis of the steel, shall be as given below – Constituent Per cent,Max Carbon 0.23 Sulphur 0.050 Phosphorus 0.050 2.2 Product Analysis : Permissible variation in the case of product analysis, from the limits specified under 2.1 shall be as follows: Constituent Variation Over the Specified Limit Percent, Maximum Carbon 0.02 Sulphur 0.005 Phosphorus 0.005 2.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceed ± 0.3 percent. 2.4 When steel is silicon–killed, silicon content on the product analysis, shall not be less than 0\n[Freedom From Defects] The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be determined to the end use of the material."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1149: 1982",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Lengths",
    "chunk_id": "IS11491982_2",
    "text": "IS 1149: 1982 High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes [Lengths]\nIn multiples of 250 mm. 5. Dimensional Tolerances : Shall be similar as specified for IS 1148 : 1982*. 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, min MPa 460 Min Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and 310 including 12 mm b) Over 12 mm upto 300 and including 20 mm c) Over 20 mm upto 280 and including 40 mm Elongation percent, Min guage length 5.65 So Min 22 6.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6 mm. 6.2 Bend Test – In the case of bars over 25 mm in diameter the test piece when cold shall withstand, without fracture, being doubled over, either by pressure or by slow and steady blows from a hammer , till the internal diameter is not greater than three times the diameter of the test piece, and sides are parallel. For bars 25 mm in diameter and un"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1161: 1998",
    "title": "Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes.",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Workmanship",
    "chunk_id": "IS11611998_1",
    "text": "IS 1161: 1998 Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes. [Workmanship]\nThe tubes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of tube, unless otherwise specified.\n[Galvanizing] If the tubes are required in galvanized condition the zinc coating on the tubes shall be conforming to the requirements.\n[Straightness] Tubes shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1 mm in any 600 mm length."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1161: 1998",
    "title": "Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes.",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Lengths",
    "chunk_id": "IS11611998_2",
    "text": "IS 1161: 1998 Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes. [Lengths]\nThe tubes shall normally be supplied in random lengths at 4 to 7 m. 9. Tests 9.1 Tensile Test – See Table 2. 9.2 Ductility Test – The tubes of 50 mm NB and under shall withstand cold bend test and tubes above 50 mm NB shall withstand flattening test as prescribed in the standard. } } TABLE 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Nominal Outside Class Thickness Weight Area of Internal Bore Diameter Cross Volume Section mm mm mm kg/m cm2 cm3/m (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 15 21.3 Light 2.0 0.947 1.21 235 Medium 2.6 1.21 1.53 203 Heavy 3.2 0.44 1.82 174 20 26.9 Light 2.3 1.38 1.78 390 Medium 2.6 1.56 1.98 370 Heavy 3.2 1.87 2.38 330 25 33.7 Light 2.6 1.98 2.54 638 Medium 3.2 2.41 3.06 585 Heavy 4.0 2.93 3.73 518 32 42.4 Light 2.6 2.54 3.25 1 086 Medium 3.2 3.10 3.94 1 017"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49231997_1",
    "text": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural [Scope]\nRequirements for hot and cold formed square and rectangular hollow steel sections for structural use. Section 1 General Requirements\n[Designation] A hollow section shall be designated by its outside dimensions and its thickness in millimetres and shall be further classified into CF or HF depending upon whether it is cold formed or hot formed. a) A cold formed square hollow section with outside dimensions of 50 mm square and 2.90 mm thickness is designated as 50 × 50 × 2.90 CF SHS. b) A hot formed rectangular hollow section with outside dimensions of 40 mm depth, 25 mm breadth and 2.65 mm thickness is designated as 40 × 25 × 2.65 HF RHS."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Dimensions And Weights",
    "chunk_id": "IS49231997_2",
    "text": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural [Dimensions And Weights]\nSee Tables 1 and 2. USE (Second Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES OF SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS Designation Depth Thick- Weight Area or ness of Width Section (D) mm mm mm kg/m cm2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 25.0×25.0×2.6 25.0 2.6 1.69 2.16 25.0×25.0×3.2 25.0 3.2 1.98 2.53 30.0×30.0×2.6 30.0 2.6 2.10 2.68 30.0×30.0×3.2 30.0 3.2 2.49 3.17 30.0×30.0×4.0 30.0 4.0 2.94 3.75 32.0×32.0×2.6 32.0 2.6 2.26 2.88 32.0×32.0×3.2 32.0 3.2 2.69 3.42 32.0×32.0×4.0 32.0 4.0 3.19 4.07 35.0×35.0×2.6 35.0 2.6 2.51 3.20 35.0×35.0×3.2 35.0 3.2 2.99 3.81 35.0×35.0×4.0 35.0 4.0 3.57 4.55 38.0×38.0×2.6 38.0 2.6 2.75 3.51 38.0×38.0×2.9 38.0 2.9 3.03 3.86 38.0×38.0×3.2 38.0 3.2 3.29 4.19 38.0×38.0×3.6 38.0 3.6 3.63 4.62 38.0×38.0×4.0 38.0 4.0 3.95 5.03 40.0×40.0×2.6 40.0 2.6 2.92 3.72 40.0×40.0x3.2 40.0 3.2 3.49 4.45"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Straightness And Twist",
    "chunk_id": "IS49231997_3",
    "text": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural [Straightness And Twist]\nMaximum deviation from straightness for tubes in finish straightened condition shall be 1/600th of length at the centre of the length. For tubes in mill straightened condition 1/200th of any length at the centre of the length. Twist shall be measured for square and rectangular sections as given in the standard. the tolerances on twist shall be 2 mm plus 0.5 mm/m.\n[Oiling And Painting] Hollow sections may be varnished painted or oiled externally. Section 2 Hot Formed Sections"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS49231997_4",
    "text": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural [Tolerances]\nThe following tolerances shall be permitted on hot formed hollow sections: a) Thickness for all sizes 1) Welded tubes ± 10 percent 2) Seamless tubes + 17.5 percent - 12.5 percent b) Outside dimensions of ±1 percent of sides length of the side to be measured with a minimum of ± 0.5 mm c) Weight 1) On individual length +10 percent - 8 percent 2) On lots of 10 tonnes ± 7.5 percent d) Squareness of corner 900 ± 20 e) Radii of corners- 3t, Max where t is Outside the thickness of section f) Length 1) Exact length ±6 mm 2) Random length This may be obtained by arrangement between the purchaser and manufacturer"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tensile Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS49231997_5",
    "text": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural [Tensile Properties]\nSee Table 4. TABLE 4 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF COLD FORMED SECTION. Grade Tensile Yield Elongation, Strength, stress, percent, Min Min, MPa Min, MPa 25.4 and Over25.4* under* YSt210 330 210 12 20 YSt240 410 240 10 15 YSt310 450 310 8 10 *The value shall be applicable for the smaller side of the rectangular section. SECTION 16 LIGHT METALS AND THEIR ALLOYS CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 733: 1983",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Bars, Rods And Sections For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7331983_1",
    "text": "IS 733: 1983 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Bars, Rods And Sections For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] Shall be as laid in IS 3965 : 1981. 4. Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19000 Panelling and moulding, refrigeration tubing, equipment for chemical, food and brewing industrial packaging, cooking utensils, sheet metal work, architectural and builder’s hardware, spun / pressed hollow ware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire, electrical appliances. 19500 Corosion resistant cladding on stronger alloys impact extruded containers; food, chemical brewing and processing equipments; tanks and pipes; marine fittings; reflectors; pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, and cable sheating. 19600 Similar to 19500. 24345 Heavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost importance, aircraft application of clad sheets, extrusions an"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 736: 1986",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Plate For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7361986_1",
    "text": "IS 736: 1986 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Plate For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] See IS 2676 : 1981* and IS 2677 : 1979.** 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19000 Electrolytic capacitors, decorative hollowares, trims and other applications requring high degree of finish. 19800 Jewellery, decorative and novelty and anodized items, auto rim, reflectors, 19700 breweries and some chemical plants and metallizing. 19600 Corrosion resistant cladding on and stronger alloys, impact extruded containters; food, chemical brewing and processing equipment, tanks and pipes, marine fitting, reflectors, pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery and cable sheathing. 19500 Similar to 19600 19000 Panelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food and brewing industries; packaging; cooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 737: 1986",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7371986_1",
    "text": "IS 737: 1986 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn tubes of round cross-section for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] The drawn tubes shall be sound and free from harmful defects."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 737: 1986",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS7371986_2",
    "text": "IS 737: 1986 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nAs given in IS 2678 : 1987.* 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19000 Panelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing industries; architectural and builder’s hardwares,fasteners, welding wire, electrical appliances, refrigeration tubes and wave guide tubes. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes, condenser tubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline. 24345 Stressed parts in aircraft and other structures where high strength is of primary consideration, hydraulic tubes. * Dimension and tolerances for wrought aluminium and alluminium alloy round tubes (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 738: 1994",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Its Alloys-Drawn Tubes For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7381994_1",
    "text": "IS 738: 1994 Wrought Aluminium And Its Alloys-Drawn Tubes For General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy wire for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] Wire shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] Shall given in IS 2525 : 1982.* 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical Uses 19000 Panelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing industries; architectural and builder’s hardwares, fasteners, welding wire, electrical appliances, rivet wires, spray gun wires. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, rivet for aircraft purpose, filler rods for inert gas are welding. 24345 Structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost imprtance, screw machine products, fasteners and rivets for aircraft purposes. 31000 General purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure vessels, builders hardware, vehicle panelling, rivet wires, fasteners, filler rods for inert gas"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 739: 1992",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys-Wire For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7391992_1",
    "text": "IS 739: 1992 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys-Wire For General Engineering Purposes [General]\nIS 739: 1992 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys-Wire For General Engineering Purposes (Third Revision) Designation Typical Uses 43000 Filler wires for brazing and soldering, welding rods, sprays gun wires. 46000 Filler wires for brazing, welding rods, spray gun wires. 52000 Panelling and structures, rivet wires, zippers, grills, fasteners, filler rods for inert gas arc welding. 53000 Shipbuilding, rivets, pressure vessels, welding rods, zippers, screen wires, grills fasteners. 55000 Shipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resistance; rivets, zippers, welding wire, screen wires, grills, fasteners. 55380 Filler wires for welding rivets, screen wires. 63400 Architectural uses and other similar applications where surface finish is important and medium strength would suffice, builders hardware. 64430 Structural applications of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring. 65032 Structural applications of all kinds rivets, builders hardwares and fastener rods Note – For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 8 (Table 1) and 9 (Table 2) of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 739 : 1992 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloyswire for general engineering purpose (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 740: 1977",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium Alloy Rivet Stock For",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7401977_1",
    "text": "IS 740: 1977 Wrought Aluminium Alloy Rivet Stock For [Scope]\nRequirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys rivet stock for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] The material shall be sound and free fom harmful defects.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] As given in IS 3577 : 1992.* 4. Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys Designation Typical use New Old 19000 RIC Rivets used in equipment for food, chemical, brewing and processing, cooking, utensils, architectural and builders hardwares and in aircraft manufacture. 24345 HR 15 Rivets used in structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost importance, aircraft structures. Designation Typical use New Old 53000 NR 5 Rivets used in ship building, pressure vessels and other processing tanks and in aircraft manufacture. 55000 NR 6 Rivets used in ship building, aircraft manufacture and other applications demanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resistance. 64430 HR 30 Rivets used in structures of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1254: 1991",
    "title": "Corrugated Aluminium Sheet",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12541991_1",
    "text": "IS 1254: 1991 Corrugated Aluminium Sheet [Scope]\nMaterial, profile, dimensions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheets meant for following uses: a) General purpose, b) Industrial, and c) Building.\n[Freedom From Defects] Corrugated sheet shall be clean and reasonably free from harmful defcets. 3. Profiles Uses Pitch Depth mm mm a) General purpose 75 19 b) Industrial 125 38 c) Building 190 38 3.1 The corrugations shall be uniform and parallel with the sides of the sheet. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Thickness – The thickness of the corrugated sheet shall be as agreed. Tolerance on the thickness of the sheets shall be subject to the general thickness tolerance specifieid in IS 2676 : 1981.* 4.2 Width General purpose : 650 to 800 mm overall Industrial : 795 mm overall Building : 830 mm overall 4.2.1 A tolerance of ± 10 mm for sheets of 0.45 mm and above in thickness. The tolerance on width for sheets less than 0.45 mm thick, shall be subject to agreement. 4.3 Length – Preferred lengths are 1800, 2400, 3000 and 3600 mm s"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1254: 1991",
    "title": "Corrugated Aluminium Sheet",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS12541991_2",
    "text": "IS 1254: 1991 Corrugated Aluminium Sheet [Finish]\nThe finish shall be ‘as-rolled’. Note — For types of profile, see 5 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1254 : 1991 Specifications for Corrugated aluminium sheet (third revision). * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and strip (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1285: 2002",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12852002_1",
    "text": "IS 1285: 2002 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For [Scope]\nRequirements of extruded round tube and hollow sections made from wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes.\n[Freedom From Defects] The extruded round tube and hollow sections shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n[Dimensions And Tolerances] The dimensions of extruded round tube and hollow sections and the tolerance shall be as laid down in IS 2673 : 2002* and IS 6477 : 1983 ** respectively."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1285: 2002",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Designation And Typical Uses Of Alloys",
    "chunk_id": "IS12852002_2",
    "text": "IS 1285: 2002 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For [Designation And Typical Uses Of Alloys]\nDesignation Typical use 19000 Panelling and moulding, equipment for food, chemical and brewing industries, architectural and builders hardwares, fasteners, welding wires and electrical guide tubes. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipment, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes, condenser tubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline. 24345 Stressed parts in aircrafts and other structures where high strength is of primary consdieration, hydraulic tubes air-conditioning ducting fan blades and vehicle panelling. 31000 General purpose alloy for moderate strength applications for chemical equipment, irrigation tubing, heat exchangers furniture, condenser, air- Designation Typical use conditioning, utensils, detonator caps, pressure vessles, fan blade"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2525: 1982",
    "title": "Dimension For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Wire",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS25251982_1",
    "text": "IS 2525: 1982 Dimension For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Wire [Scope]\nLays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of wire.\n[Dimensions] The diameters of round wires and the width/width across flats of shaped wires shall be as follows: mm mm mm 0.32 1.00 3.15 0.36 1.12 3.55 0.40 1.25 4.00 0.45 1.40 4.50 0.50 1.60 5.00 0.56 1.80 5.60 0.63 2.00 6.30 0.71 2.24 7.10 0.80 2.50 8.00 0.90 2.80 9.00 3. Tolerances 3.1 Round Wires Diameter, mm Tolerance, mm Up to 0.63 ± 0.015 From 0.71 to 1.12 ± 0.025 From 1.25 to 9.0 ± 0.05 or 1 per cent of diameter which ever is higher. For detailed information, refer to IS 2525 : 1982 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, wire (first revision). 3.2 Hexagonal and Octagonal Wires Width Across Flats, Tolerance mm mm Up to 1.12 ± 0.04 Over 1.12 to 9.00 ± 0.07 or 1.5 percent of width across flats which ever is higher. 3.3 Square and Rectangular Wires Width or Thickness Tolerance mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2676: 1981",
    "title": "Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Sheet And Strip",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26761981_1",
    "text": "IS 2676: 1981 Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Sheet And Strip [Scope]\nLays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys, sheet and strip. 2. Dimensions 2.1. Lengths and Widths Length Width Length Width mm mm mm mm 1 800 × 600 3 600 × 900 1 800 × 900 3 600 × 1 000 1 800 × 1 000 3 600 × 1 200 1 800 × 1 200 3 600 × 1 500 2 000 × 600 4 000 × 900 2 000 × 900 4 000 × 1 000 2 000 × 1 000 4 000 × 1 200 2 000 × 1 200 4 000 × 1 500 2 000 × 1 500 2 400 × 600 2 400 × 900 2 400 × 1 000 2 400 × 1 200 2 400 × 1 500 2.2 Thickness 0.15 1.25 0.19 1.40 0.23 1.60 0.28 1.80 0.32 2.00 0.36 2.24 0.40 2.50 0.45 2.80 0.50 3.15 0.56 3.55 0.63 4.00 0.71 4.50 0.80 5.00 0.90 5.60 1.0 6.00 1.12 3. Tolerances 3.1 For shearing tolerances, general and fine for sheets and strips and the tolerances, general and fine on thicknesses of sheets and strips, refer to tables 1 to 6 of"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2677: 1979",
    "title": "Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Alloys Plates And Hot-Rolled Sheets",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26771979_1",
    "text": "IS 2677: 1979 Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Alloys Plates And Hot-Rolled Sheets [Scope]\nLays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plate and hot-rolled sheets. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Lenghts and Widths mm mm mm mm mm mm 1 800 × 300 2 400 × 300 3 600 × 300 1 800 × 600 2 400 × 600 3 600 × 600 1 800 × 900 2 400 × 900 3 600 × 900 1 800 × 1 200 2 400 × 1 200 3 600 × 1 200 2.2 Thickness and Tolerances – See Table 1. 2.3 Shearing Tolerance on Length and Width – See Table 2. TABLE 1 TOLERANCES ON THICKNESS OF PLATE AND HOT-ROLLED SHEETS All dimensions in millimeters STANDARD FOR WIDTHS UP TO FOR WIDTH THICKNESS AND INCLUDING1200 1201 TO 2000 (1) (2) (3) 4.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 4.5 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 8.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 9.0 ±0.42 ±0.46 10.0 ±0.46 ±0.48 11.0 ±0.49 ±0.51 12.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2678: 1987",
    "title": "Dimensions And Tolerance For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys Drawn Round Tubes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS26781987_1",
    "text": "IS 2678: 1987 Dimensions And Tolerance For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys Drawn Round Tubes [Scope]\nLays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn round tube with parallel bore. } } } }\n[Tolerances] See Tables 2, 3 and 4. } } Note1: Nominal dimension means specified dimensions Note2: Sizes other than standard shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaswer TABLE 3 TOLERANCES ON OUTSIDE OR INSIDE DIAMETERS OF DRAWN ROUND TUBE WITH PARALLEL BORE All dimemsions in millimeters. Nominal Nominal Wall Thickness of Tube Outside Diameter 0.50 0.63 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.5 16.0 ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± 4.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 5.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 6.3 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 8 .0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 10.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 12.5 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 16.0 – 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 20.0 – 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 25.0 – 0.18 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3908: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Equal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS39081986_1",
    "text": "IS 3908: 1986 Aluminium Equal Leg Angles [Scope]\nCover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium equal leg angles for structural use and other applications.\n[Designation] Aluminium equal leg angles sections shall be designated as ALE followed by lengths of legs and thickness of the section in mm. For example ALE 80 × 80 × 6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3908: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Equal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS39081986_2",
    "text": "IS 3908: 1986 Aluminium Equal Leg Angles [Dimensions]\nALE 10×10×1.5 ALE 30×30×3.0 ALE 50×50×3.0 ALE 100×100× 6.0 ALE 10×10×2.0 ALE 30×30×4.0 ALE 50×50×4.0 ALE 100×100× 8.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 50×50×5.0 ALE 100×100× 10.0 ALE 50×50×6.0 ALE 100×100×12.0 ALE 15×15×1.5 ALE 35×35×3.0 ALE 60×60×4.0 ALE 120×120× 10.0 ALE 15×15×2.0 ALE 35×35×4.0 ALE 60×60×5.0 ALE 120×120× 12.0 ALE 15×15×3.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 60×60×6.0 ALE 120×120× 16.0 ALE 20×20×2.0 ALE 40×40×3.0 ALE 70×70×5.0 ALE 150×150×10.0 ALE 20×20×3.0 ALE 40×40×4.0 ALE 70×70×6.0 ALE 150×150×12.0 ALE 40×40×5.0 ALE 70×70×7.0 ALE 150×150×16.0 ALE 25×25×2.0 ALE 45×45×3.0 ALE 80×80×6.0 ALE 200×200×12.0 ALE 25×25×3.0 ALE 45×45×4.0 ALE 80×80×8.0 ALE 200×200×16.0 ALE 25×25×4.0 ALE 45×45×5.0 ALE 80×80×10.0 ALE 200×200×20.0 3.1 Designation and Size in mm Note – For sectional properties refer to Table 1 of t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3908: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Equal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS39081986_3",
    "text": "IS 3908: 1986 Aluminium Equal Leg Angles [Materials]\n4.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and section (first revision). appropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 4.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the provisions of IS 733 : 1983.+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3909: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Unequal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS39091986_1",
    "text": "IS 3909: 1986 Aluminium Unequal Leg Angles [Scope]\nCovers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium unequal leg angles for structural use and other applications.\n[Designation] Aluminium unequal leg angles sections shall be designated as ALU followed by lengths (First Revision) of longer and shorter legs and thickness of the section in mm. For example Alu 80 × 60 × 6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3921: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium Channels",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS39211985_1",
    "text": "IS 3921: 1985 Aluminium Channels [General]\nIS 3921: 1985 Aluminium Channels (First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3921 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium channels (first revision). ALC 40 × 20 - 0.63 ALC 40 × 20 - 0.44 ALC 50 × 30 - 1.55 ALC 50 × 30 - 0.88 ALC 50 × 30 - 1.14 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.13 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.55 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.95 ALC 60 × 40 - 1.87 ALC 60 × 40 - 2.38 ALC 80 × 40 - 2.10 ALC 80 × 40 - 2.67 ALC 80 × 40 - 3.21 ALC 100 × 40 - 2.95 ALC 100 × 40 - 3.55 ALC 100 × 50 - 4.98 ALC 100 × 50 - 3.39 ALC 100 × 50 - 4.09 ALC 120 × 50 - 4.43 ALC 120 × 50 - 3.68 ALC 120 × 60 - 4.98 ALC 120 × 60 - 6.08 ALC 150 × 60 - 5.51 ALC 150 × 60 - 6.77 ALC 150 × 80 - 6.59 ALC 150 × 80 - 6.59 ALC 150 × 80 - 8.07 ALC 150 × 80 - 0.26 ALC 200 × 80 - 9.28 ALC 200 × 80"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3921: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium Channels",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS39211985_2",
    "text": "IS 3921: 1985 Aluminium Channels [General]\n× 60 - 6.08 ALC 150 × 60 - 5.51 ALC 150 × 60 - 6.77 ALC 150 × 80 - 6.59 ALC 150 × 80 - 6.59 ALC 150 × 80 - 8.07 ALC 150 × 80 - 0.26 ALC 200 × 80 - 9.28 ALC 200 × 80 - 11.74 ALC 200 × 100 - 15.33 ALC 200 × 100 -3.47"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5384: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium I–Beam",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS53841985_1",
    "text": "IS 5384: 1985 Aluminium I–Beam [Scope]\nCovers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium I- beam sections for structural use and other applications.\n[Designation] Aluminium I- beam sections shall be designated as ALB followed by the depth of section, width of flange in mm and mass in kilograms per metre of the section. Example : ALB 120 x 60 - 4.7"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5384: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium I–Beam",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS53841985_2",
    "text": "IS 5384: 1985 Aluminium I–Beam [Materials]\n3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 5384 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium I-beam (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5384: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium I–Beam",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS53841985_3",
    "text": "IS 5384: 1985 Aluminium I–Beam [Dimensions]\n4.1 Designation ALB 40 × 20 - 0.4 ALB 100 × 60 - 4.7 ALB 40 × 20 - 0.6 ALB 50 × 30 - 0.9 ALB 120 × 60 - 4.7 ALB 50 × 30 - 1.2 ALB 120 × 60 - 5.0 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.1 ALB 120 × 70 - 5.6 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.5 ALB 120 × 80 - 6.1 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.9 ALB 120 × 80 - 7.4 ALB 60 × 40 - 1.9 ALB 150 × 80 - 6.6 ALB 60 × 40 - 2.4 ALB 150 × 80 - 8.1 ALB 80 × 40 - 2.1 ALB 150 × 100 - 7.7 ALB 80 × 40 - 2.7 ALB 150 × 100 - 9.4 ALB 80 × 40 - 3.2 ALB 150 × 100 - 12.1 ALB 100 x 50 - 3.4 ALB 200 × 100 - 10.5 ALB 100 x 50 - 3.9 ALB 200 × 100 - 13.4 ALB 100 x 60 - 3.9 ALB 200 × 100 - 12.9 ALB 100 x 60 - 4.1 ALB 200 × 120 - 16.1 Note– For sectional properties, refer to the standard dimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in IS 3965:1981* * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, ro"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6445: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium Tee - Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS64451985_1",
    "text": "IS 6445: 1985 Aluminium Tee - Sections [Scope]\nCovers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium tee – sections for structural use and other applications.\n[Designation] Aluminium tee-sections shall be designated as ALT followed by the depth of section, in mm width of flange in mm and mass in kilograms per metre of the section. Example : ALT 125 × 100 – 7.0 3. Materials 3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper – 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision) (First Revision) 4. Dimensions 4.1 Designation ALT 25 × 25 - 0.4 ALT 100 × 75 - 5.4 ALT 30 × 30 - 0.5 ALT 100 × 100 - 4.2 ALT 30 × 30 - 0.7 ALT 100 × 100 - 5.2 ALT 40 × 50 - 0.8 ALT 100 × 100"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8111987_1",
    "text": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections [Scope]\nLays down dimensions mass, sectional properties and requirements for corrosion protection for cold formed light guage open wall steel sections for structural and other general applications, having minimum thickness of 1.25mm.\n[Designation] Cold formed light guage sections shall be designated by figures denoting depth (mm)× width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the section."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS8111987_2",
    "text": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections [Materials]\nSheet and strip used for making the cold-formed sections shall conform to IS 1079 : 1994* Sheet and strip conforming to IS 513: 1994+ may also be used for sections where load bearing is not a design criteria, for examle, false ceiling, sections for frames of doors and windows."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS8111987_3",
    "text": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections [Dimensions And Properties]\n4.1 Equal Angles – 4.1.1 Designations h × h × t in mm h × h × t in mm 20 × 20 × 1.25 20 × 20 × 1.60 20 × 20 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 1.60 30 × 30 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 3.15 40 × 40 × 1.60 40 × 40 × 2.00 40 × 40 × 2.55 40 × 40 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 2.00 50 × 50 × 2.55 50 × 50 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 4.00 60 × 60 × 2.00 60 × 60 × 2.55 60 × 60 × 3.15 60 × 60 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 3.15 70 × 70 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 4.00 80 × 80 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 6.00 100 × 100 × 3.15 100 × 100 × 4.00 100 × 100 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 6.00 4.2 Unequal Angles – 4.2.1 Designations h × b × t in mm h × b × t in mm 20 × 15 × 1.25 20 × 15 × 1.60 20 × 15 × 2.00"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS8111987_4",
    "text": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections [Dimensions And Properties]\n100 × 100 × 4.00 100 × 100 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 6.00 4.2 Unequal Angles – 4.2.1 Designations h × b × t in mm h × b × t in mm 20 × 15 × 1.25 20 × 15 × 1.60 20 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 15 × 1.25 30 × 15 × 1.60 30 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 20 × 1.60 30 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 1.60 40 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 2.55 40 × 25 × 2.00 40 × 25 × 2.55 50 × 25 × 1.60 50 ×"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Corrosion Protection",
    "chunk_id": "IS8111987_5",
    "text": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections [Corrosion Protection]\nCorrosion protection of cold formed light gauge steel sections shall be carried out in accordance with IS 4180 : 1967. The performance tests for protective scheme in the protection of these sections against corrosion shall conform to IS 4777 : 1968. + * Code of practice for corrosion protection of light gauge steel sections used in buildings. + Performance tests for protection schemes used in protection of light guage steel against corrosion."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1173: 1978",
    "title": "Hot Rolled And Slit Steel Tee Bars",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11731978_1",
    "text": "IS 1173: 1978 Hot Rolled And Slit Steel Tee Bars [Scope]\nLays down nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometrical properties.\n[Classification] a) Indian Standard Rolled Normal Tee Bars(ISNT) b) Indian Standard Rolled Deep Legged Tee Bars (ISDT), Designation Weight Normal size Moments of Inertia (kg/m) (Depth × Width) Ixx Iyy mm × mm 106 mm4 106 mm4 a) Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars ISNT 20 1.1 20 × 20 0.005 0.002 ISNT 30 1.8 30 × 30 0.018 0.008 ISNT 40 3.5 40 × 40 0.061 0.029 ISNT 50 4.4 50 × 50 0.123 0.057 ISNT 60 5.4 60 × 60 0.214 0.097 ISNT 75 10.0 75 × 75 0.620 0.292 ISNT 100 14.9 100 × 100 1.64 0.768 ISNT 150 22.7 150 × 150 5.41 2.50 b) Indian Standard Deep Legged Tee Bars ISDT 100 8.1 100 × 50 0.990 0.096 ISDT 150 15.7 150 × 75 4.50 0.370 c) Indian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars ISLT 200 28.4 200 × 165 12.7 3.58 ISLT 250 37.5 250 × 180 27.7 5.32 d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars ISMT 50 5.8 50 × 70 0.108"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1730: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17301989_1",
    "text": "IS 1730: 1989 Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes [Scope]\nSpecifies nominal dimensions, nominal mass and surface area (for sheets) of hot-rolled steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for structural and general engineering purposes.\n[Designation] Hot-rolled steel plates, sheets strips and flats conforming to this standard shall be designated as under : a) Plates shall be designated as ISPL followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the sheet. b) Sheets shall be designated as ISSH followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the sheet. TABLE 1 STANDARD NOMINAL SIZES OF PLATES Width 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 in mm Length in mm Maximum Standard Nominal thickness in mm. 2 200 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 2 500 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 2 800 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 3 200 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 3600 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 4000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 4500 63"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1730: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Sheets",
    "chunk_id": "IS17301989_2",
    "text": "IS 1730: 1989 Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes [Sheets]\n4.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows 0.40 0.80 1.12 1.60 2.00 2.80 4.00 0.50 0.90 1.25 1.80 2.24 3.15 4.30 0.63 1.00 1 .40 1.90 2.50 3.55 4.65 4.2 Dimensions Size mm × mm 1800 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2000 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2200 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2500 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2800 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3200 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3600 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 4000×600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1730: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Strips",
    "chunk_id": "IS17301989_3",
    "text": "IS 1730: 1989 Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes [Strips]\n5.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows : 1.60 2.24 3.15 4.50 8.00 1.80 2.50 3.65 5.00 10.00 2.00 2.80 4 .00 6.00 5.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows: 100 200 400 800 1050 1300 125 250 500 950 1150 1450 160 320 650 1000 1250 1550 6 Flats 6.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows : 3.0 8.0 20.0 4.0 10.0 25.0 5.0 12.0 30.0 6.0 15.0 40.0 50.0 6.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows: 10 45 90 180 16 50 100 200 20 60 120 250 25 65 130 300 30 70 140 400 35 75 150 40 80 160"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1730: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS17301989_4",
    "text": "IS 1730: 1989 Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes [Tolerances]\nThe rolling and cutting tolerances and masss tolerances for steel plates, sheet strips and , flats shall be as laid down in IS 1852 : 1985. * Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revesion) For detailed information, refer to IS 1730 : 1989 Steel plates, sheets, strips and flats structural and general engineering purposes – Dimensions (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1732: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS17321989_1",
    "text": "IS 1732: 1989 Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions [Scope]\nSpecifies dimensions, sectional areas and mass of hot-rolled round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes. This standard does not cover bars for rivets and threaded components."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1732: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS17321989_2",
    "text": "IS 1732: 1989 Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions [Designation]\nHot rolled round and square steel bars conforming to this standard shall be designated by the letters ISRO and ISSQ respectively followed by the diameter in mm in the case of round bars and the side width in mm in the case of square bars (See Tables 1 and 2)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1732: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Mass",
    "chunk_id": "IS17321989_3",
    "text": "IS 1732: 1989 Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions [Dimensions And Mass]\nThe dimensions of hotrolled round and square steel bars shall be as given in Tables 1 and 2. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF HOT- ROLLED ROUND STEELBARS Designation ISRO 5 ISRO 28 ISRO 70 ISRO 6 ISRO 30 ISRO 75 ISRO 8 ISRO 32 ISRO 80 ISRO 10 ISRO 35 ISRO 90 ISRO 12 ISRO 40 ISRO 100 ISRO 14 ISRO 45 ISRO 110 ISRO 16 ISRO 50 ISRO 120 ISRO 18 ISRO 55 ISRO 140 ISRO 20 ISRO 60 ISRO 160 ISRO 22 ISRO 65 ISRO 180 ISRO 25 ISRO 200 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF HOT-ROLLED SQUARE STEEL BARS Designation ISSQ 5 ISSQ 18 ISSQ 50 ISSQ 6 ISSQ 20 ISSQ 60 ISSQ 8 ISSQ 22 ISSQ 70 ISSQ 10 ISSQ 25 ISSQ 80 ISSQ 12 ISSQ 30 ISSQ 100 ISSQ 14 ISSQ 35 ISSQ 120 ISSQ 16 ISSQ 40 Note – For sectional areas and mass of bars, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1732 : 1989 Specifications for steel ba"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1863: 1979",
    "title": "Rolled Steel Bulb Flats",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS18631979_1",
    "text": "IS 1863: 1979 Rolled Steel Bulb Flats [Scope]\nSpecifies dimenions, sectional properties and dimensional tolerances of hot-rolled steel bulb flats\n[Materials] The bulb flats may be manufactured from steel conforing to IS 2062 : 1992. IS 3039 : 1988 or IS 8500 : 1991‡ as appropriate.\n[Designation] The bulb flats shall be designated by the width (b) and thickness (t) Example: 200 × 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1863: 1979",
    "title": "Rolled Steel Bulb Flats",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS18631979_2",
    "text": "IS 1863: 1979 Rolled Steel Bulb Flats [Dimensions]\nSee Table 1 and 1A TABLE 1 BULB FLATS - DIMENSIONS Designation 80 × 6 200 x 9 300 x 11 7 10 12 100 × 7 11.5 13 8 220 × 10 320 × 12 120 × 7 11.5 13 8 240 × 10 340 × 12 140 × 7 11 14 8 12 370 x 13 160 × 7 260 × 10 15 811 400 × 14 9 12 × 16 180 × 8 280 × 11 430 × 15 9 12 17 10 * Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) † Structural steel for construction of hulls of ships (second revision) ‡ Structural steel microalloyed - (medium & high strength qualities) (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1863 : 1979 Specifications for rolled steel bulb flats (first revision) TABLE 1 A SUPPLEMENTARY LIST OF BULB FLATS Designation 120 × 6 320 × 14 140 × 10 340 × 13 160 × 10 15 180 × 11 370 × 16 220 × 9 400 × 15 280 × 10 430 × 14 13 20 Note – For sectional properties of bul"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1863: 1979",
    "title": "Rolled Steel Bulb Flats",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS18631979_3",
    "text": "IS 1863: 1979 Rolled Steel Bulb Flats [Tolerances]\n5.1 Straightness – The maximum permissible variation in straigntness when measured over the entire length shall be 0.0035 x length. 5.2 Length – The cutting tolerance on length shall be 100 mm, – 0 mm Note—For tolerance on width thickness and weight, refer to the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_1",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Scope]\nStipulates dimensions and dimensional tolerances for Z-type , U-type an flat-type profile of hot rolled steel sheet piling sections. Sectional properties of these sections as calculated with the nominal dimensions are also included."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_2",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Materials]\nPiling sections shall be made from steel of any one grade conforming to IS 2062 : 1992* or IS 8500 : 1991† . Where steel is required in copper bearing quality, the copper content shall be between 0.20 and 0.35 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Types",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_3",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Types]\nZ- Type – Roughly Z shape with joints of piles when driven located alternately at inner and outsides of the pililng wall. U -Type – Roughly U shape with joints of piles when driven located on the neutral axis of the piling wall. Flat-Type – Having flat shape with high resistance to tensile forces."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_4",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Designation]\nSteel sheet piling sections conforming to this specification shall be designated with the letters ISPS followed by the section modulus per metre of wall in cm3 and letter symbols Z, U and F which denote Z-type , U-type and flat-type sections respectively. Designation for available piling sections shall be as follows: For detailed information, refer to IS 2314 : 1986 Steel sheet piling section (first revision). a) Z Type Piling Sections ISPS 1021 Z ISPS 1888 Z ISPS 1481 Z ISPS 2322 Z b) U Type Piling Sections ISPS 1625 U ISPS 2222 U ISPS 2770 U c) Flat - Type Piling Sections Designation IS PS 100 F Note – For detailed dimensions, tolerances and geometrical properties refer to Figs 1 to 3 and Table 1 to 5 of the Standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_5",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Tolerances]\n4.1 On Length – The sections shall be supplied in lengths between 9 m and 13.4 m subject to a tolerance of + 75 mm and -50 mm. Note – For detailed toleances, refer to 6 of the standard.\n[Surface Defects] Sheet piles shall not show defects under use steel sheet piles shall be straight and the cut and surface shall be flat."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Strength Of Joint",
    "chunk_id": "IS23141986_6",
    "text": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections [Strength Of Joint]\nTensile strength of joints of flat-type sheet piles shall not be less than 400 t/m. * Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) † Structural steel - Micro alloyed medium and high strength qualities (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3954: 1991",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Channel Sections For General",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS39541991_1",
    "text": "IS 3954: 1991 Hot Rolled Channel Sections For General [General]\nIS 3954: 1991 Hot Rolled Channel Sections For General ENGINEERING PURPOSES – DIMENSIONS (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3964: 1980",
    "title": "Light Rails",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS39641980_1",
    "text": "IS 3964: 1980 Light Rails [Scope]\nRequirements of light rail sections.\n[Designation] By letters ISLR followed by a figure denoting weight in kg per metre of the rail section.\n[Tensile Properties] Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 710 MPa with a minimum elongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.65 Where So is a area of cross section of specimen."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3964: 1980",
    "title": "Light Rails",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Dimensions And Sectional Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS39641980_2",
    "text": "IS 3964: 1980 Light Rails [Dimensions And Sectional Properties]\nDesignation Head Bottom Height Sectional width width mm Area mm mm cm2 ISLR 10 34.93 63.50 63.50 12.74 ISLR 12 35.72 68.00 69.85 15.24 ISLR 15 41.28 76.20 79.38 18.98 ISLR 25 52.39 100.01 104.78 31.68\n[Tolerances] Head width ± 2 mm Web thickness +1.0 –0.5 mm Height 1 mm Bottom flange width 2 mm Length of rail 50 mm Weight per metre 3 Percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3964: 1980",
    "title": "Light Rails",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS39641980_3",
    "text": "IS 3964: 1980 Light Rails [Freedom From Defects]\nRail should be reasonably free from twist, camber, etc. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions and sectional properties of rail sections, refer to Table-1 and 2 of the standard. Note 2 – For method of test, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3964 : 1980 Specifications for light rails (first revision). ± ± ± ± So"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8081: 1976",
    "title": "Slotted Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "Tolerance Of Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS80811976_1",
    "text": "IS 8081: 1976 Slotted Sections [Tolerance Of Dimensions]\n7.1 Flange Sectional Dimensions – The tolerance on sum of the dimensions of all flanges shall not exceed the following: Nominal Size Tolerance Over Up to and Percent Including mm mm – 40 ± 5 40 50 ± 4 50 75 ± 3 75 – ± 2 7.2 Flange Thickness – The tolerances on the thickness of the section, for steel and for aluminium section shall conform to the respective specification as appropriate. 7.3 Internal Radius of Bend – The internal radius of bend shall have a tolerance of 1.00 mm on the nominal radius. 7.4 Angle of Bend – The angle of bend shall be ± 20 throughout the width of the flange. 7.5 Size of Holes –The tolerance on size of holes shall be ± 0.1 mm. 7.6 Pitch of Holes – The deviation in the pitch of holes shall be ± 0.1 mm. 7.7 Overall Length 7.7.1 Standard Length – The tolerance on sta"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12778: 2004",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS127782004_1",
    "text": "IS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties [General]\nIS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties (First Revision) 1 Scope – Covers the nominal dimensions, mass and sectional properties of hot rolled parallel flange beams, columns and bearing piles. 2 Classification 2.1 Beams, column and pile sections are classified as follows. a) Indian Standard Narrow Parallel Flange Beams, NPB. b) Indian Standard Wide Parallel Flange Beams, WPB. c) Indian Standard Parallel Flange Bearing Piles, PBP. 2.3 The following abbreviated reference symbols have been used in designating the Indian Standard sections mentioned in 2.1: Sl.No. Section Classification Abbreviated Reference Symbol (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Beams ISNPB NPB ii) Beams/Columns ISWPB WPB iii) Pile Sections ISPBP PBP For detailed information, refer to IS 12778 : 2004 Specifications for hot rolled steel sections for parallel flange beams, columns – dimensions and section properties and bearing piles (first revision). 3 Dimensions, Mass and Tolerances 3.1 Nominal dimensions and mass of narrow and wide parallel flange beams and bearing piles shall conform to the values given in Tables 1 to 3, respectively of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12778: 2004",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS127782004_2",
    "text": "IS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties [General]\nfor parallel flange beams, columns – dimensions and section properties and bearing piles (first revision). 3 Dimensions, Mass and Tolerances 3.1 Nominal dimensions and mass of narrow and wide parallel flange beams and bearing piles shall conform to the values given in Tables 1 to 3, respectively of the standard. 3.2 Dimensional and mass tolerances of the various sections shall conform to the appropriate values stipulated in IS 12779*. 4 Sectional Properties Sectional properties of the beam, column and pile sections are given in Tables 1 to 3 of the standard, for information. * Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled parallel flange beam and column sections – specification."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12778: 2004",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS127782004_3",
    "text": "IS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties [General]\nshall conform to the appropriate values stipulated in IS 12779*. 4 Sectional Properties Sectional properties of the beam, column and pile sections are given in Tables 1 to 3 of the standard, for information. * Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled parallel flange beam and column sections – specification. SECTION 18 WELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES CONTENTS Title Page IS 814 : 2004 Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and 18.3 carbon manganese steel (Sixth revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12778: 2004",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS127782004_4",
    "text": "IS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties [General]\nand 18.14 magnesium alloy welding rods (first revision) IS 5898 : 1970 Copper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes 18.15 IS 6419 : 1996 Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded are welding of 18.16 structural steel (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 814: 2004",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS8142004_1",
    "text": "IS 814: 2004 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel [Scope]\nRequirements for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for carbon and carbon manganese steel, including hydrogen controlled electrodes for manual metal arc welding of mild and medium tensile steels including structural steels, depositing weld metal having a tensile strength not more than 610 MPa. 1.1 Electrodes designed specifically for repair welding, often markedted in India as ‘low heat input’ electrodes are not covered in this standard. 1.1.2 Ilmenite type electrodes are being used fairly widely in few other countries. There appears to be a trend to use ilmenite as an ingredient of the covering in our country also. Provision for a separate class for such electrodes may be considered at a later stage. Notes – For weld metal with tensile strength higher than 610 MPa, a ref"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 814: 2004",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS8142004_2",
    "text": "IS 814: 2004 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel [Classification]\n2.1 Coding Classification of electrodes shall be indicated by the coding system of letters and numberals as given below to indicate the specified properties or characteristics of the electrodes. 2.1.1 Main Coding– Shall be followed in the order stated: a) A prefix letter ‘E’ shall indicate a covered electrode for manual metal arc welding, manufactured by extrusion process; b) A letter indicating the type of covering; c) First digit indicating ultimate tensile strength in combination with the yield stress of the weld metal deposited; d) Second digit indicating the percentage elongation in combination with the impact values of the weld metal deposited; e) Third digit indicating welding position(s) in which the electrode may be used; and f) Fourth digit indicating the current condition in whi\n[Core Wire] Shall conform to IS 2879*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 814: 2004",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS8142004_3",
    "text": "IS 814: 2004 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel [Dimensions And Tolerances]\n4.1 Size and length – Shall be designated by the nominal diameter of the core wire expressed in mm. Shall be as given in Table 4. Tolerance on specified diameter of the core wire shall be ±0.05 mm. On specified length shall be ±3 mm. TABLE 4 SIZES AND LENGTHS OF ELECTRODES Size, mm Length, mm (1) ( 2) 1.6 150 or 200 or 250 2.0 200 or 250 or 300 or 350 2.5 250 or 300 or 350 3.15 350 or 450 4.0 350 or 450 5.0 350 or 450 6.3 350 or 450 8.0 350 or 450 * Mild steel for metal arc welding electrodes (third revision) 4.2 Bare Length (Contact End) Bare Length, mm Electrode size, mm Minimum Maximum 1.6 to 3.15 15 30 4.0 to 8.0 20 40 4.3 Bare Length ( Arc Striking End) – The arc striking end of the electrode shall be bare and permit easy striking of arc. The distance from the arc end to the first poi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1278: 1972",
    "title": "Filler Rods For Gas Welding",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12781972_1",
    "text": "IS 1278: 1972 Filler Rods For Gas Welding [Scope]\nRequirements of ferrous and non-ferrous filler rods for gas welding made of the following materials supplied in cut lengths. a) Structural steels, b) Austenitic stainless steels, c) Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and malleable iron castings), d) Copper and copper alloys, e) Nickel and nickel alloys, f) Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Size Diameter Tolerance on Diameter Other mm Cast Iron gas welding Filler Rods Filler Rods mm mm 1, 1.25,1. 6, 2, 2.5 ± 0.08 ± 0.05 3.15,4, 5, 6.3 8, 10, 12.5 ± 0.08 + 0.05 - 0.10 2.2 Length – It shall be 500 or 1000 mm for rods less than 2.5 mm dia and 1000 mm for rods 2.5 mm and above. The tolerance on length of cast iron filler rods shall be 6 50 + − mm. For all other rods sh"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4972: 1968",
    "title": "Resistance Spot – Welding Electrodes",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS49721968_1",
    "text": "IS 4972: 1968 Resistance Spot – Welding Electrodes [Scope]\nCode numbers (in metric units), dimensional requirements, and physical and mechanical properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap electrodes and shanks, mainly intented for resistance spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This standard covers . electrodes with standard ISO tapers and with Morse tapers. 2. Materials Recommended Class Material Conductivity Percent Vickers Application (that for Standard Pyramid Annealed Copper) Hardness (HV) I Cadmium copper con- 85 90 Spot-welding of coated steels, taining 0.5 to 1 percent aluminium and its alloys cadmium II Chromium copper con- 80-85 110 Spot-welding of steels other taining 0.5 to 0.8 percent than covered under class Chromium II and III III Cobalt, beryllium copper 45-50 180 Spot-welding of stainless and heat resisting"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5511: 1991",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Cast Iron",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS55111991_1",
    "text": "IS 5511: 1991 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Cast Iron [Scope]\nSpecifies a system of classification and coding and covers requirements for covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of cast iron. 2. Coding 2.1 Method of Coding a) Prefix symbol E b) Symbol for chemical composition of the electrode core wire or weld metal, using a group of letters and possibly a number ; c) Symbol characterising using one or two letters types of coating ; and d) Symbol relating to conditions of use : i) Welding positions – using a number ii) Power supply – using a number 2.2 Letter E at the head of the symbol code distinguishes the covered electrodes for are welding from any other filler product. 2.3 Symbols for Chemical Composition Basic Group Symbol Type of Alloy Iron Base FeC1 Grey cast iron FeC2 Grey cast iron with steel core Fe Steel Nickel Base NiFe Nickel-ir"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5897: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS58971985_1",
    "text": "IS 5897: 1985 Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods [Finish]\nFiller rods and wires shall have smooth finish, free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excess oxide or oil matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5897: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS58971985_2",
    "text": "IS 5897: 1985 Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods [Classification]\nS-Cu1, S-Cu2, S-Cu3 Si, S-Cu Sn1, S-Cu Sn2, S-Cu Al1, S-Cu Al2, S-Cu Al3, S-Cu Zn Al, S- Cu Ni1, S-Cu Ni2, S-Cu Ni3, S-Cu Al Ni, and S-Cu Mn Al1 based on their chemical composition. Note 1 – For requirement of spools and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard Note 2 – For chemical composition, refer to 10.3 to 10.16 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 5898 : 1970 Specifications for copper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5898: 1970",
    "title": "Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Condition Of Rod And Wire",
    "chunk_id": "IS58981970_1",
    "text": "IS 5898: 1970 Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes [Condition Of Rod And Wire]\n3.1 Finish – Filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods and wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being applied over a thoroughly clean surface. The copper content of the coated rod or wire (or wire plus the coating) expressed as a percentage of the rod shall not exceed 0.5 percent by weight. 3.2 Temper, Cast and Helix a)Temper – Shall be such that they are suitable for uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semiautomatic welding equipment. Tensile strength for those wound on spools of 300 mm and greater i"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5898: 1970",
    "title": "Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS58981970_2",
    "text": "IS 5898: 1970 Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes [Classification]\nS1, S2, S3, S4, S5 and S6 based on the chemical composition. In a classification for example, S5 - M504, S5 indicates chemical composition of the wire, M indicates that it is a mixed gas, 50 indicates tensile strength of minimum 500 MPa and 4 indicate impact value at 27 joules at minus 300C. SUMMARY"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6419: 1996",
    "title": "Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS64191996_1",
    "text": "IS 6419: 1996 Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel [General]\nIS 6419: 1996 Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel (First Revision) TABLE 1 TENSILE STRENGTH OF FILLER METAL WIRE Wire diameter, mm 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 to 2.0 2.1 to 3.2 Tensile length, 1100 1100 1000 950 900 700 600 MPa, Min A. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and Elongation Symbol Yield Tensile Percetage Elongation at Strength, Min Strength Gauge Length MPa MPa 5.65 , Min 50 420 500-640 22 B. Symbol Indicating the Impact Energy Symbol Minimum Impact Energy of 27 Joules(Charpy V-Notch at ºC Specimen) 1 + 27 2 0 3 - 20 4 - 30 C. Symbol Indicating Shielding Gas Symbol Type of Shielding Gas R Reducing gas I Inert gas M Mixed gas C Carbon dioxide F Nitrogen hydrogen mixture 5. Tests 5.1 Chemical Composition – See 12 of the standard 5.2 Soundness – Radiographs shall reveal no cracks or Zone of incomplete fusion. 5.3 All Weld Metal Mechanical Test – Ultimate tensile strength, yeild stress, percentage elongation and impact values shall be as specified in 4. Note – For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6419: 1996",
    "title": "Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS64191996_2",
    "text": "IS 6419: 1996 Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel [General]\nRadiographs shall reveal no cracks or Zone of incomplete fusion. 5.3 All Weld Metal Mechanical Test – Ultimate tensile strength, yeild stress, percentage elongation and impact values shall be as specified in 4. Note – For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6419 : 1996 Specifications for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel (first revision). So"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6560: 1996",
    "title": "Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Length Of Rods",
    "chunk_id": "IS65601996_1",
    "text": "IS 6560: 1996 Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding [Length Of Rods]\nRods less than 2.5 mm in diameter shall preferably be supplied in lengths of 500 or 1000 mm. Rods 2.5 mm and larger in diameter shall preferably supplied in lengths of 1000 mm. Lengths other than these two preferred lengths may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.3. Tolerance on each length of rod shall be ±5 mm 3. Conditions of Rods and Wires 3.1 Finish filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods and wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being applied over a throughly"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6560: 1996",
    "title": "Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS65601996_2",
    "text": "IS 6560: 1996 Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding [Classification]\nSLA-1, SLA-2, SLA-3, SLA-4 and SLA-5 based on chemical composition. In a classification, for example, SLA-5-M 504 where SLA-5 indicates chemical composition of the filler metal , M indicates that it is mixed gas,50 indicates tensile strength of minimum 500MPa and 4 indicates the impact values of 27 joules at minus 30ºC A. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and Elongation Symbol Yield Tensile Percetage Strength, Min Strength Elongation at Gauge Length MPa MPa 5.65 , Min 50 420 500 - 640 20 53 460 530 - 680 18 56 500 560 - 720 16 B. Symbol Indicating the Impact Energy Symbol Minimum Impact Energy of 27 Joules (Charpy V-Notch at ºC Specimen) 1 + 27 2 0 3 - 20 4 - 30 C. Symbol Indicating Shielding Gas Symbol Type of Shielding Gas R Reducing gas I Inert gas M Mixed gas C Carbon dioxide F Nitrog"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7280: 1974",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS72801974_1",
    "text": "IS 7280: 1974 Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels [Scope]\nRequirements of solid filler wires for submerged arc welding of structural steels (28-50 kgf/mm2 yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm2 ultimate tensile strength). Note – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3 and 8.0 mm. 2.2 Tolerance on the diameters of wires shall be ± 0.05 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7280: 1974",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Conditions Of Wires",
    "chunk_id": "IS72801974_2",
    "text": "IS 7280: 1974 Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels [Conditions Of Wires]\nFiller wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7280: 1974",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS72801974_3",
    "text": "IS 7280: 1974 Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels [Classification]\nAS-1, AS-1 Si, AS-2, AS-2Si, AS- 2 Mo, AS-2 Ni, AS-3, AS-3 Mo, AS-3 Mo Ni, AS-4, AS- 4 Mo, AS-6 and AS-6 Mo based on their chemical composition. Note 1– For requirements of reels for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard. Note 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7280 : 1974 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8363: 1976",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS83631976_1",
    "text": "IS 8363: 1976 Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels [Scope]\nRequirements of solid bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy steels. Note. – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 2.0, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0 and 6.3 mm. 2.2 Tolerance on dia on wire shall be 0 05 .0 + − mm 2.3 Ovality of wire shall not exceed 50 percent of tolerance on dia."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8363: 1976",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Conditions Of Wires",
    "chunk_id": "IS83631976_2",
    "text": "IS 8363: 1976 Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels [Conditions Of Wires]\nFiller wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8363: 1976",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS83631976_3",
    "text": "IS 8363: 1976 Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels [Classification]\nES-2, ES-2Si, ES-3, ES-3Mo, ES-3 MO Ni, ES-4, ES-4 Mo, ELS-4, ELS-4 Mo, ELS -2 Mo and ELS-2 Mo Cr based on their chemical composition. Note 1– For requirements of coils for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard. Note 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8363 : 1976 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels. 19.1 SECTION 19 THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS SP 21 : 2005 CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 207: 1964",
    "title": "Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2071964_1",
    "text": "IS 207: 1964 Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes [Scope]\nRequirements for gate and shutter hooks and eyes which are commonly used on doors and windows for keeping them in position when kept open. 2. Types Type 1– Mild steel and hard-drawn brass hooks and eyes, and Type 2– Cast brass hooks and plates. 3. Size and Dimensions (in mm) 3.1 Type 1– 65 (4.17), 5 (4.52), 100(5.23),125 (5.59)150 (5.59), 200 (6.30), 250 (6.30) 300 (7.01). 3.2 Type – 75(4), 100(5), 125(6.5), 200(8) Note – Figure in brackets indicate diameter (average diameter in case of cast brass hooks) of unthreaded shank. 4. Tolerances For length upto size 250 ± 2 mm For length upto size 300 ± 3 mm For average Diameter of ± 0.5 mm cast brass hooks"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 207: 1964",
    "title": "Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS2071964_2",
    "text": "IS 207: 1964 Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes [Finish]\nThe articles shall be finished bright. Note – For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Table 1 and 11, Fig.1 and 2 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 207 : 1964 Specification for gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 723: 1972",
    "title": "Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7231972_1",
    "text": "IS 723: 1972 Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails [Scope]\nRequirements of steel countersunk head wire nails. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm) 2.1 Dimensions Shank Length Head Diameter Diameter 1.25 20 3.4 1.4 20 3.8 1.6 15, 20, 25 4 1.8 25, 30 4.5 2 25, 30, 40, 50 4 2.24 40 4.5 2.5 50 5 2.8 60 5.6 3.15 60 5.7 3.55 80 6.4 4 100 7.2 4.5 90, 100, 125 8.1 5 100, 125, 150 9 6.3 150 11.3 8 200, 225 14.4 10 250 18 2.2 Tolerances (in mm) a) On shank dia 1.25 to 2.24 ±0.04 2.5 ±0.05 2.8 to 10 ±0.06 b) On length 15 to 20 ±1 25 to 30 ±1.2 40 ±1.5 50 to 60 ±2.1 80 ±2.6 90 ±3.1 100 ±3.4 125 to 150 ±3.8 200 to 250 ±4.4 2.3 Bend of shank shall not exceed 1 percent of length. 2.4 Eccentricity and ovality of centre of nail head from axis of shank: a) Maximum12 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter 2 mm and above. b) Maximum14 percent of shan\n[Designation] As an example, a countersunk head nail of size 4.00 mm and length 100 mm shall be designated as `Nail 4 × 100 IS : 723’.\n[Finish] Shall be supplied plain finished."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 723: 1972",
    "title": "Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Test (Bend Test)",
    "chunk_id": "IS7231972_2",
    "text": "IS 723: 1972 Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails [Test (Bend Test)]\nTest piece shall not break or develop crack when doubled over by pressure or hammer blows until internal radius equals diameter of test piece and sides are parallel. For detailed information, refer to IS 723 : 1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 724 :1964 Specification for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes ( revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 724: 1964",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7241964_1",
    "text": "IS 724: 1964 Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes [Scope]\nRequirements for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes.\n[Types] a) Shouldered cup hooks b) Shouldered ruler hooks c) Shouldered square hooks d) Plain cup hooks e) Plain ruler hooks f) Plain square hooks 2.1 Screw Eyes shall be of One Type Only."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 724: 1964",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS7241964_2",
    "text": "IS 724: 1964 Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes [Designation]\nShall be based on type, length, and screw designation No. of the fitting. For example, shouldered cup hook of length 25 mm and of screw designation No.5. shall be designated as “Shouldered cup hook 25×No. 5” 4. Dimensions 4.1 Shouldered cup, ruler and square hooks Dimension Designation 15×No.3 20×No.4 25×No.5 35×No.7 40×No.8 50×No.10 50×No12 D(mm) 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.88 5.59 T(mm) 4.7 6.5 8.0 12.5 14.0 17.5 20.0 4.2 Plain Cup and Ruler Hooks Dimension Designation 25×No.5 30×No.7 40×No.8 45×No.8 5o×No.8 D(mm) 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.17 4.17 T(mm) 8.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 4.3 Plain Square hooks Dimension Designation 20×No.4 25×No.5 30×No.6 40×No.7 50×No.9 60×No.12 75×No14 D(mm) 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.52 5.59 6.30 T(mm) 8.0 10.0 14.0 15.0 20.0 24.0 28.0M 4.4 Screw eyes Dimension Designation 16×\n[Finish] Hooks and eyes shall be finished bright."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 725: 1961",
    "title": "Copper Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS7251961_1",
    "text": "IS 725: 1961 Copper Wire Nails [Scope]\nCovers the following types of copper wire nails: a) Rose-head boat nails, square shank, square point. b) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, sharp square point. c) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, round point, d) Wrought tacks e) Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 725: 1961",
    "title": "Copper Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions (In Mm)",
    "chunk_id": "IS7251961_2",
    "text": "IS 725: 1961 Copper Wire Nails [Dimensions (In Mm)]\nLengths of different types of copper nails are given in 2.1 to 2.5. Values given in brackets are the sizes of shank across flats except in case of Type (e) where it is diameter. 2.3 Type (c) – 40 (2.5), 25 (2.5) 2.4 Type (d) – 30 (2), 25 (2), 20 (2), 20 (1.6) 2.5 Type (e) – 20 (1.8), 15 (1.8), 10 (1.8), 10 (1.6)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 725: 1961",
    "title": "Copper Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS7251961_3",
    "text": "IS 725: 1961 Copper Wire Nails [Finish]\nShall be finished bright and free from burrs and sharp edges except at the points. In case of tinned copper nails, tin coating shall cover nails completely and uniformly. 2.1 Type (a) 110 (5) 110 (4) 100(5) 100 (4) 100(3.15) 90 (5) 90 (4) 90(3.15) 80 (4.5) 80(4) 80(3.15) 80 (2.5) 70 (4) 70 (3.15) 70 (2.5) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 60 (2.5) 60 (2) 50 (3.15) 50 (2.5) 50 (2) 45(3.15) 45 (2.5) 45 (2) 40(3.15) 40(2.5) 40(2) 35(3.15) 35(2.5) 35 (2) 30(3.15) 30 (2.5) 30 (2) 25(5) 25 (2.5) 25 (2) 25(1.6) 2.2 Type (b) 125 (5) 100 (5) 100 (4) 100 (3.15) 90(3.55) 80 (5) 80 (3.15) 70 (5) 70 (3.15) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 50(3.55) 50(3.15) 40 (3.15) 30 (3.15) 25 (3.15) 20 (3.15) Note 1– Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of Types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be 3 times the size"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 730: 1978",
    "title": "Hook Bolts For Corrugated Sheet Roofing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7301978_1",
    "text": "IS 730: 1978 Hook Bolts For Corrugated Sheet Roofing [General]\nIS 730: 1978 Hook Bolts For Corrugated Sheet Roofing (Second Revision) Note 1– Preferred lengths – 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190 and 200mm. Note 2– Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to two-thirds times the total length of the screw. Note 3– For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard. Note 4– For tolerances, refer to 3 (Fig. 1) of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1120: 1975",
    "title": "Coach Screw",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS11201975_1",
    "text": "IS 1120: 1975 Coach Screw [Scope]\nRequirements of hexagon head coach screws (hexagon head wood screws). 2. Dimensions (in mm) For detailed information, refer to IS 1120 : 1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision). Size No. Diameter of Unthreaded Shank Range of Preferred Screw Length (See Note 1) Designation Nominal Max Min 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 20 - 35 14 6.33 6.43 6.05 20 - 100 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 25 - 110 24 9.86 9.98 9.00 25 - 200 28 11.28 11.40 11.02 25 - 200 (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1120: 1975",
    "title": "Coach Screw",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS11201975_2",
    "text": "IS 1120: 1975 Coach Screw [Designation]\nAs an example, a hexagon head coach screw of screw No. 10, length 30 mm and made of steel, shall be designated as Coach Screw No.10 x 30 IS 1120 Steel. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4016 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part12002_1",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4016 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon head botts with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C. 2. Dimensions M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. Note – For details,of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS AND NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADE C PART 1 : HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS (SIZE RANGE M5 TO M64) (Fourth Revision) 2.1 Prefered threads – M5, M6 and M64 2.2 Non - Prfered threads – M14, M18, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, and M60"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4016 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Specifications",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part12002_2",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4016 : 1999 [Specifications]\nSee Table 1 Note – For corresponding Indian Standards of certain International standard refer, along with their degree of equivalence, refer the National Foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part I) : 2002 – ISO 4016 : 1999. Specification for Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part I Heaxagon head bolts (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4016 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part12002_3",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4016 : 1999 [Designation]\nExample for the designation of a hexagon head bolt, with thread M12, nominal length l = 80 mm and property class 4.6 : Hexagon head bolt IS 1363 (Part I) – ISO 4016 M12 × 80 – 4.6’ TABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 8g Thread International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Property class a) d≤ 39 mm : 3.6, 4.6, 4.8 Mechanical properties d > 39 mm : as agreed International Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-1 d > 39 mm : as agreed Product grade C Tolerance International Standard ISO 4759-1 As processed Finish (1)Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042. (2)If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer a"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4018 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part22002_1",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4018 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.\n[Dimensions] M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. Note – For details, of preferred and non preferred threads size refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard). 2.1 Prefered the neads 2.2 Non - Preferred thneads – M14, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60\n[Specifications] See Table 1 HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADE C PART 2 : HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS (SIZE RANGE M5 TO M64) (Fourth Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4018 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part22002_2",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4018 : 1999 [Designation]\nExample for the designation of a hexagon head screw with thread M12, nominal length Note – For corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer , the National Forewrd of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 2) : 2002 ISO 4016 : 1999 Specification for hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision). TABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 8g Thread International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Classa) d ≤ 39 mm : 3.6, 4.6, 4.8 Mechanical properties d > 39 mm : as agreed International Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-1 d > 39 mm : as agreed Pr"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4034 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1363Part32002_1",
    "text": "IS 1363 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4034 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon head bolts with threads from M1,6 up to and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1,6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter. 2. Dimensions 4. Designation : Example for the designation of a hexagon head bolt with thread M12, nominal length l = Note – For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of equivalence,refer , the National Foreward of the standard. 80 mm and property class 8.8 : Hexagon head bolt IS 1364 (Part 1) – ISO – 4014 – M12 × 80 – 8.8 2.1 Preferred threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part12002_1",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A [General]\nIS 1364 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A AND B PART 1 : HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64) (Third Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 1) :1992. Specification for ISO 4014 : 1998. Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B – Part I – Hexagon head bolts (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision). TABLE 1 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General International Standard ISO 8992 requirements Thread Tolerance 6g International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Mechanical Property classa d < mm: as agreed d ≤ 24 m: A2-70, A4-70 Materials properties 3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm 24 mm < d ≤ mm: specified 5.6, 8.8, 9.8, 10.9 A2-50, A4-50 ISO 8839 d > 39 mm: as agreed d > 39 mm: as agreed International Standard 3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm: d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1 ISO 898-1 d > 39 mm: as agreed d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm: as agreed Tolerance Product grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part12002_2",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A [General]\nmm: as agreed International Standard 3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm: d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1 ISO 898-1 d > 39 mm: as agreed d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm: as agreed Tolerance Product grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or 150 mmb: A Ford > 24 mm or / > 10 d or 150 mmb: B International Standard ISO 4759-1 Finish and/or coating As processed Plain Plain Requirements for Requirements for electroplating are covered in electroplating are ISO 4042 covered in ISO 4042 Requirements for non-electrolytically applied zinc flake coating are covered in ISO 10683 If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier. Limits for surface discontinuities are covered in ISO 6157-1 Acceptability For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269. a For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively. b Whichever is shorter."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4017 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part22002_1",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4017 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M1.6 upto and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1 6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter. 2. Dimensions Note —For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence refer to the National foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1364(Part 2) :1992— ISO 4017 : 1998. Specification for Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 2- Hexagon head screws (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4017 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part22002_2",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4017 : 1999 [Designation]\nExample for the designation of a hexagon screw with thread size M12, nominal length l = 2.1 Prefered threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. 2.2 Non– Preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, and M60. Note —For details, of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4017 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Specifications",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part22002_3",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4017 : 1999 [Specifications]\nSee Table 1 80 mm and property class 8.8—Hexagon head bolt IS 1364 (Part 2) — ISO 4017 — M12 x 80— 8.8 TABLE 2 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General International Standard ISO 8992 requirements Thread Tolerance 6g International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Mechanical Property classa d < mm: as agreed d ≤ 24 m: A2-70, A4-70 Materials properties 3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm 24 mm < d ≤ mm: specified 5.6, 8.8, 9.8, 10.9 A2-50, A4-50 ISO 8839 d > 39 mm: as agreed d > 39 mm: as agreed International Standard d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 898-1 d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1 d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm: d > 39 mm: as agreed as agreed Tolerance Product grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or 150 mmb: A Ford > 24 mm or / > 10 d or 150 mmb: B International Standard ISO 4759-1 Finish and/o"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4032 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part32002_1",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4032 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon nuts style 1, with thread diameters from M1.6, to M64, with product grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade B for d > M16."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4032 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part32002_2",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4032 : 1999 [Dimensions]\n2.1 Threads Preferred throads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. 2.2 Non - preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60. Note—For details, of preferred and non preferred sizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4032 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Specifications",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part32002_3",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4032 : 1999 [Specifications]\nSee Table 1 HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS AND NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADES A & B PART 3 : HEXAGON NUTS (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64) (Fourth Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1364(PART 3) :1992.Specification for ISO 4032:1986 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B— Part 3— Hexagon nuts (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision). 4. Designation : Example for the designation of a hexagon nut,style1, with thread size d= M12, and property class 8: Hexagon nut IS 1364(PART 3)— ISO4032—M12 — 8 TABLE 3 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General International Standard ISO 8992 requirements Thread Tolerance 6H International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Mechanical Property classa d < M3: as agreed d ≤ M24: A2-70, A4-70 Materials"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Iso 4035 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part42003_1",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003 Iso 4035 : 1999 [Scope]\nGives specifications for chamfered hexagon thin nuts, with thread diameters from M1.6 to M64,including , with product grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade B for threads d > M16."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Iso 4035 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part42003_2",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003 Iso 4035 : 1999 [Dimensions]\n2.1 Preferred threads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64 2.2 Non–preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M2.7, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60 Note – For details, on preferred and non -preferred sizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Iso 4035 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Specifications",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part42003_3",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003 Iso 4035 : 1999 [Specifications]\nSee Table 1 HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS,SCREWS&NUTS OFPRODUCTGRADEA &B PART 4 HEXAGON THIN NUTS (CHAMFERED) (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64) (Fourth Revision) Note – For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer to National Foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 4):1992. - ISO 4035: 1986 hexagon head bolts, screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 4 – Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision). 4. Designation : Example for the designation of a hexagon chamfered haxagon thin nut with thread size d= M12, and property class 05 :Hexagon thin nut IS 1364 (Part 4) — ISO 4035— M12 — 05 TABLE 3 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel No"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part52002_1",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002 Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product [Scope]\nGives specifications for hexagon thin nuts with metric dimensions and thread diameters from 1.6, up to and including 10 mm and product grade B.\n[Dimensions] M1.6, M2, M2.5, M(3.5), M4, M5, M6, M8, M10. Note – For details see 3 of the standard\n[Specifications] See Table Note — For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer to National foreward of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1364Part52002_2",
    "text": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002 Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product [Designation]\nExample for the designation of an hexagon thin nut with metric thread d=M6 For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 5) :1992 - ISO 4036 : 1979 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B Part 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (Size range M1.6 to M10) (fourth revision). made from steel with 110 HV 30.(st): Hexagon nut IS 1364 (Part 5) — ISO 4036 M6-st TABLE 4 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel (S) Non - ferrous metal General International ISO 8992 requirments Standard Thread Tolerance 6H International ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Standards Mechanical Hardness min. 110 HV30 International Materials as specified in ISO 8839 Standard Tolerances Product grade B International ISO 4759-1 Standard As processed Plain Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1365: 1978",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13651978_1",
    "text": "IS 1365: 1978 Slotted Countersunk Head Screws [Scope]\nRequirements for slotted countersunk head screws in the diameter range 1 to 20 mm. 2. Requirements 2.1 Mechanical Properties – Shall conform to IS : 1367*. Where brass or aluminium alloy is used, it shall have minimum tensile strength of 300 MPa. 2.2 Grade— Precision Grade (P) of IS : 1367*—"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1365: 1978",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS13651978_2",
    "text": "IS 1365: 1978 Slotted Countersunk Head Screws [Designation]\nShall be designated by name, nominal size, length, the number of this standard and the property class. For example, a slotted countersunk head screw of size M4, length 10 mm and of property class 4.8 shall be designated as : Countersunk Screw M4 × 10 —IS 1365—4.8 For detailed information, refer to IS 1365 : 1978 Specification for slotted countersunk head screws (third revision). 4. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Diameter Length Size Nom Max Min M1 1.9 1.90 1.76 1.10 M1.2 2.3 2.30 2.16 1.12 (M1.4) 2.6 2.60 2.46 1.14 M1.6 3.0 3.00 3.00 2.16 (M1.8) 3.4 3.40 3.10 2.18 M2 3.8 3.80 3.50 2.52 (M2.2) 4.2 4.20 3.90 2.52 M2.5 4.7 4.70 4.40 3.25 M3 5.6 5.60 5.30 4.30 (M3.5) 6.5 6.50 6.14 4.35 M4 7.5 7.50 7.14 5.40 (M4.5) 8.3 8.30 7.94 7.45 M5 9.2 9.20 8.84 7.50 M6 11 11.0 10.57 7.55 M8 14.5 14.5 14.07 9."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1366: 2002",
    "title": "Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS13662002_1",
    "text": "IS 1366: 2002 Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted [Scope]\nRequirements for slotted cheese head screws of product grade A and with the neads from M1.6 to M10. CHEESE HEAD SCREWS (Third Revision)\n[Dimensions] M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, (M3.5), M4, M6, M8, M12"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1366: 2002",
    "title": "Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS13662002_2",
    "text": "IS 1366: 2002 Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted [Designation]\nas per sheet attahced. For detailed information, refer to IS 1366 : 1982. Specification for Slotted cheese head screws (third revision). Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 6 g Thread International Standards ISO 261, ISO 965-2 Property class 4, 8, 5.8 A2-70, A2-50 Mechanical properties International Standards ISO 898-1 ISO 3506 ISO 8839 Product grade A Tolerance International Standard ISO 4759-1 Plain Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042. If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements Finish areneeded for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer and supplier. Limits for surface discontinuities are covered in ISO 6157-1 and ISO 6157 - 3. Acceptability Accepta"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1929: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS19291982_1",
    "text": "IS 1929: 1982 Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing [Scope]\nRequirements of hot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets (snap head, flat countersunk head and flat head rivets) for hot closing in the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Range of Preferred Length Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm mm mm 12 28-80 13.5 14 32-95 15.5 16 35-110 17.5 18 40-120 19.5 20 45-125 21.5 22 50-140 23.5 24 55-160 25.5 27 65-180 29 30 70-200 32 33 85-225 35 36 95-225 38 For detailed information, refer to IS 1929 : 1982 Specification for hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter) (first revision). Note 1– The nominal diameters 14, 18, 22, 27 and 33 mm are of second preference. Note 2 – Preferre"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1929: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS19291982_2",
    "text": "IS 1929: 1982 Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing [Tolerances]\nOn length, +1.5, – 0 mm for diameter upto 16 mm and +3.0, – 0 mm for diameter above 16 mm. 4. Tests 4.1 Shear Test – Shear stength shall not be less than 260 MPa for mild steel rivets and 280 MPa for high tensile rivets. 4.2 Head Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1929: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS19291982_3",
    "text": "IS 1929: 1982 Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing [Designation]\nAs an example, a high tensile steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as ``Snap Head Rivet 16 × 70HT IS 1929”. In case of mild steel revet, the symbol `HT’ shall not be included in designation. Note 1– For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 2– For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, methods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2016: 1967",
    "title": "Plain Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS20161967_1",
    "text": "IS 2016: 1967 Plain Washers [Tolerances]\n+0.5 for l ≤ 10; 4. Tests 4.1 Shear Test – Shear strength shall not be less than 260 MPa. 4.2 Heat Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between head and shank."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2016: 1967",
    "title": "Plain Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS20161967_2",
    "text": "IS 2016: 1967 Plain Washers [Finish]\nPlain washers shall be supplied in natural finish. At the request of purchasers, washers may be phosphate coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc. *General requirements of plain washers and lock washers (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2016 : 1967 Specification for Plain washers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2016: 1967",
    "title": "Plain Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20161967_3",
    "text": "IS 2016: 1967 Plain Washers [Scope]\nRequirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Range of Preferred Length – Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes – Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm mm mm 6 12-55 6.3 8 14-70 8.4 10 18-85 10.5 12 20-100 13 14 22-110 15 16 24-110 17 Note 1– The nominal diameter 14 mm is of second preference. Note 2– Preferred lengths–- 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48, 50, 55, 60, 65,70, 75, 80,85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2016: 1967",
    "title": "Plain Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS20161967_4",
    "text": "IS 2016: 1967 Plain Washers [Designation]\nAs an example, a snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated as Snap Head Rivet 6 × 30 IS 2155. For detailed Information, refer to IS 2155 : 1982 Specification for cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision). Note 1 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 2 – For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, Methods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 technical supply conditions for rivets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2155: 1982",
    "title": "Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivets For Hot",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS21551982_1",
    "text": "IS 2155: 1982 Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivets For Hot [Scope]\nRequirements for black square bolts and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black square screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm. 2. Requirements 3. Designation 2.1 Mechanical Properties – Bolts and screws shalll conform to the property class 4.6 and those for nuts to property class as specified in the prescribed standard. 2.2 Grade – Shall conform to the black grade B as specified in prescribed Fastener Thread Length Designation Size (mm) Square bolt with square nut M10 30 Square bolt M10×30N — IS 2585 Square bolt only M10 30 Square bolt M10×30 — IS 2585 Square screw M10 30 Square screw M10×30 — IS 2585 Square nut M10 - Square nut M10 — IS 2585 Square bolt with hexagon nut M10 30 Square bolt M10×30HN — IS 2585 4. Dimensions (in mm) Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Thickness Length of Le"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2585: 1968",
    "title": "Black Square Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS25851968_1",
    "text": "IS 2585: 1968 Black Square Bolts And Nuts [Scope]\nRequirements for cap nuts of product Grade A in the size range M4 to M48 with coarse pitch and fine pitch threads. For detailed information, refer to IS 2687 : 1991. Specification for cap nuts (second revision) Tolerances Product Grade A Screw Threads Tolerance 6H Material Steel Stainless Steel Non-ferrous Metal Mechanical Property <M36 : 5 <36 : Al – 50 Brass or Properties Class >M36: as agreed >M36 : as agreed Al. Alloy by purchaser by purchaser and supplier and supplier Min 300 N/mm2 As produced or Bright As produced electroplated Finish coatings Hot-dip galvanized coatings"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2585: 1968",
    "title": "Black Square Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS25851968_2",
    "text": "IS 2585: 1968 Black Square Bolts And Nuts [Dimensions]\nM4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, and M48. Note – For details See Table 1 of the standard. 4. Designation 4.1 The Cap Nuts shall be designated by the nomenclature, thread size and number of this standard. 4.1.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M8 shall be designated as – Cap Nut IS 2687 : M8 4.2 When stainless steel, brass or aluminium alloy is used for manufacture of cap nuts, the word `Stainless Steel’, `Brass’ and `Aluminium’ shall be added at the end of the designation. Note1 – Refer to various Parts of IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners. Note2 – For references to corresponding Indian standards for tolerences, screw threads, mechanical properties and finish, refer to 3. 2. Technical Supply Conditions 4.2.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M10 and mad"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2687: 1991",
    "title": "Cap Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS26871991_1",
    "text": "IS 2687: 1991 Cap Nuts [General]\nIS 2687: 1991 Cap Nuts (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2907: 1998",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS29071998_1",
    "text": "IS 2907: 1998 Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm) [Scope]\nRequirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets in the diameter range of 1mm to 10mm, intended for general engineering purposes.\n[Dimensions A) Snap Head Rivets] Nominal sizes 1, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. b) Flat Counter sink head – (90º and 120 º) rivets Nomininal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. c) Flat head rivets – Nominal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm Note 1– For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 2 – For preferred diameter-length combinations refer to Table 4 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2907: 1998",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS29071998_2",
    "text": "IS 2907: 1998 Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm) [Designation]\nShall be designated by type head, nominal diameter, length, material and number of this standard. In case of countersunk head rivets. A . Note *– For method of test refer to IS 10102 : 1982 Technical supply condition for rivets. For detailed information, refer to IS 2907 : 1998 Specification for non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm) (first revision). countersunk angle (90º or 120º) shall be included in the designation. Example — A snap head rivet of 6 mm nominal diameter, having length of 30 mm and made of copper, shall be designated as snap head rivet 6 × 30 IS 2907 Copper."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2907: 1998",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Manufacture",
    "chunk_id": "IS29071998_3",
    "text": "IS 2907: 1998 Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm) [Manufacture]\nShall be made by cold forging and shall subseqnently be appropriately head treated, if necessary. 5. Tests 5.1 Heat Soundness Test – Shall withstand the prescribed test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the filled between head and the shank. 6. General Requirement 6.1 In respect of requirements not covered in this standard, the rivets shall conform to IS 10102 : 1982* 6.2 Limits of Surface cracks on rivets shall be in Technical suply conditino for rivels accordance with"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2998: 1982",
    "title": "Cold Forged Steel Rivets For Cold",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS29981982_1",
    "text": "IS 2998: 1982 Cold Forged Steel Rivets For Cold [General]\nIS 2998: 1982 Cold Forged Steel Rivets For Cold CLOSING (1 TO 16 MM DIAMETER) (First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2998 : 1982 Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision). Note 1– For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard. Note 2– For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface crack on rivets, tolerances, refer to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10102: 1982",
    "title": "Technical Supply Conditions Of Rivets.",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS101021982_1",
    "text": "IS 10102: 1982 Technical Supply Conditions Of Rivets. [General]\nIS 10102: 1982 Technical Supply Conditions Of Rivets. Note 3 – For methods of tests, refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brinell hardness test for Metallic material (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3063: 1994",
    "title": "Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS30631994_1",
    "text": "IS 3063: 1994 Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers [Scope]\nRequirements for single coil rectangular section spring lock washers suitable for use with bolt/ nut assemblies involving fasteners of property class 5.8 or less in the size range 2 to 100 mm. 2. Types Type A – Spring lock washers with bent (deflected or tong ) ends Type B – Spring lock washers with flat (square ends)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3063: 1994",
    "title": "Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS30631994_2",
    "text": "IS 3063: 1994 Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers [Dimensions]\nNominal sizes 2, 2.2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 80, 90 and 100 mm. Nominal sizes of non-prefered sizes are 3.5 ,7,14, 18, 22, 27, 33, 39 and 45 mm. Note —For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to Table 1A and 1B of the standard.\n[Materials] The spring lock washers shall be made from suitable steel according to IS 4072 : 1975 * to meet the requirements specified\n[Finish] Natural – May be phosphate coated, nickel plated, electro-galvanized, copper plated or cadmium plated if specified."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3063: 1994",
    "title": "Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS30631994_3",
    "text": "IS 3063: 1994 Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers [Designation]\nThe spring lock washers shall be designated by the nomenclature, type, nominal size, the number of this standard and the surface protection, if any. Example – A spring lock washer of nominal size 10 mm, Type A and with phosphate coating shall be designated as follows : Spring Lock Washers A 10 - IS 3063 Phosphate coated * Steel spring washers (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3063 : 1994 Specification for fasteners-single coil rectangular section spring lock washers (second revision). Note 1– For test detailed, refer to 11 of the standard. Note 2– For spring force test,refer to Annex A of the standard. 6.1 In case the spring washer is intended for use with LH thread, the designation shall be modified as follows: Spring Lock Washer LH-A 10 IS 3063 Phosphate coated 7. G"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3121: 1981",
    "title": "Rigging Screws And Stretching Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS31211981_1",
    "text": "IS 3121: 1981 Rigging Screws And Stretching Screws [Scope]\nRequirements regarding materials, components, dimensions, finishing and tests for rigging screws and stretching screws (double-ended and singleended) of the following nominal size : a) Rigging screws – M12 to M90 b) Stretching screws – M6 to M52 2. Dimensions 2.1 Rigging Screws (With Screwed Eye at Both Ends): Nom. Siz Length Proof (Dia of Load Screw) Closed/mm Open/ mm kN M12 330 525 10.0 M16 370 550 18.0 M20 400 570 28.0 M24 475 700 36.0 M27 550 825 44.0 M30 550 825 63.0 M33 600 875 75.0 M36 600 875 86.0 M39 660 960 100.0 M45 700 960 112.0 M52 750 1 000 144.0 M56 775 1 025 194.0 M60 800 1 050 214.0 M64 1 070 1 450 286.0 M68 1 120 1 590 342.0 M75 1 270 1 700 400.0 M80 1 360 1 760 500.0 M90 1 440 1 860 624.0 2.2 Stretching Screws Nominal SizeLoad Body Length Proof (Dia of Screw) mm kN M6 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3468: 1991",
    "title": "Pipe Nuts",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS34681991_1",
    "text": "IS 3468: 1991 Pipe Nuts [General]\nIS 3468: 1991 Pipe Nuts (Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3757: 1985",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Bolts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS37571985_1",
    "text": "IS 3757: 1985 High Strength Structural Bolts [Scope]\nRequirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel bolts in property classes 8.8 and 10.9 and in the size range M16 to M36 with short thread lengths suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel joints. Bolts to this standard when matched with the appropriate nuts have been designed to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening. Note – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that the bolts are correctly used if satisfactory results are to be obtained. 2. Dimensions and Tolerence 2.1 Thread sizes shall be M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1of the standard. Note 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. 2.2 Re\n[Grades] The bolts shall be of product grade C as specified in IS 1367(Part 2) *\n[Mechanical Properties] The bolts shall as specified in prescribed standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3757: 1985",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Bolts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS37571985_2",
    "text": "IS 3757: 1985 High Strength Structural Bolts [Finish]\nShall be in dull black heat treated condition with a residual coating of light oil. Where property class 8.8 bolts are required to be hot dip galbanized they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of IS 1367(Part13) + Note – Bolts of property class 10.9 should not be hot dip galvanized since this may cause hydrogen embritlement. 6 General Requirements 6.1 In regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the bolts shall conform to prescribed standards. 6.2 In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, tbe bolts shall conform to IS 1367(Part I)+ * ISO Metric screw thread * As per sheet + Attahced + For commercial bolts and nuts (diameter range 1 to 52 mm) (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4762: 1984",
    "title": "Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS47621984_1",
    "text": "IS 4762: 1984 Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose [Scope]\nRequirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.\n[Sizes] 12, 16, 20, 22, 25,28, 30, 35, 38, 40, 45, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 115, 120, 130, 140, 145, 150 and\n[General] For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4762: 1984",
    "title": "Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS47621984_2",
    "text": "IS 4762: 1984 Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose [Materials]\nShall be selected at the manufacturer’s discretion provided that the finished clamps meet the test requirements. 4. Manufacture 4.1 Screw – Shall be held captive in the clamp housing 4.2 Band – Shall have a thread form commencing at the free end and extending for a length sufficent to enable the clamp to be tightened on to the smallest diameter of component within the working range for which it is designed. 4.3 Housing – Shall be readily removable from the band."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4762: 1984",
    "title": "Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS47621984_3",
    "text": "IS 4762: 1984 Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose [Designation]\nShall be designated by nomenclature, size and number of this standard. 5.1 A hose clamp of size 25 mm shall be designated as – Hose clamp 25 – IS 4762. 6. General Requirements 6.1 When the loop is formed, the screw shall be held firmly in engagement with the band during tightening and the clamp shall be capable of being decreased in diameter by turning the screw in clockwise direction and increased in diameter by turning the screw in anti- clockwise direction. 6.2 After expanding until the band is disconnected from the screw, it shall be to open clamps of size 35 and above to provide a gap equal to the largest diameter of the hose for which the clamp is designed and to permit easy fitting and removal of the clamp by passing the clamp over the hose in position without disturbing any connect"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4762: 1984",
    "title": "Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS47621984_4",
    "text": "IS 4762: 1984 Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose [Finish]\nShall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges. Clamps other than those manufactured from corrosion-resistant materials shall be protected against corrosion by electroplating as specified. 8. Tests 8.1 Free Turning Toque Test – Shall be conducted to ensure smooth action of the lubricated clamp in its freeturning state. 8.2 Torque Test — Shall reveal no sign of permanent distortion of the housing nor damage determental to the efficient functioning of the clamp when tightened to 75 percent of torque load specified. Also, the torque load at premanent distortion or failure shall be in excess of the appropriate value specified. 8.3 Fatique Torque Loading Test – These shall be no distortion or permanent deformation of the clamp as a whole when tested as prescribed. 8.4 Hydraulic Pressure Te"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5369: 1975",
    "title": "General Requirements For Plain Washers And Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS53691975_1",
    "text": "IS 5369: 1975 General Requirements For Plain Washers And Lock Washers [Scope]\nGeneral requirements and permissible deviation for plain washers, lock washers and similar parts.\n[Grades] Precision and ordinary. For detailed information, refer to IS 5369 : 1975 Specification for general requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision) Note– For permissible deviation on main dimensions and concentricity of the hole with respect to outside diameter of precision grade washers as well as of ordinary grade washers, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard. 3. Requirements 3.1 Finish —Natural. May be phosphate-coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper-plated or cadmium-coated. 3.2 Shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other defects. All sharp edges shall be removed."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5372: 1975",
    "title": "Taper Washers For Channels (Ismc)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS53721975_1",
    "text": "IS 5372: 1975 Taper Washers For Channels (Ismc) [General]\nIS 5372: 1975 Taper Washers For Channels (Ismc) (First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5373: 1969",
    "title": "Square Washers For Wood Fastenings",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS53731969_1",
    "text": "IS 5373: 1969 Square Washers For Wood Fastenings [Scope]\nRequirements for square washers intended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in diameter range 10 to 52 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Sides Thickness For Bolt Size Size (Dia of Hole) 11.5 30 3 M10 14 40 4 M12 18 50 5 M16 23 60 5 M20 24 70 6 M22 27 80 6 M24 (30) 90 6 (M27) 33 95 6 M30 (36) 100 6 (M33) For detailed information, refer to IS 5373 : 1969 Specification for square washers for wood fastenings. Note— Other Requirements not covered in the standard shall conform to IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision). 39 110 8 M36 (42) 125 8 (M39) 45 135 8 M42 48 140 8 M45 52 150 10 M48 56 160 10 M52 Note 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\n[Designation] As an example, a square washer for wood fastenings having a nominal size of 18 mm shall be designated as `Square Washer18 – IS 5373’."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5374: 1975",
    "title": "Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS53741975_1",
    "text": "IS 5374: 1975 Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb) [Scope]\nRequirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Beams (ISMB) with bolts of 10 mm to 39 mm diameter. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal L × B Thickness For Bolt Size (See Note 1) Size (Diameter Thin Thick of Hole) End End 11 22 × 22 1.5 4.6 M10 14 26 × 30 2 6.2 M12 18 32 × 36 2.5 7.6 M16 22 40 × 44 3 9.2 M20 (24) 44 × 50 3 10 (M22) 26 56 × 56 3 10.8 M24 (30) 56 × 56 3 10.8 (M27) 33 62 × 62 3 11.7 M30 (36) 68 × 68 3 12.6 (M33) 39 75 × 75 3 13.6 M36 (42) 80 × 80 3 14.2 (M39) For detailed information, refer to IS 5374 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first revision). Note 1– L × B are dimensions for taper washers in plan Note 2– Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. Note 3– For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 2 of the Standard.\n[Grades] ‘Ordinary’ grade of IS : 5369-1975 *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5374: 1975",
    "title": "Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS53741975_2",
    "text": "IS 5374: 1975 Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb) [Designation]\nAs an example, a taper washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as `Taper Washer 18 IS : 5374. * General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5624: 1993",
    "title": "Foundation Bolts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS56241993_1",
    "text": "IS 5624: 1993 Foundation Bolts [Scope]\nRequirements for J-type hook bolts and nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers of aluminium for roofing sheets. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Aluminium and aluminium alloys, as specified in the standard. Size Nominal Dia Thread Length, Size of Nut Preferred Lengths Min M6 6 25 M6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 and 150 M8 8 25 M8 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190 and 200 M10 10 25 M10 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,160, 170, 180, 190 and 200 3.2 Mushroom Head Seam Bolts and Nuts — Size Nominal Dia Thickness of , Size of Nut Preferred Lengths Head (Nom) M5 5 3 M5 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50 M6 6 4 M6 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100 M8 8 5 M8 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6113: 1970",
    "title": "Aluminium Fasteners For Building Purposes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS61131970_1",
    "text": "IS 6113: 1970 Aluminium Fasteners For Building Purposes [Designation]\nAs an example, seam bolt size M8, length 20 mm and material HG 19 shall be designated as `Seam Bolts M8 x 20, IS 6113— HG 19’. For detailed information, refer to IS 6610 : 1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS66101972_1",
    "text": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures [Scope]\nRequirements for heavy washers for use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to 42 mm. Nominal Tolerance on Outer Dia Tolerance Thickness Suitable for Size Size on Outer Bolt Size (Diameter) Dia 14 +0.43 24 -1.30 8 M12 18 +0.43 30 -1.30 8 M16 22 +0.52 37 -1.60 8 M20 24 +0.52 39 -1.60 8 M22 26 +0.52 44 -1.60 8 M24 30 +0.52 50 -1.60 8 M27 33 +0.62 56 -1.90 8 M30 36 +0.62 60 -1.90 8 M33 39 +0.62 66 -1.90 8 M36 42 +0.62 72 -1.90 8 M39"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS66101972_2",
    "text": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures [Materials]\nShall be made from steel. Note – Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS 5369 : 1975 General requiremens for plain washers and lock washers (first revision). 2. Dimensions (in mm)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS66101972_3",
    "text": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures [Designation]\nShall be designated by name , size, the number of this standard and the property class identification symbol 8s or 10s. In case of hot dip galvanized nuts the word galvanized shall be added to the designation. Example – A high strength structural nut of size M24, propery class 8 and galvanized shall be designated as — High Strength Structural Nut M24 IS 6623—8S Galvanized ** High strength structural bolts (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Mechanical Properties",
    "chunk_id": "IS66101972_4",
    "text": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures [Mechanical Properties]\nShall be of property class B 10 as per the specified standard, except that all nuts shall be or C hardened and then tempered at a temperature of atleast 4250c and the proof load and hardness values as given in Table 2 of the standard. 5. Finish : Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil. 6.1 Where property class 10 nuts are required to be hot-dip galvanized, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of IS : 1367 (Part 13)- 1983. * The hot-dip galvanized nuts shall be subjected to the anti-seizing test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS66101972_5",
    "text": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures [Requirements]\nIn regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the nuts shall conform toIS 1367 (Part 10) :2002 * 6.1 In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part1) :2002+ 6.2 The high strength structural bolts to be used with these nuts shall conform to the requirements of IS : 3757**"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6623: 2004",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS66232004_1",
    "text": "IS 6623: 2004 High Strength Structural Nuts [Scope]\nRequirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel nuts in property classes 8 and 10 and in the size range M16 to M36 suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel connections. Nuts to this standard when matched with the appropriate bolts have been designed to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening. Note – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that the nuts are correctly used if satisfactory results are to be obtained. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Thread Sizes – M12, M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36 Note 1 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference Note 2 – For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 of the standard 2.2 Threads of the nuts shall be in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6623: 2004",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS66232004_2",
    "text": "IS 6623: 2004 High Strength Structural Nuts [Grades]\nUnless other wire specified the nuts shall be of product grade B as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2). The tolerances on the threads shall conform to tolerance 6H of IS 14962 [Part (1, 2 and 3) and in case of hot dip galramized with the tolerances shall be in accordance with IS 14962 [(Part 4 and 5)] * Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners (various parts) + ISO metric Threads For detailed information, refer to IS 6639 : 1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979",
    "title": "*",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1367Part21979_1",
    "text": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979 * [Scope]\nRequirements for hexagon bolts in the size range 12 to 39 mm for steel structures. 2. Dimensions (in mm) 3. Requirements 3.1 Mechanical Properties– Shall conform to property class 4.6 or 5.6 of IS 1367(Part3) :1991*. The bolts shall withstand a minimum shear stress of 260 MPa (for bolt testing purposes and is not related to actual design stresses). 3.2 Grade – Product grade C according to * Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (various Parts)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979",
    "title": "*",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS1367Part21979_2",
    "text": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979 * [Designation]\nBy size, length, number of the standard and property class. Example – Hex Bolt M12 × 30 – IS 6639 – 4.6 + Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C. ** Industrial Hexagon nut of product grade C Hot dip galvanized (size range M12 to M36 fasteners) Size Diameter Distance Between Length of Bolts Parallel Side, Nom Nom (see Note 1) Nom Max Min M12 12 12.70 11.30 19 30-120 M16 16 16.70 15.30 24 35-150 M20 20 20.84 19.16 30 40-175 (M22) 22 22.84 21.16 32 40-200 M24 24 24.84 23.16 36 45-200 (M27) 27 27.84 26.16 41 60-200 M30 30 30.84 29.16 46 80-200 (M33) 33 34.00 32.00 50 100-200 M36 36 37.00 35.00 55 100-200 (M39) 39 40.00 38.00 60 110-200 Note 1— Range of preferred lengths. Note 2— Preferred lengths - 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS66391972_1",
    "text": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures [Scope]\nRequirements for through hardened and tempered steel washers intended for assembly with large series hexagon, high strength structural bolts and nuts in the size range M16 to M36. 2. Types Type A – Plain hole circular washers. Type B – Square taper washers for use with channels (60 taper) Type C– Square taper washers for use with I-beams (80 taper)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS66391972_2",
    "text": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures [Dimensions And Tolerances]\n3.1 Nominal Size (Thread Size of Associated Bolt) M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36. See Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. 3.2 The washers shall be flat with a maximum deviation not exceeding 0.25 mm from the straightedge laid along a line passing through the centre of the hole. 3.3 The hole of the washer shall be concentric with the outside dimensions within 0.50 mm. 3.4 When circular or square taper washers are required to be clipped to provide clearance, the clipped edge shall not be closer to the centre of the washer than 0.9 of the bolt diameter. In case of square taper washers, these may be clipped along the thin edge parallel to the opposite edge.\n[Grades] Shall conform to IS 5369 : 1975 +.\n[Materials] The washers shall be made from 45C8 steel as perscribed.\n[Hardness] Shall be between 35 to 45 HRC. The minimum for hot-dip galvanized washers shall be 26 HRC."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS66391972_3",
    "text": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures [Finish]\nShall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil. 7.1 Where washers are required to be hot-dip galvanized, they shall conform to the prescribed standard except that the minimum value of average mass of coating shall be 300 g/m2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS66391972_4",
    "text": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures [General Requirements]\nIn regard to requirements not covered in the standard, the washers shall conform to the requirements specified for ordinary washers according to IS 5369 : 1975. 8.1 The high strength structural bolts to be used with these washers shall conform to the requirements of IS 3757:1985. # 8.2 The high strength structural nuts to be used with these washers shall conform to the requirements of IS 6623:1985. *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS66391972_5",
    "text": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures [Designation]\nShall be designated by the word `washer’, nominal size, type and the number of this standard. In case of hot-dip galvanized washers the word galvanized’ shall be added to the designation. Examples – A plain hole circular washer of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized shall be designated as – Washer M24A – IS 6649 galvanized. 9.1 A square taper washer of 60 taper for use with channels, of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized shall be designated as – Washer M24B– IS 6649 galvanized. # High strength structural bolts (second revision). * High strength structural nuts (first revision). + General reqirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6649 : 1985 Specification for hardened and tempered wa"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6649: 1985",
    "title": "Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS66491985_1",
    "text": "IS 6649: 1985 Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts [Scope]\nRequirements of wall and roofing nails. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Type of Size Dia of Length Approx Nail (Dia of Head No. of Shank) Nails/kg Wall nail 4.00 8.0 30 260 4.50 9.0 40 190 Wall nail 5.60 13.4 50 95 60 80 6.30 15.1 70 60 80 50 2.1 Maximum eccentricity and ovality of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent of shank diameter, Max. Note 1— For tolerance, refer to Table 1 of the standard. Note 2— Length of tapered portion (pointed at bottom) of the nail shall be 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of shank.\n[Designation] Shall be designated by size, length and the number of the standard. Example– Wall nail 4 × 30 — IS 6733 Roofing nail 5.6 × 50 — IS 6733"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6649: 1985",
    "title": "Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS66491985_2",
    "text": "IS 6649: 1985 Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts [General Requirements]\nNails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks on shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wastes. Wall nails shall have sharp points and roofing nails, a chiesel point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with shanks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6649: 1985",
    "title": "Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS66491985_3",
    "text": "IS 6649: 1985 Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts [Finish]\nPlain finished. 6. Test 6.1 Bend Test – Nails when cold shall not break or crack when doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece For detailed information, refer to IS 6733 : 1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6733: 1972",
    "title": "Wall And Roofing Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS67331972_1",
    "text": "IS 6733: 1972 Wall And Roofing Nails [Scope]\nRequirements for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws. 2. Dimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded shank Range of Screw Preferred Lengths Designation) Nom Max Min (see Note1) 0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30 6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12-40 7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40 8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75 9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-75 14 6.30 6.43 6.05 25-75 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30-75 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-75 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-75 24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-75 Note 1– Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75mm Note 2– Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2/3 times the total length of the screw. Note 3– Dia of head (Max)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6733: 1972",
    "title": "Wall And Roofing Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS67331972_2",
    "text": "IS 6733: 1972 Wall And Roofing Nails [Designation]\nAs an example, a slotted raised countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as `Wood Screw No. 8 × 20 IS 6736 Steel. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6736: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS67361972_1",
    "text": "IS 6736: 1972 Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws [General]\nIS 6736: 1972 Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6739: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Round Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS67391972_1",
    "text": "IS 6739: 1972 Slotted Round Head Wood Screws [Scope]\nRequirements for slotted round head wood screws. 2. Dimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of Screw Preferred Designation) Nom Max Min Lengths (See Note1) 0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30 6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12-40 7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40 8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75 9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-75 14 6.30 6.43 6.05 25-75 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30-75 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-75 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-75 24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-75 Note 1— Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,65, 70 and 75 mm Note 2— Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2/3 times the total length of the screw. Note 3— Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 t"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6739: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Round Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS67391972_2",
    "text": "IS 6739: 1972 Slotted Round Head Wood Screws [Designation]\nAs an example, a slotted round head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as `Wood Screw No. 8×20 – IS 6739 Steel’. For detailed information, refer to IS 6739 : 1972 Specification for slotted round head wood screws. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999. Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 6760 : 1972 Specification for slotted countersunk wood screws."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6760: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS67601972_1",
    "text": "IS 6760: 1972 Slotted Countersunk Head Wood Screws [Scope]\nRequirements for washers with square hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range 6 to 24 mm.\n[Grades] Ordinary grade as specified in IS 5369 3. Dimensions (in mm) Size (Side of External Thickness Suitable of Internal Square) Dia / Side Bolt Size 6.6 22 1 M6 9 28 2 M8 11 34 2 M10 14 45 3.15 M12 18 58 4"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8033: 1976",
    "title": "Washers With Square Hole For Wood",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS80331976_1",
    "text": "IS 8033: 1976 Washers With Square Hole For Wood [Designation]\nAs an example, a slotted countersunk head bolt of nominal size M16, length 70 mm with nut and property class 8.8 shall be designated as `Slotted Countersunk Head Bolt M16 × 70 N IS 8412— 8.8’. 4.1 When the bolts are required without nuts, the letter `N’ appearing between length and number of the standard in the designation shall be omitted."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8033: 1976",
    "title": "Washers With Square Hole For Wood",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS80331976_2",
    "text": "IS 8033: 1976 Washers With Square Hole For Wood [Scope]\nRequirements of slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Nominal Dia Range of Preferred Size Lengths (See Note 1) M10 10 20-160 M12 12 25-160 M16 16 30-160 M20 20 50-160 M22 22 55-160 M24 24 60-160 Note 1– Preferred lengths – 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 and 160 mm. Note 2– For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table 1 of the Standard. Note 3 – For lengths of fully threaded bolts, refer to Table 2 of the Standard.\n[Grades] Black grade (B) as specified in the prescribed standard.\n[Mechanical Properties] Property classes 4.6 or 8.8 of the prescribed standard.\n[General Requirements] Nuts used with slotted countersunk head bolts shall conform to the requirements as specified in the prescribed standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8412: 1977",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS84121977_1",
    "text": "IS 8412: 1977 Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures [Scope]\nRequirements for washers for corrugated sheet roofing. 2. Types a) Bituminous felt washers, b) Steel washers, and c) Lead washers. 2.1 Bituminous felt washers and lead washers are of two types namely Type A and Type B, and steel washers are four types namely Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D. 3. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Size Thickness Suitable (Dia of Hole) Bolt Size 7 1.6 M6 10 1.6 M8 12 1.6 M10 For detailed information, refer to IS 8869 : 1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing. Note 1—The dimensions given in the above table shall be applicable to all types of washersmentioned in 2 and 2.1. Note 2— For detailed dimensions and shapes of washers of all types, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.\n[Grades] Ordinary grade specified in IS 5369."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8412: 1977",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS84121977_2",
    "text": "IS 8412: 1977 Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures [Designation]\nAs an example, a bituminous felt washer, Type A of nominal size 7 shall be designated as `Bituminous Felt Washer A7 – IS 8869. 6. General Requirements 6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping. 6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably impregnated. These washers when heated and maintained at a temperature of 75 ± 10C for 1 hour shall not get separated and flow out. * General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8869: 1978",
    "title": "Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS88691978_1",
    "text": "IS 8869: 1978 Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing [General]\nIS 8869: 1978 Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10238: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Dimensions And Tolerances",
    "chunk_id": "IS102382001_1",
    "text": "IS 10238: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [Dimensions And Tolerances]\nShall be as given in figure 1 of the standard.\n[Grades] The step bolts shall be of product Grade C as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2)+\n[Mechanical Properties] The step bolts shall conform to the requirements of property class 4.6 as specified in IS1367 (Part 3)++ 5. Mating Nuts and Washers 5.1 Nuts – The hexagon nuts used with step bolts covered in this standard shall be of property class 5 and conforms to the requirements of the prescribed standard. 5.2 Washers – The plain washers used on these bolts shall be of Type A punched washers type and conform to the requirements given in the prescribed standard except the thickness of washers which shall be 5 ± 1mm. The washers supplied along with bolts shall shall be hot-dip galvanized"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10238: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS102382001_2",
    "text": "IS 10238: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [General Requirements]\nThe permissible surface discontinuities of the step bolts shall conform to IS 1367(Part 9/Sec2).* 7. Finish 7.1 The step bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with IS1367(Part13)* 8. Tests 8.1 The step bolts shall not have any permanent set when subjected to the cantilever test as shown in Fig. 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10238: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS102382001_3",
    "text": "IS 10238: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [Designation]\nThe step bolts shall be designated by the size, length and the number of this Indian Standard. The letter NN shall be added to the designation to indicate supply with two nuts. Example – A step bolt of size M16 and length 175mm with two hexagon nuts shall be designated as – Step bolts M16×175 NN IS 10238 + Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12427: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS124272001_1",
    "text": "IS 12427: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [Scope]\nCovers the requirements for hot-dip galvanized hexagon head transmission tower bolts in the size range M12 to 24 for use in the construction of transmission towers, sub-stations and similar steel structures 1.1 The bolts covered in this standard are not suitable for applications requiring improved low temperatures characteristics. 2. Dimensions 2.1 The dimensions of the bolts shall be as given in Table 1 when read with Fig 1. of the standard. 2.2 The length-size combinations as well as grip ranges shall be as given in Table 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12427: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS124272001_2",
    "text": "IS 12427: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [Grades]\nUnless otherwise specified, the bolts shall be of product grade ‘C’ as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2) * 4. Mating Nuts and Washers 4.1 Nuts—The hexagon nuts used with these bolts shall conform to the requirements given in IS 14394. 4.2 Washers 4.2.1 The plain washers used with these bolts shall be of type A, punched washer type and shall conform to the requirements of the prescribed standard to except the thickness of the washer which shall be 5 ± 1 m m. The washers supplied along with these bolts shall be hot-dip galvanised. 5. Mechanical Properties 5.1 The bolts shall be of property class 5.6, 5.8 or 8.8 as specified in IS : 1367 (Part 3)* and shall be tested full size. 5.2 Shear Strength 5.2.1 The Bolts with shank lengths ls more than the nominal diameter shall withstand a minimum shear\n[General Requirements] The permissible surface discontinuities of the bolts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 9/sec 1) *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12427: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS124272001_3",
    "text": "IS 12427: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel [Designation]\nThe bolts shall be designated by nomenclature, thread size, nominal length, number of this standard and property class.. The letters N and W shall be added to the designation to indicate supply with nut and plain wsher respectively. Example – A transmission tower bolt of thread size M16 and nominal length 50mm with nut and property class 5.6 shall be designated as—Transmission Tower Bolts M16 × 50 N– 5.6 IS 12427. A transmission tower bolt of thread size M16, nominal length 50mm, property class 5.6 with nut and plain washers shall be designated as: Transmission Tower Bolt M16× 50NW—5.6 IS 12427. For detailed information, refer to IS 12427 : 2001 Specification for fasteners – Threaded steel fasteners hexagon head transmissiom tower bolts (first revision). *Technical supply conditions for th"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 278: 1978",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2781978_1",
    "text": "IS 278: 1978 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing [Scope]\nRequirements for two types of galvanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire.\n[Types] 2.1 Types A (Iowa Type) – Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around both line wires making altogether four complete turns. 2.2 Types B (Glidden Type) — Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around one line wire making altogether four complete turns. Note — For details, see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Sizes (in mm) Sizes Nominal Diameter Mass of Distance Desig- Complete Between nation Line Point Barbed Two Wire Wire Wire Barbs g/m 1. 2.50 2.50 136-155 75±12 2. 2.50 2.50 108-120 150±12 3. 2.50 2.00 108-125 75±12 4. 2.50 2.00 89-103 150±12 5. 2.24 2.00 97-106 75±12 6. 2.24 2.00 78-85 150±12 Note – Number of lays between the two consecutive barbs shall vary between 2 to 7. 3.1 Tolerances – ± 0.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 278: 1978",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS2781978_2",
    "text": "IS 278: 1978 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing [Materials]\nGalvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS 280 : 1978.* * Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision) Note – For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–tensile testing (second revision), IS 1755 : 1983 Method for wrapping test of mettalic wire (first revision) and IS 4826 : 1979 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision). For detailed infomation, refer to IS 278 : 1978 Specifications for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing. (third revision). 4.2 Freedom from Defects 4.2.1 Line and point wires shall be circular in section, free from scales and other defects and shall be uniformly galvanized. 4.2.2 Line wire shall be in continuous lengths and shall not contain any welds other than those in rod before it is d"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 278: 1978",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Designation",
    "chunk_id": "IS2781978_3",
    "text": "IS 278: 1978 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing [Designation]\nA galvanized steel barbed wire of Type A and of size designation 1 shall be designated as: Steel Barbed Wire, A-1 IS 278 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength of line wire shall be 390 to 590 N/mm2. Minimum breaking loads of completed barbed wire and individual line wires shall be 3.7 and 3.0 kN for 2.50 and 2.24 line wire respectively. 6.2 Zinc Coating – 6.2.1 Line wire – Shall satisfy the requirements as for minimum medium coated wire given in IS 4826 : 1979†. subject to a reduction of not more than 15 percent of the specified values. 6.3 Ductility Test – Line wire shall withstand wrapping and unwrapping eight turns round its own diameter without fracture. † Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2140: 1978",
    "title": "Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS21401978_1",
    "text": "IS 2140: 1978 Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing [Scope]\nRequirements for galvanized strand fencing wire of 3-ply and 7-ply construction. For detailed information, refer to IS 2140 : 1978 Specifications for stranded galvanized steel wire for fencing (first revision). 2. Dimensions 2.1 Wire Strand, 3-Ply Construction Nominal Dia Minimum Breaking Load Length of Tolerance on of Single Wire Lay Length of Lay SingleWire Completed 540 N/mm2 Strand* mm N N mm mm 1.60 1080 3078 40 ±10 2.24 2160 6156 50 ±10 2.50 2700 7695 60 ±10 2.80 3240 9234 60 ±10 3.15 4320 12312 70 ±10 3.55 5400 15390 80 ±10 *The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load. 2.2. Wire Strand, 7- Ply Construction Nominal Dia Minimum Breaking Load Length of Tolerance on of Single Wire Lay Length of Lay SingleWire Completed 540 N/mm2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2140: 1978",
    "title": "Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS21401978_2",
    "text": "IS 2140: 1978 Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing [Materials]\n3.1 Shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS 280 : 1978*. The wire shall have a tensile strength of 540 N/mm2, Min. 3.2 The galvanized Mild steel wire used shall conform to the requirements for galvanizing as laid down for the’ heavily- coated wire’ or ‘ medium coated wire as per the prescribed standard. * Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision).\n[Lay] Shall be right-hand. The strand shall be evenly and uniformly laid . The length of the lay shall be as specified in 2.1 and 2.2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2140: 1978",
    "title": "Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Freedom From Defects",
    "chunk_id": "IS21401978_3",
    "text": "IS 2140: 1978 Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing [Freedom From Defects]\nShall be free from scale, irregularities,imperfections, flaws, sand- spilts and other defects. The galvanizing shall be smooth, even and bright. 6. Tests 6.1 Minimum Breaking Load — As given in 2.1 and 2.2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2365: 1977",
    "title": "Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS23651977_1",
    "text": "IS 2365: 1977 Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists [Scope]\nRequirements of steel wire ropes for use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or platforms carrying passengers or goods and working in guides. Does not apply to ropes used for winding purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and size ranges are covered: Nominal Approximate Range of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponsing Diameter Mass Range to Tensile Designation of Wires of mm kg/100m 1230 1420 1570 kN kN kN 6 12.5 t o 13.7 13.6 t o 15 15.7 t o 17.3 17.4 to 19.1 7 17.0 t o 18.6 18.5 t o 20.4 21 t o 23 24 t o 26 8 22.1 t o 24.3 23 t o 27 26 t 31 29 t o 34 9 28.0 t o 30.8 29 t o 34 33 t o 39 37 t o 43 10 34.6 t o 38.0 35 t o 42 41 t o 48 45 t o 53 11 41.9 t o 46.0 43 t o 50 49 t o 58 55 t o 64 12 49.8 t o 54.7 51 t o 60 59 t o 69 65 t o 76 13 58.9 t o 64.3 60 t o 70 69 t o 81 76"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2365: 1977",
    "title": "Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS23651977_2",
    "text": "IS 2365: 1977 Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists [General Requirements]\nThe wire ropes shall conform to IS 6594 : 1977* and also meet the following requirements of 3.1 to 3.3. * Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS27211979_1",
    "text": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric [Scope]\nRequirements for galvanized steel chain fence fabric intended for various purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements pertaining to straining posts, struts, base plates and other fittings. *Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS27211979_2",
    "text": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric [Dimensions]\nSee Table 2.1 Mesh Size – Shall be determined by measuring the minimum clear distance between the wires forming the parallel sizes of the mesh when measured in normal structured condition. 2.2 Width – Shall be the overall dimension from one extreme line wire to other extreme line wire and shall be checked in fully stretched condition. The tolerance on the width shall be ± 0.7 of the mesh size. 2.3 Length – Shall be supplied in rolls of 5, 10, 15,20, and 25m or as per the requirements of the purchaser The supplied length shall not be less than the above values when measured in fully stretched condition. 2.4 Tolerances – As per IS 280 *"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS27211979_3",
    "text": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric [Materials]\nThe mesh wire and the line wire of the fabric shall be manufactured from galvanized steel conforming to IS 280* having a tensile strength within the range of 400 to 550 MPa.\n[Galvanizing] The chain link fence fabric shall have zinc coating of type ‘ heavy’ as given in the prescribed standards."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Workmanship And Finish",
    "chunk_id": "IS27211979_4",
    "text": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric [Workmanship And Finish]\nEach roll shall be warranted to contain no weld joint or splice whatever. The wire shall be circular and shall be free from scales, irregularities, imperfections, flaws, sand splits and other defects. The zinc coating shall be smooth, even and bright. 5.1 The fabric shall be manufactured in widths of 0.90 m, 1.20m, 1.50 m, 1.80 m, 2.00 m, 2.50, and 3.00 m, or as per the requirements of the purchaser. Table 1 Dimensions and Tolerances Mesh Nominal Line Wire Size Dia of Mesh Wire Diameter Number of wires mm mm mm Up to and Above 2 m including width 2 m width (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 2.00 2.50 2 3 25 ± 3 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 5 2.00 2.50 2 3 40 ± 4 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 4.00 4.50 2 3 2.00 2.50 2 3 50 ± 4 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 4.00 4.50 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 63 ± 4 4.00 4.50 2 3 4.50 5."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS27211979_5",
    "text": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric [Tests]\n6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength shall be within the range of 400 to 550 N/mm2. 6.2 Wrapping Test – Wires shall not break or split when wrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened. 6.3 Twist Test – Mesh and line wires shall withstand not less than 18 twists on a length equal to 100 diameters between rices. 6.4 Bend test– Mesh wire and line wire of 5 mm diameter and above shall be subjected to this test. The wire shall withstand being bent through an angle of 900 round a former of diameter equal to twice its own diameter without breaking or splitting. 6.5 Galvanizing Test – Shall be up to 10 percent less than the minimum mass of zinc coating specified in the prescribed standard and withstand one dip of half minute duration less than specified. For detailed in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990",
    "title": "Safety Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS2553Part11990_1",
    "text": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990 Safety Glass [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for safety glass meant for general purposes such as for use in glazing windows, doors of buildings and railway coaches. 2. Types a) Toughened safety (tempered) glass (TS) b) Toughened float safety glass(TF), c) Laminated safety glass (LS) and d) Laminated float safety glass (LF). 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Material – Safety glass shall be made of ‘A A’ and ‘A’ quality [see IS 2835 : 1987*] from flat transparent glass. Note – Safety glass may also be made from float glass, if agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 3.1.1.1 Safety glass may be flat or curved and tinted/ coloured itself or by providing coloured interlay(s),as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 3.1.2 Measurement of thickness — The thickne"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990",
    "title": "Safety Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Specific Requirements For Laminated Safety Glass",
    "chunk_id": "IS2553Part11990_2",
    "text": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990 Safety Glass [Specific Requirements For Laminated Safety Glass]\n* Specified Requirements for laminated Safety glass- 3.3.1 Thickness – Laminated safety glass shall be of thickness as specified in Table 1. 3.3.1.1 If agreed between the purchaser and the supplier, nominal thickness of laminated safety glass, other than those specified in Table 1 may also be supplied. In such cases the range of thickness shall be those which are applicable to immediately lower thickness as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF THICKNESS, DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE ON LENGTH AND WIDTH OF LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS (CLAUSES 3.3.1, 3.3.1.1 AND 3.2) SL. Nominal Range of Dimensional No Thickness Thickness Tolerance on Cut Size Length and Width (1) (2) (3) (4) mm mm mm i) 3.5 3.1 to 3.7 2.5 ii) 4.0 4.0 to 4.8 2.5 iii) 5.0 5.0 to 5.8 2.5 iv) 6.0 6.0 to 6.8 2.5 v) 8.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2835: 1987",
    "title": "Flat Transparent Sheet Glass",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS28351987_1",
    "text": "IS 2835: 1987 Flat Transparent Sheet Glass [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in the manufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety glasses and for glazing and framing purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2835: 1987",
    "title": "Flat Transparent Sheet Glass",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "section": "Classification A) Aa Quality Or Special Selected Quality (Ssq)",
    "chunk_id": "IS28351987_2",
    "text": "IS 2835: 1987 Flat Transparent Sheet Glass [Classification A) Aa Quality Or Special Selected Quality (Ssq)]\nIn tended for use where superior quality of safety glass, high quality mirrors, photographic plates, projection slides, etc. b) A quality or selected quality (SQ) – Intended for selected glazing, manufacture of mirrors, safety glass etc. c)B Quality or Ordinary Quality (OQ) – Intended for glazing and framing purposes; and d) C Quality or Greenhouse Quality (GQ) – Intended for green house glazing, production of frosted glass, strips for flooring, etc. 3. Requirements 3.1 Material – Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent and clear as judged by the unaided eye. It may, however, possess a light tint, when viewed edge-wise. It shall be free from any cracks. 3.2 Dimensions – Nominal thickness, range of thickness and dimensional tolerance on cut sizes (length and width) of sheet glass shall be as"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3438: 1994",
    "title": "Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34381994_1",
    "text": "IS 3438: 1994 Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for silvered glass mirrors used for general purposes. 2. Requirements 2.1 General – Mirrors shall consist of glass sheet coated with silver on one surface. The silver shall be protected by a metallic copper film which in turn shall be covered by a suitable protective paint coating. 2.2 Glass Sheet – The Glass sheet used for mirrors shall comply with the requirements prescribed for AA and A qualities of IS 2835 : 1987 Note – Float glass may also be used if agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.3 Silvering – Silvering shall be a coating of deposited silver. It shall be free from defects or blemishes in the reflecting surface, such as, lifting or separation of the silver from the glass, sulphide or other spots, haze of any other visi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3438: 1994",
    "title": "Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS34381994_2",
    "text": "IS 3438: 1994 Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes [Tests]\nShall pass the prescribed tests for: a) Test for waviness b) Salt spray test c) Hot water test d) Testing for copper and silver plating. Note— For methods of tests refer to 5 and Appendices A to D of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3438 : 1994 Specifications for silvered glass mirrors for general purposes (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5437: 1994",
    "title": "Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS54371994_1",
    "text": "IS 5437: 1994 Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for figured, rolled and wired glass. 2. General Requirements 2.1 May be clear or tinted as agreed. 2.2 Shall not contain any stones with cracks. 2.3 Shall not contain any stones bigger than 2 mm diameter or which protrude from either side of the glass. 2.4 Stones shall be seperated by at least 60 cms. 2.5 The glass sheet shall have not more than one gaseous inclusion greater than 3.5 mm or equivalent elliptical inclusion up to 20 mm long in 1m2 of each cut sheet. 2.6 Warpage – Shall not be more than 1 percent. 3. Thickness and Dimensional Tolerance of Figured and Rolled Glass 3.1 Thickness and dimensional tolerances of figured and rolled glass shall be as given below. Any other thickness as agreed to between purchaser and supplier may be provid"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5437: 1994",
    "title": "Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "section": "Specific Requirements For Wired Glass",
    "chunk_id": "IS54371994_2",
    "text": "IS 5437: 1994 Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass [Specific Requirements For Wired Glass]\n4.1 Thickness — Thickness of wired glass shall be 6.0 ± 0.4 mm. Note – The thickness can also be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier and the maximum tolerance on thickness shall be 9 percent of the nominal thickness 4.2 Dimensional Tolerance – Tolerance on cut size of wired glass shall be ± 3.0 mm. 4.3 Wire Mesh – The wire mesh used in the wired glass or wired figured glass shall be made of steel wire 0.46 to 0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal with wires twisted. In the case of welded mesh, the wire running across the manufacturing width shall be measured. 4.4 Position of Wire Mesh – The wire mesh shall be embedded completely in the glass sheet at least 1mm from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 110: 1983",
    "title": "Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, For Enamels For Use Over Primers",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS1101983_1",
    "text": "IS 110: 1983 Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, For Enamels For Use Over Primers [Scope]\nRequirements, and the methods of sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers. The material is used as a filler over the primer in the painting system normally followed by enamels. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition – The material shall be of such a composition as to satisfy the requirements of this standard. In order to obtain satisfactory flattening properties, use of slate powder along with suitable extenders and pigments, as may be necessary, is recommended. 2.2 Flattening Properties – The material shall not be inferior to the approved sample. 2.3 Hold Out Property – The material shall pass the test as prescribed in Appendix B of the standard. 2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table 1. 2.5 Water Content –"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 419: 1967",
    "title": "Putty, For Use On Window Frames",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4191967_1",
    "text": "IS 419: 1967 Putty, For Use On Window Frames [Scope]\nRequirements, and the methods of sampling and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood and metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes in wood or metal."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 419: 1967",
    "title": "Putty, For Use On Window Frames",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS4191967_2",
    "text": "IS 419: 1967 Putty, For Use On Window Frames [Requirements]\n2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous paste and shall be free from grit and other visible impurities. 2.2 Composition – Shall consist of mainly whiting and linsed oil, if necessary, varnish and suitable additives. 2.2.1 The calcium carbonate content of extracted pigment, from putty, shall be not less than 80 percent. 2.3 Consistency – The material, after thorough working in hands, shall have good plastic quality without sliminess or stickness that would render it difficult to handle and apply. It shall work readily and smoothly under a palette knife without crumbling or cracking. After being moulded in place, it shall convert itself into a cohesive mass which will not yield to specified pressure after 72 hours. 2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 423: 1961",
    "title": "Plastic Wood For Joiners Filler",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS4231961_1",
    "text": "IS 423: 1961 Plastic Wood For Joiners Filler [Scope]\nRequirements, and methods of test for material commercially known as plastic wood, for joiners fillers. The material is used for filling holes, cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a smooth surface capable of taking suitable stain to match timber. 2. Requirements 2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous and free from grit and other visible impurities. 2.2 Composition a) Nitrocellulose syrup 77 percent, Min b) Wood dust passing Remainder through IS Sieve No.15 (aperture 151 microns) With a maximum moisture content of 5 percent Note —The introcellulose lose syrup shall consist of nitocellulose, suitable resins, plasticizers, solvent and dilluent. 2.3 Consistency – It shall be in such a condition that it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for application by a"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3709: 1966",
    "title": "Mastic Cement For Bedding Of Metal Window",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS37091966_1",
    "text": "IS 3709: 1966 Mastic Cement For Bedding Of Metal Window [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows. The material is intended for application by hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one metal window into another, metal windows into wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or concrete. It is expected to be suitable for taking paint without lifting, bleeding or cracking. 2. Requirements 2.1 Shall be in the form of a homogeneous paste which after working in the hands, shall have good plastic quality. Shall work smoothly under a knife without crumbling or cracking and without sticking unduly to hand or knife. 2.2 Composition a) Whiting 80 to 85 percent by weight b) Oils 15 to 20 percent by weight Note 1 — Up to 10 percent of whiting may be replaced by asbestos fibrous powder. One to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3677: 1985",
    "title": "Unbonded Rock And Slag Wool For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS36771985_1",
    "text": "IS 3677: 1985 Unbonded Rock And Slag Wool For Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation.\n[Types] 2.1 Type 1 – Loose rock and slag wool, shall be a fluffy, light weight material. 2.2 Type 2 – Stitched rock and slagwool mats. Shall be in the form of stitched mats provided with a confining media on one or both sides. If the confining medium provided is of metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat either stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres of by stitching at not more than 250 mm along the width and 150 mm along the length with twine or metallic wire of 0.7 mm or 0.56 mm diameter or as agreed. If the confining medium provided is of hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with a suitable twine. 3. Requirements 3.1 Apparent Density — The apparent density of Type 2 of the material shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the su"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4671: 1984",
    "title": "Expanded Polystyrene For Thermal Insulation Purposes",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS46711984_1",
    "text": "IS 4671: 1984 Expanded Polystyrene For Thermal Insulation Purposes [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough shapes, finished boards and blocks, and pipe sections / segments for thermal insulation primarily for use in refrigeration and building applications in the temperature range - 150º to 80ºC. 2. Types Type 1– Non-self extinguishing type and, Type 2– Self extinguishing type 3. Requirements 3.1 Bulk Density – The bulk density of the material, calculated at nominal thickness, excluding facing, shall be 15, 20, 25, 30 or 35 kg/m3. A tolerance of ±5 percent shall be allowed on bulk density. 3.2 Dimensions 3.2.1 Size – 1.0 x 0.5 m or other agreed sizes. Pipe sections / segments — 1.0 m or 0.5 m in length, or other agreed length. 3.2.2 Thickness – 15, 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 and 100 mm unless otherwise ag"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6598: 1972",
    "title": "Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS65981972_1",
    "text": "IS 6598: 1972 Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for cellular concrete for thermal linsulation. Note – Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air bubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile construction material on account of its light weight, high thermal insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam cured) and resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be applied over flat roofs for thermal insulation. 2. Types and Grades 2.1 Two types of material depending on manner of manufacture, namely : Type 1– High pressure steam cured (auto claved) material in the form of precast blocks. Type 2 – Cured under normal conditions (that is, under ambient pressure and temperature) by water. Either"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6598: 1972",
    "title": "Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Materials A) Aggregate",
    "chunk_id": "IS65981972_2",
    "text": "IS 6598: 1972 Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation [Materials A) Aggregate]\nSand, ground quartz, shale, fly ash, granulated slag, etc. b) Binders – Portland cement of lime. c) Glassing agents – Organic foaming agents based on resin soap, glue, surface active agents, or fine aluminium powder, zinc dust, calcium carbide, calcium hypochlorite, etc. 4. Requirements 4.1 Density Grade Average Bulk Density, kg/m3 A Min 320 B 321 to 400 C 401 to 500 4.2 Crushing Strength Grade Strength, Min kgf/m2 Type 1 Type 2 A 7.0 2.5 B 12.0 4.5 C 20.0 8.0 4.3 Capillary Absorption – Shall not exceed 20 percent in case of Type 1 cellular concrete. 4.4 Thermal Conductivity – Grade Thermal Conductivity at 50ºC Mean Temp, Max mW/cmºC A 0.7 B 0.85 C 1.0 4.5 Dimensions – For Type 1 and Type 2, length 50 or 60 cm; width 20, 25 or 30 cm; thickness 7.5, 10, 15, 25 or 40 cm. 4.6 Tolerance – ±3 p"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7509: 1993",
    "title": "Thermal Insulating Cement",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS75091993_1",
    "text": "IS 7509: 1993 Thermal Insulating Cement [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for thermal linsulating cements for use at temperatures up to 950ºC.\n[Types] Type 350 – for use of temperatures up to 350º C, Type 750 – for use of temperatures up to 750ºC,and Type 950 – for use of temperatures up to 950º C. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS SI No. Characteristic Requirements Type 350 Type 750 Type 950 i) Service temperature 3500 C 7500 C 9500 C ii) Consistency, percent a) Method A 35 to 45 35 to 45 — b) Method B 175 to 230 175 to 235 — iii) Dry covering capacity m2, 1 cm, 17.5 20.0 14.0 in thickness per 100 kg of dry cement, Min iv) Compressive strength at 5 3.5 3.5 5.0 percent deformation, kg/cm2, Min v) Volume change (shrinkage) 25 25 30 upon drying, percent, Max vi) Linear shrinkage (length) 2.0 3.0 3.0 after heat soaking at service temperature, percent, Max vii) Dry adhesion to steel, kg/cm2, Min 0.35 0.35 0.50 viii) Thermal"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9490: 1980",
    "title": "Method For Determination Of Thermal Conductivity Of Insulation Material (Water Calorimeter Method)",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS94901980_1",
    "text": "IS 9490: 1980 Method For Determination Of Thermal Conductivity Of Insulation Material (Water Calorimeter Method) [Requirements]\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7509 : 1993 Specification for thermal insulating cements (first revision). 3. Requirements – The material shall be in the form of dry powder and/or granulated aggregate. The material shall also conform to the requirements given in Table 1. The material shall be in the form of dry powder and/or granulated aggregate. The material shall also conform to the requirements given in Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8154: 1993",
    "title": "Preormed Calcium Silicate Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS81541993_1",
    "text": "IS 8154: 1993 Preormed Calcium Silicate Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for performed calcium silicate insulation intended for use on surface which reach temperatures upto 6500C. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Shall be predominantly composed of reacted hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable fibres such that the physical requirements prescribed in 2 are satisfied. 2.2 Bulk Density – Average value shall be between 200 to 280 kg/m3. For any particular density, a tolerance of ±10 percent shall be allowed on the purchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above. 2.3 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness under the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent. a) dry under a load of 415 kN/m2, and b) wet (after 18 h immersion in water) under a load of 170 kN/m2. Note –\n[Thickness] 1.5 mm + 3 mm b) Pipe sections 1) Length ±3 mm 2) Inside diameter 0 mm +5 mm\n[Thickness (Average)] 1.5 mm +3 mm 2.9.3.1 Uniformity – The local thickness at any point shall not vary from the average thickness by more than ±3 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8183: 1993",
    "title": "Bonded Mineral Wool",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS81831993_1",
    "text": "IS 8183: 1993 Bonded Mineral Wool [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – The material shall be mineral wool made from rock, slag or glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form and shall be bonded with a suitable binder. The slabs are normally supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied finish of cloth, foil, wire netting, glass tissue, polythene or any other suitable material on one or both faces and these may be obtained as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.2 Bulk Density Group Bulk Density Maximum Recommended kg/m3 Hot FaceTemperature ºC 1 12-50 Up to 250 2 51-80 Up to 400 3 81-120 Up to 550 4 121-160 Up to 750 2.2.1 For any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s de"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9428: 1993",
    "title": "Preformed Calcium Silicate Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS94281993_1",
    "text": "IS 9428: 1993 Preformed Calcium Silicate Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation intended for use with surfaces with reach temperatures up to 9500C. 2. Requirements 2.1 Bulk Density – The average value shall be between 220 and 280 kg/m3. For any particular product, a tolerance of ±10 percent shall be allowed on the purchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above. 2.2 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness under the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent. a) Dry, under a load of 415 kN/m2; and b) Wet (after 18 hours immersion in water), under a load of 170 kN/m2. 2.3 Flexural Strength – The minimum value shall be 240 kN/m2. 2.4 Heat Resistance – When tested at increasing temperatures, the material shall be deemed suitable for use under"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9742: 1993",
    "title": "Sprayed Mineral Wool Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS97421993_1",
    "text": "IS 9742: 1993 Sprayed Mineral Wool Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation. 2. Material 2.1 Mineral Wool – Mineral wool conforming to IS 3677 : 1985* shall be used. 2.2 Sprayable Mineral Wool – Mineral wool with suitable binder, uniformly blended to ensure that it does not separate during normal handling and spraying operations shall be used. 3. Requirements 3.1 Density – The density of the applied and dried material shall be in the range of 200 to 250 kg/m3 and shall also not vary by more than ±15 percent from the value declared by the manufacturer. 3.2 Compressive Strength Deformation Compresive Strength, Percent Min Pa (N/m2) 10 4 550 15 6 460 3.3 Thermal Conductivity Mean Thermal Temperature Conductivity, Max ºC W/mK 100 0.066 150 0.072 200 0.079 250 0.085 370 0.101"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97431990_1",
    "text": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements [General]\nIS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements (First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for thermal insulation finishing cements, prepared by mixing with water for application to insulating materials after they have been applied at site to the plant of piping systems. Note – Some of these finishing cements are used for services at temperatures below ambient, in which case a vapour barrier is required. This standard does not prescribe requirements for setting time. 1.2 This standard does not prescribe requirements for setting time. 2. Types Type 1 – Hard-setting compositions. Type 2 – Self-setting cements Type 3 – Gypsum plaster ompositions, and Type 4 – Fire-proof finishing cements 2.1 Type 1 – finishing cements are a mixture of inorganic fillers and well distributed reinforcing fibres with a clay bonding agent, and set by removal of water by natural drying or on heating. The normal ratio of hard-setting cements will be 1 part of hydraulic cement to 4 parts of hard-setting composition. 2.2 Type 2 – finishing cements consist of well distributed reinforcing fibres (1 part) with a hydraulic cement (3 parts) as binder, with or without plasticizing agents or fillers. These set without the application of heat."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97431990_2",
    "text": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements [General]\ncements will be 1 part of hydraulic cement to 4 parts of hard-setting composition. 2.2 Type 2 – finishing cements consist of well distributed reinforcing fibres (1 part) with a hydraulic cement (3 parts) as binder, with or without plasticizing agents or fillers. These set without the application of heat. 2.3 Type 3 – finishing cements set without the application of heat and consist of calcium sulphate hemihydrate, and well distributed reinforcing fibres, usually to a lower percentage by mass than for selfsetting cement. 2.4 Type 4 – fire-proof cement is non-combustible and could effectively be used as a finishing cement over turbine insulation applications, etc. where the finishing cement should not give rise to fire due to oil leakage, etc. Note – Thermal insulation finishing cements of Type 1 and Type 3 are not suitable for exposure to weather conditions without further protection 3. Requirements 3.1 Description – Shall be thoroughly permixed and free from unopened or badly distributed fibres or coarse constituents."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97431990_3",
    "text": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements [General]\nto fire due to oil leakage, etc. Note – Thermal insulation finishing cements of Type 1 and Type 3 are not suitable for exposure to weather conditions without further protection 3. Requirements 3.1 Description – Shall be thoroughly permixed and free from unopened or badly distributed fibres or coarse constituents. 3.2 Bulk Density – The average value shall be as given below : Type of the Density Finishing Cement kg/m3, Max 1 1 500 2 1 800 3 1 600 4 1 300 3.3 Wet Covering Capacity – Wet covering of the four types of finishing cements shall be not less than 6 m2/ 100 kg at 10 mm thickness. 3.4 Inertness — Shall not include any substance that may promote corrosive attack of the surfaces with which it is in contact, for example, wire netting used as reinforcement."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97431990_4",
    "text": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements [General]\ncovering of the four types of finishing cements shall be not less than 6 m2/ 100 kg at 10 mm thickness. 3.4 Inertness — Shall not include any substance that may promote corrosive attack of the surfaces with which it is in contact, for example, wire netting used as reinforcement. 3.5 Compresive Strength Type of the Compressive Strength Material kN/m3, Min 1 1 030 2 1 720 3 820 4 1 800 Note – For method of test refer to Annex A of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials methods of test (second revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Method of test for preformed block type and pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision) and IS 5724 : 1970 Mehtods of test for thermal insulating cement. For detailed information, refer to IS 9743 : 1990 Specifications for thermal insulation finishing cement (first revision). 3.6 Flexural Strength – For Type 1 shall be not less than 2000 kN/m2. 3.7 Resistance to Impact – The average diameter of five indentations shall not exceed 30 mm. Any cracking of the specimen that is observed shall be reported."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS97431990_5",
    "text": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements [General]\n1990 Specifications for thermal insulation finishing cement (first revision). 3.6 Flexural Strength – For Type 1 shall be not less than 2000 kN/m2. 3.7 Resistance to Impact – The average diameter of five indentations shall not exceed 30 mm. Any cracking of the specimen that is observed shall be reported. 3.8 Heat Resistance – The blocks of the finishing cement shall neither disintegrate, nor have observable cracks. 3.9 Consistency of Wet Mixed Material – Shall be 35 to 45 percent. 3.10 Moisture Content – For hard setting compositions, the maximum free moisture content shall be not greater than 5 percent, and self-setting compositions and gypsum plaster shall be supplied dry."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9842: 1994",
    "title": "Preformed Fibrous Pipe Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS98421994_1",
    "text": "IS 9842: 1994 Preformed Fibrous Pipe Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for preformed fibrous pipe sections for thermal imsulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – Shall be mineral wool made from rock, slag or glass, processed from a molten state into fibrous form and bonded with a suitable binder. The sections shall normally be supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied finish of aluminium foil, paper, roofing felt or other material. 2.2 Bulk Density Group Bulk Density, Maximum kg/m3 Recommended Hot Face Temperature, ºC 1 50-80 Up to 400 2 81-120 Up to 550 3 121-160 Up to 650 4 161-250 Up to 750 2.2.1 For any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s declared value for bulk density, calculated at the nominal thickness, shall not exceed ±15 percent. The actual bulk density shall"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11128: 1984",
    "title": "Spray – Applied Hydrated Calcium Silicate Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS111281984_1",
    "text": "IS 11128: 1984 Spray – Applied Hydrated Calcium Silicate Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for spray-applied, hydrated calcium silicate thermal insulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Sprayable hydrated calcium silicate insulation shall be composed predominantly of calcium silicate mineral or refractory fibres and a suitable proportion of inorganic, heat-resistant binder. The binder and the fibres shall be uniformly blended and shall not separate during normal handling and spraying operations. The fibre content shall be less than 15 percent. 2.2 Density — The applied and dried density of the material shall be in the range of 160-350 kg/m3 and shall not vary by more than ±10 percent from the value declared by the manufacturer. 2.3 Compressive Strength — Shall be as given below: Deformation, Compressive Strength, Percent kPa (kN/m2), Min 5 285"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11307: 1985",
    "title": "Cellular Glass Block And Pipe Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS113071985_1",
    "text": "IS 11307: 1985 Cellular Glass Block And Pipe Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for cellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation intended for use on surfaces operating at temperatures between – 2000C and 4250C. 2. Requirements 2.1 General – Shall consist of a glass composition that has been formed or cellulated under molten conditions, annealed, and set to form a rigid incombustible material with hermetically-sealed cells. The material shall be trimmed into blocks of standard dimensions or commercial sizes. It shall not have visible defects that may adversely affect its service qualities. 2.2 Bulk Density – The average value shall be 160 ±15 kg/m3. 2.3 Thermal Conductivity – The average value shall be as given below: Mean Thermal Conductivity,Max Temperature ºC W/mK 150 0.082 65 0.064 0 0.048 -65 0.043 2.4 Compressive"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11308: 1985",
    "title": "Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS113081985_1",
    "text": "IS 11308: 1985 Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for hydraulic setting thermal insulating castables for use as either hot face or cold face backing of refractory linings, at temperatures up to 12500C. 2. Types a) Type 1050 – Suitable for use at temperatures up to 1 0500C, and b) Type 1 250– Suitable for use at temperatures up to 1 2500C. 3. Requirements 3.1 General – Shall be in the form of dry powder with maximum grain size 5 mm. 3.2 Moisture Content – Shall not contain more than 2 percent moisture by mass. 3.3 The material shall also conform to the reqirements given in Table 1. 3.4 Ferric Oxide Content – For temperatures up to 1 2500C shall be 5 percent, maximum TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDRAULIC SETTING THERMAL INSULATING CASTABLES FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 1 2500C. Sl Characterstic Requireme"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12436: 1988",
    "title": "Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS124361988_1",
    "text": "IS 12436: 1988 Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements, and the methods of sampling and test for preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for thermal insulation in the form of boards, cut and moulded slabs, cut and moulded pipe sections, cut and moulded radiused and bevelled lags, panels with adhesive integrally laminated facings, panels with adhesive applied facings, and cut and moulded special shapes. 2. Classification 2.1 Type – The rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation materials shall be of two types: Type 1 – For general use. Type 2 – For use where there is a requirement for greater resistance to compressive forces. 2.2 Grades – The rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation materials shall be of two grades: PUR – Rigid polyurethane foam whose maximum recommended operating te\n[Compositions] Shall consist of rigid polyurethane or rigid polyisocyanurate foam with substantially closed cell structure.\n[Requirements] Shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12436: 1988",
    "title": "Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Standard Sizes And Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS124361988_2",
    "text": "IS 12436: 1988 Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation [Standard Sizes And Dimensions]\nIn the case of finished boards of both the types, the sizes shall be either 1.0 × 0.5 m or 1.22 × 0.61 m or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. The size for pipe-section and lags shall be 1.0 or 0.5 m length unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, and the bore shall be the specified outside diameter of the pipe to be lagged. 5.1 Thickness — The material shall normally be supplied in thickness of 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 5.2 Tolerance — See Table 2 and 3. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID PREFORMED CELLULAR URETHANE FOAM THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS Sl Characterstic Requirements NO. PUR 1 PUR 2 PIR 1 PIR 2 i) Dimensional Stability at 100 ± 20C ±2 ±2 ±2 ±2 percent, for 24 h, Max"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13204: 1991",
    "title": "Rigid Phenolic Foam For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS132041991_1",
    "text": "IS 13204: 1991 Rigid Phenolic Foam For Thermal Insulation [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid for phenolic foam for thermal insulation purposes. It applies to slab (blocks, boards and profiled sheets) and profiled sections (pipe sections and radiused or bevelled lags) cut from pipes. The nominal temperature range for which the insulation material is suitable is –180 to + 130ºC without any facing. The material is normally supplied with craft paper facing on both sides. This standard is not applicable to continuously extended phenolic foam pipe insulating sections. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition — Shall consist of phenolic foam of uniform cellular structure. 2.2 The rigid phenolic foam faced or unfaced shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF RIGID PHENOLIC FOAM Sl Characteristic Requirement NO"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2036: 1995",
    "title": "Phenolic Laminated Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Optional Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS20361995_1",
    "text": "IS 2036: 1995 Phenolic Laminated Sheets [Optional Requirements]\nShall comply with requirements given in Table 7 of the standard, if agreed. 5. Sanded Sheets 5.1 General – Sanded sheets of types P2/1, P3, P3/1 and P4 of any nominal thickness in the range of 0.4 mm to 3 mm shall be produced by sanding one or both sides. Before sanding, the sheets shall comply with requirements of 3 except 3.3. 5.2 Deviations of Thickness – ± 0.050 mm for thickness up to and including 1.6 mm + 0.1 mm at higher values up to and including 3 mm. 5.3 Insulation Resistance – Shall not be less than following – Types Values, m Ω P2/1 30 P3 500 P3/1 100 P4 1000 5.4 Water Absorption – Shall not exceed the limits specified. Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to K of the standard, IS 1998 : 1962, Methods of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated shee"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2046: 1995",
    "title": "Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20461995_1",
    "text": "IS 2046: 1995 Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for decorative laminated sheets (HPL) classified according to their performance and main recommended fields of application and provides also for materials of special characteristics, for example, post formability or defined reaction to fire. They are intended for interior applications."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2046: 1995",
    "title": "Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS20461995_2",
    "text": "IS 2046: 1995 Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets [Classification]\nConsists of a materials type with three index numbers describing levels of performance. An alphabetical classification system can also be used as an alternative. Table 1compares the two systems and typical application. 2.1 Index numbers for specifying HPL properties – a) Index for – resistance to surface wear (First Index Number) b) Index for – resistance to impact by small diameter ball (Second Index Number) c) Index for resistance to scratching (Third Index Number) Note — For details refer Table 2, 3 and 4 of the standard 2.2 Special Characteristics – Material type Type S–Standard type decorative laminated sheet Type P–Post formable Decorative laminated sheet Type F–Decorative laminated sheets having defined reaction to fire. 2.3 Nomenclature – In addition to the prefix HPL and the numbe"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2508: 1984",
    "title": "Low Density Polythylene Films",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Grades",
    "chunk_id": "IS25081984_1",
    "text": "IS 2508: 1984 Low Density Polythylene Films [Grades]\nFilm shall be classified according to the optical properties, impact strength and slip. Each grade shall be designated by a set of 3 numerals : first one for optical property, second for impact strength and third for slip property. Numeral 0 shall mean the material has not been tested for that particular property. For clarity, impact strength and slip property, numerals 1, 2, 3 and 4 shall mean the following Numeral Clarity Impact Slip Property 1 Low Low Low 2 Normal Normal Medium 3 High High High 4 – – Extra High 2.1 For example, Grade 210 shall mean that the film is of normal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not been tested. 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Appearance – Shall be uniform is colour, texture and finish and free from pin-holes and substantially free from undisperse"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6307: 1985",
    "title": "Rigid Pvc Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS63071985_1",
    "text": "IS 6307: 1985 Rigid Pvc Sheets [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or calendering followed by lamination. 2. Types Type 1 – General purpose, Type 2 – With specified impact strength, and Type 3 – Suitable for deep draw vacuum forming. 3. Requirements 3.1 Appearance — Sheet shall be unifarm in colour and finish, transparent or opaque , and shall be reasonably free from detrimental scratches, creases, streaks, pinholes, pimples and inclusions. 3.2 Thickness Nominal Tolerance on Thickness, Thickness Percent mm Extruded Calendered Calender and Laminated 0.10 to 0.24 ± 20 ± 12 — 0.25 to 0.49 ± 15 ± 10 — 0.50 to 0.74 ± 12 ± 10 — 0.75 to 1.24 ± 10 — ± 20 1.25 to 1.49 ± 10 — ± 18 1.50 to 1.99 ± 10 — ± 18 2.00 to 4.99 ± 10 — ± 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10889: 1984",
    "title": "High Density Polythylene Film",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS108891984_1",
    "text": "IS 10889: 1984 High Density Polythylene Film [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) high density polyethylene films. Coloured films other than black shall be as a greed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2. Grades Grade1– High molecular mass, high density polyethylene (HM HDPE); and Grade 2 – Medium molecular mass, high density polyethylene (MM HDPE). 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Appearance – Shall be uniform in colour, texture and finish. The material shall be substantially free from pinholes and reasonably free from undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of foreign matter. There shall be no other visible defects, such as holes, tears or blisters. The edges shall be free from nicks and cuts visible to unaided eye. 3.1.2 Film Form – Shall be furnish"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12830: 1989",
    "title": "Rubber Based Adhesive For Fixing Pvc Tiles To Cement",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS128301989_1",
    "text": "IS 12830: 1989 Rubber Based Adhesive For Fixing Pvc Tiles To Cement [Scope]\nRequirements and the methods of sampling and test for rubber based adhesives used for bonding PVC tiles to cement, floors and walls of buildings. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – The material shall be manufactured from rubber, compounding ingredients, resins and appropriate solvents. The colour of the material shall be compatible with the application of the material as may be agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.2 Consistency – The material shall be of a consistency suitable for its mode of application. 2.3 Open Assembly Time – The open assembly time shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier depending upon the application and shall not vary from batch to batch. 2.4 Adhesion Strength – The adhesion strength shall be as follows. 2.4.1 Strength of joint in s"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12994: 1990",
    "title": "Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS129941990_1",
    "text": "IS 12994: 1990 Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for liquid and paste type epoxy adhesives for performance : (a) up to 50ºC, and (b) up to 100ºC.\n[Types] There shall be four types of epoxy adhesives: Type L 50 – Liquid adhesives for performance up to 50ºC. Type P 50 – Paste adhesives for performance up to 50ºC. Type L 100 – Liquid adhesives for performance up to 100ºC. Type P 100 – Paste adhesives for performance up to 100ºC."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12994: 1990",
    "title": "Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS129941990_2",
    "text": "IS 12994: 1990 Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose [Requirements]\n3.1 Properties of Uncured Components 3.1.1 Solids Content – Each component of the adhesive shall be free from volatile solvents, and the non-volatilise in each component shall be not less than 99.5 percent. 3.1.2 Viscosity – The viscosity of the individual components shall comply with the following requirements: Type L 50 and L 100 – 10 00 0 mPas Max Type P 50 and P 100 – 10 00 000 mPas Max 3.2 Properties of Uncured Mixture 3.2.1 Gelation Time of Liquid Adhesives – The gelation time of the mix of resin and hardener of Type L 50 and L 100 prepared in the ratio recommended by the manufacturer shall not be less than 30 minutes at a bath temperature of 27 ± 1ºC. 3.2.2 Spreadability of paste adhesives – A mass of 25 g of the adhesive of Type P 50 and P 100, when uniformly mixed with the prescri"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14182: 1994",
    "title": "Solvent Cement For Use With Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe And Fittings",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS141821994_1",
    "text": "IS 14182: 1994 Solvent Cement For Use With Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe And Fittings [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of sampling and test for solvent cements to be used in joining unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings intended for use in carrying potable water. The pipes may be pressure or non-pressure type. 2. Requirements 2.1 The solvent cement shall be a solution of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride moulding or extrusion compound or PVC resin. The requirements for rigid PVC compound are given in Table 1 for information only. 2.2 The solvent cement shall be thixotropic and consist substantially of solvents that will swell plasticized PVC polymers and stabilizers. Fillers may be incorporated provided the resulting cement meets all the requirements of specification. 2.3 The solvent cement shall be capable of application by brush and shall contain no lumps or foreign m"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_1",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\nIS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and tests for polycarbonate sheets of solid section as well as multi-wall variety and also thinner gauge sheets (films), multi-layer composite laminates of polycarbonate compact sheets and composites of polycarbonate compact sheets and glass sheets. Sheets containing glass fibre or any other reinforcement are, however, not covered by this standard. 1.2 This standard establishes a system for designating vacrious possible polycarbonate sheets and films. Since the system is not based on application, end use condition and performance requirement, it cannot be used for selection of any sheet or film for specific end use. For specific end use and type of sheet or film expert opinion should be sought for fabrication details. 2. Designation/Classification System 2.1 This standard adopts a data block system consisting of five blocks – each block, describing specific information about the product. Each block is separated from the other by an asterisk mark. In case a block is not used, the skipped block will be indicated by an additional asterisk mark."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_2",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\n2.1 This standard adopts a data block system consisting of five blocks – each block, describing specific information about the product. Each block is separated from the other by an asterisk mark. In case a block is not used, the skipped block will be indicated by an additional asterisk mark. Block 1* Block 2* Block 3* Block 4* Block 5* Block 1 – Contains this IS specification number to indicate that the classification is according to this standard. Block 2 – This block is used to describe the product in general. This block consists of four letters and one digit. The first two letters are invariably ‘PC’ to denote that the product under specification is made out of polycarbonate. The digit that comes next indicates the number of layers or walls (in case of hollow sheets). The letter following the digit indicates whether the product under consideration has a solid or hollow cross- section and the type of profile in case of hollow product. And the last letter indicates the surface texture of the product. Codes for Block 2 are described in Table 1. TABLE 1 CODES FOR BLOCK 2 3rd Position 4th Position 5th Position Code No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_3",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\na solid or hollow cross- section and the type of profile in case of hollow product. And the last letter indicates the surface texture of the product. Codes for Block 2 are described in Table 1. TABLE 1 CODES FOR BLOCK 2 3rd Position 4th Position 5th Position Code No. of Code Profile Code Texture Layers/Walls (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1 One S Solid section R Ribbed 2 Two N Hollow N F Fine profile grain 3 Three R Hollow C Coarse rectangular grain profile 4 Four T Hollow tunnel P Polished profile 0 Not O Not O Not specified specified specified Example: For a twin wall hollow sheet with N profile and polished surface texture the Block 2 will be represented by PC 2 NP. Block 3 – This block accommodates four letters. The first letter indicates whether the material used to manufacture the sheet is light stabilized or not. The next letter indicates whether any special coating has been applied on the sheet or not. Third letter is to indicate whether the sheets is transparent, translucent or opaque and the last letter takes care of colour. Table 2 describes the codes for Block 3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_4",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\nis light stabilized or not. The next letter indicates whether any special coating has been applied on the sheet or not. Third letter is to indicate whether the sheets is transparent, translucent or opaque and the last letter takes care of colour. Table 2 describes the codes for Block 3. Example: An opaque colourd sheet made out of polycarbonate grade containing UV stabilizer and having a hard abrasion resistance surface coating is designated by LHQC in Block 3. Block 4 – Combination of four digits form this block. Each digit indicates the following properties in order: a) Weight per sq. metre of the sheet/film as per the codes given in Table 3. b) Dart drop impact strength at 27ºC. c) Light transmission. d) Flammability rating codes listed in Table 3. Example : For a sheet with 1.3 kg/m2, dart drop impact value of 12J, light transmission of 55 percent and flammability rating not specified, the block 4 will be represented by 1530. Block 5 – This block is provided for any additional specific performance requirements, if required to be specified. These specific performances include resistance to vandalism, resistance to forced entry, resistance to bullet and resistance to explosion."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_5",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\npercent and flammability rating not specified, the block 4 will be represented by 1530. Block 5 – This block is provided for any additional specific performance requirements, if required to be specified. These specific performances include resistance to vandalism, resistance to forced entry, resistance to bullet and resistance to explosion. In case, there is no specific requirement for the sheet the designation ends at Block 4 with an asterisk mark. Each requirement is codified by a combination of one letter and one digit. The letter indicates the type of resistance under consideration and the digit indicates the level of resistance. The scheme is elaborated below: V = Resistance to vandalism F = Resistance to forced entry B = Resistance to bullet E = Resistance to explosion Table 4 to 7 of the standard give the condition under the above categories."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_6",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\nunder consideration and the digit indicates the level of resistance. The scheme is elaborated below: V = Resistance to vandalism F = Resistance to forced entry B = Resistance to bullet E = Resistance to explosion Table 4 to 7 of the standard give the condition under the above categories. TABLE 2 CODES FOR BLOCK 3 1st Position 2nd Position 3rd Position 4th Position Code Light Code Coating Code Transparency Code Colour Stabilization (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) L Yes H Hard T Transparent C Coloured X No U UV R Transparent N Natural O Not specified O Not specified Q Opaque O Not specified O Not specified TABLE 3 CODES FOR BLOCK 4 1st Position 2nd Position 3rd Position 4th Position Code Wt./Sq."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_7",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\n(5) (6) (7) (8) L Yes H Hard T Transparent C Coloured X No U UV R Transparent N Natural O Not specified O Not specified Q Opaque O Not specified O Not specified TABLE 3 CODES FOR BLOCK 4 1st Position 2nd Position 3rd Position 4th Position Code Wt./Sq. metre Code Dart Drop Code Light Transmi- Code Flame (kg/m2) Impact ssion Percent Retardancy (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 1 Up to 1.5 1 Above 150 1 Above 85 1 UL 94 HB 2 Above 1.5 up to 2 Above 100 up to 2 Above 70 up to 2 UL 94 V2 and including 3.0 and including 150 and including 85 3 Above 3.0 up to 3 Above 60 up to 3 Above 50 up to 3 UL 94 V1 and including 4.5 and including 100 and including 70 4 Above 4.5 up to 4 Above 15 up to 4 Above 35 up to 4 UL 94 V0 and including 6.5 and including 60 and including 50 5 Above 6.5 up to 5 Up to 15 5 Up to 35 5 UL 94 5V and including 8.5 6 Above 8.5 up to 0 Not specified 0 Not"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS144431997_8",
    "text": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets [General]\nup to 4 Above 35 up to 4 UL 94 V0 and including 6.5 and including 60 and including 50 5 Above 6.5 up to 5 Up to 15 5 Up to 35 5 UL 94 5V and including 8.5 6 Above 8.5 up to 0 Not specified 0 Not specified 0 Not specified and including 12.0 7 Above 12.0 up to and including 15.0 8 Above 15.0 9 Not specified Note 1 – Code of good fabricating practices is given at Annex A of the standards. Note 2 – For method of tests, refer to Appendices B to F of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 14443 : 1997 Specifications for polycarbonate sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14643: 1999",
    "title": "Unsintered Polytetrafluoroethylene",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS146431999_1",
    "text": "IS 14643: 1999 Unsintered Polytetrafluoroethylene [Scope]\nRequirements, methods of sampling and tests for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tapes for use as a thread sealing material and in similar applications. This tape is suitable for applications under ambient conditions with all common fluids and gases up to 80 bar gauge for pipes. This tape is suitable for applications in the range —200C to 2000C for pipe sizes up to 50 mm. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition 2.1.1 Manufacture – Shall be manufactured from a suitable grade of virgin PTFE material . The tape shall not contain fillers or additives other than residual lubricant. The residual lubricant content shall not exceed 0.1 percent by mass. 2.1.2 The lubricant used in the manufacture of the tape shall be such that any residue left in the tape shall be entirely removed under the condit"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14753: 1999",
    "title": "Polymethyl Methacrylate (Pmma)",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS147531999_1",
    "text": "IS 14753: 1999 Polymethyl Methacrylate (Pmma) [Scope]\nRequirements, methods of sampling and tests for polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) sheets. 2. Requirements 2.1 Protection of Surface – Unless otherwise agreed between the supplier and the purchaser, the surface of the sheet, as delivered, shall be protected by suitable material, for example, kraft paper pasted with a water soluble or pressure-sensitive adhesive or a polyethylene or any other suitable film; readily removable without surface contamination or damage. 2.2 Appearance 2.2.1 Surface Defects – The sheets shall have a smooth surface. There shall be no surface defects, scratches or marks larger than 5 mm2 each anywhere in the sheet. 2.2.2 Inclusion Defects – There shall be no bubbles, large inclusions, cracks or other defects that could adversely affect the performance of the sheet i"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_1",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nIS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages UP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 VOLTS (Third Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements and tests for the following types of unarmoured PVC insulated cables with copper or aluminium conductors and flexible cords with copper conductors for electric power and lighting (including cables for outdoor use and cables for low temperature conditions) for voltages up to and including 1100 Volts. Note 1 For out door use, the cables shall meet the requirements of additional ageing test. [see 15.4 of the standard] Note 2 The cables intended for low-temperature conditions shall meet the requirements of cold bend or cold impact test whichever is applicable. [see 15.4 of the standard] 1.1.1 Types of Cables a) Cables for fixed wiring: i) Single core (unsheathed); ii) Single core (sheathed); iii) Circular twin, three and four core (sheathed); iv) Flat twin with or without ECC (sheathed); and v) Flat three core (sheathed). b) Flexible cables, single core (unsheathed). c) Flexible cords: i) Single core (unsheathed); ii) Single core (sheathed); iii) Parallel twin (unsheathed); iv) Twisted twin (unsheathed); v) Circular twin, three , four and five core (sheathed); and vi) Flat twin (sheathed)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_2",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nor without ECC (sheathed); and v) Flat three core (sheathed). b) Flexible cables, single core (unsheathed). c) Flexible cords: i) Single core (unsheathed); ii) Single core (sheathed); iii) Parallel twin (unsheathed); iv) Twisted twin (unsheathed); v) Circular twin, three , four and five core (sheathed); and vi) Flat twin (sheathed). 1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and including 1100 volts. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltage up to and including 1500 volts. 1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in a continuous conductor temperature not exceeding 700C. 1.4 The cables covered in this standard are also suitable for use under outdoor or low temperature conditions provided these meet the additional requirements as given under type tests. For still lower temperature, the purchaser may specify the additional requirements. 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_3",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nresults in a continuous conductor temperature not exceeding 700C. 1.4 The cables covered in this standard are also suitable for use under outdoor or low temperature conditions provided these meet the additional requirements as given under type tests. For still lower temperature, the purchaser may specify the additional requirements. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material 2.1.1 Conductor – The conductor shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper wires and aluminium wires in case of copper and aluminium conductors respectively. 2.1.2 Insulation/ Sheath – Shall be composed of PVC compound. 2.1.3 Filters – It shall consist of vulcanized / unvulcanized rubber, thermoplastic compound or textile materials. 2.1.4 Binder Tape – It shall consist of plastic or proofed textile material. 2.2 Construction 2.2.1 Conductor – Conductors for cables for fixed wiring shall be solid and / or stranded type depending upon nominal cross-sectional area of conductors. For cables having nominal area less than 16 mm2 shall be circular only and for nominal area 16 mm2 and above, these may be circular or shaped. 2.2.2 Insulation – It shall be of PVC compound."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_4",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nbe solid and / or stranded type depending upon nominal cross-sectional area of conductors. For cables having nominal area less than 16 mm2 shall be circular only and for nominal area 16 mm2 and above, these may be circular or shaped. 2.2.2 Insulation – It shall be of PVC compound. 2.2.3 Laying-up of cores a) Flat twin and three-core cables (without ECC)– Two or three cores shall be laid side by side. b) Flat-twin cables (with ECC)–Two cores in a bare ECC (in centre) shall be laid side by side. c) Circular twin, three and four core cables– Two, three or four cores shall be laid together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices between cores may be filed with fillers. A binder tape may be applied over laid-up cores. d) Circular twin, three,four and five core flexible cords–Two, three, four or five cords shall be twisted together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices may be filled with sheathing material fillers or strengthening cords of textile or any other suitable material. e) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cords–Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated simultaneously such that the cores can be separated readily without damage."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_5",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\ntwisted together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices may be filled with sheathing material fillers or strengthening cords of textile or any other suitable material. e) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cords–Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated simultaneously such that the cores can be separated readily without damage. f) Twisted twin (unsheathed) flexible cords–Two cores shall be twisted together with a suitable right hand lay. g) Flat twin (sheathed) flexible cords – Two cores shall be laid side by side. 2.2.4 Sheathing – Shall be applied by extrusion. 2.2.5 Thickness of insulation and sheath – Range of average thickness shall not be less than the nominal values specified in Table 1. 2.3 Cable Code – The following code shall be used for designating the cable: Constituent Code Letter Aluminum conductor A PVC insulation Y PVC sheath Y Earth continuity conductor (ECC) Suitable for outdoor use OU Suitable for low temperature SZ Note – No code letter is required when the conductors material is copper. 3."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_6",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nThe following code shall be used for designating the cable: Constituent Code Letter Aluminum conductor A PVC insulation Y PVC sheath Y Earth continuity conductor (ECC) Suitable for outdoor use OU Suitable for low temperature SZ Note – No code letter is required when the conductors material is copper. 3. Tests 3.1 Type Tests a) Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium), c) Wrapping test (for aluminum), d) Resistance test, e) Test for overall dimensions and thickness of insulation and sheath f) Physical tests for insulation and sheath g) Insulation test, and h) High voltage test (water immersion test) and j) Flammability test. TABLE 1 RANGE OF AVERAGE THICKNESS Sl. No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_7",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\naluminium), c) Wrapping test (for aluminum), d) Resistance test, e) Test for overall dimensions and thickness of insulation and sheath f) Physical tests for insulation and sheath g) Insulation test, and h) High voltage test (water immersion test) and j) Flammability test. TABLE 1 RANGE OF AVERAGE THICKNESS Sl. No. Type Range of Nominal Range of Nominal Range of Nominal Sectional Area of Thickness of Thickness of Conductor Insultation Sheath mm2 mm2 mm2 i) Single-core PVC insulated 1-630 0.7-2.8 cables (unsheathed) ii) Flexible PVC insulated cords 0.5-40 0.6-0.8 - (unsheathed) iii) Single core unsheathed 6.50 0.8-1.4 - Flexible cables iv) PVC insulted and sheathed 1-50 0.6-1.4 0.8-1.8 cables v) Flexible PVC insulated and 0.5-4.0 0.6-0.8 0.9-1.1 sheathed cords Note 1 – Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor- 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500 and 630 mm2. Note 2 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 to 6 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_8",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\n0.5-4.0 0.6-0.8 0.9-1.1 sheathed cords Note 1 – Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor- 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300, 400, 500 and 630 mm2. Note 2 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 to 6 of the standard. Note – For test details, refer to IS 5831 : 1984 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, (first Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_9",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\ncables for working voltages upto and including 1 100 volts (third revision). 3.2 Acceptance Tests – Tests specified in (a) to (d), (h) and ( j ) of 3.1 and following: a) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath b) Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath. c) Insulation resistance test 3.3 Routine Tests a) Conductor resistance test, and b) High voltage test 3.4 Optional Tests a) Cold bend test, b) Cold impact test, and c) Additional ageing test d) Flexing test 2.1.2 Insulation – The general purpose and heat resisting insulation of Type A and Type C PVC compound respectively conforming to the requirements of IS 5831:1984+ 2.1.3 Filler and Inner Sheath a) Unvulcanized rubber, or b) Thermoplastic materials, or c) Proofed tape (for inner sheath only) 2.1.4 Armouring – Shall be of the following: a) Galvanized round steel wire, b) Galvanized steel strip, or c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip. 2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of Type ST1 & ST2 PVC compound conforming to IS 5831: 1984† for Cables with general purpose insulation and with heat resisting insulation respectively."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS6941990_10",
    "text": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages [General]\nShall be of the following: a) Galvanized round steel wire, b) Galvanized steel strip, or c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip. 2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of Type ST1 & ST2 PVC compound conforming to IS 5831: 1984† for Cables with general purpose insulation and with heat resisting insulation respectively. 2.2 Construction 2.2.1 Conductor – Shall be as follows : NOMINAL CROSS SECTIONAL AREA Copper Aluminium Solid/ Flexibility mm2 mm2 Stranded Class – 1.5 Solid Class 1 1.5 to 6 2.5 to 10 Solid/ Class1 for Stranded Solid Class2 for Stranded 10 and above 16 and above Stranded Class 2 Cables with reduced neutral conductors shall have sizes as given in Table 1 of the stranded. 2.2.2 Insulation – Shall be provided with PVC insulation applied by extrusion. The average thickness of insulation shall be not less than the nominal value specified in Table 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1554Part11988_1",
    "text": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables [General]\nIS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables PART 1 – FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UPTO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS (Third Revision) †PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision). 2.2.3 Core Identification – Shall be identified by different colouring of PVC insulation. (a) 1 core:red, black, yellow, blue or natural (nonpigmented) (b) 2 cores – red and black (c) 3 cores – red , yellow and blue (d) 4 cores – red, yelow and blue and black (e) 5 cores – red,yellow, blue, black,and grey (f) 6 cores and above – Two adjacent cores (counting and direction core) in each layer,blue and yellow, remaining Cores grey Note1– For reduced neutral conductors, the insulation colour shall be black. Note 2 – For cables of more than 5 cores, the core identification may be done by numbers. 2.2.4 Laying up of cores – Shall be laid together with a suitable lay; the outermost having right hand lay and successive layers with opposite lay. Recommended plan up to 100 is given in Table 3 of the standard. 2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1554Part11988_2",
    "text": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables [General]\nup of cores – Shall be laid together with a suitable lay; the outermost having right hand lay and successive layers with opposite lay. Recommended plan up to 100 is given in Table 3 of the standard. 2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. Thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table 4 of the standard. 2.2.6 Armouring – Shall be applied over the insulation in case of single core cables and over the inner sheath in case of twin, three and multi core cables. 2.2.7 Outer Sheath – Shall be applied by extrusion as below: a) Over the insulation in case of unarmoured single core cables b) Over the inner sheath in case of unarmoured twin, three and multi-core cables, and c) Over the armouring in case of armoured cables thickness shall be as given in Table 7 of the standard 3. Tests 3.1 Type Tests a) Tests on conductor: 1) Annealing test (for copper), 2) Tensile test (for aluminium), and 3) Wrapping test (for aluminium), and 4) Conductor resistance test. b) Test for armouring wire/strips c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1554Part11988_3",
    "text": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables [General]\ngiven in Table 7 of the standard 3. Tests 3.1 Type Tests a) Tests on conductor: 1) Annealing test (for copper), 2) Tensile test (for aluminium), and 3) Wrapping test (for aluminium), and 4) Conductor resistance test. b) Test for armouring wire/strips c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath. d) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath: 1) Tensile strength and elongation at break 2) Ageing in air oven, 3) Shrinkage test, 4) Hot deformation, 5) Loss of mass in air oven, 6) Heat shock test, and 7) Thermal stability, e) Insulation resistance test. f) High voltage test (water immersion test). g) High voltage test at room temperature. h) Flammability test. Note1 – For acceptance, routine optional tests and additional tests for Cables with improved fix performance refer to 15 0f the standard. 4."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS1554Part11988_4",
    "text": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables [General]\nshock test, and 7) Thermal stability, e) Insulation resistance test. f) High voltage test (water immersion test). g) High voltage test at room temperature. h) Flammability test. Note1 – For acceptance, routine optional tests and additional tests for Cables with improved fix performance refer to 15 0f the standard. 4. Identification 4.1 Cable Code – The following code shall be used for designating the cable : Constituent Code Letter Aluminium conductor A PVC insulation Y Steel round wire armour W Steel strip armour F Steel double round wire armour WW Steel double strip armour F F PVC outer sheath Y Note – No code letter for conductor is required when the conductor material is copper. Note – For method of tests, refer to the relevent parts of IS 10810. Methods of tests for cables. For detailed information, refer to IS 1554 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cable: Part I For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_1",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\nIS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables PART-1 FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS (First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for both armoured and unarmoured single, twin, three, four and multi-core cross–linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC sheathed cables for electric supply and control purpose. 1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltage up to and including 1 500 volts to earth. Note –The cables conforming to this standard may be operated continuously at a power frequency voltage 10 percent higher than rated voltage. 1.3 Armoured cables specified in this standard are suitable for use in mines also. However, for such cables, additional requirements have been included. 1.4 These cables are suitable for use where combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 90ºC under normal operation and 250ºC under short circuit condition."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_2",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\nare suitable for use in mines also. However, for such cables, additional requirements have been included. 1.4 These cables are suitable for use where combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 90ºC under normal operation and 250ºC under short circuit condition. 1.5 This standard also covers cables with improved fire performance categories C1 and C2 for which additional requirements have been included. 2. Requirements 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Conductor – Shall be composed of plain copper or aluminium wires complying with IS 8130: 1984+. Mining cables to be used in gassy mines shall be of copper conductor only. 2.1.2 Insulation – Shall be of cross linked polyethylene conforming to the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard. 2.1.3 Filler and Inner Sheath – Shall be of the following: a) Vulcanized or unvulcanized rubber, or b) Thermoplastic materials. 2.1.4 Armouring – Shall be of the following : a) Galvanized round steel wire, or b) Galvanized steel strip, or c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip. 2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of polyviny choride (PVC) compound conforming to the requirements of type ST 2 compound of IS 5831 : 1984*."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_3",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\n2.1.4 Armouring – Shall be of the following : a) Galvanized round steel wire, or b) Galvanized steel strip, or c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip. 2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of polyviny choride (PVC) compound conforming to the requirements of type ST 2 compound of IS 5831 : 1984*. 2.2 Construction 2.2.1 Conductor – Shall be as follows : Nominal Cross Sectional Area Solid / Flexiblitity stranded class Copper Alluminium mm2 mm2 -- 1.5 Solid 1 1.5- 6 2.5-10 Solid/ Stranded 1 for solid 2 for stranded 10 and 16 and Stranded 2 above above Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have size as given in Table 2 of the standard. 2.2.2 Insulation – Shall be provided with cross linked polyethylene insulation applied by extrusion. The average thickness of insulation shall be not less than the nominal value specified in Table 3 of the standard. 2.2.3 Core identification – Cores shall be identified as specified below : †Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_4",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\nwith cross linked polyethylene insulation applied by extrusion. The average thickness of insulation shall be not less than the nominal value specified in Table 3 of the standard. 2.2.3 Core identification – Cores shall be identified as specified below : †Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first revision). * PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision) a) Coloured strip applied on the core b) Colouring of XLPE insulation as follows : 1 Core—Red, black, yellow, blue or natural; 2 Core—Red and black; 3 Core—Red, yellow and blue; 4 Core—Red, yellow, blue and black; 5 Core—Red, yellow, blue, black and grey; 6 Core— and above—Two adjacent cores (counting and direction core) in each layer, blue and yellow, remaining cores, grey; or c) By numerals either by applying numbered strips or by printing on the cores as follows 2 Core – 0, 1 3 Core – 0, 1, 2, 3 4 Core – 0, 1, 2 and 3 Note 1– For reduced neutral conductors, the core shall be black."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_5",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\ncores, grey; or c) By numerals either by applying numbered strips or by printing on the cores as follows 2 Core – 0, 1 3 Core – 0, 1, 2, 3 4 Core – 0, 1, 2 and 3 Note 1– For reduced neutral conductors, the core shall be black. Note 2 – For cables of more than 5 cores, the core identification may be done by numbers 2.2.4 Laying of core – Shall be laid up togather with a suitable lay, the outermost layer having right hand lay and successive layers with opposite layers. Recommended plan up to 100 be is given in Table 4 of the standard. 2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. Thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table 5 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_6",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\nright hand lay and successive layers with opposite layers. Recommended plan up to 100 be is given in Table 4 of the standard. 2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. Thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table 5 of the standard. 2.2.6 Armouring – Shall be applied over the insulation in case of single core cables and over the inner sheath in case of twin, three and multicore cables 2.2.7 Outer sheath – Shall be applied by extrusion as below: a) Over the insulation in case of unarmoured single core cables, b) Over the inner sheath in case of unarmoured twin, three and multi-core cables; and c) Over the armouring in case of armoured cables. Thickness shall be as given in Table 8 of the standard 3. Tests 3.1 Types Tests – a) Tests on conductor: i) Annealing test (for copper) ii) Tensile test (for aluminium) iii) Wrapping test (for aluminium) iv) Resistance test b) Test for armouring wires/strips."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_7",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\narmouring in case of armoured cables. Thickness shall be as given in Table 8 of the standard 3. Tests 3.1 Types Tests – a) Tests on conductor: i) Annealing test (for copper) ii) Tensile test (for aluminium) iii) Wrapping test (for aluminium) iv) Resistance test b) Test for armouring wires/strips. c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath d) Physical tests for insulation : i) Tensile strength and elongation at break ii) Ageing in air oven iii) Shrinkage test iv) Hot set test v) Water absorption (gravimetric) e) Physical tests for outer sheath i) Tensile strength and elongation at break ii) Ageing in air oven, iii) Loss of mass in air oven iv) Shrinkage test, and v) Hot deformation vi) Heat shock test vii) Thermal stability f) Insulation resistence (Volume resistivity Test) g) High voltage test, h) Flammability test, Note – For acceptance, routine, optional tests and additional tests for cables with improved fine performance refer to 15 of the standard. 4. Identification 4.1 The following code shall be used for designating the cable: Sl. No."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS7098Part11988_8",
    "text": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables [General]\nf) Insulation resistence (Volume resistivity Test) g) High voltage test, h) Flammability test, Note – For acceptance, routine, optional tests and additional tests for cables with improved fine performance refer to 15 of the standard. 4. Identification 4.1 The following code shall be used for designating the cable: Sl. No. Constituent Code Letter i) Aluminium conductor A ii) XLPE insulation 2X iii) Steel round wire armour W iv) Non-magnetic round wire armour Wa v) Steel strip armour F vi) Non-magnetic strip armour Fa vii) Double steel strip armour F F viii) Double steel round wire armour W W ix) PVC outer sheath Y Note – No code letter for conductor is required when the conductor material is copper. Cables with heat resisting insulation suitable for 85ºC conductor temperature shall be identified by the letters ‘HR 85’ marked on it. Note – For methods tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 10810 Methods of test for cables. For detailed information, refer to IS 7098 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for cross–linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed cables: Part I For working voltages upto and including 1100 volts (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998",
    "title": "Elastomer Insulated Cables,",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS9968Part11998_1",
    "text": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998 Elastomer Insulated Cables, [Scope]\nRequirements of elastomeric insulated cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages up to and including 1100 volts. 1.1 The following types of cables and cords are covered in this standard. 1.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring a) Braided and compounded/varnished, b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), and c) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty) with earth continuity conductor. 1.1.2 Flexible cables a) Braided and varnished, and b) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty). 1.1.3 Flexible cords a) Braided b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), c) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and compounded (workshop type), and d) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and compounded. 1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on single-pha"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998",
    "title": "Elastomer Insulated Cables,",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Identification",
    "chunk_id": "IS9968Part11998_2",
    "text": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998 Elastomer Insulated Cables, [Identification]\nCables or cords shall be identified throughout the length of the cable or cords by the legends shown below, either printed or indented or embossed on the cable. Type of Cable Insulation Legend Heat resisting rubber HR 90 Silicon rubber HR 150 The following code shall be used for designating the cable : Constituent Code Letter Aluminium conductor A Elastomer insulation R Braiding, compounding or B varnishing Elastomer sheath R Earth continuity conductor ECC SECTION 26 WIRING ACCESSORIES CONTENTS Title Page"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 371: 1999",
    "title": "Ceiling Roses",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Ratings",
    "chunk_id": "IS3711999_1",
    "text": "IS 371: 1999 Ceiling Roses [Ratings]\nShall have a rated voltage of not exceeding 250 V and rated current not exceeding 6A. 5. Classification a) According to the method of mounting : i) Surface type, and ii) Semi-recessed or flush type b) According to load support : i) Intended to support mechanical load by means or a flexible cord complying widh IS 694, and ii) Intended to support mechanical loads as nominated by the manufacturer in addition to those specified in 5 (b) (i), by means other than a flexible cord. c) According to current carrying terminal arrangement : i) Having provision for the connection of switch wiring, and ii) Having no provision for the connection of switch wiring. d) According to terminal type : i) Having screw type terminals, ii) Having screw-less terminals, and iii) Having a combination of both terminal"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 371: 1999",
    "title": "Ceiling Roses",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS3711999_2",
    "text": "IS 371: 1999 Ceiling Roses [Construction]\nWhere protection against electric shock is provided by a cover screwing on to a base or by similar attachments, such parts shall withstand the forces likely to be applied in normal use. Provision shall be made for entry and connection of a circular flexible cord having three conductors of 1.0 mm2. A device or means of unsultating materials, shall be provided to prevent strain upon flexible conductors connected to the ceiling rose, being transmitted to the terminal. 8. Tests a) Marking, b) Dimensions, c) Accessibility of live parts, d) Provision of earthing, e) Terminals, Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 371 : 1999 Specification for ceiling roses (third revision). f) Construction, g) Resistance to moisture and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1293: 1988",
    "title": "Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS12931988_1",
    "text": "IS 1293: 1988 Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated [Scope]\nRequirements and tests for three-pin twopole and earthing plugs and socket-outlets (shuttered and non-shuttered) including multi-socket-outlet (shuttered and non-shuttered) suitable for ac circuits with a rated voltage above 50 V but not exceeding 250 volts and a rated current of 6 A or 16 A. Note 1– 2 pin plugs and socket outlets are considered non- standard. Note 2– Fused plugs are not covered under the scope of this standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1293: 1988",
    "title": "Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS12931988_2",
    "text": "IS 1293: 1988 Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated [General Requirements]\nAccessories shall be so designed and constructed that in normal use their performance is reliable and without danger to the user or the surroundings. 3. Ratings 3.1 Rated Voltage – The rated voltage shall not exceed 250 V. The preferred voltage shall be 240 V. 3.2 Rated Current – Shall be 6 or 16 A in line with international practice. However, for the convenience of manufacturers and users used to the present series of 5 and 15 A and in order to facilitate a smooth change over, both the series shall be used con-currently."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1293: 1988",
    "title": "Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS12931988_3",
    "text": "IS 1293: 1988 Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated [Classification]\nShall be classified according to: a) Absence or presence of enclosures: i) Unenclosed, and ii) Enclosed. b) Absence or the presence of shutters: i) Without shutters, and ii) With shutters c) The method of application: i) Surface-type socket-outlets, ii) Flush-type socket-outlets, iii) Portable type socket-outlets. 5. Dimensions Reference Rating to Fig 1 6A 16A m m mm A 22.2 28.6 B 19.1 25.4 +0.025 +0.025 C 7.06 8.71 – 0.050 – 0.050 +0.025 +0.025 D 5.08 7.06 – 0.050 – 0.050 +1.04 +1.04 E 15.9 20.6 – 0.13 – 0.13 +1.04 +1.04 F 20.06 28.6 – 0.13 – 0.13 G.min. 7.94 9.52 H 5.16 to 7.54 6.76 to 9.12 26.5 6. Materials Part Material a) Plug base, plug Though, non-ignitable cover, socket- insulating material outlet cover shutter b) Socket base Tough, non-ignitable insulating material or vitrified ce"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2086: 1993",
    "title": "Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS20861993_1",
    "text": "IS 2086: 1993 Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type [Scope]\nPerformance requirements and tests as well as dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses having a rated current up to and including 100 A meant for alternating current systems of voltages not exceeding 650v between lines.The specification does not cover fuse-wire used in rewirable type fuses. 2. Electrical Requirements 2.1 Preferred Voltages – Fuses shall be rated for one of the following voltages – For ac systems – 240 V singlephase and 415 V three phase. Note – A 240 V grade fuse shall not be used in a three- phase 4 wire 415 V systems. 2.2 Rated Currents – The preferred values shall be 16, 32, 63 and 100 A 2.2.1 The fuse-carrier and base shall be so designed and proportioned, that when they are carrying their rated current continuously in an ambient temperatu"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2086: 1993",
    "title": "Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Dimensions Of Carriers And Bases",
    "chunk_id": "IS20861993_2",
    "text": "IS 2086: 1993 Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type [Dimensions Of Carriers And Bases]\nThe dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses shall conform to Type A dimensions given in Annex-A of the standard. 5. Tests 5.1 Type Tests a) Mechanical test sequence : i) Visual examination ii) Test for dimensions iii) Test for mechanical endurance iv) Test for mechanical strength v) Test for withdrawal force b) Electrical test sequence : i) Test for temperature rise ii) Insulation resistance test iii) High voltage test iv) Test for breaking capacity c) Test for proving material properties: i) Test for water absorption (non-ceramic) ii) Test on ceramic material iii) Ignition test 5.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in [(a) – (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)] [(b) – (i), (ii), (iii) ] [(c) – (i)] of 5.1and Temperature cycle test (for ceramic materials). 5.3 Routine Tes"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2412: 1975",
    "title": "Link Clips For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS24121975_1",
    "text": "IS 2412: 1975 Link Clips For Electrical Wiring [Scope]\nRequirements and tests for link clips (both joint link clips and link clips with separate linking eyes) for general wiring purpose. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Aluminium sheet or strip in the annealed condition. 2.2 Construction – Shall be smooth, free from dents or burrs, and shall have corners rounded off smoothly. 2.2.1 One fixing hole for sizes up to 40 mm and two for size over 40 mm. Size of hole 2.6 mm clear diameter and tolerance on hole +0.25,– 0 mm. 2.3 Finish – Shall be free from any mark of corrosion. 3. Dimensions (in mm) 3.1 Link Clip with Separate Eyes Size (Length) 25 32 40 50 63 80 Thickness 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.40 0.40 0.40 Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 Note – Values of thickness are minimum values. Tolerance on other dimensions shall be ± 5 percent 3.1.1 Linking Eye – Size 15 × 6.5 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2667: 1988",
    "title": "Fittings For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Dimensions",
    "chunk_id": "IS26671988_1",
    "text": "IS 2667: 1988 Fittings For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring [Dimensions]\nThe nominal sizes of outlets of the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981 3.1 For all cast fittings (other than boxes), the minimum thickness of the machined part measured at the root of the thread shall be as follows : Thickness mm For sizes equal to 16, 20, and 25 mm dia 1.5 For sizes equal to 32, 40, and 50 mm dia 2.5 For sizes equal to 63 mm dia 3.0 3.2 All dimensions except those for which tolerance are specifically stated herein or which are definitely stated as being maximum or minimum, shall be taken as nominal dimensions and subject to a tolerance of ±5 percent. 3.3 Couplers – Sizes (Min) Nominal 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,50 and 63. 3.4 Elbows – Nominal Size in mm 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63 3.5 Normal Bends and Hal"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3419: 1989",
    "title": "Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34191989_1",
    "text": "IS 3419: 1989 Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits [Scope]\nRequirements and methods of test for rigid conduit fittings manufactured from insulating materials for use with circular, rigid, non-flame propagating and non-threadable plain conduits of insulating materials. This standard covers conduit fittings suitable for temperature between –5ºC and + 60ºC. Only plain type fittings are covered in this standard. The fittings covered by this standard are–couplers, bends, elbows,tees, inspection sleeves, and boxes. 2. Requirements 2.1 Shall be homogenous and non-porous. 2.2 Inside and outside surfaces shall be smooth, clean and uniform and free from projections, grooving and other defects. 2.3 Elbows – Area of the opening in case of inspection elbow shall not be less than two and a half times the internal cross-sectional area of the corresponding condui"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3419: 1989",
    "title": "Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Dimensions (In Mm)",
    "chunk_id": "IS34191989_2",
    "text": "IS 3419: 1989 Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits [Dimensions (In Mm)]\nNominal size of the outlets of the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 3) : 1983*. Note – For detailed dimenasions of slip type couplers, socketed type couplers, clamp type couplers, normal type bends, slip type coupling bends, normal type elbows, normal type tees, socketed type tees and spout type circular boxes refer to Tables 1 to 9 of the standard. * Conduitsfor electrical insulations, Part 3, Rigid plain conduits of insulating materials. 4. Tests 4.1 Type Tests 4.1.1 Visual examination 4.1.2 Checking of dimensions 4.1.3 Resistance to heat – Diameter of the impression shall not exceed 2 mm when tested as prescribed. 4.1.4 Resistance to burning – When tested as prescribed, if the sample burns, it shall do so slowly that the"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3480: 1966",
    "title": "Flexible Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS34801966_1",
    "text": "IS 3480: 1966 Flexible Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring [Scope]\nMaterial, dimensions and other requirements of accessories (other than fittings) used with rigid steel conduits conforming of IS : 9537 (Part 2) 1981*. Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles (single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal and internally screwed circular). 2. Requirements 2.1 Saddles shall be ribbed for reinforcement at crown. 2.2 Plug may be recessed to the thickness of the head, thickness of wall being not less than 3 mm. 2.3 The inside edges of entry bushes shall be smoothly rounded in order to prevent abrasion of cables. Note – For constructional details in respect of screw thread, spacing plates, plug, lock nuts and entry bush, refer to 3 of the standard. 2.4 Shall be protected against corrosion both insi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3837: 1976",
    "title": "Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS38371976_1",
    "text": "IS 3837: 1976 Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring [General Requirements]\nSwitches and boxes shall be so designed and constructed, that in normal use, their performance is reliable and without danger to the user or surroundings.\n[Ratings] Switches shall preferably have rated voltage of 110 V, 230V, 240V and 250V, 400V, 415V. For momentary contact switches intended to operate bells, electromagnetic remote control switches or time-delay switches, the standard rated voltages are 110V and 250V. 3.1 Switches shall preferably have rated currents of 6 A, 10 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, and 63 A. The rated current shall be not less than 6A, except that rated current of 1 A, 2 A and 4 A are allowed for push-button switches intended to operated bells, electromagenetic remote control switches or time-delay switches."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3837: 1976",
    "title": "Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS38371976_2",
    "text": "IS 3837: 1976 Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring [Classification]\na) According to the possible connections – Pattern No. – Single-pole switches 1 – Double-pole switches 2 – Three-pole switches 3 – Three-pole plus switched neutral switches 03 – Two-way switches 6 – Two-circuit switches with a common incoming 5 – Two-way switches with one off position 4 – Two-way double-poleswitches 6/2 – Two-way double-pole reversing switches 7 b) According to the contact opening – – Switches of normal gap constructions. – Switches of mini-gap construction (only for a.c.) c) According to the degree of protection against electric shock –"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3854: 1997",
    "title": "Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Protection Against Electric Shock",
    "chunk_id": "IS38541997_1",
    "text": "IS 3854: 1997 Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes [Protection Against Electric Shock]\nSwitches shall be so designed that when they are mounted and wired as in normal use, live parts are not accessibl even after removal of parts which can be removed without the use of a tool.\n[Provision For Earthing] Accessible metal parts, which may become live in the event of an insulation fault, shall be provided with, or permanently and reliably connected to, an earthing terminal."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3854: 1997",
    "title": "Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Terminals",
    "chunk_id": "IS38541997_2",
    "text": "IS 3854: 1997 Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes [Terminals]\nSwitches shall be provided with terminals having screw clamping or with screwless terminals. The means for clamping the conductors shall not serve to fix any other component, although they may hold the terminals in place or prevent them from turning. 8. Tests 8.1 Type tests – a) Rating b) Classification c) Marking d) Checking of dimensions e) Protection against electric shock f) Provision for earthing g) Terminals h) Constructional requirements j) Mechanism k) Resistance to ageing, to harmful ingress of water and to humidity m) Insulation resistance and electric strength n) Temperature rise p) Making and breaking capacity q) Normal operation r) Mechanical strength s) Resistance to heat t) Screws, current carrying parts and connections u) Creepage distance, clearance and distance through se\n[Scope] Requirements for interlocking type switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use in ac and dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3854: 1997",
    "title": "Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Standard Current Ratings",
    "chunk_id": "IS38541997_3",
    "text": "IS 3854: 1997 Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes [Standard Current Ratings]\n5, 15 and 30 A 3. Requirements 3.1 Material – Part manufactured with following materials : a) Base – of vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material. b) Cover, cover plates and actuating member– of tough, non-ignitable insulating material. c) Current carrying parts – of brass, copper, phosphor, bronze, aluminium alloy, or other suitable material. d) Springs – of corrosion resistant metal. e) Attachment fittings, screws, noncurrent carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and wi"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4160: 1967",
    "title": "Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS41601967_1",
    "text": "IS 4160: 1967 Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet [Scope]\nRequirements for switch socket-outlets of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to 30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4160: 1967",
    "title": "Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Standard Current Ratings",
    "chunk_id": "IS41601967_2",
    "text": "IS 4160: 1967 Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet [Standard Current Ratings]\n5,15, and 30 A. 3. Requirements: 3.1 Materials – Parts shall be manufactured with following materials – a) Base – Vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material. b) Covers, cover plates and actuating member– Tough, non ignitable insulating material– c) Current-carrying parts – Brass, copper, phosphor bronze, aluminium alloy, etc. d) Springs – Corrosion resistant material e) Attachment fittings, screws, non current carrying parts – Mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of stands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to the con"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4615: 1968",
    "title": "Switch Socket-Outlets",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS46151968_1",
    "text": "IS 4615: 1968 Switch Socket-Outlets [Scope]\nRequirements for adaptors of clamp and solid types for flexible steel conduits intended for the protection of cables in electrical installations. Adaptors are used for connecting flexible metallic conduits to a rigid conduits or its fitting. Flexible steel conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Malleable iron. 2.2 Shall be protected against corrosion, both inside and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Examples a) Medium protection – Stoved enamel; Airdrying paint; and Electrolytic deposits. b) Heavy protection – Hot-dip galvanized coating; Sherardiring 2.3 Shall be fitted with external earthing lug with hole to accommodate not less than 4 mm2 earthing wire. The lug shall be tapped and fitted with a headed clamping screw"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4649: 1968",
    "title": "Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS46491968_1",
    "text": "IS 4649: 1968 Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits [Scope]\nRequirements and tests for three-pin (two - pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and cover, or either of these components, constructed of rubber or other suitable resilient material and suitable for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250 V. Note –These are intended to be used with socket outlet conforming to IS 1293:1988*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4649: 1968",
    "title": "Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Standard Ratings",
    "chunk_id": "IS46491968_2",
    "text": "IS 4649: 1968 Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits [Standard Ratings]\n5 and 15 A 3. Requirements 3.1 Materials a) Plug base and cover– of rubber (hardness < 85 IRHD) or tough non-ignitable insulating material. b) Pins, terminals, current-carrying parts– of phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium alloy, etc. c) Non-current-carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy, or insulating material. 3.2 Construction 3.2.1 During insertion of plug into socket-outlet, it shall not be possible to touch a live pin after contact has been established between pins and socket contacts. Earthing pin shall make and break contact respectively before and after the associated current-carrying pins make and break contact with corresponding contacts. 3.2.2 Dimensions of plugs (in mm) – See Table 1. 3.2.3 Terminals and screws –The design shall allow a conductor to be connected without"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6538: 1971",
    "title": "Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS65381971_1",
    "text": "IS 6538: 1971 Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial [General]\nIS 6538: 1971 Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial p) Test for water absorption q) Test for screws and connections (not applicable for moulded-on type plugs), r) Test for cord grip, s) Test for resistance to heat, and t) Test for resistance to rust. Note – For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1988 Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6538: 1971 Specification for three-pin plugs made of resilient material. 4.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in (a) to (m) of 4.1 4.3 Routine Tests–Tests specified in (a), (b) and (e) of 4.1 d) their dielectric properties; iii) the tests intended for confirming that these conditions have been met and the methods to be adopted for the tests; iv)the data to be marked on the devices; v) the test sequences to be carried out and the number of samples to be submitted for certification purposes (see Annex C of the standard). vi)the coordination with separate fuses associated in the same circuit (see Annex D of the standard). 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6538: 1971",
    "title": "Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS65381971_2",
    "text": "IS 6538: 1971 Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial [General]\niv)the data to be marked on the devices; v) the test sequences to be carried out and the number of samples to be submitted for certification purposes (see Annex C of the standard). vi)the coordination with separate fuses associated in the same circuit (see Annex D of the standard). 2. Classification 2.1 According to the number of poles: – single-pole circuit-breakers – two-pole-circuit-breakers with one protected pole; – two-pole circuit-breakers with two protected poles; – three-pole circuit-breakers with three protected poles; – four-pole circuit-breakers with three protected poles; – four-pole circuit- breakers with four protected poles. 2.2 According to the protection against external influences : – enclosed-type (not requiring an appropriate enclosure); – unenclosed-type (for use with an appropriate enclosure); 2.3 According to the method of mounting : – surface-type; – flush-type; – panel board type, also referred to as distribution board type."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8828: 1996",
    "title": "/Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS88281996_1",
    "text": "IS 8828: 1996 /Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations [Scope]\nApplies to A.C. air-break circuit-breakers for operation at 50 Hz or 60 Hz, having a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V (between phases), a rated current not exceeding 125 A and a rated short-circuit capacity not exceeding 25 000 A. 1.2 These circuit-breakers are intended for the protection against overcurrents of wiring installations of buildings and similar applications; they are designed for use by uninstructed people and for not being maintained. 1.3 This standard also applies to circuit-breakers having more than one rated current, provided that the means for changing from one discrete rating to another is not accessible in normal service and that the rating cannot be changed without the use of a tool. 1.4 This standard does not apply to: – circuit-breakers intended to protect motors. –"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8828: 1996",
    "title": "/Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Standard And Preferred Values",
    "chunk_id": "IS88281996_2",
    "text": "IS 8828: 1996 /Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations [Standard And Preferred Values]\nSee Table 1 TABLE 1 PREFERRED VALUES OF RATED VOLTAGE Circuit-breakers Circuit Supplying the Circuit-Breaker Rated Voltage Single phase (phase to neutral) 230 V Single phase (Phase to earthed middle 120 V conductor, or phase to neutral) Single-pole Single phase (phase to neutral) or three phase (3 single-pole circuit- 230/400 V breaker) (3-wire or 4- wire) Single phase (phase to neutral) 230 V Two-pole Single phase (phase to phase ) 400 V Single phase (phase to phase, 3-wire) 120/240 V Three-pole Three phase 240 V Four-pole (3-wire or 4-wire) 400 V 3.1 Preferred Values of Rated Current are – 6 A, 8 A, 10 A, 13 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, 50 A, 63 A, 80 A, 100 A and 125 A. 3.2 Standard Values of Rated Frequency – Standard values of rated frequency are 50 Hz and 60 Hz. 3.3 Standard Valu"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8828: 1996",
    "title": "/Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Standard Condition For Operation In Service",
    "chunk_id": "IS88281996_3",
    "text": "IS 8828: 1996 /Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations [Standard Condition For Operation In Service]\nThe ambient air temperature does not exceed +40 0C and its average over a period of 24 h does not exceed +35 0C. — The lower limit of the ambient air temperature is -5 0C. — In general the altitude of the site of installation does not exceed 2000 m (6600 ft). — The air is clean and its relative humidity does not exceed 50% at a maximum temperature of +40 0C Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8828 : 1996 Specification for circuit breakers for over current protection for house-hold and similar installations (second revision). 5. Tests a) Indeliblity of marketing, b) Reliability of screws,current-carrying, Parts and connections c) Reliability of terminals for external conductors d) Protection against electric shoc"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "External Influences",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part11980_1",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980 Conduits For Electrical Installations [External Influences]\nConduits shall have adequate protection against external influences. The influences included here are ingress of water or oil or building materials, low or high temperatures and polluting substances and solar radiation.\n[Scope] Requirements and methods of test of threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General Requirements",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part11980_2",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980 Conduits For Electrical Installations [General Requirements]\nConduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable mechanical protection to conductors and/or cables contained therein. Conduit shall withstand stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage. 3. Classification 3.1 According to Resistance against Corrosiv or Polluting substances : a) Conduits with low protection, b) Conduits with medium protection, c) Conduits with high protection, d) Conduits with high protection on the outside and low protection inside, e) Conduits with medium protection outside and low protection inside, and f) Conduits with high protection outside and medium protection inside. Note 1 – Normally, protection mentioned at (b) and (c) are commonly used. Note 2– Typical examples of medium protection are stove enamellin"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Construction",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part11980_3",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980 Conduits For Electrical Installations [Construction]\nThe inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be reasonably smooth and free from burrs, flash and similar defects. The conduits shall be solid drawn or seam joined by welding. 6. Mechanical Properties 6.1 Bending Test – After the test, basic material or protective coating of conduits shall not show any cracks visible by normal or corrected vision without magnification. Seams, if any, shall not have opened, and section of conduit shall not have distored unduly. 6.2 Compression Test – The difference between the initial diameter and diameter of flattened samples shall not exceed 10 percent of outside diameter measured before the test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 4): 1983",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part41983_1",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 4): 1983 Conduits For Electrical Installations [General]\nIS 9537 (Part 4): 1983 Conduits For Electrical Installations PART 4 – PLIABLE SELF RECOVERING CONDUITS OF INSULATING MATERIALS Note – For details requirements refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 4) : 1983 Specification for conduits for electrical installations :Part 4 Pliable self- recovering conduits of insulating materials."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part52000_1",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000 Conduits For Electrical Installations [Scope]\nThis clause of Part 1 of the Standard is applicable except as follows: Addition: This Indian Standard (Part 5) specifies requirements for pliable non-flame propagating plain and corrugated conduits of insulating material. It does not include selfrecovering or flexible conduits. This standard also applies to corrugated conduits with a smooth exterior surface.\n[General Requirements] This clause of Part 1 is applicable"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "General Notes On Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part52000_2",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000 Conduits For Electrical Installations [General Notes On Tests]\nThis clause of Part 1 is applicable except as follows: Replacement: The minimum total length of conduit to be submitted for all tests is 36 m. Temperature Temperature not Permanent Classification Normally less Than Application Temperature Range Storae and Use and Transport Installation oC oC oC – 45 – 45 – 15 – 15 to + 60 – 25 – 25 – 15 – 15 to + 60 – 5 – 5 – 5 – 5 to + 60 + 90 – 5 – 5 – 5 to 601 + 90/–25 – 25 – 15 – 15 to + 601 1 These types, for use in prefabricated concrete, will temporarity withstand temperatures up to + 900C. Note : Conduits of insulating materials for temperature up to 2000C are under consideration."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part52000_3",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000 Conduits For Electrical Installations [Classification]\nThis clause of Part 1 is applicable except as follows: 5.1 (a), (1), 5.1 (a), (3), 5.1 (b), (1), 5.1 (d), (1) 5.1 (d), (2), 5.1 (d), (3), 5.1 (c), (2), 5.1 (f), (2) and 5.1 (g), (1) (i), not applicable. Additional Sub-clause 5.101 According to temperature, given as follows:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Classification Of Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS9537Part52000_4",
    "text": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000 Conduits For Electrical Installations [Classification Of Tests]\n5.1 Types Tests The following shall constitute the type tests: a) Checking of admissions b) Bending test c) Compression d) Impact test e) Collapse test f) Resistance to heat g) Resistance to burning h) Electrical characteristics, and j) External influences 5.1.1 Acceptance Tests The following shall constitue the acceptance tests: a) Checking of dimensions b) Bending test (at room temperature only) c) Compression test d) Collapse test e) Resistance to burning f) Electrical characteristics Note – For detail requirements refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 5): 1983. Specification for conduits for electric installations - Part 3 Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14772: 2000",
    "title": "General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS147722000_1",
    "text": "IS 14772: 2000 General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed [Scope]\nThis standard applies to enclosures or parts of enclosures or parts for accessories with a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V intended for household or similar fixed electrical installatinos, either indoors or outdoors. This standard may be used as a guide for enclosures having a rated vltage up to 100 V. Enclosures complying with this standard are suitable for use, after installation, an ambient temperatures not normally exceeding 35oC, but occasionally reaching 45oC. For the purpose of this standard the enclosures include surface, flush and semi-flush mounting boxes provided, for electrical accessories, where the cover or cover plate may or may not be part of the accessory. This standard does not apply to enclosures for assemblies containing overcurrent protective devices, not to enclosur"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14772: 2000",
    "title": "General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Classification",
    "chunk_id": "IS147722000_2",
    "text": "IS 14772: 2000 General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed [Classification]\nEnclosures are classified according to: 3.1 The nature of their material 3.1.1 Insulating material 3.1.2 Metallic 3.1.3 Composite 3.2 The method of installatino 3.2.1 Flush - type 3.2.2 Semi-flush type 3.2.3 Surface - type 3.3 The Nature of installation 3.3.1 Enclosures flush mounted in : 3.3.1.1 Solid non - combustible walls and ceillilngs: a) Suitable to be placed before the building process (for example not suitable for casting into concrete) b) Suitable to be placed after the building process (for example not suitable for casting into concrete). 3.3.1.2 Solid combustible walls and ceilings 3.3.1.3 Hollow walls, hollow ceillings, furniture, architraves 3.3.1.4 Trunking and ducting 3.3.2 Enclosures surface mounted on : 3.3.2.1 Non-combustible walls and ceilings 3.3.2.2 Combustible walls"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14772: 2000",
    "title": "General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Tests",
    "chunk_id": "IS147722000_3",
    "text": "IS 14772: 2000 General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed [Tests]\n4.1 Category of Test – Tests are classified as type, acceptance and routine test. Table 3 Scheduled of Test (Clause 18.1) Sl. No. Test i) Making ii) Dimensions iii) Protection against electric shock iv) Provision for earthing v) Construction vi) Resistance to ageing, to humid conditinos, ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water vii) Mechanical strenghs viii) Resistance to heat ix) Resistance of insulating material to abnormal heat and fire x) Resistance to rusting xi) Resistance of tracking 4.2 Acceptance test – The follosing shall constitue the accpetance test: Test Making Protection against electric shock Provision for earthing Construction Resistance to ageing, to humid condition, to ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water Mechanical Strength 4.3 Routine"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Design Loads",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Scope",
    "chunk_id": "IS875Part11987_1",
    "text": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987 Code Of Practice For Design Loads [Scope]\nCovers unit weight mass of materials, and parts or components in a building that apply to the determination of dead loads in the design of buildings. The unit weight mass of materials that are likely to be stored in a building are also specified in the standard for the purpose of load calculations along with angles internal friction as appropriate."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Design Loads",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Building Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS875Part11987_2",
    "text": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987 Code Of Practice For Design Loads [Building Materials]\nTable 1 of the standard gives the unit weight mass of the following materials used in building construction: Acoustical materials Aggregate, coarse Aggregate, organic Asbestos Asbestos cement building pipes Asbestos cement gutters Asbestos cement pressure pipes Asbestos cement sheeting Bitumen Blocks Boards Bricks Brick chips and broken bricks Brick dust (SURKHI) Cast iron, manhole covers Cast iron, manhole frames Cast iron pipes Cement Cement concrete, plain Cement concrete, reinforced Cement concrete pipes Cement concrete, prestressed Cement mortar Cement plaster Cork Expanded metal Felt, bituminous for water-proofing and damp-proofing Foam slag, foundry pumice Glass Gutter, asbestos cement Gypsum Iron Lime Linoleum Mastic asphalt. Masonry brick Masonry stone Metal sheeting, protected ga"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Design Loads",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Building Parts And Components",
    "chunk_id": "IS875Part11987_3",
    "text": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987 Code Of Practice For Design Loads [Building Parts And Components]\nTable 2 of the standard gives the unit weights of the following building parts or components: Ceilings Finishing Cement concrete, plain Flooring Cement concrete, reinforced Roofing Damp-proofing Walling Earth filling"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Design Loads",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "section": "Store And Miscellaneous Materials",
    "chunk_id": "IS875Part11987_4",
    "text": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987 Code Of Practice For Design Loads [Store And Miscellaneous Materials]\nUnit weights of the following store and miscellaneous materials are given in Appendix A of the standard. Agricultural and Chemicals and allied food products materials For detailed information, refer to IS 875 (Part 1) : 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earth quake) for building and structures. Part 1 Dead codes - Unit weight of building materials and stread materials. Fuels Metals and alloys Ores Textiles paper and allied materials Manures Miscellaneous materials"
  }
]